Schizophrenia associated genes, proteins and biallelic markers

ABSTRACT

The invention concerns the human sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 genes, polynucleotides, polypeptides biallelic markers, and human chromosome 13q31-q33 biallelic markers. The invention also concerns the association established between schizophrenia and bipolar disorder and the biallelic markers and the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 genes and nucleotide sequences. The invention provides means to identify compounds useful in the treatment of schizophrenia, bipolar disorder and related diseases, means to determine the predisposition of individuals to said disease as well as means for the disease diagnosis and prognosis.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/416,384, filed Oct. 12, 1999. This application also claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Nos. 60/126,903, filed Mar. 30, 1999; 60/131,971, filed Apr. 30, 1999; 60/132,065, filed Apr. 30, 1999; 60/143,928, filed Jul. 14, 1999; 60/145,915, filed Jul. 27, 1999; 60/146,453, filed Jul. 29, 1999; 60/146,452, filed Jul. 29, 1999; and 60/162,288, filed Oct. 28, 1999. All of the above applications are hereby incorporated by reference in their entiretires.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The invention concerns the human sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 genes, polynucleotides, polypeptides biallelic markers, and human chromosome 13q31-q33 biallelic markers. The invention also concerns the association established between schizophrenia and bipolar disorder and the biallelic markers and the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 genes and nucleotide sequences. The invention provides means to identify compounds useful in the treatment of schizophrenia, bipolar disorder and related diseases, means to determine the predisposition of individuals to said disease as well as means for the disease diagnosis and prognosis.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Advances in the technological armamentarium available to basic and clinical investigators have enabled increasingly sophisticated studies of brain and nervous system function in health and disease. Numerous hypotheses both neurobiological and pharmacological have been advanced with respect to the neurochemical and genetic mechanisms involved in central nervous system (CNS) disorders, including psychiatric disorders and neurodegenerative diseases. However, CNS disorders have complex and poorly understood etiologies, as well as symptoms that are overlapping, poorly characterized, and difficult to measure. As a result future treatment regimes and drug development efforts will be required to be more sophisticated and focused on multigenic causes, and will need new assays to segment disease populations, and provide more accurate diagnostic and prognostic information on patients suffering from CNS disorders.

Neurological Basis of CNS Disorders

Neurotransmitters serve as signal transmitters throughout the body. Diseases that affect neurotransmission can therefore have serious consequences. For example, for over 30 years the leading theory to explain the biological basis of many psychiatric disorders such as depression has been the monoamine hypothesis. This theory proposes that depression is partially due to a deficiency in one of the three main biogenic monoamines, namely dopamine, norepinephrine and/or serotonin.

In addition to the monoamine hypothesis, numerous arguments tend to show the value of taking into account the overall function of the brain and no longer only considering a single neuronal system. In this context, the value of dual specific actions on the central aminergic systems including second and third messenger systems has now emerged.

Endocrine Basis of CNS Disorders

It is furthermore apparent that the main monoamine systems, namely dopamine, norepinephrine and serotonin, do not completely explain the pathophysiology of many CNS disorders. In particular, it is clear that CNS disorders may have an endocrine component; the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis, including the effects of corticotrophin-releasing factor and glucocorticoids, plays an important role in the pathophysiology of CNS disorders.

In the hypothalamus-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis, the hypothalamus lies at the top of the hierarchy regulating hormone secretion. It manufactures and releases peptides (small chains of amino acids) that act on the pituitary, at the base of the brain, stimulating or inhibiting the pituitary's release of various hormones into the blood. These hormones, among them growth hormone, thyroid-stimulating hormone and adrenocorticotrophic hormone (ACTH), control the release of other hormones from target glands. In addition to functioning outside the nervous system, the hormones released in response to pituitary hormones also feed back to the pituitary and hypothalamus. There they deliver inhibitory signals that serve to limit excess hormone biosynthesis.

CNS Disorders

Neurotransmitter and hormonal abnormalities are implicated in disorders of movement (e.g. Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, motor neuron disease, etc.), disorders of mood (e.g. unipolar depression, bipolar disorder, anxiety, etc.) and diseases involving the intellect (e.g. Alzheimer's disease, Lewy body dementia, schizophrenia, etc.). In addition, these systems have been implicated in many other disorders, such as coma, head injury, cerebral infarction, epilepsy, alcoholism and the mental retardation states of metabolic origin seen particularly in childhood.

Genetic Analysis of Complex Traits

Until recently, the identification of genes linked with detectable traits has relied mainly on a statistical approach called linkage analysis. Linkage analysis is based upon establishing a correlation between the transmission of genetic markers and that of a specific trait throughout generations within a family. Linkage analysis involves the study of families with multiple affected individuals and is useful in the detection of inherited traits, which are caused by a single gene, or possibly a very small number of genes. But linkage studies have proven difficult when applied to complex genetic traits. Most traits of medical relevance do not follow simple Mendelian monogenic inheritance. However, complex diseases often aggregate in families, which suggests that there is a genetic component to be found. Such complex traits are often due to the combined action of multiple genes as well as environmental factors. Such complex trait, include susceptibilities to heart disease, hypertension, diabetes, cancer and inflammatory diseases. Drug efficacy, response and tolerance/toxicity can also be considered as multifactoral traits involving a genetic component in the same way as complex diseases. Linkage analysis cannot be applied to the study of traits for which no large informative families are available. Moreover, because of their low penetrance, such complex traits do not segregate in a clear-cut Mendelian manner as they are passed from one generation to the next. Attempts to map such diseases have been plagued by inconclusive results, demonstrating the need for more sophisticated genetic tools.

Knowledge of genetic variation in the neuronal and endocrine systems is important for understanding why some people are more susceptible to disease or respond differently to treatments. Ways to identify genetic polymorphism and to analyze how they impact and predict disease susceptibility and response to treatment are needed.

Although the genes involved in the neuronal and endocrine systems represent major drug targets and are of high relevance to pharmaceutical research, we still have scant knowledge concerning the extent and nature of sequence variation in these genes and their regulatory elements. In the case where polymorphisms have been identified the relevance of the variation is rarely understood. While polymorphisms hold promise for use as genetic markers in determining which genes contribute to multigenic or quantitative traits, suitable markers and suitable methods for exploiting those markers have not been found and brought to bear on the genes related to disorders of the brain and nervous system.

The basis for accomplishing these goals is to use genetic association analysis to detect markers that predict susceptibility for these traits. Recently, advances in the fields of genetics and molecular biology have allowed identification of forms, or alleles, of human genes that lead to diseases. Most of the genetic variations responsible for human diseases identified so far, belong to the class of single gene disorders. As this name implies, the development of single gene disorders is determined, or largely influenced, by the alleles of a single gene. The alleles that cause these disorders are, in general, highly deleterious (and highly penetrant) to individuals who carry them. Therefore, these alleles and their associated diseases, with some exceptions, tend to be very rare in the human population. In contrast, most common diseases and non-disease traits, such as a physiological response to a pharmaceutical agent, can be viewed as the result of many complex factors. These can include environmental exposures (toxins, allergens, infectious agents, climate, and trauma) as well as multiple genetic factors.

Association studies seek to analyze the distributions of chromosomes that have occurred in populations of unrelated (at least not directly related) individuals. An assumption in this type of study is that genetic alleles that result in susceptibility for a common trait arose by ancient mutational events on chromosomes that have been passed down through many generations in the population. These alleles can become common throughout the population in part because the trait they influence, if deleterious, is only expressed in a fraction of those individuals who carry them. Identification of these “ancestral” chromosomes is made difficult by the fact that genetic markers are likely to have become separated from the trait susceptibility allele through the process of recombination, except in regions of DNA which immediately surround the allele. The identities of genetic markers contained within the fragments of DNA surrounding a susceptibility allele will be the same as those from the ancestral chromosome on which the allele arose. Therefore, individuals from the population who express a complex trait might be expected to carry the same set of genetic markers in the vicinity of a susceptibility allele more often than those who do not express the trait; that is these markers will show an association with the trait.

Schizophrenia

Schizophrenia is one of the most severe and debilitating of the major psychiatric diseases. It usually starts in late adolescence or early adult life and often becomes chronic and disabling. Men and women are at equal risk of developing this illness; however, most males become ill between 16 and 25 years old, while females develop symptoms between 25 and 30. People with schizophrenia often experience both “positive” symptoms (e.g., delusions, hallucinations, disorganized thinking, and agitation) and “negative” symptoms (e.g., lack of drive or initiative, social withdrawal, apathy, and emotional unresponsiveness).

Schizophrenia affects 1% of the world population. There are an estimated 45 million people with schizophrenia in the world, with more than 33 million of them in the developing countries. This disease places a heavy burden on the patient's family and relatives, both in terms of the direct and indirect costs involved and the social stigma associated with the illness, sometimes over generations. Such stigma often leads to isolation and neglect.

Moreover, schizophrenia accounts for one fourth of all mental health costs and takes up one in three psychiatric hospital beds. Most schizophrenia patients are never able to work. The cost of schizophrenia to society is enormous. In the United States, for example, the direct cost of treatment of schizophrenia has been estimated to be close to 0.5% of the gross national product. Standardized mortality ratios (SMRs) for schizophrenic patients are estimated to be two to four times higher than the general population, and their life expectancy overall is 20% shorter than for the general population. The most common cause of death among schizophrenic patients is suicide (in 10% of patients) which represents a 20 times higher risk than for the general population. Deaths from heart disease and from diseases of the respiratory and digestive system are also increased among schizophrenic patients.

Bipolar Disorder

Bipolar disorders are relatively common disorders with severe and potentially disabling effects. In addition to the severe effects on patients' social development, suicide completion rates among bipolar patients are reported to be about 15%.

Bipolar disorders are characterized by phases of excitement and often including depression; the excitement phases, referred to as mania or hypomania, and depression can alternate or occur in various admixtures, and can occur to different degrees of severity and over varying time periods. Because bipolar disorders can exist in different forms and display different symptoms, the classification of bipolar disorder has been the subject of extensive studies resulting in the definition of bipolar disorder subtypes and widening of the overall concept to include patients previously thought to be suffering from different disorders. Bipolar disorders often share certain clinical signs, symptoms, treatments and neurobiological features with psychotic illnesses in general and therefore present a challenge to the psychiatrist to make an accurate diagnosis. Furthermore, because the course of bipolar disorders and various mood and psychotic disorders can differ greatly, it is critical to characterize the illness as early as possible in order to offer means to manage the illness over a long term.

Bipolar disorders appear in about 1.3% of the population and have been reported to constitute about half of the mood disorders seen in a psychiatric clinic. Bipolar disorders have been found to vary with gender depending of the type of disorder; for example, bipolar disorder 1 is found equally among men and women, while bipolar disorder II is reportedly more common in women. The age of onset of bipolar disorders is typically in the teenage years and diagnosis is typically made in the patient's early twenties. Bipolar disorders also occur among the elderly, generally as a result of a medical or neurological disorder.

The costs of bipolar disorders to society are enormous. The mania associated with the disease impairs performance and causes psychosis, and often results in hospitalization. This disease places a heavy burden on the patient's family and relatives, both in terms of the direct and indirect costs involved and the social stigma associated with the illness, sometimes over generations. Such stigma often leads to isolation and neglect. Furthermore, the earlier the onset, the more severe are the effects of interrupted education and social development.

The DSM-IV classification of bipolar disorder distinguishes among four types of disorders based on the degree and duration of mania or hypomania as well as two types of disorders which are evident typically with medical conditions or their treatments, or to substance abuse. Mania is recognized by elevated, expansive or irritable mood as well as by distractability, impulsive behavior, increased activity, grandiosity, elation, racing thoughts, and pressured speech. Of the four types of bipolar disorder characterized by the particular degree and duration of mania, DSM-IV includes:

-   -   bipolar disorder 1, including patients displaying mania for at         least one week;     -   bipolar disorder II, including patients displaying hypomania for         at least 4 days, characterized by milder symptoms of excitement         than mania, who have not previously displayed mania, and have         previously suffered from episodes of major depression;     -   bipolar disorder not otherwise specified (NOS), including         patients otherwise displaying features of bipolar disorder II         but not meeting the 4 day duration for the excitement phase, or         who display hypomania without an episode of major depression;         and     -   cyclothymia, including patients who show numerous manic and         depressive symptoms that do not meet the criteria for hypomania         or major depression, but which are displayed for over two years         without a symptom-free interval of more than two months.

The remaining two types of bipolar disorder as classified in DSM-VI are disorders evident or caused by various medical disorder and their treatments, and disorders involving or related to substance abuse. Medical disorders which can cause bipolar disorders typically include endocrine disorders and cerebrovascular injuries, and medical treatments causing bipolar disorder are known to include glucocorticoids and the abuse of stimulants. The disorder associated with the use or abuse of a substance is referred to as “substance induced mood disorder with manic or mixed features”.

Diagnosis of bipolar disorder can be very challenging. One particularly troublesome difficulty is that some patients exihibit mixed states, simultaneously manic and dysphoric or depressive, but do not fall into the DSM-IV classification because not all required criteria for mania and major depression are met daily for at least one week. Other difficulties include classification of patients in the DSM-IV groups based on duration of phase since patients often cycle between excited and depressive episodes at different rates. In particular, it is reported that the use of antidepressants may alter the course of the disease for the worse by causing “rapid-cycling”. Also making diagnosis more difficult is the fact that bipolar patients, particularly at what is known as Stage III mania, share symptoms of disorganized thinking and behavior with bipolar disorder patients. Furthermore, psychiatrists must distinguish between agitated depression and mixed mania; it is common that patients with major depression (14 days or more) exhibit agitiation, resulting in bipolar-like features. A yet further complicating factor is that bipolar patients have an exceptionally high rate of substance, particularly alcohol abuse. While the prevalence of mania in alcoholic patients is low, it is well known that substance abusers can show excited symptoms. Difficulties therefore result for the diagnosis of bipolar patients with substance abuse.

Treatment

As there are currently no cures for bipolar disorder or schizophrenia, the objective of treatment is to reduce the severity of the symptoms, if possible to the point of remission. Due to the similarities in symptoms, schizophrenia and bipolar disorder are often treated with some of the same medicaments. Both diseases are often treated with antipsychotics and neuroleptics.

For schizophrenia, for example, antipsychotic medications are the most common and most valuable treatments. There are four main classes of antipsychotic drugs which are commonly prescribed for schizophrenia. The first, neuroleptics, exemplified by chlorpromazine (Thorazine), has revolutionized the treatment of schizophrenic patients by reducing positive (psychotic) symptoms and preventing their recurrence. Patients receiving chlorpromazine have been able to leave mental hospitals and live in community programs or their own homes. But these drugs are far from ideal. Some 20% to 30% of patients do not respond to them at all, and others eventually relapse. These drugs were named neuroleptics because they produce serious neurological side effects, including rigidity and tremors in the arms and legs, muscle spasms, abnormal body movements, and akathisia (restless pacing and fidgeting). These side effects are so troublesome that many patients simply refuse to take the drugs. Besides, neuroleptics do not improve the so-called negative symptoms of schizophrenia and the side effects may even exacerbate these symptoms. Thus, despite the clear beneficial effects of neuroleptics, even some patients who have a good short-term response will ultimately deteriorate in overall functioning.

The well known deficiencies in the standard neuroleptics have stimulated a search for new treatments and have led to a new class of drugs termed atypical neuroleptics. The first atypical neuroleptic, Clozapine, is effective for about one third of patients who do not respond to standard neuroleptics. It seems to reduce negative as well as positive symptoms, or at least exacerbates negative symptoms less than standard neuroleptics do. Moreover, it has beneficial effects on overall functioning and may reduce the chance of suicide in schizophrenic patients. It does not produce the troubling neurological symptoms of the standard neuroleptics, or raise blood levels of the hormone prolactin, excess of which may cause menstrual irregularities and infertility in women, impotence or breast enlargement in men. Many patients who cannot tolerate standard neuroleptics have been able to take clozapine. However, clozapine has serious limitations. It was originally withdrawn from the market because it can cause agranulocytosis, a potentially lethal inability to produce white blood cells. Agranulocytosis remains a threat that requires careful monitoring and periodic blood tests. Clozapine can also cause seizures and other disturbing side effects (e.g., drowsiness, lowered blood pressure, drooling, bed-wetting, and weight gain). Thus it is usually taken only by patients who do not respond to other drugs.

Researchers have developed a third class of antipsychotic drugs that have the virtues of clozapine without its defects. One of these drugs is risperidone (Risperdal). Early studies suggest that it is as effective as standard neuroleptic drugs for positive symptoms and may be somewhat more effective for negative symptoms. It produces more neurological side effects than clozapine but fewer than standard neuroleptics. However, it raises prolactin levels. Risperidone is now prescribed for a broad range of psychotic patients, and many clinicians seem to use it before clozapine for patients who do not respond to standard drugs, because they regard it as safer. Another new drug is Olanzapine (Zyprexa) which is at least as effective as standard drugs for positive symptoms and more effective for negative symptoms. It has few neurological side effects at ordinary clinical doses, and it does not significantly raise prolactin levels. Although it does not produce most of clozapine's most troubling side effects, including agranulocytosis, some patients taking olanzapine may become sedated or dizzy, develop dry mouth, or gain weight. In rare cases, liver function tests become transiently abnormal.

Outcome studies in schizophrenia are usually based on hospital treatment studies and may not be representative of the population of schizophrenia patients. At the extremes of outcome, 20% of patients seem to recover completely after one episode of psychosis, whereas 14-19% of patients develop a chronic unremitting psychosis and never fully recover. In general, clinical outcome at five years seems to follow the rule of thirds: with about 35% of patients in the poor outcome category; 36% in the good outcome category, and the remainder with intermediate outcome. Prognosis in schizophrenia does not seem to worsen after five years.

Whatever the reasons, there is increasing evidence that leaving schizophrenia untreated for long periods early in course of the illness may negatively affect the outcome. However, the use of drugs is often delayed for patients experiencing a first episode of the illness. The patients may not realize that they are ill, or they may be afraid to seek help; family members sometimes hope the problem will simply disappear or cannot persuade the patient to seek treatment; clinicians may hesitate to prescribe antipsychotic medications when the diagnosis is uncertain because of potential side effects. Indeed, at the first manifestation of the disease, schizophrenia is difficult to distinguish from bipolar manic-depressive disorders, severe depression, drug-related disorders, and stress-related disorders. Since the optimum treatments differ among these diseases, the long term prognosis of the disorder also differs the beginning of the treatment.

For both schizophrenia and bipolar disorder, all the known molecules used for the treatment of schizophrenia have side effects and act only against the symptoms of the disease. There is a strong need for new molecules without associated side effects and directed against targets which are involved in the causal mechanisms of schizophrenia and bipolar disorder. Therefore, tools facilitating the discovery and characterization of these targets are necessary and useful.

Schizophrenia and bipolar disorder are now considered to be brain diseases, and emphasis is placed on biological determinants in researching the conditions. In the case of schizophrenia, neuroimaging and neuropathological studies have shown evidence of brain abnormalities in schizophrenic patients. The timing of these pathological changes is unclear but are likely to be a defect in early brain development. Profound changes have also occurred in hypotheses concerning neurotransmitter abnormalities in schizophrenia. The dopamine hypothesis has been extensively revised and is no longer considered as a primary causative model.

The aggregation of schizophrenia and bipolar disorder in families, the evidence from twin and adoption studies, and the lack of variation in incidence worldwide, indicate that schizophrenia and bipolar disorder are primarily genetic conditions, although environmental risk factors are also involved at some level as necessary, sufficient, or interactive causes. For example, schizophrenia occurs in 1% of the general population. But, if there is one grandparent with schizophrenia, the risk of getting the illness increases to about 3%; one parent with Schizophrenia, to about 10%. When both parents have schizophrenia, the risk rises to approximately 40%.

Consequently, there is a strong need to identify genes involved in schizophrenia and bipolar disorder. The knowledge of these genes will allow researchers to understand the etiology of schizophrenia and bipolar disorder and could lead to drugs and medications which are directed against the cause of the diseases, not just against their symptoms.

There is also a great need for new methods for detecting a susceptibility to schizophrenia and bipolar disorder, as well as for preventing or following up the development of the disease. Diagnostic tools could also prove extremely useful. Indeed, early identification of subjects at risk of developing schizophrenia would enable early and/or prophylactic treatment to be administered. Moreover, accurate assessments of the eventual efficacy of a medicament as well as the patent's eventual tolerance to it may enable clinicians to enhance the benefit/risk ratio of schizophrenia and bipolar disorder treatment regimes.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention stems from the identification of novel polymorphisms including biallelic markers located on the human chromosome 13q31-q33 locus, the identification and characterization of novel schizophrenia-related genes located on the human chromosome 13q31-q33 locus, and from the identification of genetic associations between alleles of biallelic markers located on the human chromosome 13q31-q33 locus and disease, as confirmed and characterized in a panel of human subjects. The invention furthermore provides a fine structure map of the region which includes the schizophrenia-associated gene sequences.

The present invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules comprising the genomic sequences of novel human genes encoding sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 proteins, proteins encoded thereby, as well as antibodies thereto. The sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 genomic sequences may also comprise regulatory sequence located upstream (5′-end) and downstream (3′-end) of the transcribed portion of said gene, these regulatory sequences being also part of the invention. The invention also deals with the cDNA sequence encoding the sbg1 and g35018 proteins.

Oligonucleotide probes or primers hybridizing specifically with a sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 genomic or cDNA sequence are also part of the present invention, as well as DNA amplification and detection methods using said primers and probes.

A further object of the invention consists of recombinant vectors comprising any of the nucleic acid sequences described above, and in particular of recombinant vectors comprising a sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 regulatory sequence or a sequence encoding a sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, as well as of cell hosts and transgenic non human animals comprising said nucleic acid sequences or recombinant vectors.

The invention also concerns to biallelic markers of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene and the use thereof. Included are probes and primers for use in genotyping biallelic markers of the invention.

An embodiment of the invention encompasses any polynucleotide of the invention attached to a solid support polynucleotide may comprise a sequence disclosed in the present specification; optionally, said polynucleotide may comprise, consist of, or consist essentially of any polynucleotide described in the present specification; optionally, said determining may be performed in a hybridization assay, sequencing assay, microsequencing assay, or an enzyme-based mismatch detection assay; optionally, said polynucleotide may be attached to a solid support, array, or addressable array; optionally, said polynucleotide may be labeled.

Finally, the invention is directed to drug screening assays and methods for the screening of substances for the treatment of schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or a related CNS disorder based on the role of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 nucleotides and polynucleotides in disease. One object of the invention deals with animal models of schizophrenia, including mouse, primate, non-human primate bipolar disorder or related CNS disorder based on the role of sbg1 in disease. The invention is also directed to methods for the screening of substances or molecules that inhibit the expression of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018, as well as with methods for the screening of substances or molecules that interact with a sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide, or that modulate the activity of a sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide.

As noted above, certain aspects of the present invention stem from the identification of genetic associations between schizophrenia and bipolar disorder and alleles of biallelic markers located on the human chromosome 13q31-q33 region, and more particularly on a subregion thereof referred to herein as Region D. The invention provides appropriate tools for establishing further genetic associations between alleles of biallelic markers on the 13q31-13q33 locus and either side effects or benefit resulting from the administration of agents acting on schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, or schizophrenia or bipolar disorder symptoms, includng agents like chlorpromazine, clozapine, risperidone, olanzapine, sertindole, quetiapine and ziprasidone.

The invention provides appropriate tools for establishing further genetic associations between alleles of biallelic markers on the 13q31-13q33 locus and a trait. Methods and products are provided for the molecular detection of a genetic susceptibility in humans to schizophrenia and bipolar disorder. They can be used for diagnosis, staging, prognosis and monitoring of this disease, which processes can be further included within treatment approaches. The invention also provides for the efficient design and evaluation of suitable therapeutic solutions including individualized strategies for optimizing drug usage, and screening of potential new medicament candidates.

Additional embodiments are set forth in the Detailed Description of the Invention and in the Examples.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the exon structure of the sbg1 gene.

FIG. 2 is a table demonstrating the statistical significance of allelic frequencies of selected chromosome 13q31-q33 biallelic markers of the invention in sporadic and familial French Canadian schizophrenia cases and controls.

FIG. 3 is a table demonstrating the results of a haplotype association analysis between total French Canadian schizophrenia cases and haplotypes which consist of chromosome 13q31-q33 biallelic markers of the invention.

FIG. 4 is a table showing the involvement of selected biallelic markers of the invention in statistically significant haplotypes.

FIG. 5 is a table demonstrating the results of a haplotype association analysis between French Canadian schizophrenia cases and haplotypes which consist of chromosome 13q31-q33 biallelic markers of the invention.

FIG. 6 is a table demonstrating the results of a haplotype association analysis between French Canadian schizophrenia cases and haplotypes which consist of chromosome 13q31-q33 biallelic markers of the invention.

FIGS. 7A and 7B show the results of a haplotype association analysis (Omnibus LR test value distribution) between schizophrenia cases and haplotypes comprising Region D biallelic markers of the invention.

FIGS. 8A and 8B show the results of a haplotype association analysis (HaplotMaxM test value distribution) between schizophrenia cases and haplotypes comprising Region D biallelic markers of the invention.

FIGS. 9A and 9B show the results of a haplotype association analysis (Omnibus LR test value distribution) between bipolar disorder cases and haplotypes comprising Region D biallelic markers of the invention.

FIGS. 10A and 10B show the results of a haplotype association analysis (HaploMaxM test value distribution) between bipolar disorder cases and haplotypes comprising Region D biallelic markers of the invention.

FIGS. 11A and 11B show the results of a haplotype association analysis (HaploMaxS test value distribution) between bipolar disorder cases and haplotypes comprising Region D biallelic markers of the invention.

FIG. 12 shows a comparison of the number of significant single and multipoint biallelic marker analyses in subregions D1 to D4 of Region D in French Canadian samples.

FIG. 13 shows a summary of the number of significant single and multipoint biallelic marker analyses across Region D in French Canadian samples.

FIG. 14 shows a comparison of the number of significant single and multipoint biallelic marker analyses in subregions D1 to D4 of Region D in United States schizophrenia samples.

FIG. 15 shows a summary of the number of significant single and multipoint biallelic marker analyses across Region D in United States schizophrenia samples.

FIG. 16 shows a comparison of the number of significant single and multipoint biallelic marker analyses in subregions D1 to D4 of Region D in Argentinian bipolar disorder samples.

FIG. 17 shows a summary of the number of significant single and multipoint biallelic marker analyses across Region D in Argentinian bipolar disorder samples.

FIG. 18 shows the effect of injection of an sbg1 peptide on locomotor activity and stereotypy of mice.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram of an exemplary computer system.

FIG. 20 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of a process 200 for comparing a new nucleotide or protein sequence with a database of sequences in order to determine the homology levels between the new sequence and the sequences in the database.

FIG. 21 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of a process 250 in a computer for determining whether two sequences are homologous.

FIG. 22 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of an identifier process 300 for detecting the presence of a feature in a sequence.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE SEQUENCES PROVIDED IN THE SEQUENCE LISTING

SEQ ID No. 1 contains the approximately 319 kb of genomic nucleotide sequence comprising sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 nucleic acid sequences and the biallelic markers A1 to A360 and polymorphisms A361 to A489 located on the human chromosome 13q31-q33 locus.

SEQ ID Nos. 2 to 26 contain cDNA sequences of the sbg1 gene.

SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 contain amino acid sequences of sbg1 polypeptides, encoded by cDNAs of SEQ ID Nos. 2 to 26.

SEQ ID No. 36 to 40 contain cDNA sequences of the g35018 gene

SEQ ID No. 41 to 43 contain amino acid sequences of an g35018 polypeptides.

SEQ ID No. 44 to 53 contain primers used to isolate sbg1cDNAs

SEQ ID No. 54 to 111 contain genomic nucleotide sequences comprising exons of the sbg1 gene from several different primates.

SEQ ID Nos. 112 to 229 respectively contain the nucleotide sequence of the amplicons which comprise the biallelic markers A243 to A360 located on the human chromosome 13q31-q33 locus.

SEQ ID No 230 contains a primer containing the additional PU 5′ sequence described further in Example 2

SEQ ID No 231 contains a primer containing the additional RP 5′ sequence described further in Example 2.

In accordance with the regulations relating to Sequence Listings, the following codes have been used in the Sequence Listing to indicate the locations of biallelic markers within the sequences and to identify each of the alleles present at the polymorphic base. The code “r” in the sequences indicates that one allele of the polymorphic base is a guanine, while the other allele is an adenine. The code “y” in the sequences indicates that one allele of the polymorphic base is a thymine, while the other allele is a cytosine. The code “m” in the sequences indicates that one allele of the polymorphic base is an adenine, while the other allele is an cytosine. The code “k” in the sequences indicates that one allele of the polymorphic base is a guanine, while the other allele is a thymine. The code “s” in the sequences indicates that one allele of the polymorphic base is a guanine, while the other allele is a cytosine. The code “w” in the sequences indicates that one allele of the polymorphic base is an adenine, while the other allele is an thymine.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The identification of genes involved in a particular trait such as a specific central nervous system disorder, like schizophrenia, can be carried out through two main strategies currently used for genetic mapping: linkage analysis and association studies. Linkage analysis requires the study of families with multiple affected individuals and is now useful in the detection of mono- or oligogenic inherited traits. Conversely, association studies examine the frequency of marker alleles in unrelated trait (T+) individuals compared with trait negative (T−) controls, and are generally employed in the detection of polygenic inheritance.

Candidate Region on the Chromosome 13 (Linkage Analysis)

Genetic link or “linkage” is based on an analysis of which of two neighboring sequences on a chromosome contains the least recombinations by crossing-over during meiosis. To do this, chromosomal markers, like microsatellite markers, have been localized with precision on the genome. Genetic link analysis calculates the probabilities of recombinations on the target gene with the chromosomal markers used, according to the genealogical tree, the transmission of the disease, and the transmission of the markers. Thus, if a particular allele of a given marker is transmitted with the disease more often than chance would have it (recombination level between 0 and 0.5), it is possible to deduce that the target gene in question is found in the neighborhood of the marker.

Using this technique, it has been possible to localize several genes demonstrating a genetic predisposition of familial cancers. In order to be able to be included in a genetic link study, the families affected by a hereditary form of the disease must satisfy the “informativeness” criteria: several affected subjects (and whose constitutional DNA is available) per generation, and at best having a large number of siblings.

By linkage analysis, observations have been made, according to which a candidate region for schizophrenia is present on chromosome 13q32 locus (Blouin et al., 1998). Linkage analysis has been successfully applied to map simple genetic traits that show clear Mendelian inheritance patterns and which have a high penetrance, but this method suffers from a variety of drawbacks. First, linkage analysis is limited by its reliance on the choice of a genetic model suitable for each studied trait. Furthermore, the resolution attainable using linkage analysis is limited, and complementary studies are required to refine the analysis of the typical 20 Mb regions initially identified through this method. In addition, linkage analysis have proven difficult when applied to complex genetic traits, such as those due to the combined action of multiple genes and/or environmental factors. In such cases, too great an effort and cost are needed to recruit the adequate number of affected families required for applying linkage analysis to these situations. Finally, linkage analysis cannot be applied to the study of traits for which no large informative families are available.

In the present invention alternative means for conducting association studies rather than linkage analysis between markers located on the chromosome 13q31-q33 locus and a trait, preferably schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, are disclosed.

In the present application, additional biallelic markers located on the human chromosome 13q31-q33 locus associated with schizophrenia are disclosed. The identification of these biallelic markers in association with schizophrenia has allowed for the further definition of the chromosomal region suspected of containing a genetic determinant involved in a predisposition to develop schizophrenia and has resulted in the identification of novel gene sequences disclosed herein which are associated with a predisposition to develop schizophrenia. The present invention thus provides an extensive fine structure map of the 13q31-q33 locus, including novel biallelic markers located on the human 13q31-q33 locus, approximately 319 kb of genomic nucleotide sequence of a subregion of the human 13q31-q33 locus, and polymorphisms including biallelic markers and nucleotide deletions in said 319 kb genomic sequence. The biallelic markers of the human chromosome 13q31-q33 locus and the nucleotide sequences, polymorphisms and gene sequences located in Region D subregion of the human chromosome 13q31-q33 locus are useful as genetic and physical markers for further mapping studies. The approximately 319 kb of genomic nucleotide sequence disclosed herein can further serve as a reference in genetic or physical analysis of deletions, substitutions, and insertions in that region. Additionally, the sequence information provides a resource for the further identification of new genes in that region. Additionally, the sequences comprising the the schizophrenia-associated genes are useful, for example, for the isolation of other genes in putative gene families, the identification of homologs from other species, treatment of disease and as probes and primers for diagnostic or screening assays as described herein.

These identified polymorphisms are used in the design of assays for the reliable detection of genetic susceptibility to schizophrenia and bipolar disorder. They can also be used in the design of drug screening protocols to provide an accurate and efficient evaluation of the therapeutic and side-effect potential of new or already existing medicament or treatment regime.

Definitions

As used interchangeably herein, the term “oligonucleotides”, and “polynucleotides” include RNA, DNA, or RNA/DNA hybrid sequences of more than one nucleotide in either single chain or duplex form. The term “nucleotide” as used herein as an adjective to describe molecules comprising RNA, DNA, or RNA/DNA hybrid sequences of any length in single-stranded or duplex form. The term “nucleotide” is also used herein as a noun to refer to individual nucleotides or varieties of nucleotides, meaning a molecule, or individual unit in a larger nucleic acid molecule, comprising a purine or pyrimidine, a ribose or deoxyribose sugar moiety, and a phosphate group, or phosphodiester linkage in the case of nucleotides within an oligonucleotide or polynucleotide. Although the term “nucleotide” is also used herein to encompass “modified nucleotides” which comprise at least one modifications (a) an alternative linking group, (b) an analogous form of purine, (c) an analogous form of pyrimidine, or (d) an analogous sugar, for examples of analogous linking groups, purine, pyrimidines, and sugars see for example PCT publication No. WO 95/04064, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. However, the polynucleotides of the invention are preferably comprised of greater than 50% conventional deoxyribose nucleotides, and most preferably greater than 90% conventional deoxyribose nucleotides. The polynucleotide sequences of the invention may be prepared by any known method, including synthetic, recombinant, ex vivo generation, or a combination thereof, as well as utilizing any purification methods known in the art.

The term “purified” is used herein to describe a polynucleotide or polynucleotide vector of the invention which has been separated from other compounds including, but not limited to other nucleic acids, carbohydrates, lipids and proteins (such as the enzymes used in the synthesis of the polynucleotide), or the separation of covalently closed polynucleotides from linear polynucleotides. A polynucleotide is substantially pure when at least about 50%, preferably 60 to 75% of a sample exhibits a single polynucleotide sequence and conformation (linear versus covalently close). A substantially pure polynucleotide typically comprises about 50%, preferably 60 to 90% weight/weight of a nucleic acid sample, more usually about 95%, and preferably is over about 99% pure. Polynucleotide purity or homogeneity may be indicated by a number of means well known in the art, such as agarose or polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis of a sample, followed by visualizing a single polynucleotide band upon staining the gel. For certain purposes higher resolution can be provided by using HPLC or other means well known in the art.

The term “isolated” requires that the material be removed from its original environment (e.g., the natural environment if it is naturally occurring). For example, a naturally-occurring polynucleotide or polypeptide present in a living animal is not isolated, but the same polynucleotide or DNA or polypeptide, separated from some or all of the coexisting materials in the natural system, is isolated. Such polynucleotide could be part of a vector and/or such polynucleotide or polypeptide could be part of a composition, and still be isolated in that the vector or composition is not part of its natural environment.

The term “primer” denotes a specific oligonucleotide sequence which is complementary to a target nucleotide sequence and used to hybridize to the target nucleotide sequence. A primer serves as an initiation point for nucleotide polymerization catalyzed by either DNA polymerase, RNA polymerase or reverse transcriptase.

The term “probe” denotes a defined nucleic acid segment (or nucleotide analog segment, e.g., polynucleotide as defined herein) which can be used to identify a specific polynucleotide sequence present in samples, said nucleic acid segment comprising a nucleotide sequence complementary of the specific polynucleotide sequence to be identified.

The terms “trait” and “phenotype” are used interchangeably herein and refer to any clinically distinguishable, detectable or otherwise measurable property of an organism such as symptoms of, or susceptibility to a disease for example. Typically the terms “trait” or “phenotype” are used herein to refer to symptoms of, or susceptibility to schizophrenia or bipolar disorder; or to refer to an individual's response to an agent acting on schizophrenia or bipolar disorder; or to refer to symptoms of, or susceptibility to side effects to an agent acting on schizophrenia or bipolar disorder.

The term “allele” is used herein to refer to variants of a nucleotide sequence. A biallelic polymorphism has two forms. Typically the first identified allele is designated as the original allele whereas other alleles are designated as alternative alleles. Diploid organisms may be homozygous or heterozygous for an allelic form.

The term “heterozygosity rate” is used herein to refer to the incidence of individuals in a population, which are heterozygous at a particular allele. In a biallelic system the heterozygosity rate is on average equal to 2P_(a)(1−P_(a)), where P_(a) is the frequency of the least common allele. In order to be useful in genetic studies a genetic marker should have an adequate level of heterozygosity to allow a reasonable probability that a randomly selected person will be heterozygous.

The term “genotype” as used herein refers the identity of the alleles present in an individual or a sample. In the context of the present invention a genotype preferably refers to the description of the biallelic marker alleles present in an individual or a sample. The term “genotyping” a sample or an individual for a biallelic marker involves determining the specific allele or the specific nucleotide(s) carried by an individual at a biallelic marker.

The term “mutation” as used herein refers to a difference in DNA sequence between or among different genomes or individuals which has a frequency below 1%.

The term “haplotype” refers to a combination of alleles present in an individual or a sample on a single chromosome. In the context of the present invention a haplotype preferably refers to a combination of biallelic marker alleles found in a given individual and which may be associated with a phenotype.

The term “polymorphism” as used herein refers to the occurrence of two or more alternative genomic sequences or alleles between or among different genomes or individuals. “Polymorphic” refers to the condition in which two or more variants of a specific genomic sequence can be found in a population. A “polymorphic site” is the locus at which the variation occurs. A polymorphism may comprise a substitution, deletion or insertion of one or more nucleotides. A single nucleotide polymorphism is a single base pair change. Typically a single nucleotide polymorphism is the replacement of one nucleotide by another nucleotide at the polymorphic site. Deletion of a single nucleotide or insertion of a single nucleotide, also give rise to single nucleotide polymorphisms. In the context of the present invention “single nucleotide polymorphism” preferably refers to a single nucleotide substitution. Typically, between different genomes or between different individuals, the polymorphic site may be occupied by two different nucleotides.

The terms “biallelic polymorphism” and “biallelic marker” are used interchangeably herein to refer to a polymorphism having two alleles at a fairly high frequency in the population, preferably a single nucleotide polymorphism. A “biallelic marker allele” refers to the nucleotide variants present at a biallelic marker site. Typically the frequency of the less common allele of the biallelic markers of the present invention has been validated to be greater than 1%, preferably the frequency is greater than 10%, more preferably the frequency is at least 20% (i.e. heterozygosity rate of at least 0.32), even more preferably the frequency is at least 30% (i.e. heterozygosity rate of at least 0.42). A biallelic marker wherein the frequency of the less common allele is 30% or more is termed a “high quality biallelic marker.” All of the genotyping, haplotyping, association, and interaction study methods of the invention may optionally be performed solely with high quality biallelic markers.

The location of nucleotides in a polynucleotide with respect to the center of the polynucleotide are described herein in the following manner. When a polynucleotide has an odd number of nucleotides, the nucleotide at an equal distance from the 3′ and 5′ ends of the polynucleotide is considered to be “at the center” of the polynucleotide, and any nucleotide immediately adjacent to the nucleotide at the center, or the nucleotide at the center itself is considered to be “within 1 nucleotide of the center.” With an odd number of nucleotides in a polynucleotide any of the five nucleotides positions in the middle of the polynucleotide would be considered to be within 2 nucleotides of the center, and so on. When a polynucleotide has an even number of nucleotides, there would be a bond and not a nucleotide at the center of the polynucleotide. Thus, either of the two central nucleotides would be considered to be “within 1 nucleotide of the center” and any of the four nucleotides in the middle of the polynucleotide would be considered to be “within 2 nucleotides of the center”, and so on. For polymorphisms which involve the substitution, insertion or deletion of 1 or more nucleotides, the polymorphism, allele or biallelic marker is “at the center” of a polynucleotide if the difference between the distance from the substituted, inserted, or deleted polynucleotides of the polymorphism and the 3′ end of the polynucleotide, and the distance from the substituted, inserted, or deleted polynucleotides of the polymorphism and the 5′ end of the polynucleotide is zero or one nucleotide. If this difference is 0 to 3, then the polymorphism is considered to be “within 1 nucleotide of the center.” If the difference is 0 to 5, the polymorphism is considered to be “within 2 nucleotides of the center.” If the difference is 0 to 7, the polymorphism is considered to be “within 3 nucleotides of the center,” and so on. For polymorphisms which involve the substitution, insertion or deletion of 1 or more nucleotides, the polymorphism, allele or biallelic marker is “at the center” of a polynucleotide if the difference between the distance from the substituted, inserted, or deleted polynucleotides of the polymorphism and the 3′ end of the polynucleotide, and the distance from the substituted, inserted, or deleted polynucleotides of the polymorphism and the 5′ end of the polynucleotide is zero or one nucleotide. If this difference is 0 to 3, then the polymorphism is considered to be “within 1 nucleotide of the center.” If the difference is 0 to 5, the polymorphism is considered to be “within 2 nucleotides of the center.” If the difference is 0 to 7, the polymorphism is considered to be “within 3 nucleotides of the center,” and so on.

The term “upstream” is used herein to refer to a location which, is toward the 5′ end of the polynucleotide from a specific reference point.

The terms “base paired” and “Watson & Crick base paired” are used interchangeably herein to refer to nucleotides which can be hydrogen bonded to one another be virtue of their sequence identities in a manner like that found in double-helical DNA with thymine or uracil residues linked to adenine residues by two hydrogen bonds and cytosine and guanine residues linked by three hydrogen bonds (See Stryer, L., Biochemistry, 4th edition, 1995).

The terms “complementary” or “complement thereof” are used herein to refer to the sequences of polynucleotides which is capable of forming Watson & Crick base pairing with another specified polynucleotide throughout the entirety of the complementary region. This term is applied to pairs of polynucleotides based solely upon their sequences and not any particular set of conditions under which the two polynucleotides would actually bind.

The terms “sbg1 gene”, when used herein, encompasses genomic, mRNA and cDNA sequences encoding the sbg1 protein, including the untranslated regulatory regions of the genomic DNA.

The terms “g34665 gene”, when used herein, encompasses genomic, mRNA and cDNA sequences encoding the g34665 protein, including the untranslated regulatory regions of the genomic DNA.

The terms “sbg2 gene”, when used herein, encompasses genomic, mRNA and cDNA sequences encoding the sbg2 protein, including the untranslated regulatory regions of the genomic DNA.

The terms “g35017 gene”, when used herein, encompasses genomic, mRNA and cDNA sequences encoding the g35017 protein, including the untranslated regulatory regions of the genomic DNA.

The terms “g35018 gene”, when used herein, encompasses genomic, mRNA and cDNA sequences encoding the g35018 protein, including the untranslated regulatory regions of the genomic DNA.

As used herein the term “13g31-q33-related biallelic marker” relates to a set of biallelic markers residing in the human chromosome 13q31-q33 region. The term 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker encompasses all of the biallelic markers disclosed in Table 6b and any biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith, as well as any biallelic markers disclosed in Table 6c and any biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith. The preferred chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker alleles of the present invention include each one the alleles described in Tables 6b individually or in groups consisting of all the possible combinations of the alleles listed.

As used herein the term “Region D-related biallelic marker” relates to a set of biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium with the subregion of the chromosome 13q31-q33 region referred to herein as Region D. The term Region D-related biallelic marker encompasses the biallelic markers A1 to A242, A249 to A251, A257 to A263, A269 to A270, A278, A285 to A299, A303 to A307, A324, A330, A334 to A335, A346 to A357 and A361 to A489 disclosed in Table 6b and any biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium with markers A1 to A242, A249 to A251, A257 to A263, A269 to A270, A278, A285 to A299, A303 to A307, A324, A330, A334 to A335, A346 to A357 and A361 to A489.

As used herein the term “sbg1-related biallelic marker” relates to a set of biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium with the sbg1 gene or an sbg1 nucleotide sequence. The term sbg1-related biallelic marker encompasses the biallelic markers A85 to A219 disclosed in Table 6b and any biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith.

As used herein the term “g34665-related biallelic marker” relates to a set of biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium with the g34665 gene or an sbg1 nucleotide sequence. The term g34665-related biallelic marker encompasses the biallelic markers A230 to A236 disclosed in Table 6b and any biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith.

As used herein the term “sbg2-related biallelic marker” relates to a set of biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium with the sbg2 gene or an sbg2 nucleotide sequence. The term sbg2-related biallelic marker encompasses the biallelic markers A79 to A99 disclosed in Table 6b and any biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith.

As used herein the term “35017-related biallelic marker” relates to a set of biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium with the g35017 gene or an g35017 nucleotide sequence. The term g35017-related biallelic marker encompasses biallelic marker A41 disclosed in Table 6b and any biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith.

As used herein the term “g35018-related biallelic marker” relates to a set of biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium with the g35018 gene or a g35018 nucleotide sequence. The term g35018-related biallelic marker encompasses the biallelic markers A1 to A39 disclosed in Table 6b and any biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith.

The term “polypeptide” refers to a polymer of amino acids without regard to the length of the polymer; thus, peptides, oligopeptides, and proteins are included within the definition of polypeptide. This term also does not specify or exclude prost-expression modifications of polypeptides, for example, polypeptides which include the covalent attachment of glycosyl groups, acetyl groups, phosphate groups, lipid groups and the like are expressly encompassed by the term polypeptide. Also included within the definition are polypeptides which contain one or more analogs of an amino acid (including, for example, non-naturally occurring amino acids, amino acids which only occur naturally in an unrelated biological system, modified amino acids from mammalian systems etc.), polypeptides with substituted linkages, as well as other modifications known in the art, both naturally occurring and non-naturally occurring.

The term “purified” is used herein to describe a polypeptide of the invention which has been separated from other compounds including, but not limited to nucleic acids, lipids, carbohydrates and other proteins. A polypeptide is substantially pure when at least about 50%, preferably 60 to 75% of a sample exhibits a single polypeptide sequence. A substantially pure polypeptide typically comprises about 50%, preferably 60 to 90% weight/weight of a protein sample, more usually about 95%, and preferably is over about 99% pure. Polypeptide purity or homogeneity is indicated by a number of means well known in the art, such as agarose or polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis of a sample, followed by visualizing a single polypeptide band upon staining the gel. For certain purposes higher resolution can be provided by using HPLC or other means well known in the art.

As used herein, the term “non-human animal” refers to any non-human vertebrate, birds and more usually mammals, preferably primates, farm animals such as swine, goats, sheep, donkeys, and horses, rabbits or rodents, more preferably rats or mice. As used herein, the term “animal” is used to refer to any vertebrate, preferable a mammal. Both the terms “animal” and “mammal” expressly embrace human subjects unless preceded with the term “non-human”.

As used herein, the term “antibody” refers to a polypeptide or group of polypeptides which are comprised of at least one binding domain, where an antibody binding domain is formed from the folding of variable domains of an antibody molecule to form three-dimensional binding spaces with an internal surface shape and charge distribution complementary to the features of an antigenic determinant of an antigen, which allows an immunological reaction with the antigen. Antibodies include recombinant proteins comprising the binding domains, as wells as fragments, including Fab, Fab′, F(ab)₂, and F(ab′)₂ fragments.

As used herein, an “antigenic determinant” is the portion of an antigen molecule, in this case an sbg1 polypeptide, that determines the specificity of the antigen-antibody reaction. An “epitope” refers to an antigenic determinant of a polypeptide. An epitope can comprise as few as 3 amino acids in a spatial conformation which is unique to the epitope. Generally an epitope comprises at least 6 such amino acids, and more usually at least 8-10 such amino acids. Methods for determining the amino acids which make up an epitope include x-ray crystallography, 2-dimensional nuclear magnetic resonance, and epitope mapping e.g. the Pepscan method described by Geysen et al. 1984; PCT Publication No. WO 84/03564; and PCT Publication No. WO 84/03506.

Variants and Fragments

The invention also relates to variants and fragments of the polynucleotides described herein, particularly of a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, and particularly of a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 containing one or more biallelic markers and/or other polymorphisms according to the invention.

Variants of polynucleotides, as the term is used herein, are polynucleotides that differ from a reference polynucleotide. A variant of a polynucleotide may be a naturally occurring variant such as a naturally occurring allelic variant, or it may be a variant that is not known to occur naturally. Such non-naturally occurring variants of the polynucleotide may be made by mutagenesis techniques, including those applied to polynucleotides, cells or organisms. Generally, differences are limited so that the nucleotide sequences of the reference and the variant are closely similar overall and, in many regions, identical.

Variants of polynucleotides according to the invention include, without being limited to, nucleotide sequences which are at least 95% identical to a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or to any polynucleotide fragment of at least 8 consecutive nucleotides of a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, and preferably at least 99% identical, more particularly at least 99.5% identical, and most preferably at least 99.8% identical to a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or to any polynucleotide fragment of at least 30, 35, 40, 50, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500, 1000 or 2000, to the extent that the length is consistent with the particular sequence ID, consecutive nucleotides of a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229.

Nucleotide changes present in a variant polynucleotide may be silent, which means that they do not alter the amino acids encoded by the polynucleotide. However, nucleotide changes may also result in amino acid substitutions, additions, deletions, fusions and truncations in the polypeptide encoded by the reference sequence. The substitutions, deletions or additions may involve one or more nucleotides. The variants may be altered in coding or non-coding regions or both. Alterations in the coding regions may produce conservative or non-conservative amino acid substitutions, deletions or additions.

A polynucleotide fragment is a polynucleotide having a sequence that is entirely the same as part but not all of a given nucleotide sequence, preferably the nucleotide sequence of an sbg1 polynucleotide, and variants thereof, or of a polynucleotide of any of SEQ ID Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, or a polynucleotide comprising one of the biallelic markers A1 to A360 or polymorphism A361 to A489, or the complements thereof. Such fragments may be “free-standing”, i.e. not part of or fused to other polynucleotides, or they may be comprised within a single larger polynucleotide of which they form a part or region. Indeed, several of these fragments may be present within a single larger polynucleotide. Optionally, such fragments may comprise, consist of, or consist essentially of a contiguous span of at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides in length of any of SEQ ID Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229.

Identity Between Nucleic Acids Or Polypeptides

The terms “percentage of sequence identity” and “percentage homology” are used interchangeably herein to refer to comparisons among polynucleotides and polypeptides, and are determined by comparing two optimally aligned sequences over a comparison window, wherein the portion of the polynucleotide or polypeptide sequence in the comparison window may comprise additions or deletions (i.e., gaps) as compared to the reference sequence (which does not comprise additions or deletions) for optimal alignment of the two sequences. The percentage is calculated by determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid base or amino acid residue occurs in both sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the window of comparison and multiplying the result by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity. Homology is evaluated using any of the variety of sequence comparison algorithms and programs known in the art. Such algorithms and programs include, but are by no means limited to, TBLASTN, BLASTP, FASTA, TFASTA, and CLUSTALW (Pearson and Lipman, 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85(8):2444-2448; Altschul et al., 1990, J. Mol. Biol. 215(3):403-410; Thompson et al., 1994, Nucleic Acids Res. 22(2):4673-4680; Higgins et al., 1996, Methods Enzymol. 266:383-402; Altschul et al., 1990, J. Mol. Biol. 215(3):403-410; Altschul et al., 1993, Nature Genetics 3:266-272). In a particularly preferred embodiment, protein and nucleic acid sequence homologies are evaluated using the Basic Local Alignment Search Tool (“BLAST”) which is well known in the art (see, e.g., Karlin and Altschul, 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:2267-2268; Altschul et al., 1990, J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410; Altschul et al., 1993, Nature Genetics 3:266-272; Altschul et al., 1997, Nuc. Acids Res. 25:3389-3402). In particular, five specific BLAST programs are used to perform the following task:

-   -   (1) BLASTP and BLAST3 compare an amino acid query sequence         against a protein sequence database;     -   (2) BLASTN compares a nucleotide query sequence against a         nucleotide sequence database;     -   (3) BLASTX compares the six-frame conceptual translation         products of a query nucleotide sequence (both strands) against a         protein sequence database;     -   (4) TBLASTN compares a query protein sequence against a         nucleotide sequence database translated in all six reading         frames (both strands); and     -   (5) TBLASTX compares the six-frame translations of a nucleotide         query sequence against the six-frame translations of a         nucleotide sequence database.

The BLAST programs identify homologous sequences by identifying similar segments, which are referred to herein as “high-scoring segment pairs,” between a query amino or nucleic acid sequence and a test sequence which is preferably obtained from a protein or nucleic acid sequence database. High-scoring segment pairs are preferably identified (i.e., aligned) by means of a scoring matrix, many of which are known in the art. Preferably, the scoring matrix used is the BLOSUM62 matrix (Gonnet et al., 1992, Science 256:1443-1445; Henikoff and Henikoff, 1993, Proteins 17:49-61). Less preferably, the PAM or PAM250 matrices may also be used (see, e.g., Schwartz and Dayhoff, eds., 1978, Matrices for Detecting Distance Relationships: Atlas of Protein Sequence and Structure, Washington: National Biomedical Research Foundation). The BLAST programs evaluate the statistical significance of all high-scoring segment pairs identified, and preferably selects those segments which satisfy a user-specified threshold of significance, such as a user-specified percent homology. Preferably, the statistical significance of a high-scoring segment pair is evaluated using the statistical significance formula of Karlin (see, e.g., Karlin and Altschul, 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:2267-2268).

The BLAST programs may be used with the default parameters or with modified parameters provided by the user.

Stringent Hybridization Conditions

By way of example and not limitation, procedures using conditions of high stringency are as follows: Prehybridization of filters containing DNA is carried out for 8 h to overnight at 65° C. in buffer composed of 6×SSC, 50 mM Tris-HCl (pH 7.5), 1 mM EDTA, 0.02% PVP, 0.02% Ficoll, 0.02% BSA, and 500 μg/ml denatured salmon sperm DNA. Filters are hybridized for 48 h at 65° C., the preferred hybridization temperature, in prehybridization mixture containing 100 μg/ml denatured salmon sperm DNA and 5-20×10⁶ cpm of ³²P-labeled probe. Subsequently, filter washes can be done at 37° C. for 1 h in a solution containing 2×SSC, 0.01% PVP, 0.01% Ficoll, and 0.01% BSA, followed by a wash in 0.1×SSC at 50° C. for 45 min. Following the wash steps, the hybridized probes are detectable by autoradiography. Other conditions of high stringency which may be used are well known in the art and as cited in Sambrook et al., 1989; and Ausubel et al., 1989, are incorporated herein in their entirety. These hybridization conditions are suitable for a nucleic acid molecule of about 20 nucleotides in length. There is no need to say that the hybridization conditions described above are to be adapted according to the length of the desired nucleic acid, following techniques well known to the one skilled in the art. The suitable hybridization conditions may for example be adapted according to the teachings disclosed in the book of Hames and Higgins (1985) or in Sambrook et al. (1989).

Genomic Sequences of the Polynucleotides of the Invention

The present invention concerns genomic DNA sequences of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 genes, as well as DNA sequences of the human chromosome 13q31-q33 region, and more particularly, a subregion thereof referred to herein as region D.

As referred to herein, genomic sequences of sbg2, g35017 and g35018 are indicated by nucleotide position in the 5′ to 3′ orientation on SEQ ID No 1. sbg1 and g34665 are transcribed in the opposite direction, ie. from the nucleic acid strand complementary to SEQ ID No 1. Genomic sequences of sbg1 and g34665 are thus indicated by nucleotide position in the 3′ to 5′ orientation on SEQ ID No 1.

Preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides of nucleotide positions 31 to 292651 and 292844 to 319608 of SEQ ID No. 1, or the complements thereof. Further nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides, to the extent that the length of said span is consistent with the length of the SEQ ID, of SEQ ID Nos. 112 to 229. Optionally, said span is at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides of SEQ ID Nos. 112 to 114, 115 to 117, 119, 121, 125 to 145, 147 to 150, 159 to 170, and 176 to 229.

Additional preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100 or 200 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises a biallelic marker. Optionally, said contiguous span comprises ar biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A242. Optionally allele 2 is present at the biallelic marker. It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section.

Another particularly preferred set of nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides, to the extent that such a length is consistent with the lengths of the particular nucleotide position, of SEQ ID No. 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 nucleotide positions of any one of the following ranges of nucleotide positions, designated pos1 to pos166, of SEQ ID No. 1 listed in Table 1 below: TABLE 1 Position in SEQ ID No 1 Position Begining End pos 1 36 2000 pos 2 2001 4000 pos 3 4001 6000 pos 4 6001 8000 pos 5 8001 10000 pos 6 10001 12000 pos 7 12001 14000 pos 8 14001 16000 pos 9 16001 18000 pos 10 18001 20000 pos 11 20001 22000 pos 12 22001 24000 pos 13 24001 26000 pos 14 26001 28000 pos 15 28001 29966 pos 16 30116 32000 pos 17 32001 34000 pos 18 34001 36000 pos 19 36001 38000 pos 20 38001 40000 pos 21 40001 42000 pos 22 42001 44000 pos 23 44001 46000 pos 24 46001 48000 pos 25 48001 50000 pos 26 50001 52000 pos 27 52001 54000 pos 28 54001 56000 pos 29 56001 58000 pos 30 58001 60000 pos 31 60001 62000 pos 32 62001 64000 pos 33 64001 66000 pos 34 66001 68000 pos 35 68001 70000 pos 36 70001 72000 pos 37 72001 74000 pos 38 74001 76000 pos 39 76001 78000 pos 40 78001 80000 pos 41 80001 82000 pos 42 82001 84000 pos 43 84001 86000 pos 44 86001 88000 pos 45 88001 90000 pos 46 90001 92000 pos 47 92001 94000 pos 48 94001 96000 pos 49 96001 98000 pos 50 98001 100000 pos 51 10000 102000 pos 52 10200 104000 pos 53 10400 106000 pos 54 10600 108000 pos 55 10800 110000 pos 56 11000 102000 pos 57 10200 104000 pos 58 10400 106000 pos 59 10600 108000 pos 60 10800 110000 pos 61 11000 112000 pos 62 11200 114000 pos 63 11400 116000 pos 64 11600 118000 pos 65 11800 120000 pos 66 12000 122000 pos 67 12200 124000 pos 68 12400 126000 pos 69 12600 128000 pos 70 12800 130000 pos 71 13000 132000 pos 72 13200 134000 pos 73 13400 136000 pos 74 13600 138000 pos 75 13800 140000 pos 76 14000 142000 pos 77 14200 144000 pos 78 14400 146000 pos 79 14600 148000 pos 80 148000 150000 pos 81 150001 152000 pos 82 152001 154000 pos 83 154001 156000 pos 84 156001 158000 pos 85 158001 160000 pos 86 160001 162000 pos 87 162001 164000 pos 88 164001 166000 pos 89 166001 168000 pos 90 168001 170000 pos 91 170001 172000 pos 92 172001 174000 pos 93 174001 176000 pos 94 176001 178000 pos 95 178001 180000 pos 96 180001 182000 pos 97 182001 184000 pos 98 184001 186000 pos 99 186001 188000 pos 100 188001 190000 pos 101 190001 192000 pos 102 192001 194000 pos 103 194001 196000 pos 104 196001 198000 pos 105 198001 200000 pos 106 200001 201000 pos 107 201001 202000 pos 108 202001 204000 pos 109 204001 206000 pos 110 206001 208000 pos 111 208001 210000 pos 112 210001 212000 pos 113 212001 214000 pos 114 214001 216000 pos 115 216001 218000 pos 116 218001 220000 pos 117 220001 222000 pos 118 222001 224000 pos 119 224001 226000 pos 120 226001 228000 pos 121 228001 230000 pos 122 230001 232000 pos 123 232001 234000 pos 124 234001 236000 pos 125 236001 238000 pos 126 238001 240000 pos 127 240001 242000 pos 128 242001 244000 pos 129 244001 246000 pos 130 246001 248000 pos 131 248001 250000 pos 132 250001 252000 pos 133 252001 254000 pos 134 254001 256000 pos 135 256001 258000 pos 136 258001 260000 pos 137 260001 262000 pos 138 262001 264000 pos 139 264001 266000 pos 140 266001 268000 pos 141 268001 270000 pos 142 270001 272000 pos 143 272001 274000 pos 144 274001 276000 pos 145 276001 278000 pos 146 278001 280000 pos 147 280001 282000 pos 148 282001 284000 pos 149 284001 286000 pos 150 286001 288000 pos 151 288001 290000 pos 152 290001 292000 pos 153 292001 294000 pos 154 294001 296000 pos 155 296001 298000 pos 156 298001 300000 pos 157 300001 302000 pos 158 302001 304000 pos 159 304001 306000 pos 160 306001 308000 pos 161 308001 310000 pos 162 310001 312000 pos 163 312001 314000 pos 164 314001 316000 pos 165 316001 318000 pos 166 318001 319608

Nucleic Acid Sequences of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018

The present invention encompasses the g34665, g34673, g34667, g35017 and g35018 genes and nucleotide sequences.

g34665

In one aspect, the invention concerns g34665 genomic sequences consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising the sequence of nucleotide positions 292653 to 296047 of SEQ ID No 1, a sequence complementary thereto, as well as fragments and variants thereof. These polynucleotides may be purified, isolated, or recombinant.

Particularly preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150 or 200 nucleotides, to the extent that the length of said span is consistent with the nucleotide position range, of nucleotide positions 292653 to 292841, 295555 to 296047 or 295580 to 296047 of SEQ ID No 1. Further preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150 or 200 nucleotides, to the extent that the length of said span is consistent with the nucleotide position range, of nucleotide positions 292653 to 292841, 295555 to 296047, or 295580 to 296047 of SEQ ID No 1, or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises a g34665-related biallelic marker. Optionally, said biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A230 to A236. It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section.

The invention also encompasses a purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 97, 98 or 99% nucleotide identity with a nucleotide sequence of of nucleotide positions 290653 to 292652, 292653 to 296047, 292653 to 292841, 295555 to 296047, 295580 to 296047 and 296048 to 298048 of SEQ ID No 1 or a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment thereof. The nucleotide differences as regards to nucleotide positions 290652 to 292652, 292653 to 296047, 292653 to 292841, 295555 to 296047, 295580 to 296047 and 296048 to 298048 of SEQ ID No 1 may be generally randomly distributed throughout the entire nucleic acid. Nevertheless, preferred nucleic acids are those wherein the nucleotide differences as regards to the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1 are predominantly located outside the coding sequences contained in the exons. These nucleic acids, as well as their fragments and variants, may be used as oligonucleotide primers or probes in order to detect the presence of a copy of the g34665 gene in a test sample, or alternatively in order to amplify a target nucleotide sequence within the g34665 sequences.

Another object of the invention consists of a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid that hybridizes with a g34665 nucleotide sequence of any of nucleotide positions 292653 to 296047, 292653 to 292841, 295555 to 296047, 295980 to 296047 and 296048 to 298048 SEQ ID No 1 or a complementary sequence thereto or a variant thereof, under the stringent hybridization conditions as defined above.

The g34665 genomic nucleic acid comprises at least 3 exons. The exon positions in SEQ ID No 1 are detailed below in Table 2. TABLE 2 Position in SEQ ID No 1 Position in SEQ ID No 1 Exon Beginning End Intron Beginning End B 292653 292841 B-Ab 292842 295554 Ab 295555 296047 B-A 292842 295979 A 295980 296047

Thus, the invention embodies purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the 3 exons of the g34665 gene, or a sequence complementary thereto. The invention also deals with purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a combination of two exons of the g34665 gene.

Intron B-Ab refers to the nucleotide sequence located between Exon B and Exon Ab, and so on. The position of the introns is detailed in Table 2. Thus, the invention embodies purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the 2 introns of the g34665 gene, or a sequence complementary thereto.

While this section is entitled “Genomic Sequences of g34665,” it should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section, flanking the genomic sequences of g34665 on either side or between two or more such genomic sequences.

A g34665 polynucleotide or gene may further contain regulatory sequences both in the non-coding 5′-flanking region and in the non-coding 3′-flanking region that border the region containing said genes or exons.

Polynucleotides derived from 5′ and 3′ regulatory regions are useful in order to detect the presence of at least a copy of a nucleotide sequence comprising a g34665 nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No. 1 or a fragment thereof in a test sample. Polynucleotides carrying the regulatory elements located at the 5′ end and at the 3′ end of the genes comprising the exons of the present invention may be advantageously used to control the transcriptional and translational activity of a heterologous polynucleotide of interest.

Methods for identifying the relevant polynucleotides comprising biologically active g34665 regulatory fragments or variants of SEQ ID No 1 are further described herein. Thus, the present invention also relates to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide which is selected from the group consisting of the 5′ and 3′ regulatory regions of g34665, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof.

g35017

In one aspect, the invention concerns g35017 genomic sequences consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising the sequence of nucleotide positions 94124 to 94964 of SEQ ID No 1, a sequence complementary thereto, as well as fragments and variants thereof. These polynucleotides may be purified, isolated, or recombinant.

The invention also encompasses a purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95% nucleotide identity with a nucleotide sequence of of nucleotide positions 94124 to 94964 SEQ ID No 1 or a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment thereof. The nucleotide differences as regards to nucleotide positions 94124 to 94964 SEQ ID No 1 may be generally randomly distributed throughout the entire nucleic acid. Nevertheless, preferred nucleic acids are those wherein the nucleotide differences as regards to the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1 are predominantly located outside the coding sequences contained in the exons. These nucleic acids, as well as their fragments and variants, may be used as oligonucleotide primers or probes in order to detect the presence of a copy of the g35017 gene in a test sample, or alternatively in order to amplify a target nucleotide sequence within the g35017 sequences.

Another object of the invention consists of a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid that hybridizes with a g35017 nucleotide sequence of any of nucleotide positions 94124 to 94964 of SEQ ID No 1 or a complementary sequence thereto or a variant thereof, under the stringent hybridization conditions as defined above.

Particularly preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200 or 500 nucleotides of nucleotide position 94124 to 94964 of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof. Particularly preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200 or 500 nucleotides of nucleotide position 94124 to 94964 of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises a g35017 related biallelic marker. Optionally, said biallelic marker is the biallelic marker designated A41 in Table 6b. It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section.

While this section is entitled “Genomic Sequences of g35017,” it should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section, flanking the genomic sequences of g35017 on either side or between two or more such genomic sequences.

A g35017 polynucleotide or gene may further contain regulatory sequences both in the non-coding 5′-flanking region and in the non-coding 3′-flanking region that border the region containing said genes or exons.

Polynucleotides derived from g35017 5′ and 3′ regulatory regions are useful in order to detect the presence of at least a copy of a nucleotide sequence comprising an g35017 nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No. 1 or a fragment thereof in a test sample. Polynucleotides carrying the regulatory elements located at the 5′ end and at the 3′ end of the genes comprising the exons of the present invention may be advantageously used to control the transcriptional and translational activity of a heterologous polynucleotide of interest.

Methods for identifying the relevant polynucleotides comprising biologically active regulatory fragments or variants of a g35017 nucleic acid sequence of SEQ ID No 1 are further described herein. Thus, the present invention also relates to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide which is selected from the group consisting of the 5′ and 3′ regulatory regions, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof. In one aspect, the 5′ regulatory region may comprise a nucleotide sequence

g35018

In one aspect, the invention concenrs g35018 genomic sequences consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising the sequence of nucleotide positions 1108 to 65853 of SEQ ID No 1, a sequence complementary thereto, as well as fragments and variants thereof. These polynucleotides may be purified, isolated, or recombinant.

Particularly preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides, to the extent that said span is consistent with the nucleotide position range, of SEQ ID No 1, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1: 1108 to 65853, 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920, 18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282, 64666 to 64812 and 65505 to 65853, or the complements thereof. Further preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of nucleotide positions 1108 to 65853, 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920, 18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282, 64666 to 64812 or 65505 to 65853 of SEQ ID No 1, or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises a g35018 related biallelic marker. Optionally, said biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A1 to A39. It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section.

The invention also encompasses a purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95% nucleotide identity with a nucleotide sequence of nucleotide positions 31 to 1107, 1108 to 65853, 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920, 18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282, 64666 to 64812, 65505 to 65853 and 65854 to 67854 of SEQ ID No 1 or a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment thereof. The nucleotide differences as regards to nucleotide positions 31 to 1107, 1108 to 65853, 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920, 18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282, 64666 to 64812, 65505 to 65853 and 65854 to 67854 of SEQ ID No 1 may be generally randomly distributed throughout the entire nucleic acid. Nevertheless, preferred nucleic acids are those wherein the nucleotide differences as regards to the nucleotide sequence of nucleotide positions 31 to 1107, 1108 to 65853, 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920, 18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282, 64666 to 64812, 65505 to 65853 and 65854 to 67854 of SEQ ID No 1 are predominantly located outside the coding sequences contained in the exons. These nucleic acids, as well as their fragments and variants, may be used as oligonucleotide primers or probes in order to detect the presence of a copy of the g35018 gene in a test sample, or alternatively in order to amplify a target nucleotide sequence within the g35018 sequences.

Another object of the invention consists of a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid that hybridizes with a g35018 nucleotide sequence of any of nucleotide positions 31 to 1107, 1108 to 65853, 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920, 18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282, 64666 to 64812, 65505 to 65853 and 65854 to 67854 SEQ ID No 1, or a complementary sequence thereto or a variant thereof, under the stringent hybridization conditions as defined above.

Yet further nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200 or 500 nucleotides, to the extent that said span is consistent with the nucleotide position range, of SEQ ID No 1, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1: 1255 to 1289, 29967 to 30115, 30225 to 30282, or the complements thereof, as well as polynucleotides having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95% nucleotide identity with said span and polynucleotides capable of hybridizing with said span.

The g35018 genomic nucleic acid comprises at least 8 exons. The exon positions in SEQ ID No 1 are detailed below in Table 3. TABLE 3 Position in SEQ ID No 1 Position in SEQ ID No 1 Exon Beginning End Intron Beginning End A 1108 1289 A 1290 14876 B 14877 14920 B 14921 18777 Bbis 18778 18862 Bbis 18863 25592 C 25593 25740 C 25741 29387 D 29388 29502 D 29503 29966 E 29967 30282 E 30283 64665 F 64666 64812 F 64813 65504 G 65505 65853

Thus, the invention embodies purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the 8 exons of the g35018 gene, or a sequence complementary thereto. The invention also deals with purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a combination of at least two exons of the 35018 gene, wherein the polynucleotides are arranged within the nucleic acid, from the 5′-end to the 3′-end of said nucleic acid, in the same order as in SEQ ID No 1.

Intron 1 refers to the nucleotide sequence located between Exon 1 and Exon 2, and so on. The position of the introns is detailed in Table 3. Thus, the invention embodies purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the 7 introns of the g35018 gene, or a sequence complementary thereto.

While this section is entitled “Genomic Sequences of g35018,” it should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section, flanking the genomic sequences of g35018 on either side or between two or more such genomic sequences.

A g35018 polynucleotide or gene may further contain regulatory sequences both in the non-coding 5′-flanking region and in the non-coding 3′-flanking region that border the region containing said genes or exons.

Polynucleotides derived from 5′ and 3′ regulatory regions are useful in order to detect the presence of at least a copy of a nucleotide sequence comprising an g35018 nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No. 1 or a fragment thereof in a test sample. Polynucleotides carrying the regulatory elements located at the 5′ end and at the 3′ end of the genes comprising the exons of the present invention may be advantageously used to control the transcriptional and translational activity of a heterologous polynucleotide of interest.

Methods for identifying the relevant polynucleotides comprising biologically active regulatory fragments or variants of SEQ ID No 1 are further described herein. Thus, the present invention also relates to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide which is selected from the group consisting of the 5′ and 3′ regulatory regions, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof.

In one embodiment, a 5′ regulatory region may comprise an isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of nucleotide positions 31 to 1107 of SEQ ID No 1, or the complements thereof. In one embodiment, a 3′ regulatory region may comprise an isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of nucleotide positions 65854 to 67854 of SEQ ID No 1, or the complements thereof.

Genomic Sequences of sbg1 Polynucleotides

Particularly preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of nucleotide positions 213818 to 243685 of SEQ ID No 1, or the complements thereof. Also encompassed are purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95% nucleotide identity with nucleotide positions 213818 to 243685 of SEQ ID No 1, or a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment thereof. Nucleic acids of the invention encompass an sbg1 nucleic acid from any source, including primate, non-human primate, mammalian and human sbg1 nucleic acids.

Further preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises an sbg1 related biallelic marker. Optinally, said biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A85 to A219. Optinally, said biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A85 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197 and A199 to A219.

It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section.

The human sbg1 gene comprises exons selected from at least 22 different exons or exon forms, referred to herein as exons MS1, M1, M692, M862, MS2, M1069, M1090, M1117, N, N2, Nbis, O, O1, O2, Obis, P, X, Q1, Q, Qbis, Rbis and R Of these, the following exon sets contain sequence overlap and do not occur together in an mRNA: exons M1, M692, M862, MS2, M1090 M1069 and M 117; exons MS1, M1, M692 and M862; exons N and N2; exons O1 and O2; exons Q and Qbis; exons R and R bis; and exons Q and Q1.

The nucleotide positions of sbg1 exons in SEQ ID No. 1 are detailed below in Table 4; The exon structure of the sbg1 gene is further shown in FIG. 1. TABLE 4 Position in SEQ ID No 1 Exon Beginning End R 215819 215941 Rbis 215819 215975 Qbis 216661 216952 Q 216661 217061 Q1 217027 217061 X 229647 229742 P 230408 230721 Obis 231272 231412 O2 231787 231880 O1 231870 231879 O 234174 234321 Nbis 237406 237428 N2 239719 239807 N 239719 239853 M117 240528 240569 M1090 240528 240596 M1069 240528 240617 MS2 240528 240644 M862 240528 240824 M692 240528 240994 M1 240528 241685 MS1 240800 240993

Thus, the invention embodies purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the exons of the sbg1 gene, or a sequence complementary thereto. Preferred are purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising at least one exon having the nucleotide position ranges listed in Table 4 selected from the group consisting of the exons MS1, M1, M692, M862, MS2, M1069, M1090, M 117, N, N2, Nbis, O, O1, O2, Obis, P, X, Q1, Q, Qbis, R and Rbis of the sbg1 gene, or a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment or a variant thereof. Also encompassed by the invention are purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a combination of at least two exons of the sbg1 gene selected from the group consisting of exons MS1, M1, M692, M862, MS2, M1069, M1090, M1117, N, N2, Nbis, O, O1, O2, Obis, P, X, Q1, Q, Qbis, R and Rbis, wherein the polynucleotides are arranged within the nucleic acid in the same relative order as in SEQ ID No. 1.

Particularly preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100 or 200 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1: 213818 to 215818, 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975, 216661 to 216952, 216661 to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647 to 229742, 230408 to 230721, 231272 to 231412, 231787 to 231880, 231870 to 231879, 234174 to 234321, 237406 to 237428, 239719 to 239807, 239719 to 239853, 240528 to 240569, 240528 to 240596, 240528 to 240617, 240528 to 240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to 240994, 240528 to 241685, 240800 to 240993 and 241686 to 243685, or the complements thereof.

Another object of the invention consists of a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid that hybridizes with an sbg1 nucleotide sequence of nucleotide positions 213818 to 243685, 213818 to 215818, 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975, 216661 to 216952, 216661 to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647 to 229742, 230408 to 230721, 231272 to 231412, 231787 to 231880, 231870 to 231879, 234174 to 234321, 237406 to 237428, 239719 to 239807, 239719 to 239853, 240528 to 240569, 240528 to 240596, 240528 to 240617, 240528 to 240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to 240994, 240528 to 241685, 240800 to 240993 or 241686 to 243685 of SEQ ID No 1, or a complementary sequence thereto or a variant thereof, under the stringent hybridization conditions as defined above.

The present invention further embodies purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the introns of the sbg1 gene, or a sequence complementary thereto.

In other embodiments, the present invention encompasses the sbg1 gene as well as sbg1 genomic sequences consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising the sequence of nucleotide positions 215819 to 241685 of SEQ ID No 1, a sequence complementary thereto, as well as fragments and variants thereof.

The invention also encompasses a purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence of sbg1 having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95% nucleotide identity with a sequence selected from the group consisting of nucleotide positions 213818 to 215818, 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975, 216661 to 216952, 216661 to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647 to 229742, 230408 to 230721, 231272 to 231412, 231787 to 231880, 231870 to 231879, 234174 to 234321, 237406 to 237428, 239719 to 239807, 239719 to 239853, 240528 to 240569, 240528 to 240596, 240528 to 240617, 240528 to 240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to 240994, 240528 to 241685, 240800 to 240993 and 241686 to 243685 of SEQ ID No. 1 or a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment thereof. The nucleotide differences as regards the nucleotide positions 213818 to 215818, 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975, 216661 to 216952, 216661 to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647 to 229742, 230408 to 230721, 231272 to 231412, 231787 to 231880, 231870 to 231879, 234174 to 234321, 237406 to 237428, 239719 to 239807, 239719 to 239853, 240528 to 240569, 240528 to 240596, 240528 to 240617, 240528 to 240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to 240994, 240528 to 241685, 240800 to 240993 and 241686 to 243685 of SEQ ID No. 1 may generally be distributed throughout the nucleic acid.

These nucleic acids, as well as their fragments and variants, may be used as oligonucleotide primers or probes in order to detect the presence of a copy of a gene comprising an sbg1 nucleic acid sequence in a test sample, or alternatively in order to amplify a target nucleotide sequence within an sbg1 nucleic acid sequence or adjoining region.

Additional preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant sbg1 polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100 or 200 nucleotides of nucleotide positions 213818 to 215818, 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975, 216661 to 216952, 216661 to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647 to 229742, 230408 to 230721, 231272 to 231412, 231787 to 231880, 231870 to 231879, 234174 to 234321, 237406 to 237428, 239719 to 239807, 239719 to 239853, 240528 to 240569, 240528 to 240596, 240528 to 240617, 240528 to 240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to 240994, 240528 to 241685, 240800 to 240993, 215819 to 241685 and 241686 to 243685 of SEQ ID No 1, or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one biallelic marker. Optionally, said contiguous span comprises an sbg1-related biallelic marker. It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section. Either the original or the alternative allele may be present at said biallelic marker.

Yet further nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200 or 500 nucleotides, to the extent that said span is consistent with the nucleotide position range, of SEQ ID No 1, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1: 215820 to 215941, 216661 to 217009, 230409 to 290721, 231272 to 231411, 234202 to 234321, 240528 to 240567, 240528 to 240827 and 240528 to 240996, or the complements thereof, as well as polynucleotides having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95% nucleotide identity with said span, and polynucleotides capable of hybridizing with said span.

The present invention also comprises a purified or isolated nucleic acid encoding an sbg1 protein having the amino acid sequence of any one of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35 or a peptide fragment or variant thereof.

While this section is entitled “Genomic Sequences of sbg1,” it should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section, flanking the genomic sequences sbg1 on either side or between two or more such genomic sequences.

Sbg1 cDNA Sequences

The expression of the sbg1 gene has been shown to lead to the production of several mRNA species. Several cDNA sequences corresponding to these mRNA are set forth in SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26.

The invention encompasses a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26, complementary sequences thereto, splice variants thereof, as well as allelic variants, and fragments thereof. Moreover, preferred polynucleotides of the invention include purified, isolated, or recombinant sbg1 cDNAs consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26. Particularly preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 8, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 75, 80, 100, 200 or 500 nucleotides, to the extent that the length of said contiguous span is consistent with the length of the SEQ ID, of a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26, or the complements thereof.

It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section.

The invention also pertains to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide having at least 70, 80, 85, 90 or 95% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26, advantageously 99% nucleotide identity, preferably 99.5% nucleotide identity and most preferably 99.8% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment thereof.

Another object of the invention relates to purified, isolated or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes, under the stringent hybridization conditions defined herein, with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof.

The sbg1 cDNA forms of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26 are further described in Table 5a below. Shown on the Table 5a are the positions of the 5′ UTR, the open reading frame (ORF), the 3′ UTR and the polyA signal on the respective SEQ ID No. Also shown are the sbg1 exons comprising the cDNA form of a particular SEQ ID No. TABLE 5a SEQ Pos range Pos range of Pos range of Pos range of ID No cDNA of 5UTR ORF 3UTR polyA signal 2 M862NOQbisR 1 253 254 304 305 995 971 976 3 M862NOObisP 1 253 254 304 305 1035 1020 1025 4 M1 1 187 188 520 521 1158 — — 5 M862NOP 1 253 254 304 305 894 879 884 6 M1090NOXQbisR 1 25 26 76 77 863 839 844 7 M1117N2OO1P — — 2 310 311 603 588 593 8 M1117N2OP — — 2 358 359 593 578 583 9 M1117NOO1P — — 2 49 50 649 634 639 10 M1117NOO2P — — 2 49 50 733 718 723 11 MS1MS2NOQbisR 1 267 268 318 319 1009 985 990 12 M1069NOQR 1 46 47 97 98 897 873 878 13 M1069N2OQ1QbisR 1 46 47 343 344 777 753 758 14 M1069NOQ1QbisR 1 46 47 97 98 823 799 804 15 M1069N2OO2QbisR 1 46 47 427 428 836 812 817 16 M1069NOO2QbisR 1 46 47 97 98 882 858 863 17 M1069N2NbisOO2X 1 46 47 235 236 955 931 936 QbisR 18 M1069N2OQR 1 46 47 343 344 851 827 832 19 M1069N2OQbisR 1 46 47 508 509 742 718 723 20 M1069NNbisOQR 1 46 47 97 98 920 896 901 21 M1069NNbisOQbisR 1 46 47 97 98 811 787 792 22 M1069NOO2XQbisR 1 46 47 97 98 978 954 959 23 M1069NOXQR 1 46 47 97 98 993 969 974 24 M1069NOQbisRbis 1 46 47 97 98 822 — — 25 M1069N2OQbisRbis 1 46 47 508 509 776 — — 26 M1069N2OXQR 1 46 47 367 368 947 923 928

Primers used to isolate the particular sbg1 cDNAs listed above from RNA from various tissues are provided below in Table 5b. Primers designed to hybridize to nucleic acid sequences of exons MS1, M862, M1090, M1117 and MS2, and exons P and R resulted in the cloning of multiple cDNA forms for several sets of primers. The primers used are listed in SEQ ID Nos 44 or 53.

mRNA forms of sbg1 were found to differ among tissues; Table 5c lists cDNA forms cloned from various tissues and the relative percentages and numbers of clones found per tissue for each listed sbg1 mRNA form.

The present inventors have also identified further variations in cDNA sequence as obtained from various tissues and compared with the consensus sbg1 genomic nucleotide sequence. The tissues from which cDNA was cloned were obtained from pooled individuals numbering from 11 to 60. Table 5d below describes the identities of variants, the nucleotide position of the variation in nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 2, and the number of samples having the specified sequence for each respective nucleotide position on the sbg1 cDNA sequence of SEQ ID No. 2. Also indicated in Table 5d are amino acid changes in the corresponding sbg1 polypeptide sequence (described herein), if any, resulting from the nucleotide sequence variations in the cDNA of SEQ ID No 2.

These variants may represent rare polymorphisms or may be the result of tissue-specific RNA editing. Alternatively, some variations may be the result of the presence in the human genome of one or more sbg1-related genes or a small family of sbg1-related genes with strict tissue specificity of expression and small variation in gene structure. The latter hypothesis was tested by applicants for the case where the exon-intron structure of these genes are identical, demonstrating that variations in at least exons M and N are not the result of the presence of related genes.

The present invention thus further encompasses variant sbg1 polynucleotides having at least one nucleotide substitution as described in Table 5d below. The nucleotide and amino acid variations as shown in Table 5d are shown in terms of the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No. 2, and specify variations as found in exons M862, N, O, Qbis and R. The invention encompasses purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides and polypeptides encoded thereby, wherein the polynucleotides comprise a contiguous span of at least 8, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 100, 150, or 200 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complement thereof, and wherein said contiguous span further comprises a nucleotide sequence variation according to Table 5d.

The present invention comprises a purified or isolated sbg1 cDNA encoding an sbg1 protein or a peptide fragment or variant thereof. In one embodiment, a purified or isolated nucleic acid encoding an sbg1 protein may have the amino acid sequence of any of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35 or a peptide fragment or variant thereof.

Preferred nucleic acids of the invention also include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 8, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 75, 80, 100, 200 or 500 nucleotides of a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26, or the complements thereof, wherein said span comprises a sbg1-related biallelic marker of the invention. The positions of selected biallelic markers of the invention in sbg1 cDNA sequences and polypeptide sequences are listed below in Table 5e. Said contiguous span may comprise a biallelic marker selected from the group of biallelic markers listed in Table 5e; optionally, said biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of the biallelic markers located in an sbg1 cDNA form, as listed in Table 5e; optionally, said biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of the biallelic markers located in an sbg1 coding sequence, as listed in Table 5e.

Expression of sbg1 mRNA was further confirmed by Northern blotting. Using a probe corresponding to exon O of the sbg1 gene, a band corresponding to an sbg1 mRNA was detected.

While this section is entitled “sbg1 cDNA Sequences,” it should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section, flanking the genomic sequences of sbg1 on either side or between two or more such genomic sequences. TABLE 5b PRIMERS cDNA Form Observed Tissue g34872MbisEco CCCGAATTCCCAAACTTCTTTCATTTAAAGAACCA MS1NS2NOQbisR testis (SEQ ID No 26) g34872LR1309nBAmH1 ATGCGGGATCCAGAGATTCTCCCAGTCACACAGGCC (SEQ ID No 27) g34872genoLF22nEcoRI TACTGGAATTCCAGGTAGAGTGAAGCAAGTAATGTGTGTGTGAG M862NOQbiSR testis (SEQ ID No 28) g34872LR1309nBPdnH1 ATGCGGGATCCAGAGATTCTCCCAGTCACACAGGC amygdala (SEQ ID No 27) caudate nucleus cerebellum hippocampus substantia nigra thalamus g34872MterEco CCACAATTCGATGATTTAGCTGGGAGGACCCAA (SEQ ID No 30) g34872LR1305nBam TCGGGATCCAGTCACACAGGCCAGGT M1090NOQBISR testis (SEQ ID No 31) M1090NOXQBISR M1090N2OQBISR g34872LF1140ECOR1 GCTGGGAATTCGCTGGAAAAGCTGATGGGTGCTGATTCTC N1117NOQBISR testis (SEQ ID No 32) g34872LR1309nBAmH1 ATGCGGGATCCAGAGATTCTCCCAGTCACACAGGC M1117N20QBISR amygdala (SEQ ID No 27) M1117N2002Qbi5R caudate nucleus M1117N002QbisR cerebellum M1117N20QR corpus callosum cortex hippocampus substantia nigra g34872LF1064Eco TCAGAATTCTCATCTCTGCTTCACAATGCCG (SEQ ID No 34) g34872LR1309nBAmH1 ATGCGGGATCCAGAGATTCTCCCAGTCACACAGGC MS2NOQ1QbisR testis (SEQ ID No 27) MS2NOO2QbisR MS2N2OQlQbi5R NS2NOQR MS2NOQbisR g34872genoLF22nEcORI TACTGGAATTCCAGGTAGAGTGAAGCAAGTAATGTGTGTGTGAG (SEQ ID No 28) g34B72exRBAN139 ACGGGATCCTTTCAGTACTGAAGTTGAGAGGGAGA M862NOObisP testis (SEQ ID No 35) M862N02 g34872LF1140ECOR1 GCTGGGAATTCGCTGGAAAAGCTGATGGGTGCTGATTCTC (SEQ ID No 32) g34872exRBAN139 ACGGGATCCTTTCAGTACTGAAGTTGAGAGGGAGA M1117NOP testis (SEQ ID No 33) M1117N2OP M1117N2001P M1117NOO2P

TABLE 5c Primers for Cloning (exons) Tissue Percentage cDNA Form cloned M688 and R testicle 100% MS1MS2NOQbisR (95 clones) M862 and R testicle 100% M862NOQbisR (188 clones) amygdala 100% M862NOQbisR (42 clones) caudate nucleus 100% M862NOQbisR (39 clones) cerebellum 100% M862NOQbisR (87 clones) hippocampus 100% M862NOQbisR (36 clones) substantia nigra 100% M862NOQbisR (96 clones) thalamus 100% M862NOQbisR (30 clones) M1090 and testicle  45% M1090NOQBISR (5 clones) R  45% M1090NOQBISR (5 clones)  10% M1090N2OQBISR (1 clone) M1117 and testicle  26% M1117NOQBISR (23 clones) R  70% M1117N2OQBISR (62 clones)  2% M1117N2OO2QbisR (2 clones)  1% M1117NOO2QbisR (1 clones) amygdala 100% M1117NOQBISR (90 clones) caudate nucleus 100% M1117NOQBISR (94 clones) cerebellum 100% M1117NOQBISR (88 clones) corpus callosum 100% M1117NOQBISR (94 clones) cortex 100% M1117NOQBISR (95 clones) hippocampus 100% M1117N2OQR (66 clones) substantia nigra 100% M1117N2OQR (90 clones) MS2 and R testicle  1% MS2N2OO2QbisR (1 clones)  2% MS2N2OQ1QbisR (2 clones)  19% MS2NOO2QbisR (18 clones)  2% MS2NOQ1QbisR (2 clones)  8% MS2NOQR (8 clones)  67% MS2NOQbisR (63 clones) M1069 and Testicle  67% MNOQbisR R  16% MNOQR  3% MN2OqbisR  6% MNOXQR  2% MN2OQR  1% MNOO2XqbisR  2% MNNbisOQbisR  1% MNNbisOQR  1% MN2NbisOO2XqbisR  1% MN2OXQR Brain 100% MNOQbisR Hypothalamus 100% MN2OQbisR cDNA Cerebellum 100% MNOQbisR Amygdala Cdna 100% MN2OQbisR MOLT4 cells 100% MN2OQR Spinal cord  57% MNOQbisR  21% MN2OqbisR  18% MNOQR  3% MNOQbisRbis  1% MN2OQbisRbis M862 and P testicle  97% M862NOObisP (88 clones)  3% M862NOP (3 clones) N1117 and P hippocampus 100% M1117NOP (80 clones) testicle  58% M1117NOP (54 clones)  37% M1117N2OP (35 clones)  1% M1117N2OO1P (1 clone)  1% M1117NOO1P (1 clone)  2% M1117NOO2P (2 clones) M1117 and Testicle MNO O Cerebellum MNO Hippocampus MNO Caudate nucleus MNO Corpus callosum MNO Amygdala MNO Lung MNO Fetal liver MNO Pancreas MNO Stomach MNO HL60 cell line MNO Spinal cord MN2O trachea MN2O

TABLE 5d sbg1 (exons M862NOQbisR) Pos (1 to 998) genomic testicle cerebellum Subs nigra amygdala caudate nucleus 55 A 47A/1G 25A 43A/1G 40A/2G 17A/11G 122 A 48A 25A 20G/24A 40A/2G 28A 170 T 48T 25T 44T 35T/7C 19T/9C 178 G 48G 25G 24G/20A 42G 28G 209 T 47T/1C 25T 19T/25C 41T/1A 28T 226 A 48A 25G 44A 41A/1G 28A 248 G 48G 25G 44G 38G/4A 28G 258 T 48T 25C 44T 41T/1C 28T 286 T 48T 25T 44T 42T 24T/4C 301 beginning of exon N 325 T/A:L->Q 46T/2A 25T 44T 36T/6A 21T/7A 351 A/G:R->G 48A 25A 43A/1G 35A/7G 28A 391 A/G:K->R 48G 25G 44G 42G 28G 393 A/T:S->C 48A 25A 44A 29A/13T 28A 429 T/C:S->P 48T 21T/4C 44T 42T 28T 436 beginning of exon O 468 A/G:T->A 47A/1G 25A 1A 15G/2A 2G 497 T/C:H->H 47T/1C 25T 1T/1C 23T/2C 12T 511 T/C:L->S 48T 25T 28T 31C/9T 16C/11T/1N 529 pr A/G:H->R 48A 25A 39A 41A/1G 18A/10G 538 G/A:R->K 48G 25G 23G/17A 42G 28G 540 T/C:S->P 48T 25C 40T 42T 28T 571 A/G:Q->R 48A 25A 43A 37A/5G 24A/4G 584 beginning of exon Qbis 608 T/C:V->V 48T 19T/6C 44T 42T 28T 616 T/C:V->A 48T 25T 44T 41T/1C 21T/7C 702 T/C:Y->H 48T 25T 44T 42T 17T/11C 706 A/G:N->S 48A 24G/1A 44A 42A 28A 718 A/G:D->G 48A 25A 44A 42A 18A/10G 803 A 48A 25A 44A 38A/4G 28A 829 C 48C 25C 25C/19T 41C/1N 27C/1N 856 G 42G/6A 25G 25G/19A 32G/10A 24G/4A 876 beginning of exon R 901 C 48C 25C 25C/19T 40C/2N 27C/1N 915 A 46A/1G 25A 43A/1G 29G/13A 23G/5A 934 C 46C 25C 43C/1T 38C/4T 28C 938 C 46C 25C 44C 31C/11T 23C/5T

TABLE 5e Genomic position cDNA form: position of marker Biallelic on SEQ on cDNA (position in Amplicon Marker Name Allele 1 Allele 2 ID No 1 polypeptide)  8-132  8-132-179 A T 215838 M862NOQbisR: 976 M1090NOXQbisR: 844 MS1 MS2NOQbisR: 990 M1069NOQR: 878 M1069N2OQ1QbisR: 758 M1069NOQ1QbisR: 804 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 817 M1069NOO2QbisR: 863 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 936 M1069N2OQR: 832 M1069N2OQbisR: 723 M1069NNbisOQR: 901 M1069NNbisOQbisR: 792 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 959 M1069NOXQR: 974 M1069NOQbisRbis: 803 M1069N2OQbisRbis: 757 M1069N2OXQR: 928  8-132  8-132-164 A G 215853 M862NOQbisR: 961 M1090NOXQbisR: 829 MS1 MS2NOQbisR: 975 M1069NOQR: 863 M1069N2OQ1QbisR: 743 M1069NOQ1QbisR: 789 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 802 M1069NOO2QbisR: 848 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 921 M1069N2OQR: 817 M1069N2OQbisR: 708 M1069NNbisOQR: 886 M1069NNbisOQbisR: 777 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 944 M1069NOXQR: 959 M1069NOQbisRbis: 788 M1069N2OQbisRbis: 742 M1069N2OXQR: 913  8-132  8-132-97 A G 215920 M862NOQbisR: 894 M1090NOXQbisR: 762 MS1 MS2NOQbisR: 908 M1069NOQR: 796 M1069N2OQ1QbisR: 676 M1069NOQ1QbisR: 722 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 735 M1069NOO2QbisR: 781 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 854 M1069N2OQR: 750 M1069N2OQbisR: 641 M1069NNbisOQR: 819 M1069NNbisOQbisR: 710 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 877 M1069NOXQR: 892 M1069NOQbisRbis: 721 M1069N2OQbisRbis: 675 M1069N2OXQR: 846 99-13929 99-13929-201 G T 216028  8-131  8-131-363 G T 216538  8-131  8-131-199 G T 216702 M862NOQbisR: 831 M1090NOXQbisR: 699 MS1 MS2NOQbisR: 845 M1069NOQR: 733 M1069N2OQ1QbisR: 613 M1069NOQ1QbisR: 659 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 672 M1069NOO2QbisR: 718 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 791 M1069N2OQR: 687 M1069N2OQbisR: 578 M1069NNbisOQR: 756 M1069NNbisOQbisR: 647 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 814 M1069NOXQR: 829 M1069NOQbisRbis: 624 M1069N2OQbisRbis: 578 M1069N2OXQR: 783  8-130  8-130-236 C T 216874 M862NOQbisR: 659 M1090NOXQbisR: 527 MS1 MS2NOQbisR: 673 M1069NOQR: 561 M1069N2OQ1QbisR: 441 M1069NOQ1QbisR: 487 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 500 M1069NOO2QbisR: 546 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 619 M1069N2OQR: 515 M1069N2OQbisR: 406 M1069NNbisOQR: 584 M1069NNbisOQbisR: 475 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 642 M1069NOXQR: 657 M1069NOQbisRbis: 452 M1069N2OQbisRbis: 406 M1069N2OXQR: 611  8-130  8-130-220 G T 216890 M862NOQbisR: 643 M1090NOXQbisR: 511 MS1 MS2NOQbisR: 657 M1069NOQR: 545 M1069N2OQ1QbisR: 425 M1069NOQ1QbisR: 471 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 484 M1069NOO2QbisR: 530 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 603 M1069N2OQR: 499 M1069N2OQbisR: 390 (115) M1069NNbisOQR: 568 M1069NNbisOQbisR: 459 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 626 M1069NOXQR: 641 M1069NOQbisRbis: 436 M1069N2OQbisRbis: 390 (115) M1069N2OXQR: 595  8-130  8-130-144 C T 216966 M1069NOQR: 469 M1069N2OQR: 423 M1069NNbisOQR: 492 M1069NOXQR: 565 M1069N2OXQR: 519  8-130  8-130-143 A G 216967 M1069NOQR: 468 M1069N2OQR: 422 M1069NNbisOQR: 491 M1069NOXQR: 564 M1069N2OXQR: 518  8-130  8-130-102 C T 217008 M1069NOQR: 427 M1069N2OQR: 381 M1069NNbisOQR: 450 M1069NOXQR: 523 M1069N2OXQR: 477  8-130  8-130-101 G T 217009 M1069NOQR: 426 M1069N2OQR: 380 M1069NNbisOQR: 449 M1069NOXQR: 522 M1069N2OXQR: 476  8-130  8-130-83 A C 217027 M1069NOQR: 408 M1069N2OQ1QbisR: 362 M1069NOQ1QbisR: 408 M1069N2OQR: 362 M1069NNbisOQR: 431 M1069NOXQR: 504 M1069N2OXQR: 458  8-143  8-143-245 G T 229669 M1090NOXQbisR: 426 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 518 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 541 M1069NOXQR: 447 M1069N2OXQR: 401  8-143  8-143-242 A G 229672 M1090NOXQbisR: 423 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 515 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 538 M1069NOXQR: 444 M1069N2OXQR: 398  8-143  8-143-239 C T 229675 M1090NOXQbisR: 420 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 512 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 535 M1069NOXQR: 441 M1069N2OXQR: 395  8-143  8-143-232 G C 229682 M1090NOXQbisR: 413 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 505 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 528 M1069NOXQR: 434 M1069N2OXQR: 388  8-119  8-119-210 A C 230432 M862NOObisP: 1011 M862NOP: 870 M1117N2OO1P: 579 M1117N2OP: 569 M1117NOO1P: 625 M1117NOO2P: 709  8-119  8-119-204 A C 230438 M862NOObisP: 1005 M862NOP: 864 M1117N2OO1P: 573 M1117N2OP: 563 M117NOO1P: 619 M1117NOO2P: 703  8-119  8-119-200 A G 230442 M862NOObisP: 1001 M862NOP: 860 M1117N2OO1P: 569 M1117N2OP: 559 M1117NOO1P: 615 M1117NOO2P: 699  8-119  8-119-195 A C 230447 M862NOObisP: 996 M862NOP: 855 M1117N2OO1P: 564 M1117N2OP: 554 M1117NOO1P: 610 M1117NOO2P: 694  8-119  8-119-125 C T 230517 M862NOObisP: 926 M862NOP: 785 M1117N2OO1P: 494 M1117N2OP: 484 M1117NOO1P: 540 M1117NOO2P: 624  8-119  8-119-120 A G 230522 M862NOObisP: 921 M862NOP: 780 M1117N2OO1P: 489 M1117N2OP: 479 M1117NOO1P: 535 M1117NOO2P: 619  8-119  8-119-97 C T 230545 M862NOObisP: 898 M862NOP: 757 M1117N2OO1P: 466 M1117N2OP: 456 M1117NOO1P: 512 M1117NOO2P: 596  8-119  8-119-93 G T 230549 M862NOObisP: 894 M862NOP: 753 M1117N2OO1P: 462 M1117N2OP: 452 M1117NOO1P: 508 M1117NOO2P: 592  8-119  8-119-38 A T 230604 M862NOObisP: 839 M862NOP: 698 M1117N2OO1P: 407 M1117N2OP: 397 M1117NOO1P: 453 M1117NOO2P: 537  8-138  8-138-234 C T 230684 M862NOObisP: 759 M862NOP: 618 M1117N2OO1P: 327 M1117N2OP: 317 10 M1117NOO1P: 373 M1117NOO2P: 457  8-138  8-138-218 A G 230700 M862NOObisP: 743 M862NOP: 602 M1117N2OO1P: 311 M1117N2OP: 301 M1117NOO1P: 357 M1117NOO2P: 441  8-142  8-142-211 CAAA — 231293 M862NOObisP: 700  8-142  8-142-132 A G 231372 M862NOObisP: 621  8-145  8-145-197 C T 231811 M1117NOO2P: 395 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 397 M1069NOO2QbisR: 443 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 420 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 443  8-145  8-145-154 C T 231854 231854 M1117NOO2P: 352 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 354  8-145  8-145-138 A C 231870 M1117N2OO1P: 289 (96) M1117NOO1P: 335 M1117NOO2P: 336 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 338 (98) M1069NOO2QbisR: 384 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 361 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 384  8-137  8-137-182 C T 234277 M862NOQbisR: 477 M862NOObisP: 477 M862NOP: 477 M1090NOXQbisR: 249 M1117N2OO1P: 176 (59) M1117N2OP: 176 (59) M1117NOO1P: 222 M1117NOO2P: 222 MS1 MS2NOQbisR: 491 M1069NOQR: 270 M1069N2OQ1QbisR: 224 (60) M1069NOQ1QbisR: 270 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 224 (60) M1069NOO2QbisR: 270 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 247 M1069N2OQR: 224 (60) M1069N2OQbisR: 224 (60)  8-137  8-137-152 A C 234307 M862NOQbisR: 447 M862NOObisP: 447 M862NOP: 447 M1090NOXQbisR: 219 M1117N2OO1P: 146 (49) M1117N2OP: 146 (49) M1117NOO1P: 192 M1117NOO2P: 192 MS1 MS2NOQbisR: 461 M1069NOQR: 240 M1069N2OQ1QbisR: 194 (50) M1069NOQ1QbisR: 240 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 194 (50) M1069NOO2QbisR: 240 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 217 (57) M1069N2OQR: 194 (50) M1069N2OQbisR: 194 (50) M1069NNbisOQR: 263 M1069NNbisOQbisR: 263 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 240 M1069NOXQR: 240 M1069NOQbisRbis: 240 M1069N2OQbisRbis: 194 (50) M1069N2OXQR: 194 (50) 99-16038 99-16038-118 C T 239763 M862NOQbisR: 388 MB62NOObisP: 388 M862NOP: 388 M1090NOXQbisR: 160 M1117N2OO1P: 87 (29) M1117N2OP: 87 (29) M1117NOO1P: 133 M1117NOO2P: 133 MS1 MS2NOQbisR: 402 M1069NOQR: 181 M1069N2OQ1QbisR: 135 (30) M1069NOQ1QbisR: 181 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 135 (30) M1069NOO2QbisR: 181 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 135 (30) M1069N2OQR: 135 (30) M1069N2OQbisR: 135 (30) M1069NNbisOQR: 181 M1069NNbisOQbisR: 181 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 181 M1069NOXQR: 181 M1069NOQbisRbis: 181 M1069N2OQbisRbis: 135 (30) M1069N2OXQR: 135 (30)  8-153  8-153-313 C T 239763 M862NOQbisR: 388 M862NOObisP: 388 M862NOP: 388 M1090NOXQbisR: 160 M1117N2OO1P: 87 (29) M1117N2OP: 87 (29) M1117NOO1P: 133 M1117NOO2P: 133 MS1 MS2NOQbisR: 402 M1069NOQR: 181 M1069N2OQ1QbisR: 135 (30) M1069NOQ1QbisR: 181 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 135 (30) M1069NOO2QbisR: 181 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 135 (30) M1069N2OQR: 135 (30) M1069N2OQbisR: 135 (30) M1069NNbisOQR: 181 M1069NNbisOQbisR: 181 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 181 M1069NOXQR: 181 M1069NOQbisRbis: 181 M1069N2OQbisRbis: 135 (30) M1069N2OXQR: 135 (30)  8-135  8-135-166 G T 240543 M862NOQbisR: 282 (10) M862NOObisP: 282 (10) M1: 1143 M862NOP: 282 (10) M1090NOXQbisR: 54 (10) M1117N2OO1P: 27 (9) M1117N2OP: 27 (9) M1117NOO1P: 27 (9) M1117NOO2P: 27 (9) MS1 MS2NOQbisR: 296 (10) M1069NOQR: 75 (10) M1069N2OQ1QbisR: 75 (10) M1069NOQ1QbisR: 75 (10) M1069N2OO2QbisR: 75 (10) M1069NOO2QbisR: 75 (10) M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 75 (10) M1069N2OQR: 75 (10) M1069N2OQbisR: 75 (10) M1069NNbisOQR: 75 (10) M1069NNbisOQbisR: 75 (10) M1069NOO2XQbisR: 75 (10) M1069NOXQR: 75 (10) M1069NOQbisRbis: 75 (10) M1069N2OQbisRbis: 75 (10) M1069N2OXQR: 75 (10)  8-135  8-135-112 A G 240597 M862NOQbisR: 228 M862NOObisR: 228 M1: 1089 M862NOP: 228 MS1 MS2NOQbisR: 242 M1069NOQR: 21 M1069N2OQ1QbisR: 21 M1069NOQ1QbisR: 21 M1069N2OO2QbisR: 21 M1069NOO2QbisR: 21 M1069N2NbisOO2XQbisR: 21 M1069N2OQR: 21 M1069N2OQbisR: 21 M1069NNbisOQR: 21 M1069NNbisOQbisR: 21 M1069NOO2XQbisR: 21 M1069NOXQR: 21 M1069NOQbisRbis: 21 M1069N2OQbisRbis: 21 M1069N2OXQR: 21 99-16050 99-16050-235 G C 240772 M862NOQbisR: 53 M862NOObisP: 53 M1: 914 M862NOP: 53  8-144  8-144-378 C T 240858 M1: 828 MS1 MS2NOQbisR: 136  8-144  8-144-234 C T 241002 M1: 684  8-144  8-144-196 A T 241040 M1: 646  8-144  8-144-127 TGGATAC — 241109 M1: 577  8-141  8-141-304 C T 241217 M1: 469  8-141  8-141-260 C T 241261 M1: 425 (80)  8-141  8-141-161 G T 241360 M1: 326 (47)  8-140  8-140-286 A G 241507 M1: 179  8-140  8-140-173 A C 241620 M1: 66  8-140  8-140-108 G C 241685 M1: 1

Sbg1 Coding Regions

The sbg1 open reading frame is contained in the corresponding mRNA of a cDNA sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26. The effective sbg1 coding sequence (CDS) may include several forms as indicated above, in some embodiments encompassing isolated, purified, and recombinant polynucleotides which encode a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 4 amino acids, preferably 6, more preferably at least 8 or 10 amino acids, yet more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35. The effective sbg1 coding sequence (CDS) may comprise the region between the first nucleotide of the ATG codon and the end nucleotide of the stop codon of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26 as indicated in Table 5a above.

The above disclosed polynucleotide that contains the coding sequence of the sbg1 gene may be expressed in a desired host cell or a desired host organism when this polynucleotide is placed under the control of suitable expression signals. The expression signals may be either the expression signals contained in the regulatory regions in the sbg1 gene of the invention or in contrast the signals may be exogenous regulatory nucleic sequences. Such a polynucleotide, when placed under the suitable expression signals, may also be inserted in a vector for its expression and/or amplification.

Regulatory Sequences Of sbg1

As mentioned, the genomic sequence of the sbg1 gene contains regulatory sequences both in the non-coding 5′-flanking region and in the non-coding 3′-flanking region that border the sbg1 coding region containing the exons of the gene.

In one aspect, the 3′-regulatory sequence of the sbg1 gene may comprise the sequence localized between the nucleotide in position 213818 and the nucleotide in position 215818 of the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1. In one aspect, the 5′-regulatory sequence of the sbg1 gene may comprise the sequence localized between the 5′ end of the particular form of exon M and nucleotide position 243685 of SEQ ID No 1.

Polynucleotides derived from the 5′ and 3′ regulatory regions are useful in order to detect the presence of at least a copy of an sbg1 nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1 or a fragment thereof in a test sample.

The promoter activity of the 5′ regulatory regions contained in sbg1 can be assessed as described below.

In order to identify the relevant biologically active polynucleotide fragments or variants of an sbg1 regulatory region, one of skill in the art will refer to Sambrook et al. (1989), incorporated herein by reference, which describes the use of a recombinant vector carrying a marker gene (i.e. beta galactosidase, chloramphenicol acetyl transferase, etc.) the expression of which will be detected when placed under the control of a biologically active polynucleotide fragment or variant of the sbg1 sequence of SEQ ID No 1. Genomic sequences located upstream of the first exon of the sbg1 gene are cloned into a suitable promoter reporter vector, such as the pSEAP-Basic, pSEAP-Enhancer, pβgal-Basic, pβgal-Enhancer, or pEGFP-1 Promoter Reporter vectors available from Clontech, or pGL2-basic or pGL3-basic promoterless luciferase reporter gene vector from Promega. Briefly, each of these promoter reporter vectors include multiple cloning sites positioned upstream of a reporter gene encoding a readily assayable protein such as secreted alkaline phosphatase, luciferase, β galactosidase, or green fluorescent protein. The sequences upstream of the sbg1 coding region are inserted into the cloning sites upstream of the reporter gene in both orientations and introduced into an appropriate host cell. The level of reporter protein is assayed and compared to the level obtained from a vector which lacks an insert in the cloning site. The presence of an elevated expression level in the vector containing the insert with respect to the control vector indicates the presence of a promoter in the insert. If necessary, the upstream sequences can be cloned into vectors which contain an enhancer for increasing transcription levels from weak promoter sequences. A significant level of expression above that observed with the vector lacking an insert indicates that a promoter sequence is present in the inserted upstream sequence.

Promoter sequence within the upstream genomic DNA may be further defined by constructing nested 5′ and/or 3′ deletions in the upstream DNA using conventional techniques such as Exonuclease III or appropriate restriction endonuclease digestion. The resulting deletion fragments can be inserted into the promoter reporter vector to determine whether the deletion has reduced or obliterated promoter activity, such as described, for example, by Coles et al. (1998), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In this way, the boundaries of the promoters may be defined. If desired, potential individual regulatory sites within the promoter may be identified using site directed mutagenesis or linker scanning to obliterate potential transcription factor binding sites within the promoter individually or in combination. The effects of these mutations on transcription levels may be determined by inserting the mutations into cloning sites in promoter reporter vectors. This type of assay is well-known to those skilled in the art and is described in WO 97/17359, U.S. Pat. No. 5,374,544; EP 582 796; U.S. Pat. No. 5,698,389; U.S. Pat. No. 5,643,746; U.S. Pat. No. 5,502,176; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,266,488; the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.

The strength and the specificity of the promoter of the sbg1 gene can be assessed through the expression levels of a detectable polynucleotide operably linked to the sbg1 promoter in different types of cells and tissues. The detectable polynucleotide may be either a polynucleotide that specifically hybridizes with a predefined oligonucleotide probe, or a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein, including an sbg1 polypeptide or a fragment or a variant thereof. This type of assay is well-known to those skilled in the art and is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,502,176; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,266,488; the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. Some of the methods are discussed in more detail below.

Polynucleotides carrying the regulatory elements located at the 5′ end and at the 3′ end of the sbg1 coding region may be advantageously used to control the transcriptional and translational activity of an heterologous polynucleotide of interest.

Thus, the present invention also concerns a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide which is selected from the group consisting of the 5′ and 3′ regulatory regions of sbg1, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof. In one aspect, “3′ regulatory region” may comprise the nucleotide sequence located between positions 213818 and 215818 of SEQ ID No 1. In one aspect, “5′ regulatory region” may comprise the nucleotide sequence located between the 5′ end of a particular variant of exon M and nucleotide position 243685 of SEQ ID No 1. The 5′ end of particular form of exon M may be selected from the group consisting of nucleotide postions 240569, 241596, 240617, 240644, 240824, 240994, 241685 and 240993 of SEQ ID No 1. In a preferred aspect, the 5′ regulatory region comprises the nucleotides of nucleotide positions 241686 to 243685 of SEQ ID No I.

The invention also pertains to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide having at least 95% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the 5′ and 3′ regulatory regions, advantageously 99% nucleotide identity, preferably 99.5% nucleotide identity and most preferably 99.8% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the 5′ and 3′ regulatory regions, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof.

Another object of the invention consists of purified, isolated or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes, under the stringent hybridization conditions defined herein, with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of the 5′- and 3′ regulatory regions of sbg1, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof.

Preferred fragments of the 5′ regulatory region have a length of about 1500 or 1000 nucleotides, preferably of about 500 nucleotides, more preferably about 400 nucleotides, even more preferably 300 nucleotides and most preferably about 200 nucleotides.

Preferred fragments of the 3′ regulatory region are at least 50, 100, 150, 200, 300 or 400 bases in length.

“Biologically active” sbg1 polynucleotide derivatives of SEQ ID No 1 are polynucleotides comprising or alternatively consisting in a fragment of said polynucleotide which is functional as a regulatory region for expressing a recombinant polypeptide or a recombinant polynucleotide in a recombinant cell host. It could act either as an enhancer or as a repressor.

For the purpose of the invention, a nucleic acid or polynucleotide is “functional” as a regulatory region for expressing a recombinant polypeptide or a recombinant polynucleotide if said regulatory polynucleotide contains nucleotide sequences which contain transcriptional and translational regulatory information, and such sequences are “operably linked” to nucleotide sequences which encode the desired polypeptide or the desired polynucleotide.

The regulatory polynucleotides of the invention may be prepared from the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1 by cleavage using suitable restriction enzymes, as described for example in Sambrook et al. (1989). The regulatory polynucleotides may also be prepared by digestion of SEQ ID No 1 by an exonuclease enzyme, such as Bal31 (Wabiko et al., 1986). These regulatory polynucleotides can also be prepared by nucleic acid chemical synthesis, as described elsewhere in the specification.

The sbg1 regulatory polynucleotides according to the invention may be part of a recombinant expression vector that may be used to express a coding sequence in a desired host cell or host organism. The recombinant expression vectors according to the invention are described elsewhere in the specification.

A preferred 5′-regulatory polynucleotide of the invention includes the 5′-untranslated region (5′-UTR) of the sbg1 cDNA, or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof.

A preferred 3′-regulatory polynucleotide of the invention includes the 3′-untranslated region (3′-UTR) of the sbg1 cDNA, or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof.

A further object of the invention consists of a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising:

-   -   a) a nucleic acid comprising a regulatory nucleotide sequence         selected from the group consisting of:

-   (i) a nucleotide sequence comprising a polynucleotide of the sbg1 5′     regulatory region or a complementary sequence thereto;

-   (ii) a nucleotide sequence comprising a polynucleotide having at     least 95% of nucleotide identity with the nucleotide sequence of the     sbg1 5′ regulatory region or a complementary sequence thereto;

-   (iii) a nucleotide sequence comprising a polynucleotide that     hybridizes under stringent hybridization conditions with the     nucleotide sequence of the sbg1 5′ regulatory region or a     complementary sequence thereto; and

-   (iv) a biologically active fragment or variant of the     polynucleotides in (i), (ii) and (iii);     -   b) a polynucleotide encoding a desired polypeptide or a nucleic         acid of interest, operably linked to the nucleic acid defined         in (a) above; and     -   c) optionally, a nucleic acid comprising a 3′-regulatory         polynucleotide, preferably a 3′-regulatory polynucleotide of the         sbg1 gene.

In a specific embodiment of the nucleic acid defined above, said nucleic acid includes the 5′-untranslated region (5′-UTR) of the sbg1 cDNA, or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof.

In a second specific embodiment of the nucleic acid defined above, said nucleic acid includes the 3′-untranslated region (3′-UTR) of the sbg1 cDNA, or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof.

The regulatory polynucleotide of the 5′ regulatory region, or its biologically active fragments or variants, is operably linked at the 5′-end of the polynucleotide encoding the desired polypeptide or polynucleotide.

The regulatory polynucleotide of the 3′ regulatory region, or its biologically active fragments or variants, is advantageously operably linked at the 3′-end of the polynucleotide encoding the desired polypeptide or polynucleotide.

The desired polypeptide encoded by the above-described nucleic acid may be of various nature or origin, encompassing proteins of prokaryotic or eukaryotic origin. Among the polypeptides expressed under the control of an sbg1 regulatory region include bacterial, fungal or viral antigens. Also encompassed are eukaryotic proteins such as intracellular proteins, like “house keeping” proteins, membrane-bound proteins, like receptors, and secreted proteins like endogenous mediators such as cytokines. The desired polypeptide may be the sbg1 protein, especially the protein of the amino acid sequences of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35, or a fragment or a variant thereof.

The desired nucleic acids encoded by the above-described polynucleotide, usually an RNA molecule, may be complementary to a desired coding polynucleotide, for example to the sbg1 coding sequence, and thus useful as an antisense polynucleotide.

Such a polynucleotide may be included in a recombinant expression vector in order to express the desired polypeptide or the desired nucleic acid in host cell or in a host organism. Suitable recombinant vectors that contain a polynucleotide such as described herein are disclosed elsewhere in the specification.

Genomic Sequences of sbg2 Polynucleotides

Particularly preferred sbg2 nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200 nucleotides, to the extent that the length of said span is consistent with said nucleotide position range, of nucleotide positions 201188 to 216915, 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793, 215702 to 215746 and 216836 to 216915 of SEQ ID No 1, or the complements thereof.

It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section.

The human sbg2 gene comprises exons selected from at least 4 exons, referred to herein as exons S, T, U and V. The nucleotide positions of sbg2 exons in SEQ ID No. 1 are detailed below in Table 5f. TABLE 5f Position in SEQ ID No 1 Position in SEQ ID No 1 Exon Beginning End Intron Beginning End S 201188 201234 S 201235 214675 T 214676 214793 T 214794 215701 U 215702 215746 U 215747 216835 V 216836 216915

Thus, the invention embodies purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the exons of the sbg2 gene, or a sequence complementary thereto. Preferred are purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising at least one exon having the nucleotide position ranges listed in Table 5f selected from the group consisting of the exons S, T, U and V of the sbg2 gene, or a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment or a variant thereof. Also encompassed by the invention are purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a combination of at least two exons of the sbg2 gene selected from the group consisting of exons S, T, U and V, wherein the polynucleotides are arranged within the nucleic acid in the same relative order as in SEQ ID No. 1.

The present invention further embodies purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the introns of the sbg2 gene, or a sequence complementary thereto. The position of the introns is detailed in Table 5f. Intron S refers to the nucleotide sequence located between Exon S and Exon T, and so on. Thus, the invention embodies purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the 3 introns of the sbg2 gene, or a sequence complementary thereto.

The invention also encompasses a purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence of sbg2 having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 98 or 99% nucleotide identity with a sequence selected from the group consisting of nucleotide positions 201188 to 216915, 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793, 215702 to 215746 and 216836 to 216915 of SEQ ID No. 1 or a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment thereof. The nucleotide differences as regards the nucleotide positions 201188 to 216915, 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793, 215702 to 215746 and 216836 to 216915 of SEQ ID No. 1 may be generally randomly distributed throughout the entire nucleic acid.

Another object of the invention relates to purified, isolated or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes, under the stringent hybridization conditions defined herein, with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of nucleotide positions 201188 to 216915, 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793, 215702 to 215746 and 216836 to 216915 of SEQ ID No 1, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof.

Additional preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant sbg2 polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100 or 200 nucleotides of nucleotide positions 201188 to 216915, 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793, 215702 to 215746 and 216836 to 216915 of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises an sbg2-related biallelic marker. Optionally, said biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A79 to A99. It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section. Either the original or the alternative allele may be present at said biallelic marker.

An sbg2 polynucleotide or gene may further contain regulatory sequences both in the non-coding 5′-flanking region and in the non-coding 3′-flanking region that border the region containing said genes or exons. Polynucleotides derived from 5′ and 3′ regulatory regions are useful in order to detect the presence of at least a copy of a nucleotide sequence comprising an sbg2 nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No. 1 or a fragment thereof in a test sample. Polynucleotides carrying the regulatory elements located at the 5′ end and at the 3′ end of the genes comprising the exons of the present invention may be advantageously used to control the transcriptional and translational activity of a heterologous polynucleotide of interest.

While this section is entitled “sbg2 cDNA Sequences,” it should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section, flanking the genomic sequences of sbg2 on either side or between two or more such genomic sequences.

Polynucleotide Constructs

The terms “polynucleotide construct” and “recombinant polynucleotide” are used interchangeably herein to refer to linear or circular, purified or isolated polynucleotides that have been artificially designed and which comprise at least two nucleotide sequences that are not found as contiguous nucleotide sequences in their initial natural environment. It should be noted that the present invention embodies recombinant vectors comprising any one of the polynucleotides described in the present invention.

DNA Constructs that Enables Directing Temporal and Spatial Expression of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 Nucleic Acid Sequences in Recombinant Cell Hosts and in Transgenic Animals

In order to study the physiological and phenotypic consequences of a lack of synthesis of a protein encoded by a nucleotide sequence comprising an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide, both at the cell level and at the multi cellular organism level, the invention also encompasses DNA constructs and recombinant vectors enabling a conditional expression of a specific allele of a nucleotide sequence comprising an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide and also of a copy of a sequence comprising a nucleotide sequence of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide, or a fragment thereof, harboring substitutions, deletions, or additions of one or more bases. These base substitutions, deletions or additions may be located either in an exon, an intron or a regulatory sequence, in particular a 5′ regulatory sequence of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide. In a preferred embodiment, the nucleotide sequence comprising an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide further comprises a biallelic marker of the present invention.

A first preferred DNA construct is based on the tetracycline resistance operon tet from E. coli transposon Tn110 for controlling the expression of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide, such as described by Gossen et al. (1992, 1995) and Furth et al. (1994), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Such a DNA construct contains seven tet operator sequences from Tn10 (tetop) that are fused to either a minimal promoter or a 5′-regulatory sequence of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide, said minimal promoter or said sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide regulatory sequence being operably linked to a polynucleotide of interest that codes either for a sense or an antisense oligonucleotide or for a polypeptide, including an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide-encoded polypeptide or a peptide fragment thereof. This DNA construct is functional as a conditional expression system for the nucleotide sequence of interest when the same cell also comprises a nucleotide sequence coding for either the wild type (tTA) or the mutant (rTA) repressor fused to the activating domain of viral protein VP 16 of herpes simplex virus, placed under the control of a promoter, such as the HCMVIE1 enhancer/promoter or the MMTV-LTR. Indeed, a preferred DNA construct of the invention comprises both the polynucleotide containing the tet operator sequences and the polynucleotide containing a sequence coding for the tTA or the rTA repressor.

In a specific embodiment, the conditional expression DNA construct contains the sequence encoding the mutant tetracycline repressor rTA, the expression of the polynucleotide of interest is silent in the absence of tetracycline and induced in its presence.

DNA Constructs Allowing Homologous Recombination: Replacement Vectors

A second preferred DNA construct will comprise, from 5′-end to 3′-end: (a) a first nucleotide sequence comprising an sbg1 polynucleotide; (b) a nucleotide sequence comprising a positive selection marker, such as the marker for neomycine resistance (neo); and (c) a second nucleotide sequence comprising a respective sbg1 polynucleotide, and is located on the genome downstream of the first sbg1 polynucleotide sequence (a). Also encompassed are DNA construct prepared in an analogous manner using g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 nucleotide sequences in place of the sbg1 sequences described above.

In a preferred embodiment, this DNA construct also comprises a negative selection marker located upstream the nucleotide sequence (a) or downstream the nucleotide sequence (c). Preferably, the negative selection marker comprises the thymidine kinase (tk) gene (Thomas et al., 1986), the hygromycine beta gene (Te Riele et al., 1990), the hprt gene (Van der Lugt et al., 1991; Reid et al., 1990) or the Diphteria toxin A fragment (Dt-A) gene (Nada et al., 1993; Yagi et al. 1990), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Preferably, the positive selection marker is located within and exon of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide so as to interrupt the sequence encoding the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein. These replacement vectors are described, for example, by Thomas et al. (1986; 1987), Mansour et al. (1988) and Koller et al. (1992), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.

The first and second nucleotide sequences (a) and (c) may be indifferently located within an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide regulatory sequence, an intronic sequence, an exon sequence or a sequence containing both regulatory and/or intronic and/or exon sequences. The size of the nucleotide sequence of (a) and (c) ranges from 1 to 50 kb, preferably from 1 to 10 kb, more preferably from 2 to 6 kb and most preferably from 2 to 4 kb.

DNA Constructs Allowing Homologous Recombination: Cre-LoxP System.

These new DNA constructs make use of the site specific recombination system of the P1 phage. The P1 phage possesses a recombinase called Cre which interacts specifically with a 34 base pairs loxP site. The loxP site is composed of two palindromic sequences of 13 bp separated by a 8 bp conserved sequence (Hoess et al., 1986, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference). The recombination by the Cre enzyme between two loxP sites having an identical orientation leads to the deletion of the DNA fragment.

The Cre-loxP system used in combination with a homologous recombination technique has been first described by Gu et al. (1993, 1994), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Briefly, a nucleotide sequence of interest to be inserted in a targeted location of the genome harbors at least two loxP sites in the same orientation and located at the respective ends of a nucleotide sequence to be excised from the recombinant genome. The excision event requires the presence of the recombinase (Cre) enzyme within the nucleus of the recombinant cell host. The recombinase enzyme may be brought at the desired time either by (a) incubating the recombinant cell hosts in a culture medium containing this enzyme, by injecting the Cre enzyme directly into the desired cell, such as described by Araki et al. (1995), or by lipofection of the enzyme into the cells, such as described by Baubonis et al. (1993), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference; (b) transfecting the cell host with a vector comprising the Cre coding sequence operably linked to a promoter functional in the recombinant cell host, which promoter being optionally inducible, said vector being introduced in the recombinant cell host, such as described by Gu et al. (1993) and Sauer et al. (1988), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference; (c) introducing in the genome of the cell host a polynucleotide comprising the Cre coding sequence operably linked to a promoter functional in the recombinant cell host, which promoter is optionally inducible, and said polynucleotide being inserted in the genome of the cell host either by a random insertion event or an homologous recombination event, such as described by Gu et al. (1993).

In a specific embodiment, the vector containing the sequence to be inserted in an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene sequence by homologous recombination is constructed in such a way that selectable markers are flanked by loxP sites of the same orientation, it is possible, by treatment by the Cre enzyme, to eliminate the selectable markers while leaving the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide sequences of interest that have been inserted by an homologous recombination event. Again, two selectable markers are needed: a positive selection marker to select for the recombination event and a negative selection marker to select for the homologous recombination event. Vectors and methods using the Cre-loxP system are described by Zou et al. (1994), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.

Thus, in one aspect, a further preferred DNA construct of the invention comprises, from 5′-end to 3′-end: (a) a first nucleotide sequence that is comprised by an sbg1 polynucleotide; (b) a nucleotide sequence comprising a polynucleotide encoding a positive selection marker, said nucleotide sequence comprising additionally two sequences defining a site recognized by a recombinase, such as a loxP site, the two sites being placed in the same orientation; and (c) a second nucleotide sequence comprising an sbg1 polynucleotide, and is located on the genome downstream of the first sbg1 polynucleotide sequence (a). Also encompassed are DNA construct prepared in an analogous manner using g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 nucleotide sequences in place of the sbg1 sequences described above.

The sequences defining a site recognized by a recombinase, such as a loxP site, are preferably located within the nucleotide sequence (b) at suitable locations bordering the nucleotide sequence for which the conditional excision is sought. In one specific embodiment, two loxP sites are located at each side of the positive selection marker sequence, in order to allow its excision at a desired time after the occurrence of the homologous recombination event.

In a preferred embodiment of a method using the third DNA construct described above, the excision of the polynucleotide fragment bordered by the two sites recognized by a recombinase, preferably two loxP sites, is performed at a desired time, due to the presence within the genome of the recombinant host cell of a sequence encoding the Cre enzyme operably linked to a promoter sequence, preferably an inducible promoter, more preferably a tissue-specific promoter sequence and most preferably a promoter sequence which is both inducible and tissue-specific, such as described by Gu et al. (1993).

The presence of the Cre enzyme within the genome of the recombinant cell host may result from the breeding of two transgenic animals, the first transgenic animal bearing the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide-derived sequence of interest containing the loxP sites as described above and the second transgenic animal bearing the Cre coding sequence operably linked to a suitable promoter sequence, such as described by Gu et al. (1993).

Spatio-temporal control of the Cre enzyme expression may also be achieved with an adenovirus based vector that contains the Cre gene thus allowing infection of cells, or in vivo infection of organs, for delivery of the Cre enzyme, such as described by Anton et al. (1995) and Kanegae et al. (1995), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.

The DNA constructs described above may be used to introduce a desired nucleotide sequence of the invention, preferably an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide, and most preferably an altered copy an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide sequence, within a predetermined location of the targeted genome, leading either to the generation of an altered copy of a targeted gene (knock-out homologous recombination) or to the replacement of a copy of the targeted gene by another copy sufficiently homologous to allow an homologous recombination event to occur (knock-in homologous recombination). In a specific embodiment, the DNA constructs described above may be used to introduce an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide.

Nuclear Antisense DNA Constructs

Other compositions containing a vector of the invention comprise an oligonucleotide fragment of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID No. 1 respectively, as an antisense tool that inhibits the expression of the corresponding gene. Preferred methods using antisense polynucleotide according to the present invention are the procedures described by Sczakiel et al. (1995) or those described in PCT Application No WO 95/24223, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.

Preferably, the antisense tools are chosen among the polynucleotides (15-200 bp long) that are complementary to the 5′ end of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide mRNA. In one embodiment, a combination of different antisense polynucleotides complementary to different parts of the desired targeted gene are used.

Preferably, the antisense polynucleotides of the invention have a 3′ polyadenylation signal that has been replaced with a self-cleaving ribozyme sequence, such that RNA polymerase II transcripts are produced without poly(A) at their 3′ ends, these antisense polynucleotides being incapable of export from the nucleus, such as described by Liu et al. (1994), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. In a preferred embodiment, these sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 antisense polynucleotides also comprise, within the ribozyme cassette, a histone stem-loop structure to stabilize cleaved transcripts against 3′-5′ exonucleolytic degradation, such as the structure described by Eckner et al. (1991), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.

Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers

The polynucleotides of the invention are useful in order to detect the presence of at least a copy of a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No. 1 or of the respective sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 polynucleotide or gene, or a fragment, complement, or variant-thereof in a test sample.

Particularly preferred probes and primers of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides, to the extent that said span is consistent with the length of the nucleotide position range, of SEQ ID No 1, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1:

-   -   (a) nucleotide positions 31 to 292651 and 292844 to 319608;     -   (b) 290653 to 292652, 292653 to 296047, 292653 to 292841, 295555         to 296047, 295580 to 296047 and 296048 to 298048;     -   (c) 94124 to 94964;     -   (d) 31 to 1107, 1108 to 65853, 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920,         18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282,         64666 to 64812, 65505 to 65853 and 65854 to 67854;     -   (e) 213818 to 215818, 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975, 216661         to 216952, 216661 to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647 to 229742,         230408 to 230721, 231272 to 231412, 231787 to 231880, 231870 to         231879, 234174 to 234321, 237406 to 237428, 239719 to 239807,         239719 to 239853, 240528 to 240569, 240528 to 240596, 240528 to         240617, 240528 to 240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to 240994,         240528 to 241685, 240800 to 240993 and 241686 to 243685;     -   (f) 201188 to 216915, 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793, 215702         to 215746 and 216836 to 216915; or     -   (g) a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment thereof.

Probes and primers of the invention also include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95% nucleotide identity with a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides of nucleotide positions 31 to 292651 and 292844 to 319608 of SEQ ID No. 1. Preferred probes and primers of the invention also include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 nucleotide sequence having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95% nucleotide identity with at least one sequence selected from the group consisting of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No. 1:

-   -   (a) 290653 to 292652, 292653 to 296047, 292653 to 292841, 295555         to 296047, 295580 to 296047 and 296048 to 298048;     -   (b) 94124 to 94964;     -   (c) 31 to 1107, 1108 to 65853, 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920,         18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282,         64666 to 64812, 65505 to 65853 and 65854 to 67854;     -   (d) 213818 to 215818, 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975, 216661         to 216952, 216661 to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647 to 229742,         230408 to 230721, 231272 to 231412, 231787 to 231880, 231870 to         231879, 234174 to 234321, 237406 to 237428, 239719 to 239807,         239719 to 239853, 240528 to 240569, 240528 to 240596, 240528 to         240617, 240528 to 240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to 240994,         240528 to 241685, 240800 to 240993 and 241686 to 243685;     -   (e) 201188 to 216915, 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793, 215702         to 215746 and 216836 to 216915; or     -   (f) a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment thereof.

Another set of probes and primers of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No. 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 nucleotide positions of any one of the ranges of nucleotide positions, designated pos1 to pos 166, of SEQ ID No. 1 listed in Table 1 above.

The invention also relates to nucleic acid probes characterized in that they hybridize specifically, under the stringent hybridization conditions defined above, with a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides of nucleotide positions 31 to 292651 and 292844 to 319608 of SEQ ID No. 1, or a variant thereof or a sequence complementary thereto. Particularly preferred are nucleic acid probes characterized in that they hybridize specifically, under the stringent hybridization conditions defined above, with a nucleic acid selected from the group consisting of nucleotide positions:

-   -   (a) 290653 to 292652, 292653 to 296047, 292653 to 292841, 295555         to 296047, 295580 to 296047 and 296048 to 298048;     -   (b) 94124 to 94964;     -   (c) 31 to 1107, 1108 to 65853, 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920,         18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282,         64666 to 64812, 65505 to 65853 and 65854 to 67854;     -   (d) 213818 to 215818, 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975, 216661         to 216952, 216661 to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647 to 229742,         230408 to 230721, 231272 to 231412, 231787 to 231880, 231870 to         231879, 234174 to 234321, 237406 to 237428, 239719 to 239807,         239719 to 239853, 240528 to 240569, 240528 to 240596, 240528 to         246617, 240528 to 240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to 240994,         240528 to 241685, 240800 to 240993 and 241686 to 243685;     -   (e) 201188 to 216915, 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793, 215702         to 215746 and 216836 to 216915; or     -   (f) a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment thereof.

The formation of stable hybrids depends on the melting temperature (Tm) of the DNA. The Tm depends on the length of the primer or probe, the ionic strength of the solution and the G+C content. The higher the G+C content of the primer or probe, the higher is the melting temperature because G:C pairs are held by three H bonds whereas A:T pairs have only two. The GC content in the probes of the invention usually ranges between 10 and 75%, preferably between 35 and 60%, and more preferably between 40 and 55%.

A probe or a primer according to the invention may be between 8 and 2000 nucleotides in length, or is specified to be at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500, 1000 nucleotides in length. More particularly, the length of these probes can range from 8, 10, 15, 20, or 30 to 100 nucleotides, preferably from 10 to 50, more preferably from 15 to 30 nucleotides. Shorter probes tend to lack specificity for a target nucleic acid sequence and generally require cooler temperatures to form sufficiently stable hybrid complexes with the template. Longer probes are expensive to produce and can sometimes self-hybridize to form hairpin structures. The appropriate length for primers and probes under a particular set of assay conditions may be empirically determined by one of skill in the art.

The primers and probes can be prepared by any suitable method, including, for example, cloning and restriction of appropriate sequences and direct chemical synthesis by a method such as the phosphodiester method of Narang et al. (1979), the phosphodiester method of Brown et al. (1979), the diethylphosphoramidite method of Beaucage et al. (1981) and the solid support method described in EP 0 707 592. The disclosures of all these documents are incorporated herein by reference.

Detection probes are generally nucleic acid sequences or uncharged nucleic acid analogs such as, for example peptide nucleic acids which are disclosed in International Patent Application WO 92/20702, morpholino analogs which are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,185,444; 5,034,506 and 5,142,047, the disclosures of which are all incorporated herein by reference. The probe may have to be rendered “non-extendable” in that additional dNTPs cannot be added to the probe. In and of themselves analogs usually are non-extendable and nucleic acid probes can be rendered non-extendable by modifying the 3′ end of the probe such that the hydroxyl group is no longer capable of participating in elongation. For example, the 3′ end of the probe can be functionalized with the capture or detection label to thereby consume or otherwise block the hydroxyl group. Alternatively, the 3′ hydroxyl group simply can be cleaved, replaced or modified; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 07/049,061 filed Apr. 19, 1993, incorporated herein by reference, describes modifications which can be used to render a probe non-extendable.

Any of the polynucleotides of the present invention can be labeled, if desired, by incorporating a label detectable by spectroscopic, photochemical, biochemical, immunochemical, or chemical means. For example, useful labels include radioactive substances (³²P, ³⁵S, ³H, ¹²⁵I), fluorescent dyes (5-bromodesoxyuridin, fluorescein, acetylaminofluorene, digoxigenin) or biotin. Preferably, polynucleotides are labeled at their 3′ and 5′ ends. Examples of non-radioactive labeling of nucleic acid fragments are described in the French patent No. FR-7810975 or by Urdea et al (1988) or Sanchez-Pescador et al (1988), each incorporated herein by reference. In addition, the probes according to the present invention may have structural characteristics such that they allow the signal amplification, such structural characteristics being, for example, branched DNA probes as those described by Urdea et al. in 1991 or in the European patent No. EP 0 225 807 (Chiron), incorporated herein by reference.

A label can also be used to capture the primer, so as to facilitate the immobilization of either the primer or a primer extension product, such as amplified DNA, on a solid support. A capture label is attached to the primers or probes and can be a specific binding member which forms a binding pair with the solid phase reagent's specific binding member (e.g. biotin and streptavidin). Therefore depending upon the type of label carried by a polynucleotide or a probe, it may be employed to capture or to detect the target DNA. Further, it will be understood that the polynucleotides, primers or probes provided herein, may, themselves, serve as the capture label. For example, in the case where a solid phase reagent's binding member is a nucleic acid sequence, it may be selected such that it binds a complementary portion of a primer or probe to thereby immobilize the primer or probe to the solid phase. In cases where a polynucleotide probe itself serves as the binding member, those skilled in the art will recognize that the probe will contain a sequence or “tail” that is not complementary to the target. In the case where a polynucleotide primer itself serves as the capture label, at least a portion of the primer will be free to hybridize with a nucleic acid on a solid phase. DNA Labeling techniques are well known to the skilled technician.

The probes of the present invention are useful for a number of purposes. They can be notably used in Southern hybridization to genomic DNA. The probes can also be used to detect PCR amplification products. They may also be used to detect mismatches in a sequence comprising a polynucleotide of SEQ ID Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, or an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide or gene or mRNA using other techniques.

Any of the polynucleotides, primers and probes of the present invention can be conveniently immobilized on a solid support. Solid supports are known to those skilled in the art and include the walls of wells of a reaction tray, test tubes, polystyrene beads, magnetic beads, nitrocellulose strips, membranes, microparticles such as latex particles, sheep (or other animal) red blood cells, duracytes and others. The solid support is not critical and can be selected by one skilled in the art. Thus, latex particles, microparticles, magnetic or non-magnetic beads, membranes, plastic tubes, walls of microtiter wells, glass or silicon chips, sheep (or other suitable animal's) red blood cells and duracytes are all suitable examples. Suitable methods for immobilizing nucleic acids on solid phases include ionic, hydrophobic, covalent interactions and the like. A solid support, as used herein, refers to any material which is insoluble, or can be made insoluble by a subsequent reaction. The solid support can be chosen for its intrinsic ability to attract and immobilize the capture reagent. Alternatively, the solid phase can retain an additional receptor which has the ability to attract and immobilize the capture reagent. The additional receptor can include a charged substance that is oppositely charged with respect to the capture reagent itself or to a charged substance conjugated to the capture reagent. As yet another alternative, the receptor molecule can be any specific binding member which is immobilized upon (attached to) the solid support and which has the ability to immobilize the capture reagent through a specific binding reaction. The receptor molecule enables the indirect binding of the capture reagent to a solid support material before the performance of the assay or during the performance of the assay. The solid phase thus can be a plastic, derivatized plastic, magnetic or non-magnetic metal, glass or silicon surface of a test tube, microtiter well, sheet, bead, microparticle, chip, sheep (or other suitable animal's) red blood cells, duracytes and other configurations known to those of ordinary skill in the art. The polynucleotides of the invention can be attached to or immobilized on a solid support individually or in groups of at least 2, 5, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 25 distinct polynucleotides of the invention to a single solid support. In addition, polynucleotides other than those of the invention may be attached to the same solid support as one or more polynucleotides of the invention.

Consequently, the invention also comprises a method for detecting the presence of a nucleic acid comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from a group consisting of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, a fragment or a variant thereof or a complementary sequence thereto in a sample, said method comprising the following steps of:

-   -   a) bringing into contact a nucleic acid probe or a plurality of         nucleic acid probes which can hybridize with a nucleotide         sequence included in a nucleic acid selected form the group         consisting of the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26,         36 to 40 and 54 to 229, a fragment or a variant thereof or a         complementary sequence thereto and the sample to be assayed; and     -   b) detecting the hybrid complex formed between the probe and a         nucleic acid in the sample.

The invention further concerns a kit for detecting the presence of a nucleic acid comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from a group consisting of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, a fragment or a variant thereof or a complementary sequence thereto in a sample, said kit comprising:

-   -   a) a nucleic acid probe or a plurality of nucleic acid probes         which can hybridize with a nucleotide sequence included in a         nucleic acid selected form the group consisting of the         nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to         229, a fragment or a variant thereof or a complementary sequence         thereto; and     -   b) optionally, the reagents necessary for performing the         hybridization reaction.

In a first preferred embodiment of this detection method and kit, said nucleic acid probe or the plurality of nucleic acid probes are labeled with a detectable molecule. In a second preferred embodiment of said method and kit, said nucleic acid probe or the plurality of nucleic acid probes has been immobilized on a substrate. In a third preferred embodiment, the nucleic acid probe or the plurality of nucleic acid probes comprise either a sequence which is selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of P1 to P360 and the complementary sequence thereto, B1 to B229, C1 to C229, D1 to D360, E1 to E360, or a nucleotide sequence comprising a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A1 to A360 or a polymorphism selected from the group consisting of A361 to A489, or the complements thereto.

Oligonucleotide Arrays

A substrate comprising a plurality of oligonucleotide primers or probes of the invention may be used either for detecting or amplifying targeted sequences in a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No. 1, more particularly in an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide, or in genes comprising an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide and may also be used for detecting mutations in the coding or in the non-coding sequences of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 nucleic acid sequence, or genes comprising an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 nucleic acid sequence.

Any polynucleotide provided herein may be attached in overlapping areas or at random locations on the solid support. Alternatively the polynucleotides of the invention may be attached in an ordered array wherein each polynucleotide is attached to a distinct region of the solid support which does not overlap with the attachment site of any other polynucleotide. Preferably, such an ordered array of polynucleotides is designed to be “addressable” where the distinct locations are recorded and can be accessed as part of an assay procedure. Addressable polynucleotide arrays typically comprise a plurality of different oligonucleotide probes that are coupled to a surface of a substrate in different known locations. The knowledge of the precise location of each polynucleotides location makes these “addressable” arrays particularly useful in hybridization assays. Any addressable array technology known in the art can be employed with the polynucleotides of the invention. One particular embodiment of these polynucleotide arrays is known as Genechips™, and has been generally described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,143,854; PCT publications WO 90/15070 and 92/10092, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. These arrays may generally be produced using mechanical synthesis methods or light directed synthesis methods which incorporate a combination of photolithographic methods and solid phase oligonucleotide synthesis (Fodor et al., 1991, incorporated herein by reference). The immobilization of arrays of oligonucleotides on solid supports has been rendered possible by the development of a technology generally identified as “Very Large Scale Immobilized Polymer Synthesis” (VLSIPS™) in which, typically, probes are immobilized in a high density array on a solid surface of a chip. Examples of VLSIPS™ technologies are provided in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,143,854; and 5,412,087 and in PCT Publications WO 90/15070, WO 92/10092 and WO 95/11995, each of which are incorporated herein by reference, which describe methods for forming oligonucleotide arrays through techniques such as light-directed synthesis techniques. In designing strategies aimed at providing arrays of nucleotides immobilized on solid supports, further presentation strategies were developed to order and display the oligonucleotide arrays on the chips in an attempt to maximize hybridization patterns and sequence information. Examples of such presentation strategies are disclosed in PCT Publications WO 94/12305, WO 94/11530, WO 97/29212 and WO 97/31256, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.

In another embodiment of the oligonucleotide arrays of the invention, an oligonucleotide probe matrix may advantageously be used to detect mutations occurring in an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide, including in genes comprising an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide and preferably in an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide regulatory region. For this particular purpose, probes are specifically designed to have a nucleotide sequence allowing their hybridization to the genes that carry known mutations (either by deletion, insertion or substitution of one or several nucleotides). By known mutations in an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide, it is meant, mutations in an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide that have been identified according; the technique used by Huang et al. (1996) or Samson et al. (1996), each incorporated herein by reference, for example, may be used to identify such mutations.

Another technique that is used to detect mutations in an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide is the use of a high-density DNA array. Each oligonucleotide probe constituting a unit element of the high density DNA array is designed to match a specific subsequence of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide. Thus, an array consisting of oligonucleotides complementary to subsequences of the target gene sequence is used to determine the identity of the target sequence with the wild-type gene sequence, measure its amount, and detect differences between the target sequence and the reference wild-type nucleic acid sequence of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide. In one such design, termed 4L tiled array, is implemented a set of four probes (A, C, G, T), preferably 15-nucleotide oligomers. In each set of four probes, the perfect complement will hybridize more strongly than mismatched probes. Consequently, a nucleic acid target of length L is scanned for mutations with a tiled array containing 4L probes, the whole probe set containing all the possible mutations in the known wild reference sequence. The hybridization signals of the 15-mer probe set tiled array are perturbed by a single base change in the target sequence. As a consequence, there is a characteristic loss of signal or a “footprint” for the probes flanking a mutation position. This technique was described by Chee et al. in 1996, which is herein incorporated by reference.

Consequently, the invention concerns an array of nucleic acid molecules comprising at least one polynucleotide described above as probes and primers. Preferably, the invention concerns an array of nucleic acid comprising at least two polynucleotides described above as probes and primers.

Sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 Proteins and Polypeptide Fragments:

The terms “sbg1 polypeptides”, “g34665 polypeptides”, “sbg2 polypeptides”, “g35017 polypeptides”, “g35017 polypeptides” are used herein to embrace all of the proteins and polypeptides encoded by the respective sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 polypeptides of the present invention. Forming part of the invention are polypeptides encoded by the polynucleotides of the invention, as well as fusion polypeptides comprising such polypeptides. The invention embodies proteins from humans, mammals, primates, non-human primates, and includes isolated or purified sbg1 proteins consisting, consisting essentially, or comprising the sequence of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35, isolated or purified g34665, g35017 and sbg2 proteins encoded by the g34665, g35017 and sbg2 polynucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1, and isolated or purified g35018 proteins consisting, consisting essentially, or comprising the sequence of SEQ ID Nos 41 to 43.

It should be noted that the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 proteins of the invention also comprise naturally-occurring variants of the amino acid sequence of the respective human sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 proteins.

The present invention embodies isolated, purified, and recombinant polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 4 amino acids, preferably at least 6, more preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids, to the extent that said span is consistent with the length of a particular SEQ ID, of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35 and 41 to 43. In other preferred embodiments the contiguous stretch of amino acids comprises the site of a mutation or functional mutation, including a deletion, addition, swap or truncation of the amino acids in an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 protein sequence.

The invention also embodies isolated, purified, and recombinant sbg1 polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 4 amino acids, preferably at least 6 or at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35, wherein said contiguous span comprises an amino acid variation according to Table 5e.

The present inventors have further identified potential cleavage sites in the sbg1 polypeptides, and several specific sbg1 peptides. An sbg1 peptide has further been tested in behavioral studies by injection in mice, as further detailed in Example 7. In particular, the polypeptide of SEQ ID No 29 contains a protease cleavage site at amino acid positions 62 to 63; the polypeptide of SEQ ID No 30 contains a protease cleavage site at amino acid positions 63 to 64 and 110 to 111; the polypeptide of SEQ ID No 32 contains a protease cleavage site at amino acid positions 63 to 64; the polypeptide of SEQ ID No 33 contains a protease cleavage site at amino acid positions 54 to 55 and 57 to 58; the polypeptide of SEQ ID No 34 contains a protease cleavage site at amino acid positions 63 to 64 and 122 to 123; and the polypeptide of SEQ ID No 35 contains a protease cleavage site at amino acid positions 62 to 63 and 63 to 64. Additionally, sbg1 polypeptides of SEQ ID Nos 30, 32 and 34 contain cysteine residues predicted to be capable of forming a disulfide bridge at amino acid positions 82 and 104 of SEQ ID No 30, amino acid positions 82 and 106 and SEQ ID No 32, and amino acid positions 132 and 142 of SEQ ID No 34. In particularly preferred embodiment, the invention comprises isolated, purified, and recombinant sbg1 peptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 4 amino acids, preferably at least 6 or at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12 or 15 amino acids of an amino acid position range selected from the group consisting of amino acid positions: 1 to 63 and 64 to 102 of SEQ ID No 29; 1 to 64, 65 to 111 and 112 to 119 of SEQ ID No 30; 1 to 64 and 65 to 126 of SEQ ID No 32; 1 to 64, 65 to 123 and 124 to 153 of SEQ ID No 34; and 1 to 61 and 65 to 106 of SEQ ID No 35.

The invention further embodies sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 polypeptides, including isolated and recombinant polypeptides, encoded respectively by sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 polynucleotides consisting, consisting essentially, or comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200 or 500 nucleotides, to the extent that the length of said span is consistent with the nucleotide position range, of SEQ ID No 1, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1:

-   -   (a) 290653 to 292652, 292653 to 296047, 292653 to 292841, 295555         to 296047 and 295580 to 296047;     -   (b) 94144 to 94964     -   (c) 1108 to 65853, 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920, 18778 to 18862,         25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282, 64666 to 64812,         and 65505 to 65853;     -   (d) 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975, 216661 to 216952, 216661         to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647 to 229742, 230408 to 230721,         231272 to 231412, 231787 to 231880, 231870 to 231879, 234174 to         234321, 237406 to 237428, 239719 to 239807, 239719 to 239853,         240528 to 240569, 240528 to 240596, 240528 to 240617, 240528 to         240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to 240994, 240528 to 241685 and         240800 to 240993;     -   (e) 201188 to 216915, 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793, 215702         to 215746 and 216836 to 216915; or the complements thereof.

The present invention further embodies isolated, purified, and recombinant polypeptides encoded by an sbg1 polynucleotide or gene comprising at least one sbg1 nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the following sbg1 exons: MS1, M1, M692, M862, MS2, M1069, M1090, M 1117, N, N2, Nbis, O, O1, O2, Obis, P, X, Q1, Q, Qbis, R and Rbis.

The invention also encompasses a purified, isolated, or recombinant polypeptides comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 98 or 99% amino acid identity with the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 or a fragment thereof.

Sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 proteins are preferably isolated from human or mammalian tissue samples or expressed from human or mammalian genes. The sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 polypeptides of the invention can be made using routine expression methods known in the art. The polynucleotide encoding the desired polypeptide, is ligated into an expression vector suitable for any convenient host. Both eukaryotic and prokaryotic host systems is used in forming recombinant polypeptides, and a summary of some of the more common systems. The polypeptide is then isolated from lysed cells or from the culture medium and purified to the extent needed for its intended use. Purification is by any technique known in the art, for example, differential extraction, salt fractionation, chromatography, centrifugation, and the like. See, for example, Methods in Enzymology for a variety of methods for purifying proteins.

In addition, shorter protein fragments can be produced by chemical synthesis. Alternatively the proteins of the invention is extracted from cells or tissues of humans or non-human animals. Methods for purifying proteins are known in the art, and include the use of detergents or chaotropic agents to disrupt particles followed by differential extraction and separation of the polypeptides by ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, sedimentation according to density, and gel electrophoresis.

Any sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA or fragment thereof, including the respective cDNA sequences of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26 and 36 to 40 is used to express sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 proteins and polypeptides. The nucleic acid encoding the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or polypeptide to be expressed is operably linked to a promoter in an expression vector using conventional cloning technology. The sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 insert in the expression vector may comprise the full coding sequence for the respective sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a portion thereof. For example, the sbg1 or g35018 derived insert may encode a polypeptide comprising at least 10 consecutive amino acids of the respective sbg1 or g35018 protein of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35 and 41 to 43.

The expression vector is any of the mammalian, yeast, insect or bacterial expression systems known in the art. Commercially available vectors and expression systems are available from a variety of suppliers including Genetics Institute (Cambridge, Mass.), Stratagene (La Jolla, Calif.), Promega (Madison, Wis.), and Invitrogen (San Diego, Calif.). If desired, to enhance expression and facilitate proper protein folding, the codon context and codon pairing of the sequence is optimized for the particular expression organism in which the expression vector is introduced, as explained by Hatfield, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,082,767, the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.

In one embodiment, the entire coding sequence of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA through the poly A signal of the cDNA are operably linked to a promoter in the expression vector. Alternatively, if the nucleic acid encoding a portion of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein lacks a methionine to serve as the initiation site, an initiating methionine can be introduced next to the first codon of the nucleic acid using conventional techniques. Similarly, if the insert from the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA lacks a poly A signal, this sequence can be added to the construct by, for example, splicing out the Poly A signal from pSG5 (Stratagene) using BglI and SalI restriction endonuclease enzymes and incorporating it into the mammalian expression vector pXT1 (Stratagene). pXT1 contains the LTRs and a portion of the gag gene from Moloney Murine Leukemia Virus. The position of the LTRs in the construct allow efficient stable transfection. The vector includes the Herpes Simplex Thymidine Kinase promoter and the selectable neomycin gene. The nucleic acid encoding the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a portion thereof is obtained by PCR from a bacterial vector containing the a nucleotide sequence of an exon of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene as described herein and in SEQ ID No 1, or from an sbg1 or g35018 cDNA comprising a nucleic acid of SEQ ID No 2 to 26 and 36 to 40 using oligonucleotide primers complementary to the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 nucleic acid or portion thereof and containing restriction endonuclease sequences for Pst I incorporated into the 5′ primer and BglII at the 5′ end of the corresponding cDNA 3′ primer, taking care to ensure that the sequence encoding the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a portion thereof is positioned properly with respect to the poly A signal. The purified fragment obtained from the resulting PCR reaction is digested with PstI, blunt ended with an exonuclease, digested with BglII, purified and ligated to pXT1, now containing a poly A signal and digested with BglII.

The ligated product is transfected into mouse NIH 3T3 cells using Lipofectin (Life Technologies, Inc., Grand Island, N.Y.) under conditions outlined in the product specification. Positive transfectants are selected after growing the transfected cells in 600 ug/ml G418 (Sigma, St. Louis, Mo.).

Alternatively, the nucleic acids encoding the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a portion thereof is cloned into pED6dpc2 (Genetics Institute, Cambridge, Mass.). The resulting pED6dpc2 constructs is transfected into a suitable host cell, such as COS I cells. Methotrexate resistant cells are selected and expanded.

The above procedures may also be used to express a mutant sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein responsible for a detectable phenotype or a portion thereof.

The expressed proteins are purified using conventional purification techniques such as ammonium sulfate precipitation or chromatographic separation based on size or charge. The protein encoded by the nucleic acid insert may also be purified using standard immunochromatography techniques. In such procedures, a solution containing the expressed sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or portion thereof, such as a cell extract, is applied to a column having antibodies against the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or portion thereof is attached to the chromatography matrix. The expressed protein is allowed to bind the immunochromatography column. Thereafter, the column is washed to remove non-specifically bound proteins. The specifically bound expressed protein is then released from the column and recovered using standard techniques.

To confirm expression of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a portion thereof, the proteins expressed from host cells containing an expression vector containing an insert encoding the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a portion thereof can be compared to the proteins expressed in host cells containing the expression vector without an insert. The presence of a band in samples from cells containing the expression vector with an insert which is absent in samples from cells containing the expression vector without an insert indicates that the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a portion thereof is being expressed. Generally, the band will have the mobility expected for the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or portion thereof. However, the band may have a mobility different than that expected as a result of modifications such as glycosylation, ubiquitination, or enzymatic cleavage.

Antibodies capable of specifically recognizing the expressed sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a portion thereof are described below.

If antibody production is not possible, the nucleic acids encoding the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a portion thereof is incorporated into expression vectors designed for use in purification schemes employing chimeric polypeptides. In such strategies the nucleic acid encoding the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a portion thereof is inserted in frame with the gene encoding the other half of the chimera. The other half of the chimera is β-globin or a nickel binding polypeptide encoding sequence. A chromatography matrix having antibody to β-globin or nickel attached thereto is then used to purify the chimeric protein. Protease cleavage sites is engineered between the β-globin gene or the nickel binding polypeptide and the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or portion thereof. Thus, the two polypeptides of the chimera is separated from one another by protease digestion.

One useful expression vector for generating β-globin chimeric proteins is pSG5 (Stratagene), which encodes rabbit β-globin. Intron II of the rabbit β-globin gene facilitates splicing of the expressed transcript, and the polyadenylation signal incorporated into the construct increases the level of expression. These techniques are well known to those skilled in the art of molecular biology. Standard methods are published in methods texts such as Davis et al., (1986) and many of the methods are available from Stratagene, Life Technologies, Inc., or Promega. Polypeptide may additionally be produced from the construct using in vitro translation systems such as the In vitro Express™ Translation Kit (Stratagene).

Antibodies that Bind sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 Polypeptides of the Invention

Any sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide or whole protein may be used to generate antibodies capable of specifically binding to an expressed sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 protein or fragments thereof.

For an antibody composition to specifically bind to an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, it must demonstrate at least a 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 50%, or 100% greater binding affinity for full length sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein than for any full length protein in an ELISA, RIA, or other antibody-based binding assay. For an antibody composition to specifically bind to a variant sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, it must demonstrate at least a 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 50%, or 100% greater binding affinity for the respective full length variant sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein than for the respective reference sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 full length protein in an ELISA, RIA, or other antibody-based binding assay.

One antibody composition of the invention is capable of specifically binding or specifically binds to the respective sbg1 or g35018 proteins of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35 and 41 to 43. Other antibody compositions of the invention are capable of specifically binding or specifically bind to an sbg1, sbg2 or g35018 protein variant. Optionally said sbg1 protein variant may be a natural variant provided in Tables 5d or 5e.

In one embodiment, the invention concerns antibody compositions, either polyclonal or monoclonal, capable of selectively binding, or selectively bind to an epitope-containing a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide.

The invention also concerns a purified or isolated antibody capable of specifically binding to a mutated sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or to a fragment or variant thereof comprising an epitope of the mutated sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein. In another preferred embodiment, the present invention concerns an antibody capable of binding to a polypeptide comprising at least 10 consecutive amino acids of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein and including at least one of the amino acids which can be encoded by the trait causing mutations.

In a preferred embodiment, the invention concerns the use in the manufacture of antibodies of a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of any of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35 and 41 to 43.

Non-human animals, and more particularly non-human mammals and non-human primates, whether wild-type or transgenic, which express a different species of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 than the one to which antibody binding is desired, and animals which do not express sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 (i.e. an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 knock out animal as described in herein) are particularly useful for preparing antibodies. sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 knock out animals will recognize all or most of the exposed regions of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein as foreign antigens, and therefore produce antibodies with a wider array of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 epitopes. Moreover, smaller polypeptides with only 10 to 30 amino acids may be useful in obtaining specific binding to any one of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 proteins. In addition, the humoral immune system of animals which produce a species of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 that resembles the antigenic sequence will preferentially recognize the differences between the animal's native sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 species and the antigen sequence, and produce antibodies to these unique sites in the antigen sequence. Such a technique will be particularly useful in obtaining antibodies that specifically bind to any one of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 proteins.

Antibody preparations prepared according to either protocol are useful in quantitative immunoassays which determine concentrations of antigen-bearing substances in biological samples; they are also used semi-quantitatively or qualitatively to identify the presence of antigen in a biological sample.

The antibodies may also be used in therapeutic compositions for killing cells expressing the protein or reducing the levels of the protein in the body. Thus in one embodiment, the invention comprises the use of an antibody capable of specifically recognizing sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 for the treatment of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder.

The antibodies of the invention may be labeled by any one of the radioactive, fluorescent or enzymatic labels known in the art.

Consequently, the invention is also directed to a method for detecting specifically the presence of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide according to the invention in a biological sample, said method comprising the following steps:

-   -   a) bringing into contact the biological sample with a polyclonal         or monoclonal antibody that specifically binds an sbg1, g34665,         sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide, or to a peptide fragment or         variant thereof; and     -   b) detecting the antigen-antibody complex formed.

The invention also concerns a diagnostic kit for detecting in vitro the presence of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide according to the present invention in a biological sample, wherein said kit comprises:

-   -   a) a polyclonal or monoclonal antibody that specifically binds         an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide, or to a         peptide fragment or variant thereof, optionally labeled;     -   b) a reagent allowing the detection of the antigen-antibody         complexes formed, said reagent carrying optionally a label, or         being able to be recognized itself by a labeled reagent, more         particularly in the case when the above-mentioned monoclonal or         polyclonal antibody is not labeled by itself.

Biallelic Markers of the Inventions

Advantages of the Biallelic Markers of the Present Invention

The biallelic marker of the inventions of the present invention offer a number of important advantages over other genetic markers such as RFLP (Restriction fragment length polymorphism) and VNTR (Variable Number of Tandem Repeats) markers.

The first generation of markers, were RFLPs, which are variations that modify the length of a restriction fragment. But methods used to identify and to type RFLPs are relatively wasteful of materials, effort, and time. The second generation of genetic markers were VNTRs, which can be categorized as either minisatellites or microsatellites. Minisatellites are tandemly repeated DNA sequences present in units of 5-50 repeats which are distributed along regions of the human chromosomes ranging from 0.1 to 20 kilobases in length. Since they present many possible alleles, their informative content is very high. Minisatellites are scored by performing Southern blots to identify the number of tandem repeats present in a nucleic acid sample from the individual being tested. However, there are only 10⁴ potential VNTRs that can be typed by Southern blotting. Moreover, both RFLP and VNTR markers are costly and time-consuming to develop and assay in large numbers.

Single nucleotide polymorphism or biallelic markers can be used in the same manner as RFLPs and VNTRs but offer several advantages. Single nucleotide polymorphisms are densely spaced in the human genome and represent the most frequent type of variation. An estimated number of more than 10⁷ sites are scattered along the 3×10⁹ base pairs of the human genome. Therefore, single nucleotide polymorphism occur at a greater frequency and with greater uniformity than RFLP or VNTR markers which means that there is a greater probability that such a marker will be found in close proximity to a genetic locus of interest. Single nucleotide polymorphisms are less variable than VNTR markers but are mutationally more stable.

Also, the different forms of a characterized single nucleotide polymorphism, such as the biallelic markers of the present invention, are often easier to distinguish and can therefore be typed easily on a routine basis. Biallelic markers have single nucleotide based alleles and they have only two common alleles, which allows highly parallel detection and automated scoring. The biallelic markers of the present invention offer the possibility of rapid, high-throughput genotyping of a large number of individuals.

Biallelic markers are densely spaced in the genome, sufficiently informative and can be assayed in large numbers. The combined effects of these advantages make biallelic markers extremely valuable in genetic studies. Biallelic markers can be used in linkage studies in families, in allele sharing methods, in linkage disequilibrium studies in populations, in association studies of case-control populations. An important aspect of the present invention is that biallelic markers allow association studies to be performed to identify genes involved in complex traits. Association studies examine the frequency of marker alleles in unrelated case- and control-populations and are generally employed in the detection of polygenic or sporadic traits. Association studies may be conducted within the general population and are not limited to studies performed on related individuals in affected families (linkage studies). Biallelic markers in different genes can be screened in parallel for direct association with disease or response to a treatment. This multiple gene approach is a powerful tool for a variety of human genetic studies as it provides the necessary statistical power to examine the synergistic effect of multiple genetic factors on a particular phenotype, drug response, sporadic trait, or disease state with a complex genetic etiology.

Polymorphisms, Biallelic Markers And Polynucleotides Comprising Them

Polynucleotides of the Present Invention

In one aspect, the invention concerns biallelic markers associated with schizophrenia. The invention comprises chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic markers, region D-related biallelic markers, sbg1-related biallelic markers, g34665-related biallelic markers, sbg2-related biallelic markers, g35017-related biallelic markers and g35018-related biallelic markers. The markers and polymorphisms are generally referred to herein as A1, A2, A3 and so on. The polymorphisms and biallelic markers of the invention comprise the biallelic markers designated A1 to A360 in Table 6b. The polymorphisms of the invention also comprise the polymorphisms designated A361 to A489 in Table 6c. Also included are biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium with the biallelic markers of the invention.

Details of chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic markers on the subregions designated Region D including subregions thereof designated Regions D1, D2, D3 and D4, and adjacent regions referred to as Region E and Region G are shown below and in Tables 6B and 6c. Regions D, G and E of the chromosome 13q31-q33 locus are also shown in FIG. 2. References to the corresponding SEQ ID number, to alternative marker designations, and positions of the sequence features within the SEQ ID are given in Tables 6b and 6c for biallelic markers A1 to A242 and 361 to 489 located in Region D3 and D4. Further biallelic markers from the group designated A243 to A360 in Tables 6b and 6c are located in Regions D1, D2, G and E. The relative positions of biallelic markers on Region G and E are further detailed below in Table 5g; the relative positions of biallelic markers on Region D1 and D2 are further detailed below in Table 5h. TABLE 5g Biallelic Region E biallelic Biallelic Region G biallelic marker markers Position on contig marker markers Position on contig A311 99-26171-71 20778 A359 99-27912-272 153458 A333 99-26173-470 22456 A322 99-26234-336 210058 A308 99-26166-257 24731 A267 99-15672-166 266449 A310 99-26169-211 31620 A283 99-25917-115 268222 A312 99-26183-156 35869 A266 99-15668-139 278427 A309 99-26167-278 43220 A282 99-25906-131 291272 A78 99-20978-89 51405 A265 99-15665-398 306920 A275 99-20983-48 65076 A264 99-15664-185 311251 A272 99-20977-72 70519 A268 99-15682-318 315770 A274 99-20981-300 94914 A271 99-20933-81 342868 A327 99-6080-99 134366 A323 99-26238-186 347179 A325 99-5912-49 149345 A302 99-26146-264 349864 A252 99-15229-412 154582 A321 99-26233-275 362053 A276 99-22310-148 161605 A279 99-25869-182 362236 A254 99-15232-291 162153 A317 99-26222-149 391049 A247 99-14021-108 164660 A301 99-26138-193 400078 A300 99-26126-498 170445 A318 99-26223-225 405361 A329 99-7337-204 198083 A319 99-26225-148 416529 A243  8-94-252 206618 A284 99-25924-215 421281 A253 99-15231-219 212050 A320 99-26228-172 427201 A246  8-98-68 213871 A280 99-25881-275 435974 A245  8-97-98 215017 A281 99-25897-264 440452 A326 99-6012-220 216597 A337 99-26769-256 471739 A255 99-15239-377 223699 A338 99-26772-268 483511 A244  8-95-43 236882 A339 99-26776-209 494003 A328 99-7308-157 239008 A340 99-26779-437 505947 A248 99-14364-415 255729 A341 99-26781-25 514635 A342 99-26782-300 516212 A343 99-26783-81 519187 A344 99-26787-96 529412 A345 99-26789-201 540145 A316 99-26201-267 584018 A315 99-26191-58 601044 A314 99-26190-20 602591 A313 99-26189-164 603145 A277 99-25029-241 727473 A336 99-26559-315 740802

TABLE 5h Biallelic Region D1 biallelic Position on Biallelic Region D2 biallelic Position on marker markers contig marker markers contig A357 99-27365/421 48742 A304 99-26150/276 168065 A356 99-27361/181 54932 A307 99-26156/290 173255 A257 99-15253/382 56599 A306 99-26154/107 175557 A355 99-27360/142 57371 A305 99-26153/44 177194 A251 99-15065/85 61002 A298 99-25985/194 186447 A346 99-27297/280 61855 A292 99-25974/143 190018 A262 99-15355/150 62749 A335 99-26284/394 193065 A324 99-5873/159 64700 A303 99-26147/396 196922 A261 99-15280/432 76977 A285 99-25950/121 205288 A347 99-27306/108 92355 A294 99-25978/166 215025 A249 99-15056/99 93854 A293 99-25977/311 216394 A258 99-15256/392 98336 A291 99-25972/317 224712 A349 99-27323/372 100260 A297 99-25984/312 230966 A260 99-15261/202 101114 A287 99-25965/399 236799 A250 99-15063/155 105587 A286 99-25961/376 244955 A259 99-15258/337 110395 A288 99-25966/241 254680 A348 99-27312/58 117521 A350 99-27335/191 25486 A351 99-27345/189 134904 A289 99-25967/57 257662 A352 99-27349/267 138974 A290 99-25969/200 261166 A353 99-27352/197 141065 A296 99-25980/173 261957 A354 99-27353/105 141494 A295 99-25979/93 263848 A299 99-25989/398 269515 A334 99-26267/524 275710

The polynucleotide of the invention may consist of, consist essentially of, or comprise a contiguous span of nucleotides of a sequence from any of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 as well as sequences which are complementary thereto (“complements thereof”). The “contiguous span” may be at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides in length, to the extent that a contiguous span of these lengths is consistent with the lengths of the particular Sequence ID.

The present invention encompasses polynucleotides for use as primers and probes in the methods of the invention. These polynucleotides may consist of, consist essentially of, or comprise a contiguous span of nucleotides of a sequence from any of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 as well as sequences which are complementary thereto (“complements thereof”). The “contiguous span” may be at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides in length, to the extent that a contiguous span of these lengths is consistent with the lengths of the particular Sequence ID. It should be noted that the polynucleotides of the present invention are not limited to having the exact flanking sequences surrounding the polymorphic bases which, are enumerated in the Sequence Listing. Rather, it will be appreciated that the flanking sequences surrounding the biallelic markers and other polymorphisms of the invention, or any of the primers of probes of the invention which, are more distant from the markers, may be lengthened or shortened to any extent compatible with their intended use and the present invention specifically contemplates such sequences. It will be appreciated that the polynucleotides of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 may be of any length compatible with their intended use. Also the flanking regions outside of the contiguous span need not be homologous to native flanking sequences which actually occur in human subjects. The addition of any nucleotide sequence, which is compatible with the nucleotides intended use is specifically contemplated. The contiguous span may optionally include the biallelic markers of the invention in said sequence. Biallelic markers generally comprise a polymorphism at one single base position. Each biallelic marker therefore corresponds to two forms of a polynucleotide sequence which, when compared with one another, present a nucleotide modification at one position. Usually, the nucleotide modification involves the substitution of one nucleotide for another. Optionally allele 1 or allele 2 of the biallelic markers disclosed in Table 6b may be specified as being present at the biallelic marker of the invention. The contiguous span may optionally include a nucleotide at a polymorphism position described in Table 6c, including single nucleotide substitutions, deletions as well as multiple nucleotide deletions. The polymorphisms of Table 6c have not been validated as biallelic markers, but are expected to be mostly biallelic and may also be referred to as biallelic markers herein. Optionally, allele I or allele 2 of the polymorphisms of Table 6c may be specified as being present at the polymorphism of the invention. Preferred polynucleotides may consist of, consist essentially of, or comprise a contiguous span of nucleotides of a sequence from SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 as well as sequences which are complementary thereto. The “contiguous span” may be at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides in length, to the extent that a contiguous span of these lengths is consistent with the lengths of the particular Sequence ID.

A preferred probe or primer comprises a nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide selected from the group of the nucleotide sequences of P1 to P360 and the complementary sequence thereto, B1 to B229, C1 to C229, D1 to D360, E1 to E360.

The invention also relates to polynucleotides that hybridize, under conditions of high or intermediate stringency, to a polynucleotide of any of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 as well as sequences, which are complementary thereto. Preferably such polynucleotides are at least 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides in length, to the extent that a polynucleotide of these lengths is consistent with the lengths of the particular Sequence ID. Preferred polynucleotides comprise a polymorphism of the invention. Optionally either allele 1 or allele 2 of the polymorphism disclosed in Table 6c may be specified as being present at the polymorphism of the invention. Particularly preferred polynucleotides comprise a biallelic marker of the invention. Optionally either allele I or allele 2 of the biallelic markers disclosed in Table 6b may be specified as being present at the biallelic marker of the invention. Conditions of high stringency are further described herein.

The primers of the present invention may be designed from the disclosed sequences for any method known in the art. A preferred set of primers is fashioned such that the 3′ end of the contiguous span of identity with the sequences of any of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 is present at the 3′ end of the primer. Such a configuration allows the 3′ end of the primer to hybridize to a selected nucleic acid sequence and dramatically increases the efficiency of the primer for amplification or sequencing reactions. In a preferred set of primers the contiguous span is found in one of the sequences described in Table 6a. Allele specific primers may be designed such that a biallelic marker or other polymorphism of the invention is at the 3′ end of the contiguous span and the contiguous span is present at the 3′ end of the primer. Such allele specific primers tend to selectively prime an amplification or sequencing reaction so long as they are used with a nucleic acid sample that contains one of the two alleles present at said marker. The 3′ end of primer of the invention may be located within or at least 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 50, 100, 250, 500, or 1000 nucleotides upstream of a biallelic marker of the invention in said sequence or at any other location which is appropriate for their intended use in sequencing, amplification or the location of novel sequences or markers. Primers with their 3′ ends located 1 nucleotide upstream of an biallelic marker of the invention have a special utility as microsequencing assays. Preferred microsequencing primers are described in Table 6d.

The probes of the present invention may be designed from the disclosed sequences for any method known in the art, particularly methods which allow for testing if a particular sequence or marker disclosed herein is present. A preferred set of probes may be designed for use in the hybridization assays of the invention in any manner known in the art such that they selectively bind to one allele of a biallelic marker or other polymorphism, but not the other under any particular set of assay conditions. Preferred hybridization probes may consists of, consist essentially of, or comprise a contiguous span which ranges in length from 8, 10, 12, 15, 18 or 20 to 25, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, or 80 nucleotides, or be specified as being 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, or 50 nucleotides in length and including an biallelic marker or other polymorphism of the invention in said sequence. In a preferred embodiment, either of allele 1 or 2 disclosed in Table 6b or 6c may be specified as being present at the biallelic marker site. In another preferred embodiment, said biallelic marker may be within 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 nucleotides of the center of the hybridization probe or at the center of said probe.

In one embodiment the invention encompasses isolated, purified, and recombinant polynucleotides comprising, consisting of, or consisting essentially of a contiguous span of 8 to 50 nucleotides of any one of SEQ ID Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 and the complement thereof, wherein said span includes a polymorphism of the invention, a chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker in said sequence; optionally, wherein said polymorphism, chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A1 to A489, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said chromosome 13-q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A246, A250, A251, A253, A255, A259, A266, A268 to A232, A328 to A360 and 361 to 489; optionally, wherein said chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A242 and 361 to 489, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A1108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A242, A250 to A251, A259, A269 to A270, A278, A285 to A299, A303 to A307, A330, A334 to A335 and A346 to 357 and and 361 to 489, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said contiguous span is 18 to 35 nucleotides in length and said biallelic marker is within 4 nucleotides of the center of said polynucleotide; optionally, wherein said polynucleotide consists of said contiguous span and said contiguous span is 25 nucleotides in length and said biallelic marker is at the center of said polynucleotide; optionally, wherein the 3′ end of said contiguous span is present at the 3′ end of said polynucleotide; and optionally, wherein the 3′ end of said contiguous span is located at the 3′ end of said polynucleotide and said biallelic marker is present at the 3′ end of said polynucleotide. In a preferred embodiment, said probes comprise, consists of, or consists essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences: P1 to P360 and the complementary sequences thereto.

In another embodiment the invention encompasses isolated, purified and recombinant polynucleotides comprising, consisting of, or consisting essentially of a contiguous span of 8 to 50 nucleotides of any one of SEQ ID Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, or the complement thereof, wherein the 3′ end of said contiguous span is located at the 3′ end of said polynucleotide, and wherein the 3′ end of said polynucleotide is located within 20 nucleotides upstream of a polymorphism of the invention, chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker in said sequence; optionally, wherein said chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A1 to A489, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said a chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A246, A250, A25, A253, A255, A259, A266, A268 to A232, A328 to A360, and and 361 to 489, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A242 and 361 to 489; optionally, wherein said chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of optionally, wherein said chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A242, A250 to A251, A259, A269 to A270, A278, A285 to A299, A303 to A307, A330, A334 to A335, A346 to 357 and 361 to 489, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein the 3′ end of said polynucleotide is located I nucleotide upstream of said chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker; and optionally, wherein said polynucleotide comprises, consists of, or consists essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences: D1 to D360 and E1 to E360.

In a further embodiment, the invention encompasses isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising, consisting of, or consisting essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences: B1 to B229 and C1 to C229.

In an additional embodiment, the invention encompasses polynucleotides for use in hybridization assays, sequencing assays, and enzyme-based mismatch detection assays for determining the identity of the nucleotide at a chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker in any of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or the complement thereof, as well as polynucleotides for use in amplifying segments of nucleotides comprising a polymophism of the invention, a chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker in any of SEQ ID Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or the complement thereof; optionally, wherein said chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A1 to A489, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A246, A250, A251, A253, A255, A259, A266, A268 to A232, A328 to A360 and 361 to 489, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A I to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A242, A250 to A251, A259, A269 to A270, A278, A285 to A299, A303 to A307, A330, A334 to A335 and A346 to 357 and 361 to 489, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; and optionally, wherein chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, region D-related biallelic marker, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A242 and 361 to 489, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith.

These arrays may generally be produced using mechanical synthesis methods or light directed synthesis methods, which incorporate a combination of photolithographic methods and solid phase oligonucleotide synthesis (Fodor et al., Science, 251:767-777, 1991, incorporated herein by reference). The immobilization of arrays of oligonucleotides on solid supports has been rendered possible by the development of a technology generally identified as “Very Large Scale Immobilized Polymer Synthesis” (VLSIPS™) in which, typically, probes are immobilized in a high density array on a solid surface of a chip. Examples of VLSIPS™ technologies are provided in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,143,854 and 5,412,087 and in PCT Publications WO 90/15070, WO 92/10092 and WO 95/11995, each incorporated herein by reference, which describe methods for forming oligonucleotide arrays through techniques such as light-directed synthesis technique. In designing strategies aimed at providing arrays of nucleotides immobilized on solid supports, further presentation strategies were developed to order and display the oligonucleotide arrays on the chips in an attempt to maximize hybridization patterns and sequence information. Examples of such presentation strategies are disclosed in PCT Publications WO 94/12305, WO 94/11530, WO 97/29212 and WO 97/31256, each incorporated herein by reference.

Oligonucleotide arrays may comprise at least one of the sequences selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229; and the sequences complementary thereto or a fragment thereof of at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500, 1000 or 2000 consecutive nucleotides, to the extent that fragments of these lengths is consistent with the lengths of the particular Sequence ID, for determining whether a sample contains one or more alleles of the biallelic markers of the present invention. Oligonucleotide arrays may also comprise at least one of the sequences selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229; and the sequences complementary thereto or a fragment thereof of at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500, 1000 or 2000 consecutive nucleotides, to the extent that fragments of these lengths is consistent with the lengths of the particular Sequence ID, for amplifying one or more alleles of the biallelic markers of Table 6b or polymorphisms of Table 6c. In other embodiments, arrays may also comprise at least one of the sequences selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229; and the sequences complementary thereto or a fragment thereof of at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500, 1000 or 2000 consecutive nucleotides, to the extent that fragments of these lengths is consistent with the lengths of the particular Sequence ID, for conducting microsequencing analyses to determine whether a sample contains one or more alleles of the biallelic markers of the invention. In still further embodiments, the oligonucleotide array may comprise at least one of the sequences selecting from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229; and the sequences complementary thereto or a fragment thereof of at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides in length, to the extent that fragments of these lengths is consistent with the lengths of the particular Sequence ID, for determining whether a sample contains one or more alleles of the polymorphisms and biallelic markers of the present invention.

A further object of the invention relates to an array of nucleic acid sequences comprising either at least one of the sequences selected from the group consisting of P1 to P360, B1 to B229, C1 to C229, D1 to D360 E1 to E360 or the sequences complementary thereto or a fragment thereof of at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, or 40 consecutive nucleotides thereof, or at least one sequence comprising at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20 biallelic markers selected from the group consisting of A1 to A489 or the complements thereof. The invention also pertains to an array of nucleic acid sequences comprising either at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20 of the sequences selected from the group consisting of P1 to P360, B1 to B229, C1 to C229, D1 to D360, E1 to E360 or the sequences complementary thereto or a fragment thereof of at least 8 consecutive nucleotides thereof, or at least two sequences comprising a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A1 to A360 or the complements thereto.

The present invention also encompasses diagnostic kits comprising one or more polynucleotides of the invention, optionally with a portion or all of the necessary reagents and instructions for genotyping a test subject by determining the identity of a nucleotide at an biallelic marker of the invention. The polynucleotides of a kit may optionally be attached to a solid support, or be part of an array or addressable array of polynucleotides. The kit may provide for the determination of the identity of the nucleotide at a marker position by any method known in the art including, but not limited to, a sequencing assay method, a microsequencing assay method, a hybridization assay method, or enzyme-based mismatch detection assay. Optionally such a kit may include instructions for scoring the results of the determination with respect to the test subjects' predisposition to schizophrenia, or likely response to an agent acting on schizophrenia, or chances of suffering from side effects to an agent acting on schizophrenia.

Finally, in any embodiments of the present invention, a biallelic marker may may optionally comprise:

-   -   (a) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         sbg1-related markers A85 to A219, or more preferably a biallelic         marker selected from the group consisting of sbg1-related         markers A85 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177,         A179 to A197 and A199 to A219;     -   (b) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         g34665-related markers A230 to A236;     -   (c) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         sbg2-related markers A79 to A99;     -   (d) the g35017-related marker A41;     -   (e) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         g35018-related markers A1 to A39;     -   (f) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         A239, A227, A198, A228, A223, A107, A218, A270, A75, A62, A65         and A70;     -   (g) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         A48, A60, A61, A62, A65, A70, A75, A76, A80, A107, A108, A198,         A218, A221, A223, A227, A228, A239, A285, A286, A287, A288,         A290, A292, A293, A295, A299 and A304;     -   (h) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         A304, A307, A305, A298, A292, A293, A291, A287, A286, A288,         A289, A290, 99-A295 A299. A241, A239, A228, A227, A223, A221,         A218, A198, A178, 99-24649/186 A108, A107, A80, A75, A70, A65,         and A62; and/or     -   (i) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         A304, A307, A305, A298, A292, A293, A291, A287, A286, A288,         A289, A290, A295 A299, A241, A239, A228, A227, A223, A221, A218,         A198, A178, A108, A107, A80, A76, A75, A70, A65, A62, A61, A60         A48.

Optionally, in any of the embodiments described herein, a Region D- or chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker may be selected from the group consisting of A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A242, A250 to A251, A259, A269 to A270, A278, A285 to A299, A303 to A307, A330, A334 to A335, A346 to 357 and 361 to 489. Optionally, in any of the embodiments described herein, a chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker may be selected from the group consisting of A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A246, A250, A251, A253, A255, A259, A266, A268 to A232 and A328 to A360. A set of said Region D-related biallelic markers or chromosome 13q3′-q33-related biallelic markers may comprise at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 40, 50, 100 or 200 of said biallelic markers, respectively.

Optionally, any of the compositions of methods described herein may specifically exclude at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20 biallelic markers, or all of the biallelic markers selected from the group consisting of: A70, A75, A95, A107, A113, A178, A198, A223, A247 to A249, A252, A254, A256 to A258, A260 to A265, A267, A324 to A328.

Furthermore, in any of the embodiments of the present invention, a set of chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic markers, Region D-related biallelic markers, or sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic markers may comprise at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 40, 50, 100 or 200 of said biallelic markers.

Methods For De Novo Identification Of Biallelic Markers

Any of a variety of methods can be used to screen a genomic fragment for single nucleotide polymorphisms such as differential hybridization with oligonucleotide probes, detection of changes in the mobility measured by gel electrophoresis or direct sequencing of the amplified nucleic acid. A preferred method for identifying biallelic markers involves comparative sequencing of genomic DNA fragments from an appropriate number of unrelated individuals.

In a first embodiment, DNA samples from unrelated individuals are pooled together, following which the genomic DNA of interest is amplified and sequenced. The nucleotide sequences thus obtained are then analyzed to identify significant polymorphisms. One of the major advantages of this method resides in the fact that the pooling of the DNA samples substantially reduces the number of DNA amplification reactions and sequencing reactions, which must be carried out. Moreover, this method is sufficiently sensitive so that a biallelic marker obtained thereby usually demonstrates a sufficient frequency of its less common allele to be useful in conducting association studies. Usually, the frequency of the least common allele of a biallelic marker identified by this method is at least 10%.

In a second embodiment, the DNA samples are not pooled and are therefore amplified and sequenced individually. This method is usually preferred when biallelic markers need to be identified in order to perform association studies within candidate genes. Preferably, highly relevant gene regions such as promoter regions or exon regions may be screened for biallelic markers. A biallelic marker obtained using this method may show a lower degree of informativeness for conducting association studies, e.g. if the frequency of its less frequent allele may be less than about 10%. Such a biallelic marker will however be sufficiently informative to conduct association studies and it will further be appreciated that including less informative biallelic markers in the genetic analysis studies of the present invention, may allow in some cases the direct identification of causal mutations, which may, depending on their penetrance, be rare mutations.

The following is a description of the various parameters of a preferred method used by the inventors for the identification of the biallelic markers of the present invention.

Genomic DNA Samples

The genomic DNA samples from which the biallelic markers of the present invention are generated are preferably obtained from unrelated individuals corresponding to a heterogeneous population of known ethnic background. The number of individuals from whom DNA samples are obtained can vary substantially, preferably from about 10 to about 1000, more preferably from about 50 to about 200 individuals. Usually, DNA samples are collected from at least about 100 individuals in order to have sufficient polymorphic diversity in a given population to identify as many markers as possible and to generate statistically significant results.

As for the source of the genomic DNA to be subjected to analysis, any test sample can be foreseen without any particular limitation. These test samples include biological samples, which can be tested by the methods of the present invention described herein, and include human and animal body fluids such as whole blood, serum, plasma, cerebrospinal fluid, urine, lymph fluids, and various external secretions of the respiratory, intestinal and genitourinary tracts, tears, saliva, milk, white blood cells, myelomas and the like; biological fluids such as cell culture supernatants; fixed tissue specimens including tumor and non-tumor tissue and lymph node tissues; bone marrow aspirates and fixed cell specimens. The preferred source of genomic DNA used in the present invention is from peripheral venous blood of each donor. Techniques to prepare genomic DNA from biological samples are well known to the skilled technician. Details of a preferred embodiment are provided in Example 1. The person skilled in the art can choose to amplify pooled or unpooled DNA samples.

DNA Amplification

The identification of biallelic markers in a sample of genomic DNA may be facilitated through the use of DNA amplification methods. DNA samples can be pooled or unpooled for the amplification step. DNA amplification techniques are well known to those skilled in the art. Various methods to amplify DNA fragments carrying biallelic markers are further described hereinafter herein. The PCR technology is the preferred amplification technique used to identify new biallelic markers.

In a first embodiment, biallelic markers are identified using genomic sequence information generated by the inventors. Genomic DNA fragments, such as the inserts of the BAC clones described above, are sequenced and used to design primers for the amplification of 500 bp fragments. These 500 bp fragments are amplified from genomic DNA and are scanned for biallelic markers. Primers may be designed using the OSP software (Hillier L. and Green P., 1991). All primers may contain, upstream of the specific target bases, a common oligonucleotide tail that serves as a sequencing primer. Those skilled in the art are familiar with primer extensions, which can be used for these purposes.

In another embodiment of the invention, genomic sequences of candidate genes are available in public databases allowing direct screening for biallelic markers. Preferred primers, useful for the amplification of genomic sequences encoding the candidate genes, focus on promoters, exons and splice sites of the genes. A biallelic marker present in these functional regions of the gene have a higher probability to be a causal mutation.

Sequencing of Amplified Genomic DNA and Identification of Single Nucleotide Polymorphisms

The amplification products generated as described above, are then sequenced using any method known and available to the skilled technician. Methods for sequencing DNA using either the dideoxy-mediated method (Sanger method) or the Maxam-Gilbert method are widely known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Such methods are for example disclosed in Maniatis et al. (Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Press, Second Edition, 1989). Alternative approaches include hybridization to high-density DNA probe arrays as described in Chee et al. (Science 274, 610, 1996, incorporated herein by reference).

Preferably, the amplified DNA is subjected to automated dideoxy terminator sequencing reactions using a dye-primer cycle sequencing protocol. The products of the sequencing reactions are run on sequencing gels and the sequences are determined using gel image analysis. The polymorphism search is based on the presence of superimposed peaks in the electrophoresis pattern resulting from different bases occurring at the same position. Because each dideoxy terminator is labeled with a different fluorescent molecule, the two peaks corresponding to a biallelic site present distinct colors corresponding to two different nucleotides at the same position on the sequence. However, the presence of two peaks can be an artifact due to background noise. To exclude such an artifact, the two DNA strands are sequenced and a comparison between the peaks is carried out. In order to be registered as a polymorphic sequence, the polymorphism has to be detected on both strands.

The above procedure permits those amplification products, which contain biallelic markers to be identified. The detection limit for the frequency of biallelic polymorphisms detected by sequencing pools of 100 individuals is approximately 0.1 for the minor allele, as verified by sequencing pools of known allelic frequencies. However, more than 90% of the biallelic polymorphisms detected by the pooling method have a frequency for the minor allele higher than 0.25. Therefore, the biallelic markers selected by this method have a frequency of at least 0.1 for the minor allele and less than 0.9 for the major allele. Preferably at least 0.2 for the minor allele and less than 0.8 for the major allele, more preferably at least 0.3 for the minor allele and less than 0.7 for the major allele, thus a heterozygosity rate higher than 0.18, preferably higher than 0.32, more preferably higher than 0.42.

In another embodiment, biallelic markers are detected by sequencing individual DNA samples, the frequency of the minor allele of such a biallelic marker may be less than 0.1.

Validation of the Biallelic Markers of the Present Invention

The polymorphisms are evaluated for their usefulness as genetic markers by validating that both alleles are present in a population. Validation of the biallelic markers is accomplished by genotyping a group of individuals by a method of the invention and demonstrating that both alleles are present. Microsequencing is a preferred method of genotyping alleles. The validation by genotyping step may be performed on individual samples derived from each individual in the group or by genotyping a pooled sample derived from more than one individual. The group can be as small as one individual if that individual is heterozygous for the allele in question. Preferably the group contains at least three individuals, more preferably the group contains five or six individuals, so that a single validation test will be more likely to result in the validation of more of the biallelic markers that are being tested. It should be noted, however, that when the validation test is performed on a small group it may result in a false negative result if as a result of sampling error none of the individuals tested carries one of the two alleles. Thus, the validation process is less useful in demonstrating that a particular initial result is an artifact, than it is at demonstrating that there is a bona fide biallelic marker at a particular position in a sequence. All of the genotyping, haplotyping, association, and interaction study methods of the invention may optionally be performed solely with validated biallelic markers.

Evaluation of the Frequency of the Biallelic Markers of the Present Invention

The validated biallelic markers are further evaluated for their usefulness as genetic markers by determining the frequency of the least common allele at the biallelic marker site. The determination of the least common allele is accomplished by genotyping a group of individuals by a method of the invention and demonstrating that both alleles are present. This determination of frequency by genotyping step may be performed on individual samples derived from each individual in the group or by genotyping a pooled sample derived from more than one individual. The group must be large enough to be representative of the population as a whole. Preferably the group contains at least 20 individuals, more preferably the group contains at least 50 individuals, most preferably the group contains at least 100 individuals. Of course the larger the group the greater the accuracy of the frequency determination because of reduced sampling error. A biallelic marker wherein the frequency of the less common allele is 30% or more is termed a “high quality biallelic marker.” All of the genotyping, haplotyping, association, and interaction study methods of the invention may optionally be performed solely with high quality biallelic markers.

Another embodiment of the invention comprises methods of estimating the frequency of an allele in a population comprising genotyping individuals from said population for a 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker and determining the proportional representation of said biallelic marker in said population. In addition, the methods of estimating the frequency of an allele in a population encompass methods with any further limitation described in this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or in any combination: Optionally, said 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker may be in a sequence selected individually or in any combination from the group consisting of SEQ Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229; and the complements thereof; optionally, said 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker may be selected from the biallelic markers described in Table 6b or 6c; optionally, determining the frequency of a biallelic marker allele in a population may be accomplished by determining the identity of the nucleotides for both copies of said biallelic marker present in the genome of each individual in said population and calculating the proportional representation of said nucleotide at said 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker for the population; optionally, determining the frequency of a biallelic marker allele in a population may be accomplished by performing a genotyping method on a pooled biological sample derived from a representative number of individuals, or each individual, in said population, and calculating the proportional amount of said nucleotide compared with the total.

Methods Of Genotyping an Individual for Biallelic Markers

Methods are provided to genotype a biological sample for one or more biallelic markers of the present invention, all of which may be performed in vitro. Such methods of genotyping comprise determining the identity of a nucleotide at an biallelic marker of the invention by any method known in the art. These methods find use in genotyping case-control populations in association studies as well as individuals in the context of detection of alleles of biallelic markers which, are known to be associated with a given trait, in which case both copies of the biallelic marker present in individual's genome are determined so that an individual may be classified as homozygous or heterozygous for a particular allele.

These genotyping methods can be performed nucleic acid samples derived from a single individual or pooled DNA samples.

Genotyping can be performed using similar methods as those described above for the identification of the biallelic markers, or using other genotyping methods such as those further described below. In preferred embodiments, the comparison of sequences of amplified genomic fragments from different individuals is used to identify new biallelic markers whereas microsequencing is used for genotyping known biallelic markers in diagnostic and association study applications.

Another embodiment of the invention encompasses methods of genotyping a biological sample comprising determining the identity of a nucleotide at a 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker. In addition, the genotyping methods of the invention encompass methods with any further limitation described in this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or in any combination: Optionally, said 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker may be in a sequence selected individually or in any combination from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, and the complements thereof; optionally, said 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker may be selected individually or in any combination from the biallelic markers described in Table 6b and 6c; optionally, said method further comprises determining the identity of a second nucleotide at said biallelic marker, wherein said first nucleotide and second nucleotide are not base paired (by Watson & Crick base pairing) to one another; optionally, said biological sample is derived from a single individual or subject; optionally, said method is performed in vitro; optionally, said biallelic marker is determined for both copies of said biallelic marker present in said individual's genome; optionally, said biological sample is derived from multiple subjects or individuals; optionally, said method further comprises amplifying a portion of said sequence comprising the biallelic marker prior to said determining step; optionally, wherein said amplifying is performed by PCR, LCR, or replication of a recombinant vector comprising an origin of replication and said portion in a host cell; optionally, wherein said determining is performed by a hybridization assay, sequencing assay, microsequencing assay, or an enzyme-based mismatch detection assay.

Source of DNA for Genotyping

Any source of nucleic acids, in purified or non-purified form, can be utilized as the starting nucleic acid, provided it contains or is suspected of containing the specific nucleic acid sequence desired. DNA or RNA may be extracted from cells, tissues, body fluids and the like as described herein. While nucleic acids for use in the genotyping methods of the invention can be derived from any mammalian source, the test subjects and individuals from which nucleic acid samples are taken are generally understood to be human.

Amplification of DNA Fragments Comprising Biallelic Markers

Methods and polynucleotides are provided to amplify a segment of nucleotides comprising one or more biallelic marker of the present invention. It will be appreciated that amplification of DNA fragments comprising biallelic markers may be used in various methods and for various purposes and is not restricted to genotyping. Nevertheless, many genotyping methods, although not all, require the previous amplification of the DNA region carrying the biallelic marker of interest. Such methods specifically increase the concentration or total number of sequences that span the biallelic marker or include that site and sequences located either distal or proximal to it. Diagnostic assays may also rely on amplification of DNA segments carrying a biallelic marker of the present invention.

Amplification of DNA may be achieved by any method known in the art. The established PCR (polymerase chain reaction) method or by developments thereof or alternatives. Amplification methods which can be utilized herein include but are not limited to Ligase Chain Reaction (LCR) as described in EP A 320 308 and EP A 439 182, Gap LCR (Wolcott, M. J.), the so-called “NASBA” or “3SR” technique described in Guatelli J. C. et al. (1990) and in Compton J. (1991), Q-beta amplification as described in EP A 4544 610, strand displacement amplification as described in Walker et al. (1996) and EP A 684 315 and, target mediated amplification as described in PCT Publication WO 9322461. The disclosures of all of these publications are incorporated herein by reference

LCR and Gap LCR are exponential amplification techniques, both depend on DNA ligase to join adjacent primers annealed to a DNA molecule. In Ligase Chain Reaction (LCR), probe pairs are used which include two primary (first and second) and two secondary (third and fourth) probes, all of which are employed in molar excess to target. The first probe hybridizes to a first segment of the target strand and the second probe hybridizes to a second segment of the target strand, the first and second segments being contiguous so that the primary probes abut one another in 5′ phosphate-3′ hydroxyl relationship, and so that a ligase can covalently fuse or ligate the two probes into a fused product. In addition, a third (secondary) probe can hybridize to a portion of the first probe and a fourth (secondary) probe can hybridize to a portion of the second probe in a similar abutting fashion. Of course, if the target is initially double stranded, the secondary probes also will hybridize to the target complement in the first instance. Once the ligated strand of primary probes is separated from the target strand, it will hybridize with the third and fourth probes which can be ligated to form a complementary, secondary ligated product. It is important to realize that the ligated products are functionally equivalent to either the target or its complement. By repeated cycles of hybridization and ligation, amplification of the target sequence is achieved. A method for multiplex LCR has also been described (WO 9320227, incorporated herein by reference). Gap LCR (GLCR) is a version of LCR where the probes are not adjacent but are separated by 2 to 3 bases.

For amplification of mRNAs, it is within the scope of the present invention to reverse transcribe mRNA into cDNA followed by polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR); or, to use a single enzyme for both steps as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,322,770 or, to use Asymmetric Gap LCR (RT-AGLCR) as described by Marshall R. L. et al. (1994), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. AGLCR is a modification of GLCR that allows the amplification of RNA.

Some of these amplification methods are particularly suited for the detection of single nucleotide polymorphisms and allow the simultaneous amplification of a target sequence and the identification of the polymorphic nucleotide as it is further described herein.

The PCR technology is the preferred amplification technique used in the present invention. A variety of PCR techniques are familiar to those skilled in the art. For a review of PCR technology, see Molecular Cloning to Genetic Engineering White, B. A. Ed. (1997) and the publication entitled “PCR Methods and Applications” (1991, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press). In each of these PCR procedures, PCR primers on either side of the nucleic acid sequences to be amplified are added to a suitably prepared nucleic acid sample along with dNTPs and a thermostable polymerase such as Taq polymerase, Pfu polymerase, or Vent polymerase. The nucleic acid in the sample is denatured and the PCR primers are specifically hybridized to complementary nucleic acid sequences in the sample. The hybridized primers are extended. Thereafter, another cycle of denaturation, hybridization, and extension is initiated. The cycles are repeated multiple times to produce an amplified fragment containing the nucleic acid sequence between the primer sites. PCR has further been described in several patents including U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,683,195, 4,683,202 and 4,965,188, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.

Primers can be prepared by any suitable method. As for example, direct chemical synthesis by a method such as the phosphodiester method of Narang S. A. et al. (1979), the phosphodiester method of Brown E. L. et al. (1979), the diethylphosphoramidite method of Beaucage et al. (1981) and the solid support method described in EP 0 707 592.

In some embodiments the present invention provides primers for amplifying a DNA fragment containing one or more biallelic markers of the present invention. It will be appreciated that the primers listed are merely exemplary and that any other set of primers which produce amplification products containing one or more biallelic markers of the present invention.

The spacing of the primers determines the length of the segment to be amplified. In the context of the present invention amplified segments carrying biallelic markers can range in size from at least about 25 bp to 35 kbp. Amplification fragments from 25-3000 bp are typical, fragments from 50-1000 bp are preferred and fragments from 100-600 bp are highly preferred. It will be appreciated that amplification primers for the biallelic markers may be any sequence which allow the specific amplification of any DNA fragment carrying the markers. Amplification primers may be labeled or immobilized on a solid support as described in the section titled “Oligonucleotide Probes and Primers”.

Methods of Genotyping DNA Samples for Biallelic Markers

Any method known in the art can be used to identify the nucleotide present at a biallelic marker site. Since the biallelic marker allele to be detected has been identified and specified in the present invention, detection will prove simple for one of ordinary skill in the art by employing any of a number of techniques. Many genotyping methods require the previous amplification of the DNA region carrying the biallelic marker of interest. While the amplification of target or signal is often preferred at present, ultrasensitive detection methods which do not require amplification are also encompassed by the present genotyping methods. Methods well-known to those skilled in the art that can be used to detect biallelic polymorphisms include methods such as, conventional dot blot analyzes, single strand conformational polymorphism analysis (SSCP) described by Orita et al. (1989), denaturing gradient gel electrophoresis (DGGE), heteroduplex analysis, mismatch cleavage detection, and other conventional techniques as described in Sheffield, V. C. et al. (1991), White et al. (1992), Grompe, M. et al. (1989) and Grompe, M. (1993). Another method for determining the identity of the nucleotide present at a particular polymorphic site employs a specialized exonuclease-resistant nucleotide derivative as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,656,127. The disclosures of all of the above publications are incorporated herein by reference

Preferred methods involve directly determining the identity of the nucleotide present at a biallelic marker site by sequencing assay, enzyme-based mismatch detection assay, or hybridization assay. The following is a description of some preferred methods. A highly preferred method is the microsequencing technique. The term “sequencing assay” is used herein to refer to polymerase extension of duplex primer/template complexes and includes both traditional sequencing and microsequencing.

1) Sequencing Assays

The nucleotide present at a polymorphic site can be determined by sequencing methods. In a preferred embodiment, DNA samples are subjected to PCR amplification before sequencing as described above. DNA sequencing methods are described in herein. Preferably, the amplified DNA is subjected to automated dideoxy terminator sequencing reactions using a dye-primer cycle sequencing protocol. Sequence analysis allows the identification of the base present at the biallelic marker site.

2) Microsequencing Assays

In microsequencing methods, a nucleotide at the polymorphic site that is unique to one of the alleles in a target DNA is detected by a single nucleotide primer extension reaction. This method involves appropriate microsequencing primers which, hybridize just upstream of a polymorphic base of interest in the target nucleic acid. A polymerase is used to specifically extend the 3′ end of the primer with one single ddNTP (chain terminator) complementary to the selected nucleotide at the polymorphic site. Next the identity of the incorporated nucleotide is determined in any suitable way.

Typically, microsequencing reactions are carried out using fluorescent ddNTPs and the extended microsequencing primers are analyzed by electrophoresis on ABI 377 sequencing machines to determine the identity of the incorporated nucleotide as described in EP 412 883. Alternatively capillary electrophoresis can be used in order to process a higher number of assays simultaneously. An example of a typical microsequencing procedure that can be used in the context of the present invention is provided in example 4.

Different approaches can be used to detect the nucleotide added to the microsequencing primer. A homogeneous phase detection method based on fluorescence resonance energy transfer has been described by Chen and Kwok (1997) and Chen et al. (1997), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. In this method amplified genomic DNA fragments containing polymorphic sites are incubated with a 5′-fluorescein-labeled primer in the presence of allelic dye-labeled dideoxyribonucleoside triphosphates and a modified Taq polymerase. The dye-labeled primer is extended one base by the dye-terminator specific for the allele present on the template. At the end of the genotyping reaction, the fluorescence intensities of the two dyes in the reaction mixture are analyzed directly without separation or purification. All these steps can be performed in the same tube and the fluorescence changes can be monitored in real time. Alternatively, the extended primer may be analyzed by MALDI-TOF Mass Spectrometry. The base at the polymorphic site is identified by the mass added onto the microsequencing primer (see Haff L. A. and Smirnov I. P., 1997, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference).

Microsequencing may be achieved by the established microsequencing method or by developments or derivatives thereof. Alternative methods include several solid-phase microsequencing techniques. The basic microsequencing protocol is the same as described previously, except that the method is conducted as a heterogenous phase assay, in which the primer or the target molecule is immobilized or captured onto a solid support. To simplify the primer separation and the terminal nucleotide addition analysis, oligonucleotides are attached to solid supports or are modified in such ways that permit affinity separation as well as polymerase extension. The 5′ ends and internal nucleotides of synthetic oligonucleotides can be modified in a number of different ways to permit different affinity separation approaches, e.g., biotinylation. If a single affinity group is used on the oligonucleotides, the oligonucleotides can be separated from the incorporated terminator regent. This eliminates the need of physical or size separation. More than one oligonucleotide can be separated from the terminator reagent and analyzed simultaneously if more than one affinity group is used. This permits the analysis of several nucleic acid species or more nucleic acid sequence information per extension reaction. The affinity group need not be on the priming oligonucleotide but could alternatively be present on the template. For example, immobilization can be carried out via an interaction between biotinylated DNA and streptavidin-coated microtitration wells or avidin-coated polystyrene particles. In the same manner oligonucleotides or templates may be attached to a solid support in a high-density format. In such solid phase microsequencing reactions, incorporated ddNTPs can be radiolabeled (Syvänen, 1994) or linked to fluorescein (Livak and Hainer, 1994). The detection of radiolabeled ddNTPs can be achieved through scintillation-based techniques. The detection of fluorescein-linked ddNTPs can be based on the binding of antifluorescein antibody conjugated with alkaline phosphatase, followed by incubation with a chromogenic substrate (such as p-nitrophenyl phosphate). Other possible reporter-detection pairs include: ddNTP linked to dinitrophenyl (DNP) and anti-DNP alkaline phosphatase conjugate (Harju et al., 1993) or biotinylated ddNTP and horseradish peroxidase-conjugated streptavidin with o-phenylenediamine as a substrate (WO 92/15712, the disclosures of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). As yet another alternative solid-phase microsequencing procedure, Nyren et al. (1993) described a method relying on the detection of DNA polymerase activity by an enzymatic luminometric inorganic pyrophosphate detection assay (ELIDA). The disclosures of all of these publications are incorporated herein by reference

Pastinen et al. (1997), incorporated herein by reference, describe a method for multiplex detection of single nucleotide polymorphism in which the solid phase minisequencing principle is applied to an oligonucleotide array format. High-density arrays of DNA probes attached to a solid support (DNA chips) are further described in herein.

In one aspect the present invention provides polynucleotides and methods to genotype one or more biallelic markers of the present invention by performing a microsequencing assay. Preferred microsequencing primers include those being featured Table 6d. It will be appreciated that the microsequencing primers listed in Table 6d are merely exemplary and that, any primer having a 3′ end immediately adjacent to a polymorphic nucleotide may be used. Similarly, it will be appreciated that microsequencing analysis may be performed for any biallelic marker or any combination of biallelic markers of the present invention. One aspect of the present invention is a solid support which includes one or more microsequencing primers listed in Table 6d, or fragments comprising at least 8, at least 12, at least 15, or at least 20 consecutive nucleotides thereof and having a 3′ terminus immediately upstream of the corresponding biallelic marker, for determining the identity of a nucleotide at biallelic marker site.

3) Mismatch Detection Assays Based on Polymerases and Ligases

In one aspect the present invention provides polynucleotides and methods to determine the allele of one or more biallelic markers of the present invention in a biological sample, by mismatch detection assays based on polymerases and/or ligases. These assays are based on the specificity of polymerases and ligases. Polymerization reactions places particularly stringent requirements on correct base pairing of the 3′ end of the amplification primer and the joining of two oligonucleotides hybridized to a target DNA sequence is quite sensitive to mismatches close to the ligation site, especially at the 3′ end. The terms “enzyme based mismatch detection assay” are used herein to refer to any method of determining the allele of a biallelic marker based on the specificity of ligases and polymerases. Preferred methods are described below. Methods, primers and various parameters to amplify DNA fragments comprising biallelic markers of the present invention are further described herein.

Allele Specific Amplification

Discrimination between the two alleles of a biallelic marker can also be achieved by allele specific amplification, a selective strategy, whereby one of the alleles is amplified without amplification of the other allele. This is accomplished by placing a polymorphic base at the 3′ end of one of the amplification primers. Because the extension forms from the 3′ end of the primer, a mismatch at or near this position has an inhibitory effect on amplification. Therefore, under appropriate amplification conditions, these primers only direct amplification on their complementary allele. Designing the appropriate allele-specific primer and the corresponding assay conditions are well with the ordinary skill in the art.

Ligation/Amplification Based Methods

The “Oligonucleotide Ligation Assay” (OLA) uses two oligonucleotides which are designed to be capable of hybridizing to abutting sequences of a single strand of a target molecules. One of the oligonucleotides is biotinylated, and the other is detectably labeled. If the precise complementary sequence is found in a target molecule, the oligonucleotides will hybridize such that their termini abut, and create a ligation substrate that can be captured and detected. OLA is capable of detecting biallelic markers and may be advantageously combined with PCR as described by Nickerson D. A. et al. (1990). In this method, PCR is used to achieve the exponential amplification of target DNA, which is then detected using OLA.

Other methods which are particularly suited for the detection of biallelic markers include LCR (ligase chain reaction), Gap LCR (GLCR) which are described herein. As mentioned above LCR uses two pairs of probes to exponentially amplify a specific target. The sequences of each pair of oligonucleotides, is selected to permit the pair to hybridize to abutting sequences of the same strand of the target. Such hybridization forms a substrate for a template-dependant ligase. In accordance with the present invention, LCR can be performed with oligonucleotides having the proximal and distal sequences of the same strand of a biallelic marker site. In one embodiment, either oligonucleotide will be designed to include the biallelic marker site. In such an embodiment, the reaction conditions are selected such that the oligonucleotides can be ligated together only if the target molecule either contains or lacks the specific nucleotide(s) that is complementary to the biallelic marker on the oligonucleotide. In an alternative embodiment, the oligonucleotides will not include the biallelic marker, such that when they hybridize to the target molecule, a “gap” is created as described in WO 90/01069, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. This gap is then “filled” with complementary dNTPs (as mediated by DNA polymerase), or by an additional pair of oligonucleotides. Thus at the end of each cycle, each single strand has a complement capable of serving as a target during the next cycle and exponential allele-specific amplification of the desired sequence is obtained.

Ligase/Polymerase-mediated Genetic Bit Analysis™ is another method for determining the identity of a nucleotide at a preselected site in a nucleic acid molecule (WO 95/21271), incorporated herein by reference. This method involves the incorporation of a nucleoside triphosphate that is complementary to the nucleotide present at the preselected site onto the terminus of a primer molecule, and their subsequent ligation to a second oligonucleotide. The reaction is monitored by detecting a specific label attached to the reaction's solid phase or by detection in solution.

4) Hybridization Assay Methods

A preferred method of determining the identity of the nucleotide present at a biallelic marker site involves nucleic acid hybridization. The hybridization probes, which can be conveniently used in such reactions, preferably include the probes defined herein. Any hybridization assay may be used including Southern hybridization, Northern hybridization, dot blot hybridization and solid-phase hybridization (see Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning—A Laboratory Manual, Second Edition, Cold Spring Harbor Press, N.Y., 1989).

Hybridization refers to the formation of a duplex structure by two single stranded nucleic acids due to complementary base pairing. Hybridization can occur between exactly complementary nucleic acid strands or between nucleic acid strands that contain minor regions of mismatch. Specific probes can be designed that hybridize to one form of a biallelic marker and not to the other and therefore are able to discriminate between different allelic forms. Allele-specific probes are often used in pairs, one member of a pair showing perfect match to a target sequence containing the original allele and the other showing a perfect match to the target sequence containing the alternative allele. Hybridization conditions should be sufficiently stringent that there is a significant difference in hybridization intensity between alleles, and preferably an essentially binary response, whereby a probe hybridizes to only one of the alleles. Stringent, sequence specific hybridization conditions, under which a probe will hybridize only to the exactly complementary target sequence are well known in the art (Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning—A Laboratory Manual, Second Edition, Cold Spring Harbor Press, N.Y., 1989). Stringent conditions are sequence dependent and will be different in different circumstances. Generally, stringent conditions are selected to be about 5° C. lower than the thermal melting point (Tm) for the specific sequence at a defined ionic strength and pH. By way of example and not limitation, procedures using conditions of high stringency are as follows: Prehybridization of filters containing DNA is carried out for 8 h to overnight at 65° C. in buffer composed of 6×SSC, 50 mM Tris-HCl (pH 7.5), 1 mM EDTA, 0.02% PVP, 0.02% Ficoll, 0.02% BSA, and 500 μg/ml denatured salmon sperm DNA. Filters are hybridized for 48 h at 65° C., the preferred hybridization temperature, in prehybridization mixture containing 100 μg/ml denatured salmon sperm DNA and 5-20×10 ⁶ cpm of ³²P-labeled probe. Alternatively, the hybridization step can be performed at 65° C. in the presence of SSC buffer, 1×SSC corresponding to 0.15M NaCl and 0.05 M Na citrate. Subsequently, filter washes can be done at 37° C. for 1 h in a solution containing 2×SSC, 0.01% PVP, 0.01% Ficoll, and 0.01% BSA, followed by a wash in 0.1×SSC at 50° C. for 45 min. Alternatively, filter washes can be performed in a solution containing 2×SSC and 0.1% SDS, or 0.5×SSC and 0.1% SDS, or 0.1×SSC and 0.1% SDS at 68° C. for 15 minute intervals. Following the wash steps, the hybridized probes are detectable by autoradiography. By way of example and not limitation, procedures using conditions of intermediate stringency are as follows: Filters containing DNA are prehybridized, and then hybridized at a temperature of 60° C. in the presence of a 5×SSC buffer and labeled probe. Subsequently, filters washes are performed in a solution containing 2×SSC at 50° C. and the hybridized probes are detectable by autoradiography. Other conditions of high and intermediate stringency which may be used are well known in the art and as cited in Sambrook et al. (Molecular Cloning—A Laboratory Manual, Second Edition, Cold Spring Harbor Press, N.Y., 1989) and Ausubel et al. (Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Green Publishing Associates and Wiley Interscience, N.Y., 1989).

Although such hybridizations can be performed in solution, it is preferred to employ a solid-phase hybridization assay. The target DNA comprising a biallelic marker of the present invention may be amplified prior to the hybridization reaction. The presence of a specific allele in the sample is determined by detecting the presence or the absence of stable hybrid duplexes formed between the probe and the target DNA. The detection of hybrid duplexes can be carried out by a number of methods. Various detection assay formats are well known which utilize detectable labels bound to either the target or the probe to enable detection of the hybrid duplexes. Typically, hybridization duplexes are separated from unhybridized nucleic acids and the labels bound to the duplexes are then detected. Those skilled in the art will recognize that wash steps may be employed to wash away excess target DNA or probe. Standard heterogeneous assay formats are suitable for detecting the hybrids using the labels present on the primers and probes.

Two recently developed assays allow hybridization-based allele discrimination with no need for separations or washes (see Landegren U. et al., 1998, incorporated herein by reference). The TaqMan assay takes advantage of the 5′ nuclease activity of Taq DNA polymerase to digest a DNA probe annealed specifically to the accumulating amplification product. TaqMan probes are labeled with a donor-acceptor dye pair that interacts via fluorescence energy transfer. Cleavage of the TaqMan probe by the advancing polymerase during amplification dissociates the donor dye from the quenching acceptor dye, greatly increasing the donor fluorescence. All reagents necessary to detect two allelic variants can be assembled at the beginning of the reaction and the results are monitored in real time (see Livak et al, 1995, incorporated herein by reference). In an alternative homogeneous hybridization-based procedure, molecular beacons are used for allele discriminations. Molecular beacons are hairpin-shaped oligonucleotide probes that report the presence of specific nucleic acids in homogeneous solutions. When they bind to their targets they undergo a conformational reorganization that restores the fluorescence of an internally quenched fluorophore (Tyagi et al., 1998).

By assaying the hybridization to an allele specific probe, one can detect the presence or absence of a biallelic marker allele in a given sample.

High-Throughput parallel hybridizations in array format are specifically encompassed within “hybridization assays” and are described below.

Hybridization to Addressable Arrays of Oligonucleotides

Hybridization assays based on oligonucleotide arrays rely on the differences in hybridization stability of short oligonucleotides to perfectly matched and mismatched target sequence variants. Efficient access to polymorphism information is obtained through a basic structure comprising high-density arrays of oligonucleotide probes attached to a solid support (the chip) at selected positions. Each DNA chip can contain thousands to millions of individual synthetic DNA probes arranged in a grid-like pattern and miniaturized to the size of a dime.

The chip technology has already been applied with success in numerous cases. For example, the screening of mutations has been undertaken in the BRCA1 gene, in S. cerevisiae mutant strains, and in the protease gene of HIV-1 virus (Hacia et al., 1996; Shoemaker et al., 1996; Kozal et al., 1996, the disclosclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference). Chips of various formats for use in detecting biallelic polymorphisms can be produced on a customized basis by Affymetrix (GeneChip™), Hyseq (HyChip and HyGnostics), and Protogene Laboratories.

In general, these methods employ arrays of oligonucleotide probes that are complementary to target nucleic acid sequence segments from an individual which, target sequences include a polymorphic marker. EP785280, the disclosures of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, describes a tiling strategy for the detection of single nucleotide polymorphisms. Briefly, arrays may generally be “tiled” for a large number of specific polymorphisms. By “tiling” is generally meant the synthesis of a defined set of oligonucleotide probes which is made up of a sequence complementary to the target sequence of interest, as well as preselected variations of that sequence, e.g., substitution of one or more given positions with one or more members of the basis set of monomers, i.e. nucleotides. Tiling strategies are further described in PCT application No. WO 95/11995, incorporated herein by reference. In a particular aspect, arrays are tiled for a number of specific, identified biallelic marker sequences. In particular the array is tiled to include a number of detection blocks, each detection block being specific for a specific biallelic marker or a set of biallelic markers. For example, a detection block may be tiled to include a number of probes, which span the sequence segment that includes a specific polymorphism. To ensure probes that are complementary to each allele, the probes are synthesized in pairs differing at the biallelic marker. In addition to the probes differing at the polymorphic base, monosubstituted probes are also generally tiled within the detection block. These monosubstituted probes have bases at and up to a certain number of bases in either direction from the polymorphism, substituted with the remaining nucleotides (selected from A, T, G, C and U). Typically the probes in a tiled detection block will include substitutions of the sequence positions up to and including those that are 5 bases away from the biallelic marker. The monosubstituted probes provide internal controls for the tiled array, to distinguish actual hybridization from artefactual cross-hybridization. Upon completion of hybridization with the target sequence and washing of the array, the array is scanned to determine the position on the array to which the target sequence hybridizes. The hybridization data from the scanned array is then analyzed to identify which allele or alleles of the biallelic marker are present in the sample. Hybridization and scanning may be carried out as described in PCT application No. WO 92/10092 and WO 95/11995 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,424,186, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.

Thus, in some embodiments, the chips may comprise an array of nucleic acid sequences of fragments of about 15 nucleotides in length. In further embodiments, the chip may comprise an array including at least one of the sequences selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 and the sequences complementary thereto, or a fragment thereof at least about 8 consecutive nucleotides, preferably 10, 15, 20, more preferably 25, 30, 40, 47, or 50 consecutive nucleotides. In some embodiments, the chip may comprise an array of at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or more of these polynucleotides of the invention. Solid supports and polynucleotides of the present invention attached to solid supports are further described in the section titled “Oligonucleotide probes and Primers”.

5) Integrated Systems

Another technique, which may be used to analyze polymorphisms, includes multicomponent integrated systems, which miniaturize and compartmentalize processes such as PCR and capillary electrophoresis reactions in a single functional device. An example of such technique is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,589,136, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, which describes the integration of PCR amplification and capillary electrophoresis in chips.

Integrated systems can be envisaged mainly when microfluidic systems are used. These systems comprise a pattern of microchannels designed onto a glass, silicon, quartz, or plastic wafer included on a microchip. The movements of the samples are controlled by electric, electroosmotic or hydrostatic forces applied across different areas of the microchip. For genotyping biallelic markers, the microfluidic system may integrate nucleic acid amplification, microsequencing, capillary electrophoresis and a detection method such as laser-induced fluorescence detection.

Methods of Genetic Analysis Using the Biallelic Markers of the Present Invention

Different methods are available for the genetic analysis of complex traits (see Lander and Schork, 1994). The search for disease-susceptibility genes is conducted using two main methods: the linkage approach in which evidence is sought for cosegregation between a locus and a putative trait locus using family studies, and the association approach in which evidence is sought for a statistically significant association between an allele and a trait or a trait causing allele (Khoury J. et al, 1993). In general, the biallelic markers of the present invention find use in any method known in the art to demonstrate a statistically significant correlation between a genotype and a phenotype. The biallelic markers may be used in parametric and non-parametric linkage analysis methods. Preferably, the biallelic markers of the present invention are used to identify genes associated with detectable traits using association studies; an approach which does not require the use of affected families and which permits the identification of genes associated with complex and sporadic traits.

The genetic analysis using the biallelic markers of the present invention may be conducted on any scale. The whole set of biallelic markers of the present invention or any subset of biallelic markers of the present invention may be used. In some embodiments a subset of biallelic markers corresponding to one or several candidate genes of the present invention may be used. Alternatively, a subset of biallelic markers of the present invention localised on a specific chromosome segment may be used. Further, any set of genetic markers including a biallelic marker of the present invention may be used. As mentioned above, it should be noted that the biallelic markers of the present invention may be included in any complete or partial genetic map of the human genome. These different uses are specifically contemplated in the present invention and claims.

Linkage Analysis

Linkage analysis is based upon establishing a correlation between the transmission of genetic markers and that of a specific trait throughout generations within a family. Thus, the aim of linkage analysis is to detect marker loci that show cosegregation with a trait of interest in pedigrees.

Parametric Methods

When data are available from successive generations there is the opportunity to study the degree of linkage between pairs of loci. Estimates of the recombination fraction enable loci to be ordered and placed onto a genetic map. With loci that are genetic markers, a genetic map can be established, and then the strength of linkage between markers and traits can be calculated and used to indicate the relative positions of markers and genes affecting those traits (Weir, B. S., 1996). The classical method for linkage analysis is the logarithm of odds (lod) score method (see Morton N. E., 1955; Ott J, 1991). Calculation of lod scores requires specification of the mode of inheritance for the disease (parametric method). Generally, the length of the candidate region identified using linkage analysis is between 2 and 20 Mb. Once a candidate region is identified as described above, analysis of recombinant individuals using additional markers allows further delineation of the candidate region. Linkage analysis studies have generally relied on the use of a maximum of 5,000 microsatellite markers, thus limiting the maximum theoretical attainable resolution of linkage analysis to about 600 kb on average.

Linkage analysis has been successfully applied to map simple genetic traits that show clear Mendelian inheritance patterns and which have a high penetrance (i.e., the ratio between the number of trait positive carriers of allele a and the total number of a carriers in the population). However, parametric linkage analysis suffers from a variety of drawbacks. First, it is limited by its reliance on the choice of a genetic model suitable for each studied trait. Furthermore, as already mentioned, the resolution attainable using linkage analysis is limited, and complementary studies are required to refine the analysis of the typical 2 Mb to 20 Mb regions initially identified through linkage analysis. In addition, parametric linkage analysis approaches have proven difficult when applied to complex genetic traits, such as those due to the combined action of multiple genes and/or environmental factors. It is very difficult to model these factors adequately in a lod score analysis. In such cases, too large an effort and cost are needed to recruit the adequate number of affected families required for applying linkage analysis to these situations, as recently discussed by Risch, N. and Merikangas, K. (1996), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.

Non-Parametric Methods

The advantage of the so-called non-parametric methods for linkage analysis is that they do not require specification of the mode of inheritance for the disease, they tend to be more useful for the analysis of complex traits. In non-parametric methods, one tries to prove that the inheritance pattern of a chromosomal region is not consistent with random Mendelian segregation by showing that affected relatives inherit identical copies of the region more often than expected by chance. Affected relatives should show excess “allele sharing” even in the presence of incomplete penetrance and polygenic inheritance. In non-parametric linkage analysis the degree of agreement at a marker locus in two individuals can be measured either by the number of alleles identical by state (IBS) or by the number of alleles identical by descent (IBD). Affected sib pair analysis is a well-known special case and is the simplest form of these methods.

The biallelic markers of the present invention may be used in both parametric and non-parametric linkage analysis. Preferably biallelic markers may be used in non-parametric methods which allow the mapping of genes involved in complex traits. The biallelic markers of the present invention may be used in both IBD- and IBS-methods to map genes affecting a complex trait. In such studies, taking advantage of the high density of biallelic markers, several adjacent biallelic marker loci may be pooled to achieve the efficiency attained by multi-allelic markers (Zhao et al., 1998, incorporated herein by reference).

However, both parametric and non-parametric linkage analysis methods analyse affected relatives, they tend to be of limited value in the genetic analysis of drug responses or in the analysis of side effects to treatments. This type of analysis is impractical in such cases due to the lack of availability of familial cases. In fact, the likelihood of having more than one individual in a family being exposed to the same drug at the same time is extremely low.

Population Association Studies

The present invention comprises methods for identifying one or several genes among a set of candidate genes that are associated with a detectable trait using the biallelic markers of the present invention. In one embodiment the present invention comprises methods to detect an association between a biallelic marker allele or a biallelic marker haplotype and a trait. Further, the invention comprises methods to identify a trait causing allele in linkage disequilibrium with any biallelic marker allele of the present invention.

As described above, alternative approaches can be employed to perform association studies: genome-wide association studies, candidate region association studies and candidate gene association studies. The candidate region analysis clearly provides a short-cut approach to the identification of genes and gene polymorphisms related to a particular trait when some information concerning the biology of the trait is available. Further, the biallelic markers of the present invention may be incorporated in any map of genetic markers of the human genome in order to perform genome-wide association studies. Methods to generate a high-density map of biallelic markers has been described in U.S. Provisional Patent application Ser. No. 60/082,614, incorporated herein by reference. The biallelic markers of the present invention may further be incorporated in any map of a specific candidate region of the genome (a specific chromosome or a specific chromosomal segment for example).

As mentioned above, association studies may be conducted within the general population and are not limited to studies performed on related individuals in affected families. Association studies are extremely valuable as they permit the analysis of sporadic or multifactor traits. Moreover, association studies represent a powerful method for fine-scale mapping enabling much finer mapping of trait causing alleles than linkage studies. Studies based on pedigrees often only narrow the location of the trait causing allele. Association studies using the biallelic markers of the present invention can therefore be used to refine the location of a trait causing allele in a candidate region identified by Linkage Analysis methods. Biallelic markers of the present invention can be used to identify the involved gene; such uses are specifically contemplated in the present invention and claims.

1) Determining the Frequency of a Biallelic Marker Allele or of a Biallelic Marker Haplotype in a Population

Another embodiment of the present invention encompasses methods of estimating the frequency of a haplotype for a set of biallelic markers in a population, comprising the steps of: a) genotyping each individual in said population for at least one 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, b) genotyping each individual in said population for a second biallelic marker by determining the identity of the nucleotides at said second biallelic marker for both copies of said second biallelic marker present in the genome; and c) applying a haplotype determination method to the identities of the nucleotides determined in steps a) and b) to obtain an estimate of said frequency. In addition, the methods of estimating the frequency of a haplotype of the invention encompass methods with any further limitation described in this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or in any combination: optionally said haplotype determination method is selected from the group consisting of asymmetric PCR amplification, double PCR amplification of specific alleles, the Clark method, or an expectation maximization algorithm; optionally, said second biallelic marker is a 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker in a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, and the complements thereof; optionally, said 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker may be selected individually or in any combination from the biallelic markers described in Tables 6b and 6c; optionally, the identity of the nucleotides at the biallelic markers in everyone of the sequences of SEQ ID Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 is determined in steps a) and b).

Association Studies Explore the Relationships Among Frequencies for sets of alleles Between Loci.

Determining the Frequency of an Allele in a Population

Allelic frequencies of the biallelic markers in a population can be determined using one of the methods described above under the heading “Methods for genotyping an individual for biallelic markers”, or any genotyping procedure suitable for this intended purpose. Genotyping pooled samples or individual samples can determine the frequency of a biallelic marker allele in a population. One way to reduce the number of genotypings required is to use pooled samples. A major obstacle in using pooled samples is in terms of accuracy and reproducibility for determining accurate DNA concentrations in setting up the pools. Genotyping individual samples provides higher sensitivity, reproducibility and accuracy and; is the preferred method used in the present invention. Preferably, each individual is genotyped separately and simple gene counting is applied to determine the frequency of an allele of a biallelic marker or of a genotype in a given population.

Determining the Frequency of a Haplotype in a Population

The gametic phase of haplotypes is unknown when diploid individuals are heterozygous at more than one locus. Using genealogical information in families gametic phase can sometimes be inferred (Perlin et al., 1994, incorporated herein by reference). When no genealogical information is available different strategies may be used. One possibility is that the multiple-site heterozygous diploids can be eliminated from the analysis, keeping only the homozygotes and the single-site heterozygote individuals, but this approach might lead to a possible bias in the sample composition and the underestimation of low-frequency haplotypes. Another possibility is that single chromosomes can be studied independently, for example, by asymmetric PCR amplification (see Newton et al., 1989; Wu et al., 1989) or by isolation of single chromosome by limit dilution followed by PCR amplification (see Ruano et al., 1990). Each of these disclosures in incorporated herein by reference. Further, a sample may be haplotyped for sufficiently close biallelic markers by double PCR amplification of specific alleles (Sarkar, G. and Sommer S. S., 1991, incorporated herein by reference). These approaches are not entirely satisfying either because of their technical complexity, the additional cost they entail, their lack of generalisation at a large scale, or the possible biases they introduce. To overcome these difficulties, an algorithm to infer the phase of PCR-amplified DNA genotypes introduced by Clark A. G. (1990), incorporated herein by reference may be used. Briefly, the principle is to start filling a preliminary list of haplotypes present in the sample by examining unambiguous individuals, that is, the complete homozygotes and the single-site heterozygotes. Then other individuals in the same sample are screened for the possible occurrence of previously recognised haplotypes. For each positive identification, the complementary haplotype is added to the list of recognised haplotypes, until the phase information for all individuals is either resolved or identified as unresolved. This method assigns a single haplotype to each multiheterozygous individual, whereas several haplotypes are possible when there are more than one heterozygous site. Alternatively, one can use methods estimating haplotype frequencies in a population without assigning haplotypes to each individual. Preferably, a method based on an expectation-maximization (EM) algorithm (Dempster et al., J. R. 1977, incorporated herein by reference) leading to maximum-likelihood estimates of haplotype frequencies under the assumption of Hardy-Weinberg proportions (random mating) is used (see Excoffier L. and Slatkin M., 1995, incorporated herein by reference). The EM algorithm is a generalised iterative maximum-likelihood approach to estimation that is useful when data are ambiguous and/or incomplete. The EM algorithm is used to resolve heterozygotes into haplotypes. Haplotype estimations are further described below under the heading “Statistical methods>>. Any other method known in the art to determine or to estimate the frequency of a haplotype in a population may also be used.

2) Linkage Disequilibrium Analysis

Linkage disequilibrium is the non-random association of alleles at two or more loci and represents a powerful tool for mapping genes involved in disease traits (see Ajioka R. S. et al., 1997, incorporated herein by reference). Biallelic markers, because they are densely spaced in the human genome and can be genotyped in more numerous numbers than other types of genetic markers (such as RFLP or VNTR markers), are particularly useful in genetic analysis based on linkage disequilibrium. The biallelic markers of the present invention may be used in any linkage disequilibrium analysis method known in the art.

Briefly, when a disease mutation is first introduced into a population (by a new mutation or the immigration of a mutation carrier), it necessarily resides on a single chromosome and thus on a single “background” or “ancestral” haplotype of linked markers. Consequently, there is complete disequilibrium between these markers and the disease mutation: one finds the disease mutation only in the presence of a specific set of marker alleles. Through subsequent generations recombinations occur between the disease mutation and these marker polymorphisms, and the disequilibrium gradually dissipates. The pace of this dissipation is a function of the recombination frequency, so the markers closest to the disease gene will manifest higher levels of disequilibrium than those that are further away. When not broken up by recombination, “ancestral” haplotypes and linkage disequilibrium between marker alleles at different loci can be tracked not only through pedigrees but also through populations. Linkage disequilibrium is usually seen as an association between one specific allele at one locus and another specific allele at a second locus.

The pattern or curve of disequilibrium between disease and marker loci is expected to exhibit a maximum that occurs at the disease locus. Consequently, the amount of linkage disequilibrium between a disease allele and closely linked genetic markers may yield valuable information regarding the location of the disease gene. For fine-scale mapping of a disease locus, it is useful to have some knowledge of the patterns of linkage disequilibrium that exist between markers in the studied region. As mentioned above the mapping resolution achieved through the analysis of linkage disequilibrium is much higher than that of linkage studies. The high density of biallelic markers combined with linkage disequilibrium analysis provides powerful tools for fine-scale mapping. Different methods to calculate linkage disequilibrium are described below under the heading “Statistical Methods”.

3) Population-Based Case-Control Studies of Trait-Marker Associations

As mentioned above, the occurrence of pairs of specific alleles at different loci on the same chromosome is not random and the deviation from random is called linkage disequilibrium. Association studies focus on population frequencies and rely on the phenomenon of linkage disequilibrium. If a specific allele in a given gene is directly involved in causing a particular trait, its frequency will be statistically increased in an affected (trait positive) population, when compared to the frequency in a trait negative population or in a random control population. As a consequence of the existence of linkage disequilibrium, the frequency of all other alleles present in the haplotype carrying the trait-causing allele will also be increased in trait positive individuals compared to trait negative individuals or random controls. Therefore, association between the trait and any allele (specifically a biallelic marker allele) in linkage disequilibrium with the trait-causing allele will suffice to suggest the presence of a trait-related gene in that particular region. Case-control populations can be genotyped for biallelic markers to identify associations that narrowly locate a trait causing allele. As any marker in linkage disequilibrium with one given marker associated with a trait will be associated with the trait. Linkage disequilibrium allows the relative frequencies in case-control populations of a limited number of genetic polymorphisms (specifically biallelic markers) to be analysed as an alternative to screening all possible functional polymorphisms in order to find trait-causing alleles. Association studies compare the frequency of marker alleles in unrelated case-control populations, and represent powerful tools for the dissection of complex traits.

Case-Control Populations (Inclusion Criteria)

Population-based association studies do not concern familial inheritance but compare the prevalence of a particular genetic marker, or a set of markers, in case-control populations. They are case-control studies based on comparison of unrelated case (affected or trait positive) individuals and unrelated control (unaffected or trait negative or random) individuals. Preferably the control group is composed of unaffected or trait negative individuals. Further, the control group is ethnically matched to the case population. Moreover, the control group is preferably matched to the case-population for the main known confusion factor for the trait under study (for example age-matched for an age-dependent trait). Ideally, individuals in the two samples are paired in such a way that they are expected to differ only in their disease status. In the following “trait positive population>>, “case population” and “affected population” are used interchangeably.

An important step in the dissection of complex traits using association studies is the choice of case-control populations (see Lander and Schork, 1994). A major step in the choice of case-control populations is the clinical definition of a given trait or phenotype. Any genetic trait may be analysed by the association method proposed here by carefully selecting the individuals to be included in the trait positive and trait negative phenotypic groups. Four criteria are often useful: clinical phenotype, age at onset, family history and severity. The selection procedure for continuous or quantitative traits (such as blood pressure for example) involves selecting individuals at opposite ends of the phenotype distribution of the trait under study, so as to include in these trait positive and trait negative populations individuals with non-overlapping phenotypes. Preferably, case-control populations comprise phenotypically homogeneous populations. Trait positive and trait negative populations comprise phenotypically uniform populations of individuals representing each between 1 and 98%, preferably between 1 and 80%, more preferably between 1 and 50%, and more preferably between 1 and 30%, most preferably between 1 and 20% of the total population under study, and selected among individuals exhibiting non-overlapping phenotypes. The clearer the difference between the two trait phenotypes, the greater the probability of detecting an association with biallelic markers. The selection of those drastically different but relatively uniform phenotypes enables efficient comparisons in association studies and the possible detection of marked differences at the genetic level, provided that the sample sizes of the populations under study are significant enough.

In preferred embodiments, a first group of between 50 and 300 trait positive individuals, preferably about 100 individuals, are recruited according to their phenotypes. A similar number of trait negative individuals are included in such studies.

In the present invention, typical examples of inclusion criteria include affection by schizophrenia.

Association Analysis

The general strategy to perform association studies using biallelic markers derived from a region carrying a candidate gene is to scan two groups of individuals (case-control populations) in order to measure and statistically compare the allele frequencies of the biallelic markers of the present invention in both groups.

If a statistically significant association with a trait is identified for at least one or more of the analysed biallelic markers, one can assume that: either the associated allele is directly responsible for causing the trait (the associated allele is the trait causing allele), or more likely the associated allele is in linkage disequilibrium with the trait causing allele. The specific characteristics of the associated allele with respect to the gene function usually gives further insight into the relationship between the associated allele and the trait (causal or in linkage disequilibrium). If the evidence indicates that the associated allele within the gene is most probably not the trait causing allele but is in linkage disequilibrium with the real trait causing allele, then the trait causing allele can be found by sequencing the vicinity of the associated marker.

Another embodiment of the present invention encompasses methods of detecting an association between a haplotype and a phenotype, comprising the steps of: a) estimating the frequency of at least one haplotype in a trait positive population according to a method of estimating the frequency of a haplotype of the invention; b) estimating the frequency of said haplotype in a control population according to the method of estimating the frequency of a haplotype of the invention; and c) determining whether a statistically significant association exists between said haplotype and said phenotype. In addition, the methods of detecting an association between a haplotype and a phenotype of the invention encompass methods with any further limitation described in this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or in any combination: Optionally, said 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker may be in a sequence selected individually or in any combination from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, and the complements thereof; optionally, said 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker may be selected individually or in any combination from the biallelic markers described in Tables 6b and 6c; optionally, said control population may be a trait negative population, or a random population; optionally, said phenotype is a disease involving schizophrenia, a response to an agent acting on schizophrenia, or a side effects to an agent acting on schizophrenia.

Haplotype Analysis

As described above, when a chromosome carrying a disease allele first appears in a population as a result of either mutation or migration, the mutant allele necessarily resides on a chromosome having a set of linked markers: the ancestral haplotype. This haplotype can be tracked through populations and its statistical association with a given trait can be analysed. Complementing single point (allelic) association studies with multi-point association studies also called haplotype studies increases the statistical power of association studies. Thus, a haplotype association study allows one to define the frequency and the type of the ancestral carrier haplotype. A haplotype analysis is important in that it increases the statistical power of an analysis involving individual markers.

In a first stage of a haplotype frequency analysis, the frequency of the possible haplotypes based on various combinations of the identified biallelic markers of the invention is determined. The haplotype frequency is then compared for distinct populations of trait positive and control individuals. The number of trait positive individuals, which should be, subjected to this analysis to obtain statistically significant results usually ranges between 30 and 300, with a preferred number of individuals ranging between 50 and 150. The same considerations apply to the number of unaffected individuals (or random control) used in the study. The results of this first analysis provide haplotype frequencies in case-control populations, for each evaluated haplotype frequency a p-value and an odd ratio are calculated. If a statistically significant association is found the relative risk for an individual carrying the given haplotype of being affected with the trait under study can be approximated.

Interaction Analysis

The biallelic markers of the present invention may also be used to identify patterns of biallelic markers associated with detectable traits resulting from polygenic interactions. The analysis of genetic interaction between alleles at unlinked loci requires individual genotyping using the techniques described herein. The analysis of allelic interaction among a selected set of biallelic markers with appropriate level of statistical significance can be considered as a haplotype analysis. Interaction analysis comprises stratifying the case-control populations with respect to a given haplotype for the first loci and performing a haplotype analysis with the second loci with each subpopulation.

Statistical methods used in association studies are further described herein.

4) Testing for Linkage in the Presence of Association

The biallelic markers of the present invention may further be used in TDT (transmission/disequilibrium test). TDT tests for both linkage and association and is not affected by population stratification. TDT requires data for affected individuals and their parents or data from unaffected sibs instead of from parents (see Spielmann S. et al., 1993; Schaid D. J. et al., 1996, Spielmann S. and Ewens W. J, 1998, the disclosures of which are all incorporated herein by reference). Such combined tests generally reduce the false-positive errors produced by separate analyses.

Statistical Methods

In general, any method known in the art to test whether a trait and a genotype show a statistically significant correlation may be used.

1) Methods in Linkage Analysis

Statistical methods and computer programs useful for linkage analysis are well-known to those skilled in the art (see Terwilliger J. D. and Ott J., 1994; Ott J., 1991, each incorporated herein by reference).

2) Methods to Estimate Haplotype Frequencies in a Population

As described above, when genotypes are scored, it is often not possible to distinguish heterozygotes so that haplotype frequencies cannot be easily inferred. When the gametic phase is not known, haplotype frequencies can be estimated from the multilocus genotypic data. Any method known to person skilled in the art can be used to estimate haplotype frequencies (see Lange K., 1997; Weir, B. S., 1996) Preferably, maximum-likelihood haplotype frequencies are computed using an Expectation-Maximization (EM) algorithm (see Dempster et al., 1977; Excoffier L. and Slatkin M., 1995). This procedure is an iterative process aiming at obtaining maximum-likelihood estimates of haplotype frequencies from multi-locus genotype data when the gametic phase is unknown. Haplotype estimations are usually performed by applying the EM algorithm using for example the EM-HAPLO program (Hawley M. E. et al., 1994) or the Arlequin program (Schneider et al., 1997). The EM algorithm is a generalised iterative maximum likelihood approach to estimation and is briefly described below. The disclosures of these publication are incorporated herein by reference.

In the following part of this text, phenotypes will refer to multi-locus genotypes with unknown phase. Genotypes will refer to known-phase multi-locus genotypes. Suppose a sample of N unrelated individuals typed for K markers. The data observed are the unknown-phase K-locus phenotypes that can categorised in F different phenotypes. Suppose that we have H underlying possible haplotypes (in case of K biallelic markers, H=2K).

For phenotype j, suppose that c_(j) genotypes are possible. We thus have the following equation $\begin{matrix} {P_{j} = {{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{c_{j}}{{pr}\left( {genotype}_{i} \right)}} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{c_{j}}{{pr}\left( {h_{k},h_{l}} \right)}}}} & {{Equation}\quad 1} \end{matrix}$ where Pj is the probability of the phenotype j, h_(k) and h_(l) are the two haplotypes constituent the genotype i. Under the Hardy-Weinberg equilibrium, pr(h_(k), h_(l)) becomes: pr(h _(k) , h _(l))=pr(h _(k))² if h _(k) =h _(l) , pr(h _(k) , h _(l))=2pr(h _(k))·pr(h _(l)) if h _(k) ≠h _(l)  Equation 2 The successive steps of the E-M algorithm can be described as follows:

Starting with initial values of the of haplotypes frequencies, noted p₁ ⁽⁰⁾, P₂ ⁽⁰⁾, . . . p_(H) ⁽⁰⁾, these initial values serve to estimate the genotype frequencies (Expectation step) and then estimate another set of haplotype frequencies (Maximisation step), noted p₁ ⁽¹⁾, p₂ ⁽⁰⁾, . . . p_(H) ⁽⁰⁾, these two steps are iterated until changes in the sets of haplotypes frequency are very small.

A stop criterion can be that the maximum difference between haplotype frequencies between two iterations is less than 10⁻⁷. These values can be adjusted according to the desired precision of estimations. In details, at a given iteration s, the Expectation step comprises calculating the genotypes frequencies by the following equation: $\begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} {{{pr}\left( {genotype}_{i} \right)}^{(s)} = {{{pr}\left( {phenotype}_{j} \right)} \cdot}} \\ {{{pr}\left( {{genotype}_{i}❘{phenotype}_{j}} \right)}^{(s)}} \\ {= {\frac{n_{j}}{N} \cdot \frac{{{pr}\left( {h_{k},h_{l}} \right)}^{(s)}}{P_{j}^{(s)}}}} \end{matrix} & {{Equation}\quad 3} \end{matrix}$ where genotype i occurs in phenotype j, and where h_(k) and h_(l) constitute genotype i. Each probability is derived according to eq.1, and eq.2 described above.

Then the Maximisation step simply estimates another set of haplotype frequencies given the genotypes frequencies. This approach is also known as gene-counting method (Smith, 1957). $\begin{matrix} {p_{t}^{({s + 1})} = {\frac{1}{2}{\sum\limits_{j = 1}^{F}{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{c_{j}}{\delta_{it} \cdot {{pr}\left( {genotype}_{i} \right)}^{(s)}}}}}} & {{Equation}\quad 4} \end{matrix}$ Where δ_(it) is an indicator variable which count the number of time haplotype t in genotype i. It takes the values of 0, 1 or 2.

To ensure that the estimation finally obtained is the maximum-likelihood estimation several values of departures are required. The estimations obtained are compared and if they are different the estimations leading to the best likelihood are kept.

3) Methods to Calculate Linkage Disequilibrium Between Markers

A number of methods can be used to calculate linkage disequilibrium between any two genetic positions, in practice linkage disequilibrium is measured by applying a statistical association test to haplotype data taken from a population. Linkage disequilibrium between any pair of biallelic markers comprising at least one of the biallelic markers of the present invention (M_(i), M_(j)) having alleles (a_(i)/b_(i)) at marker M_(i) and alleles (a_(j)/b_(j)) at marker M_(j) can be calculated for every allele combination (a_(i),a_(j); a_(i),b_(j); b_(i),a_(j) and b_(i),b_(j)), according to the Piazza formula Δ_(aiaj)={square root}θ4−{square root}(θ4+θ3)(θ4+θ2), where:

-   θ4=−−=frequency of genotypes not having allele a_(i) at M_(i) and     not having allele a_(j) at M_(j) -   θ3=−+=frequency of genotypes not having allele a_(i) at M_(i) and     having allele a_(j) at M_(j) -   θ2=+−=frequency of genotypes having allele a_(i) at M_(i) and not     having allele a_(j) at M_(j)     Linkage disequilibrium (LD) between pairs of biallelic markers     (M_(i), M_(j)) can also be calculated for every allele combination     (ai,aj; ai,bj; b_(i),a_(j) and b_(i),b_(j)), according to the     maximum-likelihood estimate (MLE) for delta (the composite genotypic     disequilibrium coefficient), as described by Weir (Weir B. S.,     1996). The MLE for the composite linkage disequilibrium is:     D _(aiaj)=(2n ₁ +n ₂ +n ₃ +n ₄/2)/N−2(pr(a _(i))·pr(a _(j)))     where n₁=Σ phenotype (a_(i)/a_(i), a_(j)/a_(j)), n₂=Σ phenotype     (a_(i)/a_(i), a_(j)/b_(j)), n₃=Σ phenotype (a_(i)/b_(i),     a_(j)/a_(j)), n4=Σ phenotype (a_(i)/b_(i), a_(j)/b_(j)) and N is the     number of individuals in the sample. This formula allows linkage     disequilibrium between alleles to be estimated when only genotype,     and not haplotype, data are available.

Another means of calculating the linkage disequilibrium between markers is as follows. For a couple of biallelic markers, M_(i)(a_(i)/b_(i)) and M_(j)(a_(j)/b_(j)), fitting the Hardy-Weinberg equilibrium, one can estimate the four possible haplotype frequencies in a given population according to the approach described above.

The estimation of gametic disequilibrium between ai and aj is simply: D _(aiaj) =pr(haplotype(a _(i) , a _(j)))−pr(a _(i))·pr(a _(j)). Where pr(a_(i)) is the probability of allele a_(i) and pr(a_(j)) is the probability of allele a_(j) and where pr(haplotype (a_(i), a_(j))) is estimated as in Equation 3 above.

For a couple of biallelic marker only one measure of disequilibrium is necessary to describe the association between M_(i) and M_(j).

Then a normalised value of the above is calculated as follows: D′ _(aiaj) =D _(aiaj)/max(−pr(a _(i))·pr(a _(j)), −pr(b _(i))·pr(b _(j))) with D_(aiaj)<0 D′ _(aiaj) =D _(aiaj)/max(pr(b _(i))·pr(a _(j)), pr(a _(i))·pr(b _(j))) with D_(aiaj)>0 The skilled person will readily appreciate that other LD calculation methods can be used without undue experimentation.

Linkage disequilibrium among a set of biallelic markers having an adequate heterozygosity rate can be determined by genotyping between 50 and 1000 unrelated individuals, preferably between 75 and 200, more preferably around 100.

4) Testing for Association

Methods for determining the statistical significance of a correlation between a phenotype and a genotype, in this case an allele at a biallelic marker or a haplotype made up of such alleles, may be determined by any statistical test known in the art and with any accepted threshold of statistical significance being required. The application of particular methods and thresholds of significance are well with in the skill of the ordinary practitioner of the art.

Testing for association is performed by determining the frequency of a biallelic marker allele in case and control populations and comparing these frequencies with a statistical test to determine if their is a statistically significant difference in frequency which would indicate a correlation between the trait and the biallelic marker allele under study. Similarly, a haplotype analysis is performed by estimating the frequencies of all possible haplotypes for a given set of biallelic markers in case and control populations, and comparing these frequencies with a statistical test to determine if their is a statistically significant correlation between the haplotype and the phenotype (trait) under study. Any statistical tool useful to test for a statistically significant association between a genotype and a phenotype may be used. Preferably the statistical test employed is a chi-square test with one degree of freedom. A P-value is calculated (the P-value is the probability that a statistic as large or larger than the observed one would occur by chance).

Statistical Significance

In preferred embodiments, significance for diagnosis purposes, either as a positive basis for further diagnostic tests or as a preliminary starting point for early preventive therapy, the p value related to a biallelic marker association is preferably about 1×10⁻² or less, more preferably about 1×10⁻⁴ or less, for a single biallelic marker analysis and about 1×10⁻³ or less, still more preferably 1×10⁻⁶ or less and most preferably of about 1×10⁻⁸ or less, for a haplotype analysis involving several markers. These values are believed to be applicable to any association studies involving single or multiple marker combinations.

The skilled person can use the range of values set forth above as a starting point in order to carry out association studies with biallelic markers of the present invention. In doing so, significant associations between the biallelic markers of the present invention and diseases involving schizophrenia can be revealed and used for diagnosis and drug screening purposes.

Phenotypic Permutation

In order to confirm the statistical significance of the first stage haplotype analysis described above, it might be suitable to perform further analyses in which genotyping data from case-control individuals are pooled and randomised with respect to the trait phenotype. Each individual genotyping data is randomly allocated to two groups, which contain the same number of individuals as the case-control populations used to compile the data obtained in the first stage. A second stage haplotype analysis is preferably run on these artificial groups, preferably for the markers included in the haplotype of the first stage analysis showing the highest relative risk coefficient. This experiment is reiterated preferably at least between 100 and 10000 times. The repeated iterations allow the determination of the percentage of obtained haplotypes with a significant p-value level.

Assessment of Statistical Association

To address the problem of false positives similar analysis may be performed with the same case-control populations in random genomic regions. Results in random regions and the candidate region are compared as described in U.S. Provisional Patent Application entitled “Methods, software and apparati for identifying genomic regions harbouring a gene associated with a detectable trait”.

5) Evaluation of Risk Factors

The association between a risk factor (in genetic epidemiology the risk factor is the presence or the absence of a certain allele or haplotype at marker loci) and a disease is measured by the odds ratio (OR) and by the relative risk (RR). If P(R⁺) is the probability of developing the disease for individuals with R and P(R⁻) is the probability for individuals without the risk factor, then the relative risk is simply the ratio of the two probabilities, that is: RR=P(R ⁺)/P(R ⁻) In case-control studies, direct measures of the relative risk cannot be obtained because of the sampling design. However, the odds ratio allows a good approximation of the relative risk for low-incidence diseases and can be calculated: ${OR} = {\left\lbrack \frac{F^{+}}{1 - F^{+}} \right\rbrack/\left\lbrack \frac{F^{-}}{\left( {1 - F^{-}} \right)} \right\rbrack}$

F⁺ is the frequency of the exposure to the risk factor in cases and F⁻ is the frequency of the exposure to the risk factor in controls. F⁺ and F⁻ are calculated using the allelic or haplotype frequencies of the study and further depend on the underlying genetic model (dominant, recessive, additive . . . ).

One can further estimate the attributable risk (AR) which describes the proportion of individuals in a population exhibiting a trait due to a given risk factor. This measure is important in quantitating the role of a specific factor in disease etiology and in terms of the public health impact of a risk factor. The public health relevance of this measure lies in estimating the proportion of cases of disease in the population that could be prevented if the exposure of interest were absent. AR is determined as follows: AR=P _(E)(RR−1)/(P _(E)(RR−1)+1) AR is the risk attributable to a biallelic marker allele or a biallelic marker haplotype. P_(E) is the frequency of exposure to an allele or a haplotype within the population at large; and RR is the relative risk which, is approximated with the odds ratio when the trait under study has a relatively low incidence in the general population.

AR is the risk attributable to a biallelic marker allele or a biallelic marker haplotype. P_(E) is the frequency of exposure to an allele or a haplotype within the population at large; and RR is the relative risk which, is approximated with the odds ratio when the trait under study has a relatively low incidence in the general population.

Association of Biallelic Markers of the Invention with Schizophrenia

In the context of the present invention, an association between chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic markers, including Region D biallelic markers, and schizophrenia and bipolar disorder were established. Several association studies using different populations and screening samples thereof, and with different sets of biallelic markers distributed on the chromosome 13q31-q33 region and Region D thereof were carried out. Further details concerning these association studies and the results are provided herein in Examples 5a to 5e.

This information is extremely valuable. The knowledge of a potential genetic predisposition to schizophrenia, even if this predisposition is not absolute, might contribute in a very significant manner to treatment efficacy of schizophrenia and to the development of new therapeutic and diagnostic tools.

Identification of Biallelic Markers in Linkage Disequilibrium with the Biallelic Markers of the Invention

Once a first biallelic marker has been identified in a genomic region of interest, the practitioner of ordinary skill in the art, using the teachings of the present invention, can easily identify additional biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium with this first marker. As mentioned before, any marker in linkage disequilibrium with a first marker associated with a trait will be associated with the trait. Therefore, once an association has been demonstrated between a given biallelic marker and a trait, the discovery of additional biallelic markers associated with this trait is of great interest in order to increase the density of biallelic markers in this particular region. The causal gene or mutation will be found in the vicinity of the marker or set of markers showing the highest correlation with the trait.

Identification of additional markers in linkage disequilibrium with a given marker involves: (a) amplifying a genomic fragment comprising a first biallelic marker from a plurality of individuals; (b) identifying of second biallelic markers in the genomic region harboring said first biallelic marker; (c) conducting a linkage disequilibrium analysis between said first biallelic marker and second biallelic markers; and (d) selecting said second biallelic markers as being in linkage disequilibrium with said first marker. Subcombinations comprising steps (b) and (c) are also contemplated.

Methods to identify biallelic markers and to conduct linkage disequilibrium analysis are described herein and can be carried out by the skilled person without undue experimentation. The present invention then also concerns biallelic markers and other polymorphisms which are in linkage disequilibrium with the specific biallelic markers of the invention and which are expected to present similar characteristics in terms of their respective association with a given trait. In a preferred embodiment, the invnetion concerns biallelic markers which are in linkage disequilibrium with the specific biallelic markers.

Identification Of Functional Mutations

Once a positive association is confirmed with a biallelic marker of the present invention, the associated candidate gene sequence can be scanned for mutations by comparing the sequences of a selected number of trait positive and trait negative individuals. In a preferred embodiment, functional regions such as exons and splice sites, promoters and other regulatory regions of the gene are scanned for mutations. Preferably, trait positive individuals carry the haplotype shown to be associated with the trait and trait negative individuals do not carry the haplotype or allele associated with the trait. The mutation detection procedure is essentially similar to that used for biallelic site identification.

The method used to detect such mutations generally comprises the following steps: (a) amplification of a region of the candidate DNA sequence comprising a biallelic marker or a group of biallelic markers associated with the trait from DNA samples of trait positive patients and trait negative controls; (b) sequencing of the amplified region; (c) comparison of DNA sequences from trait-positive patients and trait-negative controls; and (d) determination of mutations specific to trait-positive patients. Subcombinations which comprise steps (b) and (c) are specifically contemplated.

It is preferred that candidate polymorphisms be then verified by screening a larger population of cases and controls by means of any genotyping procedure such as those described herein, preferably using a microsequencing technique in an individual test format. Polymorphisms are considered as candidate mutations when present in cases and controls at frequencies compatible with the expected association results.

Candidate polymorphisms and mutations of the sbg1 nucleic acid sequences suspected of being involved in a predisposition to schizophrenia can be confirmed by screening a larger population of affected and unaffected individuals using any of the genotyping procedures described herein. Preferably the microsequencing technique is used. Such polymorphisms are considered as candidate “trait-causing” mutations when they exhibit a statistically significant correlation with the detectable phenotype.

Biallelic Markers of the Invention in Methods of Genetic Diagnostics

The biallelic markers and other polymorphisms of the present invention can also be used to develop diagnostics tests capable of identifying individuals who express a detectable trait as the result of a specific genotype or individuals whose genotype places them at risk of developing a detectable trait at a subsequent time. The trait analyzed using the present diagnostics may be any detectable trait, including predisposition to schizophrenia, age of onset of detectable symptoms, a beneficial response to or side effects related to treatment against schizophrenia. Such a diganosis can be useful in the monitoring, prognosis and/or prophylactic or curative therapy for schizophrenia.

The diagnostic techniques of the present invention may employ a variety of methodologies to determine whether a test subject has a genotype associated with an increased risk of developing a detectable trait or whether the individual suffers from a detectable trait as a result of a particular mutation, including methods which enable the analysis of individual chromosomes for haplotyping, such as family studies, single sperm DNA analysis or somatic hybrids.

The diagnostic techniques concern the detection of specific alleles present within the human chromosome 13q31-q33 region; optionally within the Region D subregion; and optionally within an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 nucleic acid sequence. More particularly, the invention concerns the detection of a nucleic acid comprising at least one of the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or a fragment thereof or a complementary sequence thereto including the polymorphic base.

These methods involve obtaining a nucleic acid sample from the individual and, determining, whether the nucleic acid sample contains at least one allele or at least one biallelic marker haplotype, indicative of a risk of developing the trait or indicative that the individual expresses the trait as a result of possessing a particular the human chromosome 13q31-q33 region, Region D, sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related polymorphism or mutation (trait-causing allele).

Preferably, in such diagnostic methods, a nucleic acid sample is obtained from the individual and this sample is genotyped using methods described above in “Methods Of Genotyping DNA Samples For Biallelic markers.” The diagnostics may be based on a single biallelic marker or a on group of biallelic markers.

In each of these methods, a nucleic acid sample is obtained from the test subject and the biallelic marker pattern of one or more of the biallelic markers of the invention is determined.

In one embodiment, a PCR amplification is conducted on the nucleic acid sample to amplify regions in which polymorphisms associated with a detectable phenotype have been identified. The amplification products are sequenced to determine whether the individual possesses one or more human chromosome 13q31-q33 region, Region D, sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related polymorphisms associated with a detectable phenotype. The primers used to generate amplification products may comprise the primers listed in Table 6a. Alternatively, the nucleic acid sample is subjected to microsequencing reactions as described above to determine whether the individual possesses one or more human chromosome 13q31-q33 region-related polymorphisms associated with a detectable phenotype resulting from a mutation or a polymorphism in the human chromosome 13q31-q33 region, Region D, sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related biallelic marker. The primers used in the microsequencing reactions may include the primers listed in 6d. In another embodiment, the nucleic acid sample is contacted with one or more allele specific oligonucleotide probes which, specifically hybridize to one or more human chromosome 13q31-q33 region, Region D, sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related alleles associated with a detectable phenotype. The probes used in the hybridization assay may include the probes listed in Table 6c. In another embodiment, the nucleic acid sample is contacted with a second oligonucleotide capable of producing an amplification product when used with the allele specific oligonucleotide in an amplification reaction. The presence of an amplification product in the amplification reaction indicates that the individual possesses one or more human chromosome 13q31-q33 region, Region D, sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related alleles associated with a detectable phenotype.

In a preferred embodiment the identity of the nucleotide present at, at least one, biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A246, A250, A251, A253, A255, A259, A266, A268 to A232, A328 to A360 and A361 to A489 and the complements thereof, is determined and the detectable trait is schizophrenia. Diagnostic kits comprise any of the polynucleotides of the present invention.

These diagnostic methods are extremely valuable as they can, in certain circumstances, be used to initiate preventive treatments or to allow an individual carrying a significant haplotype to foresee warning signs such as minor symptoms.

Diagnostics, which analyze and predict response to a drug or side effects to a drug, may be used to determine whether an individual should be treated with a particular drug. For example, if the diagnostic indicates a likelihood that an individual will respond positively to treatment with a particular drug, the drug may be administered to the individual. Conversely, if the diagnostic indicates that an individual is likely to respond negatively to treatment with a particular drug, an alternative course of treatment may be prescribed. A negative response may be defined as either the absence of an efficacious response or the presence of toxic side effects.

Clinical drug trials represent another application for the markers of the present invention. One or more markers indicative of response to an agent acting against schizophrenia or to side effects to an agent acting against schizophrenia may be identified using the methods described above. Thereafter, potential participants in clinical trials of such an agent may be screened to identify those individuals most likely to respond favorably to the drug and exclude those likely to experience side effects. In that way, the effectiveness of drug treatment may be measured in individuals who respond positively to the drug, without lowering the measurement as a result of the inclusion of individuals who are unlikely to respond positively in the study and without risking undesirable safety problems.

Prevention, Diagnosis and Treatment of Psychiatric Disease

An aspect of the present invention relates to the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of psychiatric disease, in particular schizophrenia and bipolar disorder. The present invention embodies medicaments acting on sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018.

In preferred embodiments, medicaments of the invention act on sbg1, either directly or indirectly, by acting on the sbg1 pathways. For example, the medicaments may modulate, and more preferably decrease the level of sbg1 activity which occurs in a cell or particular tissue, or increase or descrease the activity of the sbg1 protein. In certain embodiments, the invention thus comprises use of a compound capable of increasing or decreasing sbg1 expression or sbg1 protein activity in the preparation or manufacture of a medicament. Preferably, said compound is used for the treatment of a psychiatric disease, preferably for the treatment of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder. Preferably, said compound acts directly by binding to sbg1 or an sbg1 receptor.

Such medicaments may also increase or decrease the activity of a compound analogous to sbg1, a compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 25% homology to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs. 27 to 35, a compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 50% homology to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs. 27 to 35, and a compound comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 80% homology to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs. 27 to 35.

Medicaments which increase or descrease the activity of these compounds in an individual may be used to ameliorate or prevent symptoms in individuals suffering from or predisposed to a psychiatric disease, as discussed above in the section entitled “indications”.

Alternatively, sbg1 activity may be increased or decreasing by the expression of the genes encoding the identified sbg1-modulating compounds using gene therapy. Examples of vectors and promoters suitable for use in gene therapy are described above. Sbg1 activity may also be increased or decreased by preparing an antibody which binds to an sbg1 peptide, an sbg1 receptor or a protein related thereto, as well as fragments of these proteins. Such antibodies may modulate the interaction between sbg1 and an sbg1 receptor or a protein related thereto. Antibodies and methods of obtaining them are further described herein.

As described above, the present invention provides cellular assays for identifying compounds for the treatment of psychiatric disease. The assays are based on detection of sbg1 expression, measurement of sbg1 protein activity, or based on the determination of other suitable schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or related psychiatric disease endpoints. Compounds for the treatment of psychiatric disease include derivative proteins or peptides which are capable of inhibiting the activity of a wild type sbg1 protein, which may be identified by determining their ability to bind a wild type sbg1 protein. Compounds also include antibodies, and small molecules and drugs which may be obtained using a variety of synthetic approaches familiar to those skilled in the art, including combinatorial chemistry based techniques.

The invention further encompasses said methods for the prevention, treatment, and diagnosis of disease using any of the g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 nucleic acids of proteins of the invention in analogous methods.

Sbg1 in Methods of Diagnosis or Detecting Predisposition

Individuals affected by or predisposed to schizophrenia and bipolar disorder may express abnormal levels of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018. Individuals having increased or decreased sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 activity in their plasma, body fluids, or body tissues may be at risk of developing schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or a variety of potentially related psychiatric conditions. In one aspect of the present invention is a method for determining whether an individual is at risk of suffering from or is currently suffering from schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or other psychotic disorders, mood disorders, autism, substance dependence or alcoholism, mental retardation, or other psychiatric diseases including cognitive, anxiety, eating, impulse-control, and personality disorders, as defined with the Diagnosis and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders fourth edition (DSM-IV) classification, comprising determining whether the individual has an abnormal level of sbg1 activity in plasma, body fluids, or body tissues. The level of sbg1 or analogous compounds in plasma, body fluids, or body tissues may be determined using a variety approaches. In particular, the level may be determined using ELISA, Western Blots, or protein electrophoresis.

Biallelic Markers of the Invention in Methods of Genetic Diagnostics

The biallelic markers and other polymorphisms of the present invention can also be used to develop diagnostics tests capable of identifying individuals who express a detectable trait as the result of a specific genotype or individuals whose genotype places them at risk of developing a detectable trait at a subsequent time. The trait analyzed using the present diagnostics may be used to diagnose any detectable trait, including predisposition to schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, age of onset of detectable symptoms, a beneficial response to or side effects related to treatment against schizophrenia or bipolar disorder. Such a diagnosis can be useful in the monitoring, prognosis and/or prophylactic or curative therapy for schizophrenia or bipolar disorder.

The diagnostic techniques of the present invention may employ a variety of methodologies to determine whether a test subject has a genotype associated with an increased risk of developing a detectable trait or whether the individual suffers from a detectable trait as a result of a particular mutation, including methods which enable the analysis of individual chromosomes for haplotyping, such as family studies, single sperm DNA analysis or somatic hybrids.

The diagnostic techniques concern the detection of specific alleles present within the human chromosome 13q31-q33 region; optionally within the Region D subregion; and optionally within an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 nucleic acid sequence. More particularly, the invention concerns the detection of a nucleic acid comprising at least one of the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or a fragment thereof or a complementary sequence thereto including the polymorphic base.

These methods involve obtaining a nucleic acid sample from the individual and, determining, whether the nucleic acid sample contains at least one allele or at least one biallelic marker haplotype, indicative of a risk of developing the trait or indicative that the individual expresses the trait as a result of possessing a particular the human chromosome 13q31-q33 region-related polymorphism or mutation (trait-causing allele).

Preferably, in such diagnostic methods, a nucleic acid sample is obtained from the individual and this sample is genotyped using methods described above in “Methods Of Genotyping DNA Samples For Biallelic markers.” The diagnostics may be based on a single biallelic marker or a on group of biallelic markers.

In each of these methods, a nucleic acid sample is obtained from the test subject and the biallelic marker pattern of one or more of a biallelic marker of the invention is determined.

In one embodiment, a PCR amplification is conducted on the nucleic acid sample to amplify regions in which polymorphisms associated with a detectable phenotype have been identified. The amplification products are sequenced to determine whether the individual possesses one or more human chromosome 13q31-q33 region, Region D, sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related polymorphisms associated with a detectable phenotype. The primers used to generate amplification products may comprise the primers listed in Table 6a. Alternatively, the nucleic acid sample is subjected to microsequencing reactions as described above to determine whether the individual possesses one or more human chromosome 13q31-q33 region, Region D, sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related polymorphisms associated with a detectable phenotype resulting from a mutation or a polymorphism in the human chromosome 13q31-q33 region. The primers used in the microsequencing reactions may include the primers listed in Table 6d. In another embodiment, the nucleic acid sample is contacted with one or more allele specific oligonucleotide probes which, specifically hybridize to one or more human chromosome 13q31-q33 region, Region D, sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related alleles associated with a detectable phenotype. The probes used in the hybridization assay may include the probes listed in 6b. In another embodiment, the nucleic acid sample is contacted with a second oligonucleotide capable of producing an amplification product when used with the allele specific oligonucleotide in an amplification reaction. The presence of an amplification product in the amplification reaction indicates that the individual possesses one or more human chromosome 13q31-q33 region, Region D, sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related alleles associated with a detectable phenotype. In a preferred embodiment, the detectable trait is schizophrenia or bipolar disorder. Diagnostic kits comprise any of the polynucleotides of the present invention.

These diagnostic methods are extremely valuable as they can, in certain circumstances, be used to initiate preventive treatments or to allow an individual carrying a significant haplotype to foresee warning signs such as minor symptoms.

Diagnostics, which analyze and predict response to a drug or side effects to a drug, may be used to determine whether an individual should be treated with a particular drug. For example, if the diagnostic indicates a likelihood that an individual will respond positively to treatment with a particular drug, the drug may be administered to the individual. Conversely, if the diagnostic indicates that an individual is likely to respond negatively to treatment with a particular drug, an alternative course of treatment may be prescribed. A negative response may be defined as either the absence of an efficacious response or the presence of toxic side effects.

Clinical drug trials represent another application for the markers of the present invention. One or more markers indicative of response to an agent acting against schizophrenia or to side effects to an agent acting against schizophrenia may be identified using the methods described above. Thereafter, potential participants in clinical trials of such an agent may be screened to identify those individuals most likely to respond favorably to the drug and exclude those likely to experience side effects. In that way, the effectiveness of drug treatment may be measured in individuals who respond positively to the drug, without lowering the measurement as a result of the inclusion of individuals who are unlikely to respond positively in the study and without risking undesirable safety problems.

Prevention and Treatment of Disease Using Biallelic Markers

In large part because of the risk of suicide, the detection of susceptibility to schizophrenia, bipolar disorder as well as other psychiatric disease in individuals is very important. Consequently, the invention concerns a method for the treatment of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, or a related disorder comprising the following steps:

-   selecting an individual whose DNA comprises alleles of a biallelic     marker or of a group of biallelic markers of the human chromosome     13q31-q33 region, preferably Region D-related markers, and more     preferably sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related markers     associated with schizophrenia or bipolar disorder;     -   following up said individual for the appearance (and optionally         the development) of the symptoms related to schizophrenia or         bipolar disorder; and -   administering a treatment acting against schizophrenia or bipolar     disorder or against symptoms thereof to said individual at an     appropriate stage of the disease.

Another embodiment of the present invention comprises a method for the treatment of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder comprising the following steps:

-   -   selecting an individual whose DNA comprises alleles of a         biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers, of the         human chromosome 13q31-q33 region, preferably Region D-related         markers, and more preferably sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or         g35018-related markers associated with schizophrenia or bipolar         disorder;     -   administering a preventive treatment of schizophrenia or bipolar         disorder to said individual.

In a further embodiment, the present invention concerns a method for the treatment of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder comprising the following steps:

-   -   selecting an individual whose DNA comprises alleles of a         biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers of the human         chromosome 13q31-q33, preferably Region D-related markers, and         more preferably sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related         markers associated with schizophrenia or bipolar disorder;     -   administering a preventive treatment of schizophrenia or bipolar         disorder to said individual;     -   following up said individual for the appearance and the         development of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder symptoms; and         optionally     -   administering a treatment acting against schizophrenia or         bipolar disorder or against symptoms thereof to said individual         at the appropriate stage of the disease.

For use in the determination of the course of treatment of an individual suffering from disease, the present invention also concerns a method for the treatment of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder comprising the following steps:

-   -   selecting an individual suffering from schizophrenia or bipolar         disorder whose DNA comprises alleles of a biallelic marker or of         a group of biallelic markers of the human chromosome 13q31-q33         region, preferably Region D-related markers, and preferably         sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related markers, associated         with the gravity of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder or of the         symptoms thereof; and     -   administering a treatment acting against schizophrenia or         bipolar disorder or symptoms thereof to said individual.

The invention also concerns a method for the treatment of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder in a selected population of individuals. The method comprises:

-   -   selecting an individual suffering from schizophrenia or bipolar         disorder and whose DNA comprises alleles of a biallelic marker         or of a group of biallelic markers of the human chromosome         13q31-q33 region, preferably Region D-related markers, and more         preferably sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related markers         associated with a positive response to treatment with an         effective amount of a medicament acting against schizophrenia or         bipolar disorder or symptoms thereof,     -   and/or whose DNA does not comprise alleles of a biallelic marker         or of a group of biallelic markers of the human chromosome         13q31-q33 region, preferably Region D-related markers, and more         preferably sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-related markers         associated with a negative response to treatment with said         medicament; and     -   administering at suitable intervals an effective amount of said         medicament to said selected individual.

In the context of the present invention, a “positive response” to a medicament can be defined as comprising a reduction of the symptoms related to the disease. In the context of the present invention, a “negative response” to a medicament can be defined as comprising either a lack of positive response to the medicament which does not lead to a symptom reduction or which leads to a side-effect observed following administration of the medicament.

The invention also relates to a method of determining whether a subject is likely to respond positively to treatment with a medicament. The method comprises identifying a first population of individuals who respond positively to said medicament and a second population of individuals who respond negatively to said medicament. One or more biallelic markers is identified in the first population which is associated with a positive response to said medicament or one or more biallelic markers is identified in the second population which is associated with a negative response to said medicament. The biallelic markers may be identified using the techniques described herein.

A DNA sample is then obtained from the subject to be tested. The DNA sample is analyzed to determine whether it comprises alleles of one or more biallelic markers associated with a positive response to treatment with the medicament and/or alleles of one or more biallelic markers associated with a negative response to treatment with the medicament.

In some embodiments, the medicament may be administered to the subject in a clinical trial if the DNA sample contains alleles of one or more biallelic markers associated with a positive response to treatment with the medicament and/or if the DNA sample lacks alleles of one or more biallelic markers associated with a negative response to treatment with the medicament. In preferred embodiments, the medicament is a drug acting against schizophrenia or bipolar disorder.

Using the method of the present invention, the evaluation of drug efficacy may be conducted in a population of individuals likely to respond favorably to the medicament.

Another aspect of the invention is a method of using a medicament comprising obtaining a DNA sample from a subject, determining whether the DNA sample contains alleles of one or more biallelic markers associated with a positive response to the medicament and/or whether the DNA sample contains alleles of one or more biallelic markers associated with a negative response to the medicament, and administering the medicament to the subject if the DNA sample contains alleles of one or more biallelic markers associated with a positive response to the medicament and/or if the DNA sample lacks alleles of one or more biallelic markers associated with a negative response to the medicament.

The invention also concerns a method for the clinical testing of a medicament, preferably a medicament acting against schizophrenia or or bipolar disorder or symptoms thereof. The method comprises the following steps:

-   -   administering a medicament, preferably a medicament susceptible         of acting against schizophrenia or or bipolar disorder or         symptoms thereof to a heterogeneous population of individuals,     -   identifying a first population of individuals who respond         positively to said medicament and a second population of         individuals who respond negatively to said medicament,     -   identifying biallelic markers in said first population which are         associated with a positive response to said medicament,     -   selecting individuals whose DNA comprises biallelic markers         associated with a positive response to said medicament, and     -   administering said medicament to said individuals.

In any of the methods for the prevention, diagnosis and treatment of schizophrenia and bipolar disorder, including methods of using a medicament, clinical testing of a medicament, determining whether a subject is likely to respond positively to treatment with a medicament, said biallelic marker may optionally comprise:

-   -   (a) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         biallelic markers A1 to A489;     -   (b) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         biallelic markers A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to         A106, A108 to A12, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222,         A224 to A242, A250 to A251, A259, A269 to A270, A278, A285 to         A295, A303 to A307, A330, A334 to A335 and A346 to 357     -   (c) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         biallelic markers A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to         A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222,         A224 to A246, A250, A251, A253, A255, A259, A266, A268 to A232         and A328 to A489.     -   (d) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         sbg1-related markers A85 to A219, or more preferably a biallelic         marker selected from the group consisting of sbg1-related         markers A85 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112, A114 to A177,         A179 to A197 and A199 to A219;     -   (e) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         g34665-related markers A230 to A236;     -   (f) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         sbg2-related markers A79 to A99;     -   (g) the g35017-related biallelic marker A41;     -   (h) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         g35018-related markers A1 to A39;     -   (i) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         A239, A227, A198, A228, A223, A107, A218, A270, A75, A62, A65         and A70;     -   (j) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         A48, A60, A61, A62, A65, A70, A75, A76, A80, A107, A108, A198,         A218, A221, A223, A227, A228, A239, A285, A286, A287, A288,         A290, A292, A293, A295, A299 and A304;     -   (k) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         A304, A307, A305, A298, A292, A293, A291, A287, A286, A288,         A289, A290, 99-A295 A299. A241, A239, A228, A227, A223, A221,         A218, A198, A178, 99-24649/186 A108, A107, A80, A75, A70, A65,         and A62; and/or     -   (l) a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of         A304, A307, A305, A298, A292, A293, A291, A287, A286, A288,         A289, A290, A295 A299, A241, A239, A228, A227, A223, A221, A218,         A198, A178, A108, A107, A80, A76, A75, A70, A65, A62, A61, A60         A48.

Such methods are deemed to be extremely useful to increase the benefit/risk ratio resulting from the administration of medicaments which may cause undesirable side effects and/or be inefficacious to a portion of the patient population to which it is normally administered.

Once an individual has been diagnosed as suffering from schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, selection tests are carried out to determine whether the DNA of this individual comprises alleles of a biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers associated with a positive response to treatment or with a negative response to treatment which may include either side effects or unresponsiveness.

The selection of the patient to be treated using the method of the present invention can be carried out through the detection methods described above. The individuals which are to be selected are preferably those whose DNA does not comprise alleles of a biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers associated with a negative response to treatment. The knowledge of an individual's genetic predisposition to unresponsiveness or side effects to particular medicaments allows the clinician to direct treatment toward appropriate drugs against schizophrenia or bipolar disorder or symptoms thereof.

Once the patient's genetic predispositions have been determined, the clinician can select appropriate treatment for which negative response, particularly side effects, has not been reported or has been reported only marginally for the patient.

The biallelic markers of the invention have demonstrated an association with schizophrenia and bipolar disorders. However, the present invention also comprises any of the prevention, diagnostic, prognosis and treatment methods described herein using the biallelic markers of the invention in methods of preventing, diagnosing, managing and treating related disorders, particularly related CNS disorders. By way of example, related disorders may comprise psychotic disorders, mood disorders, autism, substance dependence and alcoholism, mental retardation, and other psychiatric diseases including cognitive, anxiety, eating, impulse-control, and personality disorders, as defined with the Diagnosis and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders fourth edition (DSM-IV) classification”.

Recombinant Vectors

The term “vector” is used herein to designate either a circular or a linear DNA or RNA molecule, which is either double-stranded or single-stranded, and which comprise at least one polynucleotide of interest that is sought to be transferred in a cell host or in a unicellular or multicellular host organism.

The present invention encompasses a family of recombinant vectors that comprise a polynucleotide derived from an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 nucleic acid sequence. Consequently, the present invention further comprises recombinant vectors comprising:

-   -   (a) sbg1 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids of         any of nucleotide positions 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975,         216661 to 216952, 216661 to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647 to         229742, 230408 to 230721, 231272 to 231412, 231787 to 231880,         231870 to 231879, 234174 to 234321, 237406 to 237428, 239719 to         239807, 239719 to 239853, 240528 to 240569, 240528 to 240596,         240528 to 240617, 240528 to 240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to         240994, 240528 to 241685 and 240800 to 240993 of SEQ ID No. 1,         SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26 and primate sbg1 DNAs of SEQ ID Nos 54 to         111, and the complements thereof;     -   (b) g34665 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids         of any of nucleotide positions 292653 to 292841, 295555 to         296047 and 295580 to 296047 of SEQ ID No. 1, and the complements         thereof;     -   (c) sbg2 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids of         any of nucleotide positions 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793,         215702 to 215746 and 216836 to 216915 of SEQ ID No. 1, and the         complements thereof;     -   (d) g35017 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids         of any of nucleotide positions 94124 to 94964 of SEQ ID No. 1,         and the complements thereof;     -   (e) g35018 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids         of any of nucleotide positions 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920,         18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282,         64666 to 64812, and 65505 to 65853 of SEQ ID No. 1, and the         complements thereof.

Generally, a recombinant vector of the invention may comprise any of the polynucleotides described herein, as well as any sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 primer or probe as defined above.

In a first preferred embodiment, a recombinant vector of the invention is used to amplify the inserted polynucleotide derived from an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 genomic sequence or cDNA of the invention in a suitable cell host, this polynucleotide being amplified at every time that the recombinant vector replicates.

A second preferred embodiment of the recombinant vectors according to the invention comprises expression vectors comprising either a regulatory polynucleotide or a coding nucleic acid of the invention, or both. Within certain embodiments, expression vectors are employed to express an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide which can be then purified and, for example be used in ligand screening assays or as an immunogen in order to raise specific antibodies directed against an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein. In other embodiments, the expression vectors are used for constructing transgenic animals and also for gene therapy. Expression requires that appropriate signals are provided in the vectors, said signals including various regulatory elements, such as enhancers/promoters from both viral and mammalian sources that drive expression of the genes of interest in host cells. Dominant drug selection markers for establishing permanent, stable cell clones expressing the products are generally included in the expression vectors of the invention, as they are elements that link expression of the drug selection markers to expression of the polypeptide.

More particularly, the present invention relates to expression vectors which include nucleic acids encoding an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or variants or fragments thereof, under the control of a regulatory sequence of the respective sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 regulatory polynucleotides, or alternatively under the control of an exogenous regulatory sequence.

The invention also pertains to a recombinant expression vector useful for the expression of a sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA sequence.

Recombinant vectors comprising a nucleic acid containing a human chromosome 13q31-33-related biallelic marker, preferably a Region D-related biallelic marker or more preferably an sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related biallelic marker is also part of the invention. In a preferred embodiment, said biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A1 to A489, and the complements thereof.

Some of the elements which can be found in the vectors of the present invention are described in further detail in the following sections.

1. General Features of the Expression Vectors of the Invention

A recombinant vector according to the invention comprises, but is not limited to, a YAC (Yeast Artificial Chromosome), a BAC (Bacterial Artificial Chromosome), a phage, a phagemid, a cosmid, a plasmid or even a linear DNA molecule which may comprise a chromosomal, non-chromosomal, semi-synthetic and synthetic DNA. Such a recombinant vector can comprise a transcriptional unit comprising an assembly of:

-   -   (1) a genetic element or elements having a regulatory role in         gene expression, for example promoters or enhancers. Enhancers         are cis-acting elements of DNA, usually from about 10 to 300 bp         in length that act on the promoter to increase the         transcription.     -   (2) a structural or coding sequence which is transcribed into         mRNA and eventually translated into a polypeptide, said         structural or coding sequence being operably linked to the         regulatory elements described in (1); and     -   (3) appropriate transcription initiation and termination         sequences. Structural units intended for use in yeast or         eukaryotic expression systems preferably include a leader         sequence enabling extracellular secretion of translated protein         by a host cell. Alternatively, when a recombinant protein is         expressed without a leader or transport sequence, it may include         a N-terminal residue. This residue may or may not be         subsequently cleaved from the expressed recombinant protein to         provide a final product.

Generally, recombinant expression vectors will include origins of replication, selectable markers permitting transformation of the host cell, and a promoter derived from a highly expressed gene to direct transcription of a downstream structural sequence. The heterologous structural sequence is assembled in appropriate phase with translation initiation and termination sequences, and preferably a leader sequence capable of directing secretion of the translated protein into the periplasmic space or the extracellular medium. In a specific embodiment wherein the vector is adapted for transfecting and expressing desired sequences in mammalian host cells, preferred vectors will comprise an origin of replication in the desired host, a suitable promoter and enhancer, and also any necessary ribosome binding sites, polyadenylation site, splice donor and acceptor sites, transcriptional termination sequences, and 5′-flanking non-transcribed sequences. DNA sequences derived from the SV40 viral genome, for example SV40 origin, early promoter, enhancer, splice and polyadenylation sites may be used to provide the required non-transcribed genetic elements.

The in vivo expression of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide or fragments or variants thereof may be useful in order to correct a genetic defect related to the expression of the native gene in a host organism or to the production of a biologically inactive sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein.

Consequently, the present invention also comprises recombinant expression vectors mainly designed for the in vivo production of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide by the introduction of the appropriate genetic material in the organism of the patient to be treated. In preferred embodiments, said genetic material comprises at least one nucleotide sequence selected from the group of nucleotide posittion ranges consisting of:

-   -   (a) sbg1 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids of         any of nucleotide positions 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975,         216661 to 216952, 216661 to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647 to         229742, 230408 to 230721, 231272 to 231412, 231787 to 231880,         231870 to 231879, 234174 to 234321, 237406 to 237428, 239719 to         239807, 239719 to 239853, 240528 to 240569, 240528 to 240596,         240528 to 240617, 240528 to 240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to         240994, 240528 to 241685 and 240800 to 240993 of SEQ ID No. 1,         SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26 and primate sbg1 DNAs of SEQ ID Nos. 54 to         111, and the complements thereof;     -   (b) g34665 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids         of any of nucleotide positions 292653 to 292841, 295555 to         296047 and 295580 to 296047 of SEQ ID No. 1, and the complements         thereof;     -   (c) sbg2 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids of         any of nucleotide positions 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793,         215702 to 215746 and 216836 to 216915 of SEQ ID No. 1, and the         complements thereof;     -   (d) g35017 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids         of any of nucleotide positions 94124 to 94964 of SEQ ID No. 1,         and the complements thereof; and     -   (e) g35018 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids         of any of nucleotide positions 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920,         18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282,         64666 to 64812, and 65505 to 65853 of SEQ ID No. 1, and the         complements thereof.

This genetic material may be introduced in vitro in a cell that has been previously extracted from the organism, the modified cell being subsequently reintroduced in the said organism, directly in vivo into the appropriate tissue.

2. Regulatory Elements

Promoters

The suitable promoter regions used in the expression vectors according to the present invention are chosen taking into account the cell host in which the heterologous gene has to be expressed. The particular promoter employed to control the expression of a nucleic acid sequence of interest is not believed to be important, so long as it is capable of directing the expression of the nucleic acid in the targeted cell. Thus, where a human cell is targeted, it is preferable to position the nucleic acid coding region adjacent to and under the control of a promoter that is capable of being expressed in a human cell, such as, for example, a human or a viral promoter.

A suitable promoter may be heterologous with respect to the nucleic acid for which it controls the expression or alternatively can be endogenous to the native polynucleotide containing the coding sequence to be expressed. Additionally, the promoter is generally heterologous with respect to the recombinant vector sequences within which the construct promoter/coding sequence has been inserted.

Promoter regions can be selected from any desired gene using, for example, CAT (chloramphenicol transferase) vectors and more preferably pKK232-8 and pCM7 vectors.

Preferred bacterial promoters are the LacI, LacZ, the T3 or T7 bacteriophage RNA polymerase promoters, the gpt, lambda PR, PL and trp promoters (EP 0036776, incorporated herein by reference), the polyhedrin promoter, or the p 10 protein promoter from baculovirus (Kit Novagen) (Smith et al., 1983; O'Reilly et al., 1992, each incorporated herein by reference), the lambda PR promoter or also the trc promoter.

Eukaryotic promoters include CMV immediate early, HSV thymidine kinase, early and late SV40, LTRs from retrovirus, and mouse metallothionein-L. Selection of a convenient vector and promoter is well within the level of ordinary skill in the art.

The choice of a promoter is well within the ability of a person skilled in the field of genetic engineering. For example, one may refer to the book of Sambrook et al. (1989) or also to the procedures described by Fuller et al. (1996), incorporated herein by reference.

Other Regulatory Elements

One will typically desire to include a polyadenylation signal to effect proper polyadenylation of the gene transcript. The nature of the polyadenylation signal is not believed to be crucial to the successful practice of the invention, and any such sequence may be employed such as human growth hormone and SV40 polyadenylation signals. Also contemplated as an element of the expression cassette is a terminator. These elements can serve to enhance message levels and to minimize read through from the cassette into other sequences.

The vector containing the appropriate DNA sequence as described above, more preferably an sbg1 gene regulatory polynucleotide, a polynucleotide encoding an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide comprising at least one nucleotide sequence selected from the group of nucleotide sequence ranges consisting of:

-   -   (a) sbg1 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids of         any of nucleotide positions 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975,         216661 to 216952, 216661 to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647 to         229742, 230408 to 230721, 231272 to 231412, 231787 to 231880,         231870 to 231879, 234174 to 234321, 237406 to 237428, 239719 to         239807, 239719 to 239853, 240528 to 240569, 240528 to 240596,         240528 to 240617, 240528 to 240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to         240994, 240528 to 241685 and 240800 to 240993 of SEQ ID No. 1,         SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26 and primate sbg1 DNAs or SEQ ID Nos. 54 to         111, and the complements thereof;     -   (b) g34665 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids         of any of nucleotide positions 292653 to 292841, 295555 to         296047 and 295580 to 296047 of SEQ ID No. 1, and the complements         thereof;     -   (c) sbg2 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids of         any of nucleotide positions 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793,         215702 to 215746 and 216836 to 216915 of SEQ ID No. 1, and the         complements thereof;     -   (d) g35017 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids         of any of nucleotide positions 94124 to 94964 of SEQ ID No. 1,         and the complements thereof;     -   (e) g35018 genomic DNA or cDNAs comprised in the nucleic acids         of any of nucleotide positions 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920,         18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282,         64666 to 64812, and 65505 to 65853 of SEQ ID No. 1, and the         complements thereof.

3. Selectable Markers

Such markers would confer an identifiable change to the cell permitting easy identification of cells containing the expression construct. The selectable marker genes for selection of transformed host cells are preferably dihydrofolate reductase or neomycin resistance for eukaryotic cell culture, TRP I for S. cerevisiae or tetracycline, rifampicin or ampicillin resistance in E. coli, or levan saccharase for mycobacteria, this latter marker being a negative selection marker.

4. Preferred Vectors.

Bacterial Vectors

As a representative but non-limiting example, useful expression vectors for bacterial use can comprise a selectable marker and a bacterial origin of replication derived from commercially available plasmids comprising genetic elements of pBR322 (ATCC 37017). Such commercial vectors include, for example, pKK223-3 (Pharmacia, Uppsala, Sweden), and GEM1 (Promega Biotec, Madison, Wis., USA).

Large numbers of other suitable vectors are known to those of skill in the art, and commercially available, such as the following bacterial vectors: pQE70, pQE60, pQE-9 (Qiagen), pbs, pD10, phagescript, psiX174, pbluescript SK, pbsks, pNH8A, pNH16A, pNH18A, pNH46A (Stratagene); ptrc99a, pKK223-3, pKK233-3, pDR540, pRIT5 (Pharmacia); pWLNEO, pSV2CAT, pOG44, pXT1, pSG (Stratagene); pSVK3, pBPV, pMSG, pSVL (Pharmacia); pQE-30 (QIAexpress).

Bacteriophage Vectors

The P1 bacteriophage vector may contain large inserts ranging from about 80 to about 100 kb.

The construction of P1 bacteriophage vectors such as p158 or p58/neo8 are notably described by Sternberg (1992, 1994), each incorporated herein by reference. Recombinant P1 clones comprising sbg1 polynucleotide sequences may be designed for inserting large polynucleotides of more than 40 kb (Linton et al., 1993, incorporated herein by reference). To generate P1 DNA for transgenic experiments, a preferred protocol is the protocol described by McCormick et al. (1994), incorporated herein by reference. Briefly, E. coli (preferably strain NS3529) harboring the P1 plasmid are grown overnight in a suitable broth medium containing 25 μg/ml of kanamycin. The P1 DNA is prepared from the E. coli by alkaline lysis using the Qiagen Plasmid Maxi kit (Qiagen, Chatsworth, Calif., USA), according to the manufacturer's instructions. The P1 DNA is purified from the bacterial lysate on two Qiagen-tip 500 columns, using the washing and elution buffers contained in the kit. A phenol/chloroform extraction is then performed before precipitating the DNA with 70% ethanol. After solubilizing the DNA in TE (10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.4, 1 mM EDTA), the concentration of the DNA is assessed by spectrophotometry.

When the goal is to express a P1 clone comprising an sbg1 polynucleotide sequence in a transgenic animal, typically in transgenic mice, it is desirable to remove vector sequences from the P1 DNA fragment, for example by cleaving the P1 DNA at rare-cutting sites within the P1 polylinker (Sfil, NotI or SalI). The P1 insert is then purified from vector sequences on a pulsed-field agarose gel, using methods similar using methods similar to those originally reported for the isolation of DNA from YACs (Schedl et al., 1993a; Peterson et al., 1993, each incorporated herein by reference). At this stage, the resulting purified insert DNA can be concentrated, if necessary, on a Millipore Ultrafree-MC Filter Unit (Milipore, Bedford, Mass., USA −30,000 molecular weight limit) and then dialyzed against microinjection buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.4; 250 μM EDTA) containing 100 mM NaCl, 30 μM spermine, 70 μM spermidine on a microdyalisis membrane (type VS, 0.025 μM from Millipore). The intactness of the purified P1 DNA insert is assessed by electrophoresis on 1% agarose (Sea Kem GTG; FMC Bio-products) pulse-field gel and staining with ethidium bromide.

Baculovirus Vectors

A suitable vector for the expression of an sbg1 polypeptide encoded by polynucleotides of SEQ ID No. 1 or fragments or variants thereof is a baculovirus vector that can be propagated in insect cells and in insect cell lines. A specific suitable host vector system is the pVL1392/1393 baculovirus transfer vector (Pharmingen) that is used to transfect the SF9 cell line (ATCC N°CRL 1711) which is derived from Spodoptera frugiperda.

Other suitable vectors for the expression of the sbg1 polypeptide encoded by the SEQ ID No. 1 or fragments or variants thereof in a baculovirus expression system include those described by Chai et al. (1993), Vlasak et al. (1983) and Lenhard et al. (1996), the disclosures of each of which are incorporated herein by reference.

Viral Vectors

In one specific embodiment, the vector is derived from an adenovirus. Preferred adenovirus vectors according to the invention are those described by Feldman and Steg (1996) or Ohno et al. (1994), the disclosures of each of which are incorporated herein by reference. Another preferred recombinant adenovirus according to this specific embodiment of the present invention is the human adenovirus type 2 or 5 (Ad 2 or Ad 5) or an adenovirus of animal origin (French patent application N° FR-93.05954, incorporated herein by reference).

Retrovirus vectors and adeno-associated virus vectors are generally understood to be the recombinant gene delivery systems of choice for the transfer of exogenous polynucleotides in vivo, particularly to mammals, including humans. These vectors provide efficient delivery of genes into cells, and the transferred nucleic acids are stably integrated into the chromosomal DNA of the host.

Particularly preferred retroviruses for the preparation or construction of retroviral in vitro or in vitro gene delivery vehicles of the present invention include retroviruses selected from the group consisting of Mink-Cell Focus Inducing Virus, Murine Sarcoma Virus, Reticuloendotheliosis virus and Rous Sarcoma virus. Particularly preferred Murine Leukemia Viruses include the 4070A and the 1504A viruses, Abelson (ATCC No VR-999), Friend (ATCC No VR-245), Gross (ATCC No VR-590), Rauscher (ATCC No VR-998) and Moloney Murine Leukemia Virus (ATCC No VR-190; PCT Application No WO 94/24298). Particularly preferred Rous Sarcoma Viruses include Bryan high titer (ATCC Nos VR-334, VR-657, VR-726, VR-659 and VR-728). Other preferred retroviral vectors are those described in Roth et al. (1996), PCT Application No WO 93/25234, PCT Application No WO 94/06920, Roux et al., 1989, Julan et al., 1992 and Neda et al., 1991. Each of the above disclosures are incorporated herein by reference.

Yet another viral vector system that is contemplated by the invention comprises the adeno-associated virus (AAV). The adeno-associated virus is a naturally occurring defective virus that requires another virus, such as an adenovirus or a herpes virus, as a helper virus for efficient replication and a productive life cycle (Muzyczka et al., 1992, incorporated herein by reference). It is also one of the few viruses that may integrate its DNA into non-dividing cells, and exhibits a high frequency of stable integration (Flotte et al., 1992; Samulski et al., 1989; McLaughlin et al., 1989, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference). One advantageous feature of AAV derives from its reduced efficacy for transducing primary cells relative to transformed cells.

BAC Vectors

The bacterial artificial chromosome (BAC) cloning system (Shizuya et al., 1992, incorporated herein by reference) has been developed to stably maintain large fragments of genomic DNA (100-300 kb) in E. coli. A preferred BAC vector comprises pBeloBAC11 vector that has been described by Kim et al. (1996), incorporated herein by reference. BAC libraries are prepared with this vector using size-selected genomic DNA that has been partially digested using enzymes that permit ligation into either the Bam HI or HindIII sites in the vector. Flanking these cloning sites are T7 and SP6 RNA polymerase transcription initiation sites that can be used to generate end probes by either RNA transcription or PCR methods. After the construction of a BAC library in E. coli, BAC DNA is purified from the host cell as a supercoiled circle. Converting these circular molecules into a linear form precedes both size determination and introduction of the BACs into recipient cells. The cloning site is flanked by two Not I sites, permitting cloned segments to be excised from the vector by Not I digestion. Alternatively, the DNA insert contained in the pBeloBAC11 vector may be linearized by treatment of the BAC vector with the commercially available enzyme lambda terminase that leads to the cleavage at the unique cosN site, but this cleavage method results in a full length BAC clone containing both the insert DNA and the BAC sequences.

5. Delivery of the Recombinant Vectors

In order to effect expression of the polynucleotides and polynucleotide constructs of the invention, these constructs must be delivered into a cell. This delivery may be accomplished in vitro, as in laboratory procedures for transforming cell lines, or in vivo or ex vivo, as in the treatment of certain diseases states.

One mechanism is viral infection where the expression construct is encapsulated in an infectious viral particle.

Several non-viral methods for the transfer of polynucleotides into cultured mammalian cells are also contemplated by the present invention, and include, without being limited to, calcium phosphate precipitation (Graham et al., 1973; Chen et al., 1987), DEAE-dextran (Gopal, 1985), electroporation (Tur-Kaspa et al., 1986; Potter et al., 1984), direct microinjection (Harland et al., 1985), DNA-loaded liposomes (Nicolau et al., 1982; Fraley et al., 1979), and receptor-mediated transfection (Wu and Wu, 1987; 1988). Some of these techniques may be successfully adapted for in vivo or ex vivo use. The disclosures of each of these publications are incorporated herein by reference.

Once the expression polynucleotide has been delivered into the cell, it may be stably integrated into the genome of the recipient cell. This integration may be in the cognate location and orientation via homologous recombination (gene replacement) or it may be integrated in a random, non specific location (gene augmentation). In yet further embodiments, the nucleic acid may be stably maintained in the cell as a separate, episomal segment of DNA. Such nucleic acid segments or “episomes” encode sequences sufficient to permit maintenance and replication independent of or in synchronization with the host cell cycle.

One specific embodiment for a method for delivering a protein or peptide to the interior of a cell of a vertebrate in vivo comprises the step of introducing a preparation comprising a physiologically acceptable carrier and a naked polynucleotide operatively coding for the polypeptide of interest into the interstitial space of a tissue comprising the cell, whereby the naked polynucleotide is taken up into the interior of the cell and has a physiological effect. This is particularly applicable for transfer in vitro but it may be applied to in vivo as well.

Compositions for use in vitro and in vivo comprising a “naked” polynucleotide are described in PCT application N° WO 90/11092 (Vical Inc.) and also in PCT application No. WO 95/11307 (Institut Pasteur, INSERM, Université d'Ottawa) as well as in the articles of Tacson et al. (1996) and of Huygen et al. (1996), the disclosures of which are all incorporated herein by reference.

In still another embodiment of the invention, the transfer of a naked polynucleotide of the invention, including a polynucleotide construct of the invention, into cells may be proceeded with a particle bombardment (biolistic), said particles being DNA-coated microprojectiles accelerated to a high velocity allowing them to pierce cell membranes and enter cells without killing them, such as described by Klein et al. (1987), incorporated herein by reference.

In a further embodiment, the polynucleotide of the invention may be entrapped in a liposome (Ghosh and Bacchawat, 1991; Wong et al., 1980; Nicolau et al., 1987) the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.

In a specific embodiment, the invention provides a composition for the in vivo production of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 protein or polypeptide described herein. It comprises a naked polynucleotide operatively coding for this polypeptide, in solution in a physiologically acceptable carrier, and suitable for introduction into a tissue to cause cells of the tissue to express the said protein or polypeptide.

The amount of vector to be injected to the desired host organism varies according to the site of injection. As an indicative dose, it will be injected between 0, 1 and 100 μg of the vector in an animal body, preferably a mammal body, for example a mouse body.

In another embodiment of the vector according to the invention, it may be introduced in vitro in a host cell, preferably in a host cell previously harvested from the animal to be treated and more preferably a somatic cell such as a muscle cell. In a subsequent step, the cell that has been transformed with the vector coding for the desired sbg1 polypeptide or the desired fragment thereof is reintroduced into the animal body in order to deliver the recombinant protein within the body either locally or systemically.

Cell Hosts

Another object of the invention comprises a host cell that have been transformed or transfected with one of the polynucleotides described herein, and more precisely a polynucleotide comprising an sbg1 polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, or a fragment or a variant thereof. Are included host cells that are transformed (prokaryotic cells) or that are transfected (eukaryotic cells) with a recombinant vector such as one of those described above.

Generally, a recombinant host cell of the invention comprises any one of the polynucleotides or the recombinant vectors described therein.

Preferred host cells used as recipients for the expression vectors of the invention are the following:

-   -   a) Prokaryotic host cells: Escherichia coli strains (I.E.DH5-α         strain), Bacillus subtilis, Salmonella typhimurium, and strains         from species like Pseudomonas, Streptomyces and Staphylococcus.     -   b) Eukaryotic host cells: HeLa cells (ATCC N°CCL2; N°CCL2.1;         N°CCL2.2), Cv 1 cells (ATCC N°CCL70), COS cells (ATCC N°CRL1650;         N°CRL 1651), Sf-9 cells (ATCC N°CRL1711), C127 cells (ATCC N°         CRL-1804), 3T3 (ATCC N° CRL-6361), CHO (ATCC N° CCL-61), human         kidney 293. (ATCC N° 45504; N° CRL-1573) and BHK (ECACC N°         84100501; N° 84111301).     -   c) Other mammalian host cells.

Sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 gene expression in mammalian, and typically human, cells may be rendered defective with the replacement of an sbg1 nucleic acid counterpart in the genome of an animal cell by an sbg1 polynucleotide according to the invention. These genetic alterations may be generated by homologous recombination events using specific DNA constructs that have been previously described.

One kind of cell hosts that may be used are mammal zygotes, such as murine zygotes. For example, murine zygotes may undergo microinjection with a purified DNA molecule of interest, for example a purified DNA molecule that has previously been adjusted to a concentration range from 1 ng/ml—for BAC inserts—3 ng/ml—for P1 bacteriophage inserts—in 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.4, 250 μM EDTA containing 100 mM NaCl, 30 μM spermine, and 70 μM spermidine. When the DNA to be microinjected has a large size, polyamines and high salt concentrations can be used in order to avoid mechanical breakage of this DNA, as described by Schedl et al (1993b), the disclosure of which is all incorporated herein by reference.

Any of the polynucleotides of the invention, including the DNA constructs described herein, may be introduced in an embryonic stem (ES) cell line, preferably a mouse ES cell line. ES cell lines are derived from pluripotent, uncommitted cells of the inner cell mass of pre-implantation blastocysts. Preferred ES cell lines are the following: ES-E14TG2a (ATCC n° CRL-1821), ES-D3 (ATCC n° CRL1934 and n° CRL-11632), YS001 (ATCC n° CRL-11776), 36.5 (ATCC n° CRL-11116). To maintain ES cells in an uncommitted state, they are cultured in the presence of growth inhibited feeder cells which provide the appropriate signals to preserve this embryonic phenotype and serve as a matrix for ES cell adherence. Preferred feeder cells are primary embryonic fibroblasts that are established from tissue of day 13-day 14 embryos of virtually any mouse strain, that are maintained in culture, such as described by Abbondanzo et al. (1993) and are inhibited in growth by irradiation, such as described by Robertson (1987), or by the presence of an inhibitory concentration of LIF, such as described by Pease and Williams (1990), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.

The constructs in the host cells can be used in a conventional manner to produce the gene product encoded by the recombinant sequence.

Following transformation of a suitable host and growth of the host to an appropriate cell density, the selected promoter is induced by appropriate means, such as temperature shift or chemical induction, and cells are cultivated for an additional period.

Cells are typically harvested by centrifugation, disrupted by physical or chemical means, and the resulting crude extract retained for further purification.

Microbial cells employed in the expression of proteins can be disrupted by any convenient method, including freeze-thaw cycling, sonication, mechanical disruption, or use of cell lysing agents. Such methods are well known by the skill artisan.

Transgenic Animals

The terms “transgenic animals” or “host animals” are used herein designate animals that have their genome genetically and artificially manipulated so as to include one of the nucleic acids according to the invention. Preferred animals are non-human mammals and include those belonging to a genus selected from Mus (e.g. mice), Rattus (e.g. rats) and Oryctogalus (e.g. rabbits) which have their genome artificially and genetically altered by the insertion of a nucleic acid according to the invention. In one embodiment, the invention encompasses non-human host mammals and animals comprising a recombinant vector of the invention or an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene disrupted by homologous recombination with a knock out vector. The invention also encompasses non-human primates comprising a recombinant vector of the invention or an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene disrupted by homologous recombination with a knock out vector.

The transgenic animals of the invention all include within a plurality of their cells a cloned recombinant or synthetic DNA sequence, more specifically one of the purified or isolated nucleic acids comprising an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide or a DNA sequence encoding an antisense polynucleotide such as described in the present specification.

Generally, a transgenic animal according the present invention comprises any one of the polynucleotides, the recombinant vectors and the cell hosts described in the present invention.

In a first preferred embodiment, these transgenic animals may be good experimental models in order to study the diverse pathologies related to cell differentiation, in particular concerning the transgenic animals within the genome of which has been inserted one or several copies of a polynucleotide encoding a native sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or alternatively a mutant sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein.

In a second preferred embodiment, these transgenic animals may express a desired polypeptide of interest under the control of regulatory polynucleotides which lead to good yields in the synthesis of this protein of interest, and optionally a tissue specific expression of this protein of interest.

The design of the transgenic animals of the invention may be made according to the conventional techniques well known from the one skilled in the art. For more details regarding the production of transgenic animals, and specifically transgenic mice, it may be referred to U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,191, issued Oct. 10, 1989; U.S. Pat. No. 5,464,764 issued Nov. 7, 1995; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,789,215, issued Aug. 4, 1998; these documents being herein incorporated by reference to disclose methods producing transgenic mice.

Transgenic animals of the present invention are produced by the application of procedures which result in an animal with a genome that has incorporated exogenous genetic material. The procedure involves obtaining the genetic material, or a portion thereof, which encodes either an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polynucleotide or antisense polynucleotide such as described in the present specification.

A recombinant polynucleotide of the invention is inserted into an embryonic or ES stem cell line. The insertion is preferably made using electroporation, such as described by Thomas et al. (1987), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. The cells subjected to electroporation are screened (e.g. by selection via selectable markers, by PCR or by Southern blot analysis) to find positive cells which have integrated the exogenous recombinant polynucleotide into their genome, preferably via an homologous recombination event. An illustrative positive-negative selection procedure that may be used according to the invention is described by Mansour et al. (1988), incorporated herein by reference.

Then, the positive cells are isolated, cloned and injected into 3.5 days old blastocysts from mice, such as described by Bradley (1987), incorporated herein by reference. The blastocysts are then inserted into a female host animal and allowed to grow to term.

Alternatively, the positive ES cells are brought into contact with embryos at the 2.5 days old 8-16 cell stage (morulae) such as described by Wood et al. (1993) or by Nagy et al. (1993), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference, the ES cells being internalized to colonize extensively the blastocyst including the cells which will give rise to the germ line.

The offspring of the female host are tested to determine which animals are transgenic e.g. include the inserted exogenous DNA sequence and which are wild-type.

Thus, the present invention also concerns a transgenic animal containing a nucleic acid, a recombinant expression vector or a recombinant host cell according to the invention.

Recombinant Cell Lines Derived from the Transgenic Animals of the Invention.

A further object of the invention comprises recombinant host cells obtained from a transgenic animal described herein. In one embodiment the invention encompasses cells derived from non-human host mammals and animals comprising a recombinant vector of the invention or a gene comprising an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 nucleic acid sequence disrupted by homologous recombination with a knock out vector.

Recombinant cell lines may be established in vitro from cells obtained from any tissue of a transgenic animal according to the invention, for example by transfection of primary cell cultures with vectors expressing one-genes such as SV40 large T antigen, as described by Chou (1989) and Shay et al. (1991), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.

Assays for Identification of Compounds for Treatment of Schizophrenia and Bipolar Disorder

The present invention provides assays which may be used to test compounds for their ability to treat CNS disorders, and in particular, to ameliorate symptoms of a CNS disorder mediated by sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018. In preferred embodiments, compounds tested for their ability to ameliorate syptoms of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder mediated by sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018. Compounds may also be tested for their ability to treat related disorders, including among others psychotic disorders, mood disorders, autism, substance dependence and alcoholism, mental retardation, and other psychiatric diseases including cognitive, anxiety, eating, impulse-control, and personality disorders, as defined with the Diagnosis and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders fourth edition (DSM-IV) classification.

The present invention also provides cell and animal, including primate and mouse, models of schizophrenia, bipolar disorder and related disorders.

In one aspect, provided are non-cell based, cell based and animal based assays for the identification of such compounds that affect sbg1 activity. Sbg1 activity may be affected by any mechanism; in certain embodiments, sbg1 activity is affected by modulating sbg1 gene expression or the activity of the sbg1 gene product.

The present methods allow the identification of compounds that affect sbg1 activity directly or indirectly. Thus, the non-cell based, cell based and animal assays of the present invention may also be used to identify compounds that act on an element of a sbg1 pathway other than sbg1 itself. These compounds can then be used as a therapeutic treatment to modulate sbg1 and other gene products involved in schizophrenia, bipolar disorder and related disorders.

Cell and Non-Cell Based Assays

In one aspect, cell based assays using recombinant or non-recombinant cells may be used to identify compounds which modulate sbg1 activity.

In one aspect, a cell based assay of the invention encompasses a method for identifying a test compound for the treatment of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder comprising (a) exposing a cell to a test compound at a concentration and time sufficient to ameliorate an endpoint related to schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, and (b) determining the level of sbg1 activity in a cell. Sbg1 activity can be measured, for example, by assaying a cell for mRNA transcript level, sbg1 peptide expression, localization or protein activity. Preferably the test compound is a compound capable of or suspected to be capable of ameliorating a symptom of schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or a related disorder. Test compounds capable of modulating sbg1 activity may be selected for use in developing medicaments. Such cell based assays are further described herein in the section titled “Method For Screening Ligands That Modulate The Expression Of The sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 Gene.”

In another aspect, a cell based assay of the invention encompasses a method for identifying a compound for the treatment of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder comprising (a) exposing a cell to a level of sbg1 activity sufficient to cause a schizophrenia-related or bipolar disorder-related endpoint, and (b) exposing said cell to a test compound. A test compound can then be selected according to its ability to ameliorate said schizophrenia-related or bipolar disorder-related endpoints. sbg1 activity may be provided by any suitable method, including but not limited to providing a vector containing an sbg1 nucleotide sequence, treating said cell with a compound capable of increasing sbg1 expression and treating said cell with an sbg1 peptide. Preferably said cell is treated with an sbg1 peptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 4 amino acids of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35; most preferably said sbg1 peptide comprises amino acid positions 124 to 153 of SEQ ID No 34, as described in Example 7. Preferably the test compound is a compound capable of or suspected to be capable of ameliorating a symtpom of schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or a related disorder; alternatively, the test compound is suspected of exacerbating an endpoint schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or a related disorder. A test compound capable of ameliorating any detectable symptom or endpoint of a schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or a related disorder may be selected for use in developing medicaments.

In another embodiment, the invention provides cell and non-cell based assays to sbg1 to determine whether sbg peptides bind to the cell surface, and to identify compounds for the treatment of schizophrenia, bipolar disorder and related disorders that interact with an sbg1 receptor. In one such embodiment, an sbg1 polynucleotide, or fragments thereof, is cloned into expression vectors such as those described herein. The proteins are purified by size, charge, immunochromatography or other techniques familiar to those skilled in the art. Following purification, the proteins are labeled using techniques known to those skilled in the art. The labeled proteins are incubated with cells or cell lines derived from a variety of organs or tissues to allow the proteins to bind to any receptor present on the cell surface. Following the incubation, the cells are washed to remove non-specifically bound protein. The labeled proteins are detected by autoradiography. Alternatively, unlabeled proteins may be incubated with the cells and detected with antibodies having a detectable label, such as a fluorescent molecule, attached thereto. Specificity of cell surface binding may be analyzed by conducting a competition analysis in which various amounts of unlabeled protein are incubated along with the labeled protein. The amount of labeled protein bound to the cell surface decreases as the amount of competitive unlabeled protein increases. As a control, various amounts of an unlabeled protein unrelated to the labeled protein is included in some binding reactions. The amount of labeled protein bound to the cell surface does not decrease in binding reactions containing increasing amounts of unrelated unlabeled protein, indicating that the protein encoded by the nucleic acid binds specifically to the cell surface.

In another embodiment, the present invention comprises non-cell based binding assays, wherein an sbg1 polypeptide is prepared and purified as in cell based binding assays described above. Following purification, the proteins are labeled and incubated with a cell membrane extract or isolate derived from any desired cells from any organs, tissue or combination of organs or tissues of interest to allow the sbg1 polypeptide to bind to any receptor present on a membrane. Following the incubation, the membranes are washed to remove non-specifically bound protein. The labeled proteins may be detected by autoradiography. Specificity of membrane binding of sbg1 may be analyzed by conducting a competition analysis in which various amounts of a test compound are incubated along with the labeled protein. Any desired test compound, including test polypeptides, can be incubated with the cells. The test compounds may be detected with antibodies having a detectable label, such as a fluorescent molecule, attached thereto. The amount of labeled sbg1 polypeptide bound to the cell surface decreases as the amount of competitive test compound increases. As a control, various amounts of an unlabeled protein or a compound unrelated to the test compound is included in some binding reactions. Test compounds capable of reducing the amount of sbg1 bound to cell membranes may be selected as a candidate therapeutic compound.

In preferred embodiments of the cell and non-cell based assays, said sbg1 peptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 4 amino acids of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35; most preferably said sbg1 peptide comprises amino acid positions 124 to 153 of SEQ ID No 34.

Said cell based assays may comprise cells of any suitable origin; particularly preferred cells are human cells, primate cells, non-human primate cells and mouse cells. If non-human primate cells are used, the sbg1 may comprise a nucleotide sequence or be encoded by a nucleotide sequence according to the primate nucleic acid sequences of SEQ ID No. 54 to 111, or a sequence complementary thereto or a fragment thereof.

Animal Model Based Assay

Non-human animal-based assays may also be used to identify compounds which modulate sbg1 activity. The invention encompasses animal models and animal-based assays suitable, including non-transgenic or transgenic animals, including animals containing a human or altered form of the sbg1 gene.

Thus, the present invention comprises treating an animal affected by schizophrenia or bipolar disorder or symptoms thereof with a test compound capable of directly or indirectly modulating sbg1 activity.

In one aspect, an animal-based assay of the invention encompasses a method for identifying a test compound for the treatment of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder comprising (a) exposing an animal to a test compound at a concentration and time sufficient to ameliorate an endpoint related to schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, and (b) determining the level of sbg1 activity at a site in said animal. Activity of sbg1 can be measured in any suitable cell, tissue or site. Preferably the test compound is a compound capable of or suspected to be capable of ameliorating a symptom of schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or a related disorder. Optionally said test compound is capable or suspected to be capable of modulating sbg1 activity. Test compounds capable of modulating sbg1 activity may be selected for use in developing medicaments.

In another aspect, an animal-based assay of the invention encompasses a method for identifying a compound for the treatment of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder comprising (a) exposing an animal to a level of sbg1 activity sufficient to cause a schizophrenia-related or bipolar disorder-related symptom or endpoint, and (b) exposing said animal to a test compound. A test compound can then be selected according to its ability to ameliorate said schizophrenia-related or bipolar disorder-related endpoints. Activity of sbg1 may be provided by any suitable method, including but not limited to providing a vector containing an sbg1 nucleotide sequence, treating said animal with a compound capable of increasing sbg1 expression and treating said cell with an sbg1 peptide. Preferably, said animal is treated with an sbg1 peptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 4 amino acids of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35; most preferably said sbg1 peptide comprises amino acid positions 124 to 153 of SEQ ID No 34, as described in Example 7. Preferably the test compound is a compound capable of or suspected to be capable of ameliorating a symptom of schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or a related disorder; alternatively, the test compound is suspected of exacerbating a symptom of schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or a related disorder. A test compound capable of ameliorating any detectable symptom or endpoint of a schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or a related disorder may be selected for use in developing medicaments.

Any suitable animal may be used. Preferably, said animal is a primate, a non-human primate, a mammal, or a mouse.

In one embodiment, a mouse is treated with an sbg1 peptide, exposed to a test compound, and symptoms indicative of schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or a related disorder are assessed by observing stereotypy. In other embodiments, said symptoms are assessed by performing at least one test from the group consisting of home cage observation, neurological evaluation, stress-induced hypothermia, forced swim, PTZ seizure, locomotor activity, tail suspension, elevated plus maze, novel object recognition, prepulse inhibition, thermal pain, Y-maze, and metabolic chamber tests (Psychoscreen™ tests available from Psychogenics Inc.). Other tests are known in Crawley et al, Horm. Behav. 31(3):197-211 (1997); Crawley, Brain Res 835(1):18-26 (1999) for example.

In one example, the present inventors have tested sbg1 peptides by injection into mice. An sbg1 peptide comprising amino acid positions 124 to 153 of SEQ ID No 34 was injected peritoneally into adult mice as described herein in Example 7. Upon observation, mice injected with the sbg1 peptide exhibited a decrease in the frequency of their movements over the time course of the experiment. FIG. 18 demonstrates (left top panel of the figure) a comparison of the average number of movements in 3 separate time points (5, 10, and 15 min) with the average movements per min in the last period of observations (30, 35, 40, and 45 min). The sbg1 peptide also increased stereotypy—this effect was most prominent during the last period of observations. Because the onset of stereotypy was variable, data are presented as the average of stereotypy for observations over the entire time period.

The present inventors have also determined that the sbg1 gene exists in several non-human primates. In a preferred embodiment of the animal models and drug screening assays of the invention, a non-human primate is treated with an sbg1 peptide and exposed to a test compound, wherein said sbg1 peptide is encoded by a nucleotide sequence according to the primate nucleic acid sequences of SEQ ID No. 54 to 111, or a sequence complementary thereto or a fragment thereof.

Any suitable test compound may be used with the screening methods of the invention. Examples of compounds that may be screened by the methods of the present invention include small organic or inorganic molecules, nucleic acids, including polynucleotides from random and directed polynucleotide libraries, peptides, including peptides derived from random and directed peptide libraries, soluble peptides, fusion peptides, and phosphopeptides, antibodies including polyclonal, monoclonal, chimeric, humanized, and anti-idiotypic antibodies, and single chain antibodies, FAb, F(ab′)₂ and FAb expression library fragments, and epitope-binding fragments thereof. In certain aspects, a compound capable of ameliorating or exacerbating a symptom or endpoint of schizophrenia, bipolar disorder or a related disorder may include, by way of example, antipsychotic drugs in general, neuroleptics, atypical neuroleptics, antidepressants, anti-anxiety drugs, noradrenergic agonists and antagonists, dopaminergic agonists and antagonists, serotonin reuptake inhibitors, benzodiazepines.

Methods for Screening Substances Interacting with an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 Polypeptides

For the purpose of the present invention, a ligand means a molecule, such as a protein, a peptide, an antibody or any synthetic chemical compound capable of binding to the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or one of its fragments or variants or to modulate the expression of the polynucleotide coding for the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 or a fragment or variant thereof.

In the ligand screening method according to the present invention, a biological sample or a defined molecule to be tested as a putative ligand of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein is brought into contact with the corresponding purified sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, for example the corresponding purified recombinant sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein produced by a recombinant cell host as described hereinbefore, in order to form a complex between this protein and the putative ligand molecule to be tested.

As an illustrative example, to study the interaction of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 protein, or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 4 amino acids, preferably at least 6, or preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35 and 41 to 43, with drugs or small molecules, such as molecules generated through combinatorial chemistry approaches, the microdialysis coupled to HPLC method described by Wang et al. (1997) or the affinity capillary electrophoresis method described by Bush et al. (1997), the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference, can be used.

In further methods, peptides, drugs, fatty acids, lipoproteins, or small molecules which interact with the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 4 amino acids, preferably at least 6, or preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35 and 41 to 43, may be identified using assays such as the following. The molecule to be tested for binding is labeled with a detectable label, such as a fluorescent, radioactive, or enzymatic tag and placed in contact with immobilized sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof under conditions which permit specific binding to occur. After removal of non-specifically bound molecules, bound molecules are detected using appropriate means.

Another object of the present invention comprises methods and kits for the screening of candidate substances that interact with an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide.

The present invention pertains to methods for screening substances of interest that interact with an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or one fragment or variant thereof. By their capacity to bind covalently or non-covalently to an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or to a fragment or variant thereof, these substances or molecules may be advantageously used both in vitro and in vivo.

In vitro, said interacting molecules may be used as detection means in order to identify the presence of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein in a sample, preferably a biological sample.

A method for the screening of a candidate substance comprises the following steps

-   -   a) providing a polypeptide comprising, consisting essentially         of, or consisting of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018         protein or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 4         amino acids, preferably at least 6 amino acids, more preferably         at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15,         20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35         and 41 to 43;     -   b) obtaining a candidate substance;     -   c) bringing into contact said polypeptide with said candidate         substance; and     -   d) detecting the complexes formed between said polypeptide and         said candidate substance.

The invention further concerns a kit for the screening of a candidate substance interacting with the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide, wherein said kit comprises:

-   -   a) an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein having an         amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the         amino acid sequences of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 or a         peptide fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 4         amino acids, preferably at least 6 amino acids, more preferably         at least 8 to 10 amino acids, and more preferably at least 12,         15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to         35 and 41 to 43; and     -   b) optionally means useful to detect the complex formed between         the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a peptide         fragment or a variant thereof and the candidate substance.

In a preferred embodiment of the kit described above, the detection means comprise monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies directed against the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a peptide fragment or a variant thereof.

Various candidate substances or molecules can be assayed for interaction with an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide. These substances or molecules include, without being limited to, natural or synthetic organic compounds or molecules of biological origin such as polypeptides. When the candidate substance or molecule comprise a polypeptide, this polypeptide may be the resulting expression product of a phage clone belonging to a phage-based random peptide library, or alternatively the polypeptide may be the resulting expression product of a cDNA library cloned in a vector suitable for performing a two-hybrid screening assay.

The invention also pertains to kits useful for performing the hereinbefore described screening method. Preferably, such kits comprise an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide or a fragment or a variant thereof, and optionally means useful to detect the complex formed between the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide or its fragment or variant and the candidate substance. In a preferred embodiment the detection means comprise monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies directed against the corresponding sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide or a fragment or a variant thereof.

A. Candidate Ligands Obtained from Random Peptide Libraries

In a particular embodiment of the screening method, the putative ligand is the expression product of a DNA insert contained in a phage vector (Parmley and Smith, 1988). Specifically, random peptide phages libraries are used. The random DNA inserts encode for peptides of 8 to 20 amino acids in length (Oldenburg K. R. et al., 1992; Valadon P., et al., 1996; Lucas A. H., 1994; Westerink M. A. J., 1995; Felici F. et al., 1991). According to this particular embodiment, the recombinant phages expressing a protein that binds to the immobilized sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein is retained and the complex formed between the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein and the recombinant phage may be subsequently immunoprecipitated by a polyclonal or a monoclonal antibody directed against the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein.

Once the ligand library in recombinant phages has been constructed, the phage population is brought into contact with the immobilized sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein. Then the preparation of complexes is washed in order to remove the non-specifically bound recombinant phages. The phages that bind specifically to the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein are then eluted by a buffer (acid pH) or immunoprecipitated by the monoclonal antibody produced by the hybridoma anti-sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018, and this phage population is subsequently amplified by an over-infection of bacteria (for example E. coli). The selection step may be repeated several times, preferably 2-4 times, in order to select the more specific recombinant phage clones. The last step comprises characterizing the peptide produced by the selected recombinant phage clones either by expression in infected bacteria and isolation, expressing the phage insert in another host-vector system, or sequencing the insert contained in the selected recombinant phages.

B. Candidate Ligands Obtained by Competition Experiments.

Alternatively, peptides, drugs or small molecules which bind to the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 4 amino acids, preferably at least 6 amino acids, more preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, and more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43, may be identified in competition experiments. In such assays, the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof, is immobilized to a surface, such as a plastic plate. Increasing amounts of the peptides, drugs or small molecules are placed in contact with the immobilized sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof, in the presence of a detectable labeled known sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein ligand. For example, the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 ligand may be detectably labeled with a fluorescent, radioactive, or enzymatic tag. The ability of the test molecule to bind the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof, is determined by measuring the amount of detectably labeled known ligand bound in the presence of the test molecule. A decrease in the amount of known ligand bound to the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof, when the test molecule is present indicated that the test molecule is able to bind to the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof.

C. Candidate Ligands Obtained by Affinity Chromatography.

Proteins or other molecules interacting with the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at 4 amino acids, preferably at least 6 amino acids, more preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, and more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35 and 41 to 43, can also be found using affinity columns which contain the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof. The sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof, may be attached to the column using conventional techniques including chemical coupling to a suitable column matrix such as agarose, Affi Gel®, or other matrices familiar to those of skill in art. In some embodiments of this method, the affinity column contains chimeric proteins in which the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof, is fused to glutathion S transferase (GST). A mixture of cellular proteins or pool of expressed proteins as described above is applied to the affinity column. Proteins or other molecules interacting with the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof, attached to the column can then be isolated and analyzed on 2-D electrophoresis gel as described in Ramunsen et al. (1997), the disclosure of which is incorporated by reference. Alternatively, the proteins retained on the affinity column can be purified by electrophoresis based methods and sequenced. The same method can be used to isolate antibodies, to screen phage display products, or to screen phage display human antibodies.

D. Candidate Ligands Obtained by Optical Biosensor Methods

Proteins interacting with the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 4 amino acids, preferably at least 6 amino acids, more preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, and more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43, can also be screened by using an Optical Biosensor as described in Edwards and Leatherbarrow (1997) and also in Szabo et al. (1995), the disclosure of which is incorporated by reference. This technique permits the detection of interactions between molecules in real time, without the need of labeled molecules. This technique is based on the surface plasmon resonance (SPR) phenomenon. Briefly, the candidate ligand molecule to be tested is attached to a surface (such as a carboxymethyl dextran matrix). A light beam is directed towards the side of the surface that does not contain the sample to be tested and is reflected by said surface. The SPR phenomenon causes a decrease in the intensity of the reflected light with a specific association of angle and wavelength. The binding of candidate ligand molecules cause a change in the refraction index on the surface, which change is detected as a change in the SPR signal. For screening of candidate ligand molecules or substances that are able to interact with the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof, the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof, is immobilized onto a surface. This surface comprises one side of a cell through which flows the candidate molecule to be assayed. The binding of the candidate molecule on the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof, is detected as a change of the SPR signal. The candidate molecules tested may be proteins, peptides, carbohydrates, lipids, or small molecules generated by combinatorial chemistry. This technique may also be performed by immobilizing eukaryotic or prokaryotic cells or lipid vesicles exhibiting an endogenous or a recombinantly expressed sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein at their surface.

The main advantage of the method is that it allows the determination of the association rate between the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein and molecules interacting with the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein. It is thus possible to select specifically ligand molecules interacting with the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein, or a fragment thereof, through strong or conversely weak association constants.

E. Candidate Ligands Obtained Through a Two-Hybrid Screening Assay.

The yeast two-hybrid system is designed to study protein-protein interactions in vivo (Fields and Song, 1989), and relies upon the fusion of a bait protein to the DNA binding domain of the yeast Gal4 protein. This technique is also described in the U.S. Pat. No. 5,667,973 and the U.S. Pat. No. 5,283,173 (Fields et al.) the technical teachings of both patents being herein incorporated by reference.

The general procedure of library screening by the two-hybrid assay may be performed as described by Harper et al. (1993) or as described by Cho et al. (1998) or also Fromont-Racine et al. (1997).

The bait protein or polypeptide comprises, consists essentially of, or consists of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 4 amino acids, preferably at least 6 amino acids, more preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, and more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43.

More precisely, the nucleotide sequence encoding the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 polypeptide or a fragment or variant thereof is fused to a polynucleotide encoding the DNA binding domain of the GAL4 protein, the fused nucleotide sequence being inserted in a suitable expression vector, for example pAS2 or pM3.

Then, a human cDNA library is constructed in a specially designed vector, such that the human cDNA insert is fused to a nucleotide sequence in the vector that encodes the transcriptional domain of the GAL4 protein. Preferably, the vector used is the pACT vector. The polypeptides encoded by the nucleotide inserts of the human cDNA library are termed “prey” polypeptides.

A third vector contains a detectable marker gene, such as beta galactosidase gene or CAT gene that is placed under the control of a regulation sequence that is responsive to the binding of a complete Gal4 protein containing both the transcriptional activation domain and the DNA binding domain. For example, the vector pG5EC may be used.

Two different yeast strains are also used. As an illustrative but non limiting example the two different yeast strains may be the followings:

-   -   Y190, the phenotype of which is (MATa, Leu2-3, 112 ura3-12,         trpl-901, his3-D200, ade2-101, gal4Dgal180D URA3 GAL-LacZ, LYS         GAL-HIS3, cyh^(r));     -   Y187, the phenotype of which is (MATa gal4 gal80 his3 trpl-901         ade2-101 ura3-52 leu2-3, −112 URA3 GAL-lacZmet⁻), which is the         opposite mating type of Y190.

Briefly, 20 μg of pAS2/sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 and 201 g of pACT-cDNA library are co-transformed into yeast strain Y190. The transformants are selected for growth on minimal media lacking histidine, leucine and tryptophan, but containing the histidine synthesis inhibitor 3-AT (50 mM). Positive colonies are screened for beta galactosidase by filter lift assay. The double positive colonies (His⁺, beta-gal⁺) are then grown on plates lacking histidine, leucine, but containing tryptophan and cycloheximide (10 mg/ml) to select for loss of pAS2/sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 plasmids bu retention of pACT-cDNA library plasmids. The resulting Y190 strains are mated with Y187 strains expressing sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 or non-related control proteins; such as cyclophilin B, lamin, or SNF1, as Gal4 fusions as described by Harper et al. (1993) and by Bram et al. (Bram R J et al., 1993), and screened for beta galactosidase by filter lift assay. Yeast clones that are beta gal-after mating with the control Gal4 fusions are considered false positives.

In another embodiment of the two-hybrid method according to the invention, interaction between the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 or a fragment or variant thereof with cellular proteins may be assessed using the Matchmaker Two Hybrid System 2 (Catalog No. K1604-1, Clontech). As described in the manual accompanying the Matchmaker Two Hybrid System 2 (Catalog No. K1604-1, Clontech), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference, nucleic acids encoding the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 protein or a portion thereof, are inserted into an expression vector such that they are in frame with DNA encoding the DNA binding domain of the yeast transcriptional activator GAL4. A desired cDNA, preferably human cDNA, is inserted into a second expression vector such that they are in frame with DNA encoding the activation domain of GAL4. The two expression plasmids are transformed into yeast and the yeast are plated on selection medium which selects for expression of selectable markers on each of the expression vectors as well as GAL4 dependent expression of the HIS3 gene. Transformants capable of growing on medium lacking histidine are screened for GAL4 dependent lacZ expression. Those cells which are positive for both the histidine selection and the lacZ assay contain sequences that permit, facilitate, or lead to interaction between sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 and the protein or peptide encoded by the initially selected cDNA insert; including the interacting sequences themselves.

Method for Screening Substances Interacting with the Regulatory Sequences of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 Gene.

The present invention also concerns a method for screening substances or molecules that are able to interact with the regulatory sequences of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene, such as for example promoter or enhancer sequences.

Nucleic acids encoding proteins which are able to interact with the regulatory sequences of the sbg1, g34665′ sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene, more particularly a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the polynucleotides of the 5′ and 3′ regulatory region or a fragment or variant thereof, and preferably a variant comprising one of the biallelic markers of the invention, may be identified by using a one-hybrid system, such as that described in the booklet enclosed in the Matchmaker One-Hybrid System kit from Clontech (Catalog Ref. n° K1603-1), the technical teachings of which are herein incorporated by reference. Briefly, the target nucleotide sequence is cloned upstream of a selectable reporter sequence and the resulting DNA construct is integrated in the yeast genome (Saccharomyces cerevisiae). The yeast cells containing the reporter sequence in their genome are then transformed with a library comprising fusion molecules between cDNAs encoding candidate proteins for binding onto the regulatory sequences of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene and sequences encoding the activator domain of a yeast transcription factor such as GAL4. The recombinant yeast cells are plated in a culture broth for selecting cells expressing the reporter sequence. The recombinant yeast cells thus selected contain a fusion protein that is able to bind onto the target regulatory sequence of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene. Then, the cDNAs encoding the fusion proteins are sequenced and may be cloned into expression or transcription vectors in vitro. The binding of the encoded polypeptides to the target regulatory sequences of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene may be confirmed by techniques familiar to the one skilled in the art, such as gel retardation assays or DNAse protection assays.

Gel retardation assays may also be performed independently in order to screen candidate molecules that are able to interact with the regulatory sequences of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene, such as described by Fried and Crothers (1981), Garner and Revzin (1981) and Dent and Latchman (1993), the teachings of these publications being herein incorporated by reference. These techniques are based on the principle according to which a DNA fragment which is bound to a protein migrates slower than the same unbound DNA fragment. Briefly, the target nucleotide sequence is labeled. Then the labeled target nucleotide sequence is brought into contact with either a total nuclear extract from cells containing transcription factors, or with different candidate molecules to be tested. The interaction between the target regulatory sequence of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene and the candidate molecule or the transcription factor is detected after gel or capillary electrophoresis through a retardation in the migration.

Method for Screening Ligands that Modulate the Expression of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 Gene

Another subject of the present invention is a method for screening molecules that modulate the expression of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein. Such a screening method comprises the steps of:

-   -   a) cultivating a prokaryotic or an eukaryotic cell that has been         transfected with a nucleotide sequence encoding the sbg1,         g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a variant or a         fragment thereof, placed under the control of its own promoter;     -   b) bringing into contact the cultivated cell with a molecule to         be tested;     -   c) quantifying the expression of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017         or g35018 protein or a variant or a fragment thereof.

In an embodiment, the nucleotide sequence encoding the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a variant or a fragment thereof comprises an allele of at least one sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 related biallelic marker.

Using DNA recombination techniques well known by the one skill in the art, the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein encoding DNA sequence is inserted into an expression vector, downstream from its promoter sequence. As an illustrative example, the promoter sequence of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene is contained in the nucleic acid of the 5′ regulatory region.

The quantification of the expression of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein may be realized either at the mRNA level or at the protein level. In the latter case, polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies may be used to quantify the amounts of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein that have been produced, for example in an ELISA or a RIA assay.

In a preferred embodiment, the quantification of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 mRNA is realized by a quantitative PCR amplification of the cDNA obtained by a reverse transcription of the total mRNA of the cultivated sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018-transfected host cell, using a pair of primers specific for sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018.

The present invention also concerns a method for screening substances or molecules that are able to increase, or in contrast to decrease, the level of expression of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene. Such a method may allow the one skilled in the art to select substances exerting a regulating effect on the expression level of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene and which may be useful as active ingredients included in pharmaceutical compositions for treating patients suffering from diseases.

Thus, is also part of the present invention a method for screening of a candidate substance or molecule that modulated the expression of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene, this method comprises the following steps:

-   -   providing a recombinant cell host containing a nucleic acid,         wherein said nucleic acid comprises a nucleotide sequence of the         5′ regulatory region or a biologically active fragment or         variant thereof located upstream a polynucleotide encoding a         detectable protein;     -   obtaining a candidate substance; and     -   determining the ability of the candidate substance to modulate         the expression levels of the polynucleotide encoding the         detectable protein.

In a further embodiment, the nucleic acid comprising the nucleotide sequence of the 5′ regulatory region or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof also includes a 5′ UTR region of the sbg1 cDNA of SEQ ID No 2 to 26 or the g35018 cDNA of SEQ ID No 36 to 40, or one of its biologically active fragments or variants thereof.

Among the preferred polynucleotides encoding a detectable protein, there may be cited polynucleotides encoding beta galactosidase, green fluorescent protein (GFP) and chloramphenicol acetyl transferase (CAT).

The invention also pertains to kits useful for performing the herein described screening method. Preferably, such kits comprise a recombinant vector that allows the expression of a nucleotide sequence of the 5′ regulatory region or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof located upstream and operably linked to a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein or the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 protein or a fragment or a variant thereof.

In another embodiment of a method for the screening of a candidate substance or molecule that modulates the expression of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene, wherein said method comprises the following steps:

-   -   a) providing a recombinant host cell containing a nucleic acid,         wherein said nucleic acid comprises a 5′ UTR sequence of an         sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA, preferably of an sbg1         or g35018 cDNA of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26 or 36 to 40, or one of its         biologically active fragments or variants, the 5′ UTR sequence         or its biologically active fragment or variant being operably         linked to a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein;     -   b) obtaining a candidate substance; and     -   c) determining the ability of the candidate substance to         modulate the expression levels of the polynucleotide encoding         the detectable protein.

In a specific embodiment of the above screening method, the nucleic acid that comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the 5′ UTR sequence of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA, preferably of an sbg1 or g35018 cDNA of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26 or 36 to 40 or one of its biologically active fragments or variants, includes a promoter sequence which is endogenous with respect to the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 5′ UTR sequence.

In another specific-embodiment of the above screening method, the nucleic acid that comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the 5′ UTR sequence of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA or one of its biologically active fragments or variants, includes a promoter sequence which is exogenous with respect to the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 5′ UTR sequence defined therein.

In a further preferred embodiment, the nucleic acid comprising the 5′-UTR sequence of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA or the biologically active fragments thereof includes an sbg1-related biallelic marker.

The invention further comprises a kit for the screening of a candidate substance modulating the expression of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene, wherein said kit comprises a recombinant vector that comprises a nucleic acid including a 5′ UTR sequence of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26 or 36 to 40, or one of their biologically active fragments or variants, the 5′ UTR sequence or its biologically active fragment or variant being operably linked to a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein.

For the design of suitable recombinant vectors useful for performing the screening methods described above, it will be referred to the section of the present specification wherein the preferred recombinant vectors of the invention are detailed.

Expression levels and patterns of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 may be analyzed by solution hybridization with long probes as described in International Patent Application No. WO 97/05277, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Briefly, the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA or the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 genomic DNA described above, or fragments thereof, is inserted at a cloning site immediately downstream of a bacteriophage (T3, T7 or SP6) RNA polymerase promoter to produce antisense RNA. Preferably, the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 insert comprises at least 100 or more consecutive nucleotides of the genomic DNA sequence or the cDNA sequences. The plasmid is linearized and transcribed in the presence of ribonucleotides comprising modified ribonucleotides (i.e. biotin-UTP and DIG-UTP). An excess of this doubly labeled RNA is hybridized in solution with mRNA isolated from cells or tissues of interest. The hybridization is performed under standard stringent conditions (40-50° C. for 16 hours in an 80% formamide, 0.4 MNaCl buffer, pH 7-8). The unhybridized probe is removed by digestion with ribonucleases specific for single-stranded RNA (i.e. RNases CL3, Ti, Phy M, U2 or A). The presence of the biotin-UTP modification enables capture of the hybrid on a microtitration plate coated with streptavidin. The presence of the DIG modification enables the hybrid to be detected and quantified by ELISA using an anti-DIG antibody coupled to alkaline phosphatase.

Quantitative analysis of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene expression may also be performed using arrays. As used herein, the term array means a one dimensional, two dimensional, or multidimensional arrangement of a plurality of nucleic acids of sufficient length to permit specific detection of expression of mRNAs capable of hybridizing thereto. For example, the arrays may contain a plurality of nucleic acids derived from genes whose expression levels are to be assessed. The arrays may include the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 and g35018 genomic DNA, the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA sequences or the sequences complementary thereto or fragments thereof, particularly those comprising at least one of the biallelic markers according the present invention. Preferably, the fragments are at least 15 nucleotides in length. In other embodiments, the fragments are at least 25 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, the fragments are at least 50 nucleotides in length. More preferably, the fragments are at least 100 nucleotides in length. In another preferred embodiment, the fragments are more than 100 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments the fragments may be more than 500 nucleotides in length.

For example, quantitative analysis of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene expression may be performed with a complementary DNA microarray as described by Schena et al. (1995 and 1996). Full length sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNAs or fragments thereof are amplified by PCR and arrayed from a 96-well microtiter plate onto silylated microscope slides using high-speed robotics. Printed arrays are incubated in a humid chamber to allow rehydration of the array elements and rinsed, once in 0.2% SDS for 1 min, twice in water for 1 min and once for 5 min in sodium borohydride solution. The arrays are submerged in water for 2 min at 95° C., transferred into 0.2% SDS for 1 min, rinsed twice with water, air dried and stored in the dark at 25° C.

Cell or tissue mRNA is isolated or commercially obtained and probes are prepared by a single round of reverse transcription. Probes are hybridized to 1 cm² microarrays under a 14×14 mm glass coverslip for 6-12 hours at 60° C. Arrays are washed for 5 min at 25° C. in low stringency wash buffer (1×SSC/0.2% SDS), then for 10 min at room temperature in high stringency wash buffer (0.1×SSC/0.2% SDS). Arrays are scanned in 0.1×SSC using a fluorescence laser scanning device fitted with a custom filter set. Accurate differential expression measurements are obtained by taking the average of the ratios of two independent hybridizations.

Quantitative analysis of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene expression may also be performed with full length sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNAs or fragments thereof in complementary DNA arrays as described by Pietu et al. (1996). The full length sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA or fragments thereof is PCR amplified and spotted on membranes. Then, mRNAs originating from various tissues or cells are labeled with radioactive nucleotides. After hybridization and washing in controlled conditions, the hybridized mRNAs are detected by phospho-imaging or autoradiography. Duplicate experiments are performed and a quantitative analysis of differentially expressed mRNAs is then performed.

Alternatively, expression analysis using the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 genomic DNA, the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA, or fragments thereof can be done through high density nucleotide arrays as described by Lockhart et al. (1996) and Sosnowsky et al. (11997). Oligonucleotides of 15-50 nucleotides from the sequences of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 genomic DNA, the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA sequences particularly those comprising at least one of biallelic markers according the present invention, or the sequences complementary thereto, are synthesized directly on the chip (Lockhart et al., supra) or synthesized and then addressed to the chip (Sosnowski et al., supra). Preferably, the oligonucleotides are about 20 nucleotides in length.

sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 cDNA probes labeled with an appropriate compound, such as biotin, digoxigenin or fluorescent dye, are synthesized from the appropriate mRNA population and then randomly fragmented to an average size of 50 to 100 nucleotides. The said probes are then hybridized to the chip. After washing as described in Lockhart et al., supra and application of different electric fields (Sosnowsky et al., 1997), the dyes or labeling compounds are detected and quantified. Duplicate hybridizations are performed. Comparative analysis of the intensity of the signal originating from cDNA probes on the same target oligonucleotide in different cDNA samples indicates a differential expression of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 mRNA.

Methods for Inhibiting the Expression of an sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 Gene

Other therapeutic compositions according to the present invention comprise advantageously an oligonucleotide fragment of the nucleic sequence of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 as an antisense tool or a triple helix tool that inhibits the expression of the corresponding sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene. A preferred fragment of the nucleic sequence of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 comprises an allele of at least one of the biallelic markers of the invention.

Antisense Approach

Preferred methods using antisense polynucleotide according to the present invention are the procedures described by Sczakiel et al. (1995), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.

Preferably, the antisense tools are chosen among the polynucleotides (15-200 bp long) that are complementary to the 5′end of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 mRNA. In another embodiment, a combination of different antisense polynucleotides complementary to different parts of the desired targeted gene are used.

Preferred antisense polynucleotides according to the present invention are complementary to a sequence of the mRNAs of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 that contains either the translation initiation codon ATG or a splicing donor or acceptor site.

The antisense nucleic acids should have a length and melting temperature sufficient to permit formation of an intracellular duplex having sufficient stability to inhibit the expression of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 mRNA in the duplex. Strategies for designing antisense nucleic acids suitable for use in gene therapy are disclosed in Green et al., (1986) and Izant and Weintraub, (1984), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.

In some strategies, antisense molecules are obtained by reversing the orientation of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 coding region with respect to a promoter so as to transcribe the opposite strand from that which is normally transcribed in the cell. The antisense molecules may be transcribed using in vitro transcription systems such as those which employ T7 or SP6 polymerase to generate the transcript. Another approach involves transcription of sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 antisense nucleic acids in vivo by operably linking DNA containing the antisense sequence to a promoter in a suitable expression vector.

Alternatively, suitable antisense strategies are those described by Rossi et al. (1991), in the International Applications Nos. WO 94/23026, WO 95/04141, WO 92/18522 and in the European Patent Application No. EP 0 572 287 A2, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference

An alternative to the antisense technology that is used according to the present invention comprises using ribozymes that will bind to a target sequence via their complementary polynucleotide tail and that will cleave the corresponding RNA by hydrolyzing its target site (namely “hammerhead ribozymes”). Briefly, the simplified cycle of a hammerhead ribozyme comprises (1) sequence specific binding to the target RNA via complementary antisense sequences; (2) site-specific hydrolysis of the cleavable motif of the target strand; and (3) release of cleavage products, which gives rise to another catalytic cycle. Indeed, the use of long-chain antisense polynucleotide (at least 30 bases long) or ribozymes with long antisense arms are advantageous. A preferred delivery system for antisense ribozyme is achieved by covalently linking these antisense ribozymes to lipophilic groups or to use liposomes as a convenient vector. Preferred antisense ribozymes according to the present invention are prepared as described by Sczakiel et al. (1995), the specific preparation procedures being referred to in said article being herein incorporated by reference.

Triple Helix Approach

The sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 genomic DNA may also be used to inhibit the expression of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene based on intracellular triple helix formation.

Triple helix oligonucleotides are used to inhibit transcription from a genome. They are particularly useful for studying alterations in cell activity when it is associated with a particular gene.

Similarly, a portion of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 genomic DNA can be used to study the effect of inhibiting sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 transcription within a cell. Traditionally, homopurine sequences were considered the most useful for triple helix strategies. However, homopyrimidine sequences can also inhibit gene expression. Such homopyrimidine oligonucleotides bind to the major groove at homopurine:homopyrimidine sequences. Thus, both types of sequences from the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 genomic DNA are contemplated within the scope of this invention.

To carry out gene therapy strategies using the triple helix approach, the sequences of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 genomic DNA are first scanned to identify 10-mer to 20-mer homopyrimidine or homopurine stretches which could be used in triple-helix based strategies for inhibiting sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 expression. Following identification of candidate homopyrimidine or homopurine stretches, their efficiency in inhibiting sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 expression is assessed by introducing varying amounts of oligonucleotides containing the candidate sequences into tissue culture cells which express the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene.

The oligonucleotides can be introduced into the cells using a variety of methods known to those skilled in the art, including but not limited to calcium phosphate precipitation, DEAE-Dextran, electroporation, liposome-mediated transfection or native uptake.

Treated cells are monitored for altered cell function or reduced sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 expression using techniques such as Northern blotting, RNase protection assays, or PCR based strategies to monitor the transcription levels of the sbg1, g34665, sbg2, g35017 or g35018 gene in cells which have been treated with the oligonucleotide.

The oligonucleotides which are effective in inhibiting gene expression in tissue culture cells may then be introduced in vivo using the techniques described above in the antisense approach at a dosage calculated based on the in vitro results, as described in antisense approach.

In some embodiments, the natural (beta) anomers of the oligonucleotide units can be replaced with alpha anomers to render the oligonucleotide more resistant to nucleases. Further, an intercalating agent such as ethidium bromide, or the like, can be attached to the 3′ end of the alpha oligonucleotide to stabilize the triple helix. For information on the generation of oligonucleotides suitable for triple helix formation see Griffin et al. (1989), which is hereby incorporated by this reference.

Pharmaceutical Compositions And Formulations

Sbg1-Modulating Compounds

Using the methods disclosed herein, compounds that selectively modulate sbg1 activity in vitro and in vivo may be identified. The compounds identified by the process of the invention include, for example, antibodies having binding specificity for the sbg1 peptide. It is also expected that homologues of sbg1 may be useful for modulating sbg1-mediated activity and the related physiological condition associated with schizophrenia or bipolar disorder. Generally, it is further expected that assay methods of the present invention based on the role of sbg1 in central nervous system disorder may be used to identify compounds capable of intervening in the assay cascade of the invention.

Indications

While sbg1 has demonstrated an association with schizophrenia and bipolar disorder, indications involving sbg1 may include various central nervous system disorders. Nervous system disorders are expected to have complex genetic bases and often share certain symptoms. In particular, as described herein, indications may include schizophrenia and other psychotic disorders, mood disorders, autism, substance dependence and alcoholism, mental retardation, and other psychiatric diseases including cognitive, anxiety, eating, impulse-control, and personality disorders, as defined with the Diagnosis and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders fourth edition (DSM-IV) classification.

Pharmaceutical Formulations and Routes of Administration

The compounds identified using the methods of the present invention can be administered to a mammal, including a human patient, alone or in pharmaceutical compositions where they are mixed with suitable carriers or excipient(s) at therapeutically effective doses to treat or ameliorate schizophrenia or bipolar disorder related disorders. A therapeutically effective dose further refers to that amount of the compound sufficient to result in amelioration of symptoms as determined by the methods described herein. Preferably, a therapeutically effective dosage is suitable for continued periodic use or administration. Techniques for formulation and administration of the compounds of the instant application may be found in “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences,” Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., latest edition.

Routes of Administration

Suitable routes of administration include oral, rectal, transmucosal, or intestinal administration, parenteral delivery, including intramuscular, subcutaneous, intramedullary injections, as well as intrathecal, direct intraventricular, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intranasal or intraocular injections. A particularly useful method of administering compounds for treating central nervous system disease involves surgical implantation of a device for delivering the compound over an extended period of time. Sustained release formulations of the invented medicaments particularly are contemplated.

Composition/Formulation

Pharmaceutical compositions and medicaments for use in accordance with the present invention may be formulated in a conventional manner using one or more physiologically acceptable carriers comprising excipients and auxiliaries. Proper formulation is dependent upon the route of administration chosen.

For injection, the agents of the invention may be formulated in aqueous solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hanks's solution, Ringer's solution, or physiological saline buffer such as a phosphate or bicarbonate buffer. For transmucosal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art.

Pharmaceutical preparations which can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a plasticizer, such as glycerol or sorbitol. The push-fit capsules can contain the active ingredients in admixture with fillers such as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate and, optionally, stabilizers. In soft capsules, the active compounds may be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethylene glycols. In addition, stabilizers may be added. All formulations for oral administration should be in dosages suitable for such administration.

For buccal administration the compositions may take the form of tablets or lozenges formulated in conventional manner.

For administration by inhalation, the compounds for use according to the present invention are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebulizer, with the use of a suitable gaseous propellant, e.g., carbon dioxide. In the case of a pressurized aerosol the dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount. Capsules and cartridges of, e.g., gelatin, for use in an inhaler or insufflator, may be formulated containing a powder mix of the compound and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.

The compounds may be formulated for parenteral administration by injection, e.g., by bolus injection or continuous infusion. Formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosage form, e.g., in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an added preservative. The compositions may take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in aqueous vehicles, and may contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents.

Pharmaceutical formulations for parenteral administration include aqueous solutions of the active compounds in water-soluble form. Aqueous suspensions may contain substances which increase the viscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, or dextran. Optionally, the suspension may also contain suitable stabilizers or agents which increase the solubility of the compounds to allow for the preparation of highly concentrated solutions.

Alternatively, the active ingredient may be in powder or lyophilized form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, such as sterile pyrogen-free water, before use.

In addition to the formulations described previously, the compounds may also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long acting formulations may be administered by implantation (for example subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection. Thus, for example, the compounds may be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt.

Additionally, the compounds may be delivered using a sustained-release system, such as semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing the therapeutic agent. Various sustained release materials have been established and are well known by those skilled in the art. Sustained-release capsules may, depending on their chemical nature, release the compounds for a few weeks up to over 100 days.

Depending on the chemical nature and the biological stability of the therapeutic reagent, additional strategies for protein stabilization may be employed.

The pharmaceutical compositions also may comprise suitable solid or gel phase carriers or excipients. Examples of such carriers or excipients include but are not limited to calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars, starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, and polymers such as polyethylene glycols.

Effective Dosage.

Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for use in the present invention include compositions wherein the active ingredients are contained in an effective amount to achieve their intended purpose. More specifically, a therapeutically effective amount means an amount effective to prevent development of or to alleviate the existing symptoms of the subject being treated. Determination of the effective amounts is well within the capability of those skilled in the art, especially in light of the detailed disclosure provided herein.

For any compound used in the method of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays, and a dose can be formulated in animal models. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans.

A therapeutically effective dose refers to that amount of the compound that results in amelioration of symptoms in a patient. Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50, (the dose lethal to 50% of the test population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio between LD50 and ED50. Compounds which exhibit high therapeutic indices are preferred.

The data obtained from these cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in human. The dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50, with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. The exact formulation, route of administration and dosage can be chosen by the individual physician in view of the patient's condition. (See, e.g., Fingl et al., 1975, in “The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics”, Ch. 1).

Computer-Related Embodiments

As used herein the term “nucleic acid codes of the invention” encompass the nucleotide sequences comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of any one of the following:

-   -   a) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40,         50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides         of SEQ ID No. 1, and the complements thereof, wherein said         contiguous span comprises at least one of the following         nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1: 31 to 292651 and 292844 to         319608.     -   b) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40,         50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides         of any of SEQ ID Nos. 54 to 229, and the complements thereof, to         the extent that such a length is consistent with the particular         sequence ID.     -   c) a contiguous span of at least 8, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35,         40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100 or 200 nucleotides,         to the extent that such a length is consistent with the         particular sequence ID, of SEQ ID Nos. 2 to 26, 36 to 40 or the         complements thereof.     -   d) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40,         45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90 or 100 nucleotides of SEQ ID         No. 1 or the complements thereof wherein said contiguous span         comprises at least one of the following nucleotide positions of         SEQ ID No 1:         -   (i) 292653 to 296047, 292653 to 292841, 295555 to 296047 and             295580 to 296047;         -   (ii) 31 to 1107, 1108 to 65853, 1108 to 1289, 14877 to             14920, 18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967             to 30282, 64666 to 64812, 65505 to 65853 and 65854 to 67854;         -   (iii) 94124 to 94964;         -   (iv) 213818 to 215818, 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975,             216661 to 216952, 216661 to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647             to 229742, 230408 to 230721, 231272 to 231412, 231787 to             231880, 231870 to 231879, 234174 to 234321, 237406 to             237428, 239719 to 239807, 239719 to 239853, 240528 to             240569, 240528 to 240596, 240528 to 240617, 240528 to             240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to 240994, 240528 to             241685, 240800 to 240993 and 241686 to 243685; and         -   (v) 201188 to 216915, 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793,             215702 to 215746 and 216836 to 216915;     -   e) a contiguous span according to a), b), c) or d), wherein said         span includes a biallelic marker selected from the group         consisting of A1 to A489.     -   f) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40,         50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides         of SEQ ID No. 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said         contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 nucleotide         positions of any one the ranges of nucleotide positions         designated pos1 to pos166 of SEQ ID No. 1 listed in Table 1         above;     -   g) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40,         50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides         of any of SEQ ID Nos. 2 to 26, 36 to 42, 44 to 48 and 52 to 269,         and the complements thereof, wherein said span includes a         chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, a Region         D-related biallelic marker, an sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or         g35018-related biallelic marker;     -   h) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40,         50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides         of any of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, and the         complements thereof, wherein said span includes a chromosome         13q31-q33-related biallelic marker, a Region D-related biallelic         marker, an sbg1-, g34665-, sbg2-, g35017- or g35018-related         biallelic marker with the alternative allele present at said         biallelic marker.     -   i) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40,         50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides         of any of SEQ ID No 1, and the complements thereof, wherein said         span includes a polymorphism selected from the group consisting         of A1 to A69, A71 to A74, A76 to A94, A96 to A106, A108 to A112,         A114 to A177, A179 to A197, A199 to A222, A224 to A242 and 361         to A489.

The “nucleic acid codes of the invention” further encompass nucleotide sequences homologous to a contiguous span of at least 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000 or 2000 nucleotides, to the extent that such a length is consistent with the particular sequence of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, and the complements thereof. The “nucleic acid codes of the invention” also encompass nucleotide sequences homologous to a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90 or 100 nucleotides of SEQ ID No. 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No. 1:

-   -   (i) 292653 to 296047, 292653 to 292841, 295555 to 296047 and         295580 to 296047;     -   (ii) 31 to 1107, 1108 to 65853, 1108 to 1289, 14877 to 14920,         18778 to 18862, 25593 to 25740, 29388 to 29502, 29967 to 30282,         64666 to 64812, 65505 to 65853 and 65854 to 67854;     -   (iii) 94124 to 94964;     -   (iv) 213818 to 215818, 215819 to 215941, 215819 to 215975,         216661 to 216952, 216661 to 217061, 217027 to 217061, 229647 to         229742, 230408 to 230721, 231272 to 231412, 231787 to 231880,         231870 to 231879, 234174 to 234321, 237406 to 237428, 239719 to         239807, 239719 to 239853, 240528 to 240569, 240528 to 240596,         240528 to 240617, 240528 to 240644, 240528 to 240824, 240528 to         240994, 240528 to 241685, 240800 to 240993 and 241686 to 243685;         and     -   (v) 201188 to 216915, 201188 to 201234, 214676 to 214793, 215702         to 215746 and 216836 to 216915.

Homologous sequences refer to a sequence having at least 99%, 98%, 97%, 96%, 95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, or 75% homology to these contiguous spans. Homology may be determined using any method described herein, including BLAST2N with the default parameters or with any modified parameters. Homologous sequences also may include RNA sequences in which uridines replace the thymines in the nucleic acid codes of the invention. It will be appreciated that the nucleic acid codes of the invention can be represented in the traditional single character format (See the inside back cover of Stryer, Lubert. Biochemistry, 3^(rd) edition. W. H Freeman & Co., New York.) or in any other format or code which records the identity of the nucleotides in a sequence.

As used herein the term “polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43” encompasses the polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35 and 41 to 43, polypeptide sequences homologous to the polypeptides of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43, or fragments of any of the preceding sequences. Homologous polypeptide sequences refer to a polypeptide sequence having at least 99%, 98%, 97%, 96%, 95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, 75% homology to one of the polypeptide sequences of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43. Homology may be determined using any of the computer programs and parameters described herein, including FASTA with the default parameters or with any modified parameters. The homologous sequences may be obtained using any of the procedures described herein or may result from the correction of a sequencing error as described above. The polypeptide fragments comprise at least 4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 75, 100, or 150 consecutive amino acids of the polypeptides of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43. Preferably, the fragments are novel fragments. It will be appreciated that the polypeptide codes of the SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 can be represented in the traditional single character format or three letter format (See the inside back cover of Starrier, Lubert. Biochemistry, 3^(rd) edition. W. H Freeman & Co., New York.) or in any other format which relates the identity of the polypeptides in a sequence.

It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 and polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 can be stored, recorded, and manipulated on any medium which can be read and accessed by a computer. As used herein, the words “recorded” and “stored” refer to a process for storing information on a computer medium. A skilled artisan can readily adopt any of the presently known methods for recording information on a computer readable medium to generate embodiment comprising one or more of nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, or one or more of the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43. Another aspect of the present invention is a computer readable medium having recorded thereon at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229. Another aspect of the present invention is a computer readable medium having recorded thereon at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35 and 41 to 43.

Computer readable media include magnetically readable media, optically readable media, electronically readable media and magnetic/optical media. For example, the computer readable media may be a hard disk, a floppy disk, a magnetic tape, CD-ROM, Digital Versatile Disk (DVD), Random Access Memory (RAM), or Read Only Memory (ROM) as well as other types of other media known to those skilled in the art.

Embodiments of the present invention include systems, particularly computer systems which store and manipulate the sequence information described herein. One example of a computer system 100 is illustrated in block diagram form in FIG. 19. As used herein, “a computer system” refers to the hardware components, software components, and data storage components used to analyze the nucleotide sequences of the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, or the amino acid sequences of the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43. In one embodiment, the computer system 100 is a Sun Enterprise 1000 server (Sun Microsystems, Palo Alto, Calif.). The computer system 100 preferably includes a processor for processing, accessing and manipulating the sequence data. The processor 105 can be any well-known type of central processing unit, such as the Pentium III from Intel Corporation, or similar processor from Sun, Motorola, Compaq or International Business Machines.

Preferably, the computer system 100 is a general purpose system that comprises the processor 105 and one or more internal data storage components 110 for storing data, and one or more data retrieving devices for retrieving the data stored on the data storage components. A skilled artisan can readily appreciate that any one of the currently available computer systems are suitable.

In one particular embodiment, the computer system 100 includes a processor 105 connected to a bus which is connected to a main memory 115 (preferably implemented as RAM) and one or more internal data storage devices 110, such as a hard drive and/or other computer readable media having data recorded thereon. In some embodiments, the computer system 100 further includes one or more data retrieving device 118 for reading the data stored on the internal data storage devices 110.

The data retrieving device 118 may represent, for example, a floppy disk drive, a compact disk drive, a magnetic tape drive, etc. In some embodiments, the internal data storage device 110 is a removable computer readable medium such as a floppy disk, a compact disk, a magnetic tape, etc. containing control logic and/or data recorded thereon. The computer system 100 may advantageously include or be programmed by appropriate software for reading the control logic and/or the data from the data storage component once inserted in the data retrieving device.

The computer system 100 includes a display 120 which is used to display output to a computer user. It should also be noted that the computer system 100 can be linked to other computer systems 125 a-c in a network or wide area network to provide centralized access to the computer system 100.

Software for accessing and processing the nucleotide sequences of the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, or the amino acid sequences of the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 (such as search tools, compare tools, and modeling tools etc.) may reside in main memory 115 during execution.

In some embodiments, the computer system 100 may further comprise a sequence comparer for comparing the above-described nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 stored on a computer readable medium to reference nucleotide or polypeptide sequences stored on a computer readable medium. A “sequence comparer” refers to one or more programs which are implemented on the computer system 100 to compare a nucleotide or polypeptide sequence with other nucleotide or polypeptide sequences and/or compounds including but not limited to peptides, peptidomimetics, and chemicals stored within the data storage means. For example, the sequence comparer may compare the nucleotide sequences of the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229, or the amino acid sequences of the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 stored on a computer readable medium to reference sequences stored on a computer readable medium to identify homologies, motifs implicated in biological function, or structural motifs. The various sequence comparer programs identified elsewhere in this patent specification are particularly contemplated for use in this aspect of the invention.

FIG. 20 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of a process 200 for comparing a new nucleotide or protein sequence with a database of sequences in order to determine the homology levels between the new sequence and the sequences in the database. The database of sequences can be a private database stored within the computer system 100, or a public database such as GENBANK, PIR OR SWISSPROT that is available through the Internet.

The process 200 begins at a start state 201 and then moves to a state 202 wherein the new sequence to be compared is stored to a memory in a computer system 100. As discussed above, the memory could be any type of memory, including RAM or an internal storage device.

The process 200 then moves to a state 204 wherein a database of sequences is opened for analysis and comparison. The process 200 then moves to a state 206 wherein the first sequence stored in the database is read into a memory on the computer. A comparison is then performed at a state 210 to determine if the first sequence is the same as the second sequence. It is important to note that this step is not limited to performing an exact comparison between the new sequence and the first sequence in the database. Well-known methods are known to those of skill in the art for comparing two nucleotide or protein sequences, even if they are not identical. For example, gaps can be introduced into one sequence in order to raise the homology level between the two tested sequences. The parameters that control whether gaps or other features are introduced into a sequence during comparison are normally entered by the user of the computer system.

Once a comparison of the two sequences has been performed at the state 210, a determination is made at a decision state 210 whether the two sequences are the same. Of course, the term “same” is not limited to sequences that are absolutely identical. Sequences that are within the homology parameters entered by the user will be marked as “same” in the process 200.

If a determination is made that the two sequences are the same, the process 200 moves to a state 214 wherein the name of the sequence from the database is displayed to the user. This state notifies the user that the sequence with the displayed name fulfills the homology constraints that were entered. Once the name of the stored sequence is displayed to the user, the process 200 moves to a decision state 218 wherein a determination is made whether more sequences exist in the database. If no more sequences exist in the database, then the process 200 terminates at an end state 220. However, if more sequences do exist in the database, then the process 200 moves to a state 224 wherein a pointer is moved to the next sequence in the database so that it can be compared to the new sequence. In this manner, the new sequence is aligned and compared with every sequence in the database.

It should be noted that if a determination had been made at the decision state 212 that the sequences were not homologous, then the process 200 would move immediately to the decision state 218 in order to determine if any other sequences were available in the database for comparison.

Accordingly, one aspect of the present invention is a computer system comprising a processor, a data storage device having stored thereon a nucleic acid code of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or a polypeptide code of SEQ ID Nos 27 to 35 and 41 to 43, a data storage device having retrievably stored thereon reference nucleotide sequences or polypeptide sequences to be compared to the nucleic acid code of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or polypeptide code of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 and a sequence comparer for conducting the comparison. The sequence comparer may indicate a homology level between the sequences compared or identify structural motifs in the above described nucleic acid code of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 and polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 or it may identify structural motifs in sequences which are compared to these nucleic acid codes and polypeptide codes. In some embodiments, the data storage device may have stored thereon the sequences of at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 of the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43.

Another aspect of the present invention is a method for determining the level of homology between a nucleic acid code of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 and a reference nucleotide sequence, comprising the steps of reading the nucleic acid code and the reference nucleotide sequence through the use of a computer program which determines homology levels and determining homology between the nucleic acid code and the reference nucleotide sequence with the computer program. The computer program may be any of a number of computer programs for determining homology levels, including those specifically enumerated herein, including BLAST2N with the default parameters or with any modified parameters. The method may be implemented using the computer systems described above. The method may also be performed by reading 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 of the above described nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 through use of the computer program and determining homology between the nucleic acid codes and reference nucleotide sequences.

FIG. 21 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of a process 250 in a computer for determining whether two sequences are homologous. The process 250 begins at a start state 252 and then moves to a state 254 wherein a first sequence to be compared is stored to a memory. The second sequence to be compared is then stored to a memory at a state 256. The process 250 then moves to a state 260 wherein the first character in the first sequence is read and then to a state 262 wherein the first character of the second sequence is read. It should be understood that if the sequence is a nucleotide sequence, then the character would normally be either A, T, C, G or U. If the sequence is a protein sequence, then it should be in the single letter amino acid code so that the first and sequence sequences can be easily compared.

A determination is then made at a decision state 264 whether the two characters are the same. If they are the same, then the process 250 moves to a state 268 wherein the next characters in the first and second sequences are read. A determination is then made whether the next characters are the same. If they are, then the process 250 continues this loop until two characters are not the same. If a determination is made that the next two characters are not the same, the process 250 moves to a decision state 274 to determine whether there are any more characters either sequence to read.

If there aren't any more characters to read, then the process 250 moves to a state 276 wherein the level of homology between the first and second sequences is displayed to the user. The level of homology is determined by calculating the proportion of characters between the sequences that were the same out of the total number of sequences in the first sequence. Thus, if every character in a first 100 nucleotide sequence aligned with a every character in a second sequence, the homology level would be 100%.

Alternatively, the computer program may be a computer program which compares the nucleotide sequences of the nucleic acid codes of the present invention, to reference nucleotide sequences in order to determine whether the nucleic acid code of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 differs from a reference nucleic acid sequence at one or more positions. Optionally such a program records the length and identity of inserted, deleted or substituted nucleotides with respect to the sequence of either the reference polynucleotide or the nucleic acid code of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229. In one embodiment, the computer program may be a program which determines whether the nucleotide sequences of the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 contain a biallelic marker or single nucleotide polymorphism (SNP) with respect to a reference nucleotide sequence. This single nucleotide polymorphism may comprise a single base substitution, insertion, or deletion, while this biallelic marker may comprise abour one to ten consecutive bases substituted, inserted or deleted.

Another aspect of the present invention is a method for determining the level of homology between a polypeptide code of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 and a reference polypeptide sequence, comprising the steps of reading the polypeptide code of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 and the reference polypeptide sequence through use of a computer program which determines homology levels and determining homology between the polypeptide code and the reference polypeptide sequence using the computer program.

Accordingly, another aspect of the present invention is a method for determining whether a nucleic acid code of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 differs at one or more nucleotides from a reference nucleotide sequence comprising the steps of reading the nucleic acid code and the reference nucleotide sequence through use of a computer program which identifies differences between nucleic acid sequences and identifying differences between the nucleic acid code and the reference nucleotide sequence with the computer program. In some embodiments, the computer program is a program which identifies single nucleotide polymorphisms. The method may be implemented by the computer-systems described above and the method illustrated in FIG. 21. The method may also be performed by reading at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 of the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 and the reference nucleotide sequences through the use of the computer program and identifying differences between the nucleic acid codes and the reference nucleotide sequences with the computer program.

In other embodiments the computer based system may further comprise an identifier for identifying features within the nucleotide sequences of the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or the amino acid sequences of the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43.

An “identifier” refers to one or more programs which identifies certain features within the above-described nucleotide sequences of the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or the amino acid sequences of the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43. In one embodiment, the identifier may comprise a program which identifies an open reading frame in the cDNAs codes of SEQ ID Nos 2 to 26 and 36 to 40.

FIG. 22 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of an identifier process 300 for detecting the presence of a feature in a sequence. The process 300 begins at a start state 302 and then moves to a state 304 wherein a first sequence that is to be checked for features is stored to a memory 115 in the computer system 100. The process 300 then moves to a state 306 wherein a database of sequence features is opened. Such a database would include a list of each feature's attributes along with the name of the feature. For example, a feature name could be “Initiation Codon” and the attribute would be “ATG”. Another example would be the feature name “TAATAA Box” and the feature attribute would be “TAATAA”. An example of such a database is produced by the University of Wisconsin Genetics Computer Group (www.gcg.com).

Once the database of features is opened at the state 306, the process 300 moves to a state 308 wherein the first feature is read from the database. A comparison of the attribute of the first feature with the first sequence is then made at a state 310. A determination is then made at a decision state 316 whether the attribute of the feature was found in the first sequence. If the attribute was found, then the process 300 moves to a state 318 wherein the name of the found feature is displayed to the user.

The process 300 then moves to a decision state 320 wherein a determination is made whether move features exist in the database. If no more features do exist, then the process 300 terminates at an end state 324. However, if more features do exist in the database, then the process 300 reads the next sequence feature at a state 326 and loops back to the state 310 wherein the attribute of the next feature is compared against the first sequence.

It should be noted, that if the feature attribute is not found in the first sequence at the decision state 316, the process 300 moves directly to the decision state 320 in order to determine if any more features exist in the database.

In another embodiment, the identifier may comprise a molecular modeling program which determines the 3-dimensional structure of the polypeptides codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43. In some embodiments, the molecular modeling program identifies target sequences that are most compatible with profiles representing the structural environments of the residues in known three-dimensional protein structures. (See, e.g., Eisenberg et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,436,850 issued Jul. 25, 1995). In another technique, the known three-dimensional structures of proteins in a given family are superimposed to define the structurally conserved regions in that family. This protein modeling technique also uses the known three-dimensional structure of a homologous protein to approximate the structure of the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43. (See e.g., Srinivasan, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,557,535 issued Sep. 17, 1996). Conventional homology modeling techniques have been used routinely to build models of proteases and antibodies. (Sowdhamini et al., Protein Engineering 10:207, 215 (1997)). Comparative approaches can also be used to develop three-dimensional protein models when the protein of interest has poor sequence identity to template proteins. In some cases, proteins fold into similar three-dimensional structures despite having very weak sequence identities. For example, the three-dimensional structures of a number of helical cytokines fold in similar three-dimensional topology in spite of weak sequence homology.

The recent development of threading methods no %% enables the identification of likely folding patterns in a number of situations where the structural relatedness between target and template(s) is not detectable at the sequence level. Hybrid methods, in which fold recognition is performed using Multiple Sequence Threading (MST), structural equivalencies are deduced from the threading output using a distance geometry program DRAGON to construct a low resolution model, and a full-atom representation is constructed using a molecular modeling package such as QUANTA.

According to this 3-step approach, candidate templates are first identified by using the novel fold recognition algorithm MST, which is capable of performing simultaneous threading of multiple aligned sequences onto one or more 3-D structures. In a second step, the structural equivalencies obtained from the MST output are converted into interresidue distance restraints and fed into the distance geometry program DRAGON, together with auxiliary information obtained from secondary structure predictions. The program combines the restraints in an unbiased manner and rapidly generates a large number of low resolution model confirmations. In a third step, these low resolution model confirmations are converted into full-atom models and subjected to energy minimization using the molecular modeling package QUANTA. (See e.g., Aszódi et al., Proteins:Structure, Function, and Genetics, Supplement 1:38-42 (1997)).

The results of the molecular modeling analysis may then be used in rational drug design techniques to identify agents which modulate the activity of the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43.

Accordingly, another aspect of the present invention is a method of identifying a feature within the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 comprising reading the nucleic acid code(s) or the polypeptide code(s) through the use of a computer program which identifies features therein and identifying features within the nucleic acid code(s) or polypeptide code(s) with the computer program. In one embodiment, computer program comprises a computer program which identifies open reading frames. In a further embodiment, the computer program identifies structural motifs in a polypeptide sequence. In another embodiment, the computer program comprises a molecular modeling program. The method may be performed by reading a single sequence or at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 of the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 through the use of the computer program and identifying features within the nucleic acid codes or polypeptide codes with the computer program.

The nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 may be stored and manipulated in a variety of data processor programs in a variety of formats. For example, the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43 may be stored as text in a word processing file, such as MicrosoftWORD or WORDPERFECT or as an ASCII file in a variety of database programs familiar to those of skill in the art, such as DB2, SYBASE, or ORACLE. In addition, many computer programs and databases may be used as sequence comparers, identifiers, or sources of reference nucleotide or polypeptide sequences to be compared to the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43. The following list is intended not to limit the invention but to provide guidance to programs and databases which are useful with the nucleic acid codes of SEQ ID Nos. 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 or the polypeptide codes of SEQ ID Nos. 27 to 35 and 41 to 43. The programs and databases which may be used include, but are not limited to: MacPattern (EMBL), DiscoveryBase (Molecular Applications Group), GeneMine (Molecular Applications Group), Look (Molecular Applications Group), MacLook (Molecular Applications Group), BLAST and BLAST2 (NCBI), BLASTN and BLASTX (Altschul et al, J. Mol. Biol. 215: 403 (1990)), FASTA (Pearson and Lipman, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 85: 2444 (1988)), FASTDB (Brutlag et al. Comp. App. Biosci. 6:237-245, 1990), Catalyst (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Catalyst/SHAPE (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Cerius².DBAccess (Molecular Simulations Inc.), HypoGen (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Insight II, (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Discover (Molecular Simulations Inc.), CHARMm (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Felix (Molecular Simulations Inc.), DelPhi, (Molecular Simulations Inc.), QuanteMM, (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Homology (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Modeler (Molecular Simulations Inc.), ISIS (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Quanta/Protein Design (Molecular Simulations Inc.), WebLab (Molecular Simulations Inc.), WebLab Diversity Explorer (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Gene Explorer (Molecular Simulations Inc.), SeqFold (Molecular Simulations Inc.), the EMBL/Swissprotein database, the MDL Available Chemicals Directory database, the MDL Drug Data Report data base, the Comprehensive Medicinal Chemistry database, Derwents's World Drug Index database, the BioByteMasterFile database, the Genbank database, and the Genseqn database. Many other programs and data bases would be apparent to one of skill in the art given the present disclosure.

Motifs which may be detected using the above programs include sequences encoding leucine zippers, helix-turn-helix motifs, glycosylation sites, ubiquitination sites, alpha helices, and beta sheets, signal sequences encoding signal peptides which direct the secretion of the encoded proteins, sequences implicated in transcription regulation such as homeoboxes, acidic stretches, enzymatic active sites, substrate binding sites, and enzymatic cleavage sites.

Throughout this application, various publications, patents, and published patent applications are cited. The disclosures of the publications, patents, and published patent specifications referenced in this application are hereby incorporated by reference into the present disclosure to more fully describe the state of the art to which this invention pertains.

EXAMPLES

Several of the methods of the present invention are described in the following examples, which are offered by way of illustration and not by way of limitation. Many other modifications and variations of the invention as herein set forth can be made without departing from the spirit and scope thereof and therefore only such limitations should be imposed as are indicated by the appended claims.

Example 1 Identification of Biallelic Markers—DNA Extraction

Donors were unrelated and healthy. They presented a sufficient diversity for being representative of a heterogeneous population. The DNA from 100 individuals was extracted and tested for the detection of the biallelic markers.

30 ml of peripheral venous blood were taken from each donor in the presence of EDTA. Cells (pellet) were collected after centrifugation for 10 minutes at 2000 rpm. Red cells were lysed by a lysis solution (50 ml final volume: 10 mM Tris pH7.6; 5 mM MgCl₂; 10 mM NaCl). The solution was centrifuged (10 minutes, 2000 rpm) as many times as necessary to eliminate the residual red cells present in the supernatant, after resuspension of the pellet in the lysis solution.

The pellet of white cells was lysed overnight at 42° C. with 3.7 ml of lysis solution composed of:

-   -   3 ml TE 10-2 (Tris-HCl 10 mM, EDTA 2 mM)/NaCl 0 4 M     -   200 μl SDS 10%     -   500 μl K-proteinase (2 mg K-proteinase in TE 10-2/NaCl 0.4 M).

For the extraction of proteins, 1 ml saturated NaCl (6M) (1/3.5 v/v) was added. After vigorous agitation, the solution was centrifuged for 20 minutes at 10000 rpm.

For the precipitation of DNA, 2 to 3 volumes of 100% ethanol were added to the previous supernatant, and the solution was centrifuged for 30 minutes at 2000 rpm. The DNA solution was rinsed three times with 70% ethanol to eliminate salts, and centrifuged for 20 minutes at 2000 rpm. The pellet was dried at 37° C., and resuspended in 1 ml TE 10-1 or 1 ml water. The DNA concentration was evaluated by measuring the OD at 260 nm (1 unit OD=50 μg/ml DNA). To determine the presence of proteins in the DNA solution, the OD 260/OD 280 ratio was determined. Only DNA preparations having a OD 260/OD 280 ratio between 1.8 and 2 were used in the subsequent examples described below.

The pool was constituted by mixing equivalent quantities of DNA from each individual.

Example 2

Identification of Biallelic Markers: Amplification of Genomic DNA by PCR

The amplification of specific genomic sequences of the DNA samples of Example 1 was carried out on the pool of DNA obtained previously. In addition, 50 individual samples were similarly amplified.

PCR assays were performed using the following protocol: Final volume 25 μl DNA 2 ng/μl MgCl₂ 2 mM dNTP (each) 200 μM primer (each) 2.9 ng/μl Ampli Taq Gold DNA polymerase 0.05 unit/μl PCR buffer (10× = 0.1 M TrisHCl pH8.3 0.5 M KCl) 1×

Each pair of first primers was designed using the sequence information of genomic DNA sequences of SEQ ID Nos 1 to 26, 36 to 40 and 54 to 229 disclosed herein and the OSP software (Hillier & Green, 1991). This first pair of primers was about 20 nucleotides in length and had the sequences disclosed in Table 6a in the columns labeled “Position range of amplification primer in SEQ ID No.” and “Complementary position range of amplification primer in SEQ ID No.”. TABLE 6a Complementary Position range of position range of SEQ Primer amplification primer Primer amplification primer Amplicon ID No name in SEQ ID name in SEQ ID 99-27943 1 B1 7938 7958 C1 8446 8465  8-121 1 B2 14699 14718 C2 15100 15118 99-27935 1 B3 21365 21385 C3 21845 21864  8-122 1 B4 25409 25426 C4 25825 25844  8-123 1 B5 29349 29366 C5 29684 29701  8-147 1 B6 29900 29919 C6 30340 30356 99-34243 1 B7 49219 49239 C7 49664 49684  8-127 1 B8 64639 64657 C8 64981 64999  8-128 1 B9 65453 65471 C9 65856 65874  8-129 1 B10 65547 65566 C10 65949 65966 99-34240 1 B11 75629 75649 C11 76140 76158 99-31959 1 B12 94254 94273 C12 94683 94703 99-31960 1 B13 95034 95053 C13 95543 95563 99-31962 1 B14 96707 96727 C14 97222 97242 99-44282 1 B15 106357 106377 C15 106805 106822 99-24656 1 B16 107022 107040 C16 107495 107513 99-24636 1 B17 107132 107152 C17 107613 107630 99-31939 1 B18 108425 108444 C18 108916 108935 99-44281 1 B19 109333 109353 C19 109848 109868 99-31941 1 B20 112149 112169 C20 112720 112740 99-31942 1 B21 115144 115162 C21 115617 115637 99-24635 1 B22 155353 155373 C22 155805 155822 99-16059 1 B23 157860 157878 C23 158296 158316 99-24634 1 B24 160770 160787 C24 161240 161257 99-24639 1 B25 160279 160298 C25 160785 160802 99-7652 1 B26 168813 168830 C26 169331 169351 99-16100 1 B27 170666 170686 C27 171153 171173 99-5862 1 B28 173065 173085 C28 173495 173514 99-16083 1 B29 173830 173850 C29 174309 174327 99-16044 1 B30 175453 175470 C30 175881 175901 99-16042 1 B31 180464 180481 C31 180991 181008 99-5919 1 B32 189753 189771 C32 190187 190207 99-24658 1 B33 197116 197135 C33 197555 197572 99-30364 1 B34 198666 198684 C34 199148 199168 99-30366 1 B35 200145 200162 C35 200663 200683 99-16094 1 B36 204263 204282 C36 204643 204662 99-24644 1 B37 204741 204758 C37 205222 205240 99-16107 1 B38 206103 206120 C38 206548 206568 99-15873 1 B39 211454 211471 C39 211893 211910  8-124 1 B40 214564 214581 C40 214965 214983  8-125 1 B41 215506 215525 C41 215924 215942  8-132 1 B42 215628 215647 C42 215998 216016 99-13929 1 B43 215749 215769 C43 216210 216228  8-131 1 B44 216473 216491 C44 216883 216900  8-130 1 B45 216683 216702 C45 217091 217109  8-209 1 B46 217119 217136 C46 217521 217539 99-5897 1 B47 219408 219425 C47 219882 219899 99-24649 1 B48 220505 220522 C48 221004 221021  8-199 1 B49 221384 221402 C49 221807 221824  8-198 1 B50 221740 221759 C50 222167 222185  8-195 1 B51 222696 222713 C51 223073 223093 99-13925 1 B52 223499 223518 C52 224013 224033  8-192 1 B53 225103 225120 C53 225505 225524 99-16090 1 B54 225995 226013 C54 226510 226530  8-189 1 B55 226211 226230 C55 226615 226632  8-188 1 B56 226569 226588 C56 226988 227005  8-187 1 B57 226915 226934 C57 227319 227338  8-185 1 B58 227468 227487 C58 227888 227907 99-16051 1 B59 227768 227788 C59 228214 228231  8-184 1 B60 227832 227849 C60 228234 228252  8-183 1 B61 228209 228227 C61 228635 228654  8-181 1 B62 228898 228917 C62 229499 229517  8-180 1 B63 229443 229462 C63 229624 229642  8-179 1 B64 229442 229459 C64 229857 229874  8-143 1 B65 229487 229506 C65 229896 229913  8-178 1 B66 229739 229756 C66 230141 230159  8-177 1 B67 230097 230115 C67 230517 230536  8-119 1 B68 230210 230227 C68 230622 230641  8-138 1 B69 230517 230536 C69 230899 230917  8-175 1 B70 230705 230724 C70 231127 231144 99-15870 1 B71 231278 231298 C71 231729 231747  8-142 1 B72 231084 231103 C72 231485 231503  8-145 1 B73 231588 231605 C73 231990 232007  8-171 1 B74 232147 232166 C74 232547 232566  8-170 1 B75 232405 232423 C75 232830 232849  8-169 1 B76 232744 232762 C76 233145 233163  8-168 1 B77 233056 233074 C77 233461 233479  8-235 1 B78 233314 233334 C78 233785 233801  8-137 1 B79 234039 234058 C79 234440 234458  8-165 1 B80 234516 234533 C80 234916 234935 99-16087 1 B81 235081 235101 C81 235515 235533  8-157 1 B82 237972 237989 C82 238381 238399  8-155 1 B83 238607 238626 C83 239029 239046 99-16038 1 B84 239405 239425 C84 239862 239880  8-136 1 B85 239606 239624 C85 240012 240029  8-153 1 B86 239651 239670 C86 240058 240075  8-135 1 B87 240356 240375 C87 240691 240708 99-16050 1 B88 240518 240538 C88 240988 241006  8-144 1 B89 240810 240828 C89 241217 241235  8-141 1 B90 241094 241113 C90 241502 241520 99-15880 1 B91 241700 241717 C91 242151 242171  8-140 1 B92 241373 241392 C92 241773 241792  8-240 1 B93 242169 242188 C93 242571 242588  8-225 1 B94 244172 244191 C94 244574 244593 99-25940 1 B95 247513 247533 C95 248023 248043 99-16032 1 B96 248204 248223 C96 248588 248606 99-16055 1 B97 253315 253333 C97 253816 253834 99-16105 1 B98 255697 255715 C98 256133 256152 99-16101 1 B99 258138 258155 C99 258606 258623 99-16033 1 B100 259885 259902 C100 260324 260342 99-15875 1 B101 279626 279644 C101 280154 280173 99-13521 1 B102 287977 287995 C102 288484 288504  8-112 1 B103 292501 292519 C103 292901 292920  8-111 1 B104 295376 295395 C104 295777 295795  8-110 1 B105 295682 295701 C105 296102 296119  8-134 1 B106 295812 295830 C106 296143 296161 99-7462 1 B107 298946 298964 C107 299459 299476 99-16052 1 B108 300153 300170 C108 300660 300680 99-16047 1 B109 311615 311632 C109 312126 312144 99-25993 1 B110 315649 315668 C110 316129 316147 99-25101 1 B111 316925 316943 C111 317378 317395  8-94 162 B112 1250 1267 C112 1651 1669  8-95 161 B113 1125 1144 C113 1526 1543  8-97 160 B114 1249 1268 C114 1581 1598  8-98 159 B115 1135 1154 C115 1550 1568 99-14021 151 B116 1394 1411 C116 1853 1870 99-14364 152 B117 1344 1364 C117 1798 1816 99-15056 115 B118 1098 1118 C118 1582 1599 99-15063 116 B119 1347 1364 C119 1784 1804 99-15065 117 B120 1120 1140 C120 1568 1585 99-15229 157 B121 1419 1437 C121 1893 1912 99-15231 163 B122 1189 1209 C122 1701 1719 99-15232 155 B123 1211 1228 C123 1677 1695 99-15239 164 B124 1139 1156 C124 1579 1599 99-15252 118 B125 1 18 C125 434 451 99-15253 119 B126 1120 1138 C126 1578 1596 99-15256 120 B127 1110 1127 C127 1548 1565 99-15258 121 B128 1165 1183 C128 1685 1705 99-15261 122 B129 1302 1320 C129 1782 1802 99-15280 123 B130 1070 1087 C130 1590 1610 99-15355 124 B131 1352 1369 C131 1822 1840 99-15663 175 B132 1349 1369 C132 1781 1798 99-15664 176 B133 1184 1203 C133 1667 1685 99-15665 174 B134 1423 1441 C134 1879 1898 99-15668 177 B135 1363 1380 C135 1801 1821 99-15672 173 B136 1120 1138 C136 1649 1666 99-15682 178 B137 1184 1202 C137 1665 1683 99-16081 113 B138 114 131 C138 556 575 99-16082 114 B139 16 33 C139 527 547 99-20933 179 B140 1130 1149 C140 1563 1581 99-20977 147 B141 1430 1447 C141 1921 1941 99-20978 148 B142 1124 1144 C142 1571 1589 99-20981 149 B143 1202 1219 C143 1630 1650 99-20983 150 B144 1099 1119 C144 1530 1548 99-22310 154 B145 1183 1203 C145 1630 1648 99-25029 180 B146 1292 1307 C146 1722 1741 99-25224 125 B147 937 955 C147 1446 1466 99-25869 181 B148 1320 1340 C148 1849 1868 99-25881 182 B149 1227 1245 C149 1693 1713 99-25897 183 B150 1242 1262 C150 1736 1756 99-25906 184 B151 1374 1392 C151 1888 1908 99-25917 185 B152 1115 1135 C152 1595 1615 99-25924 186 B153 1287 1306 C153 1717 1736 99-25950 126 B154 1381 1399 C154 1859 1879 99-25961 127 B155 1391 1411 C155 1854 1873 99-25965 128 B156 1429 1449 C156 1879 1899 99-25966 129 B157 1219 1239 C157 1721 1741 99-25967 130 B158 1064 1084 C158 1537 1556 99-25969 131 B159 1171 1191 C159 1680 1700 99-25972 132 B160 1368 1388 C160 1795 1815 99-25974 133 B161 1100 1120 C161 1623 1643 99-25977 134 B162 1191 1211 C162 1710 1730 99-25978 135 B163 1155 1175 C163 1644 1663 99-25979 136 B164 1409 1427 C164 1924 1944 99-25980 137 B165 1332 1352 C165 1817 1837 99-25984 138 B166 1293 1310 C166 1794 1812 99-25985 139 B167 1308 1328 C167 1756 1776 99-25989 140 B168 1346 1366 C168 1880 1898 99-26126 165 B169 1004 1022 C169 1525 1545 99-26138 187 B170 1309 1327 C170 1741 1761 99-26146 188 B171 1314 1334 C171 1746 1764 99-26147 141 B172 1433 1453 C172 1879 1896 99-26150 142 B173 1323 1340 C173 1758 1776 99-26153 143 B174 1458 1476 C174 1885 1905 99-26154 144 B175 1396 1415 C175 1903 1920 99-26156 145 B176 1212 1229 C176 1702 1722 99-26166 166 B177 1237 1257 C177 1739 1757 99-26167 167 B178 1319 1339 C178 1759 1778 99-26169 168 B179 1262 1282 C179 1693 1711 99-26171 169 B180 1431 1450 C180 1860 1880 99-26183 170 B181 1348 1367 C181 1798 1818 99-26189 189 B182 1215 1235 C182 1644 1664 99-26190 190 B183 1071 1091 C183 1502 1520 99-26191 191 B184 1095 1115 C184 1539 1558 99-26201 192 B185 1304 1324 C185 1749 1767 99-26222 193 B186 1354 1373 C186 1843 1863 99-26223 194 B187 1277 1297 C187 1842 1862 99-26225 195 B188 1355 1375 C188 1805 1825 99-26228 196 B189 1330 1350 C189 1792 1812 99-26233 197 B190 1254 1274 C190 1755 1775 99-26234 198 B191 1379 1399 C191 1813 1833 99-26238 199 B192 1235 1255 C192 1668 1686 99-5873 146 B193 1176 1194 C193 1632 1649 99-5912 171 B194 1463 1483 C194 1946 1963 99-6012 158 B195 1292 1310 C195 1758 1776 99-6080 156 B196 1061 1081 C196 1572 1589 99-7308 153 B197 1345 1362 C197 1814 1834 99-7337 172 B198 1298 1318 C198 1731 1748 99-16106 200 B199 32 50 C199 518 535 99-25332 201 B200 1 18 C200 461 478 99-25516 202 B201 1 18 C201 385 404 99-26173 203 B202 1033 1052 C202 1570 1589 99-26267 204 B203 983 1002 C203 1553 1573 99-26284 205 B204 1460 1480 C204 1874 1894 99-26559 206 B205 1187 1207 C205 1650 1670 99-26769 207 B206 1249 1267 C206 1707 1727 99-26772 208 B207 1235 1254 C207 1702 1722 99-26776 209 B208 1294 1314 C208 1755 1775 99-26779 210 B209 1072 1089 C209 1548 1568 99-26781 211 B210 1477 1497 C210 1905 1925 99-26782 212 B211 1202 1221 C211 1695 1715 99-26783 213 B212 1421 1440 C212 1857 1877 99-26787 214 B213 1406 1425 C213 1872 1892 99-26789 215 B214 1301 1319 C214 1771 1791 99-27297 216 B215 1206 1224 C215 1761 1779 99-27306 217 B216 1395 1415 C216 1822 1842 99-27312 218 B217 1445 1463 C217 1940 1960 99-27323 219 B218 1132 1150 C218 1610 1628 99-27335 220 B219 1322 1342 C219 1768 1788 99-27345 221 B220 1139 1159 C220 1672 1689 99-27349 222 B221 1337 1355 C221 1748 1767 99-27352 223 B222 1250 1269 C222 1677 1697 99-27353 224 B223 1085 1105 C223 1584 1604 99-27360 225 B224 1361 1381 C224 1793 1812 99-27361 226 B225 1322 1340 C225 1815 1834 99-27365 227 B226 1081 1099 C226 1590 1609 99-27680 228 B227 1 18 C227 509 526 99-27912 229 B228 1230 1250 C228 1659 1679 99-30329 112 B229 1 18 C229 496 514

Preferably, the primers contained a common oligonucleotide tail upstream of the specific bases targeted for amplification which was useful for sequencing.

Primers from the column labeled “Position range of amplification primer in SEQ ID No.” contain the following additional PU 5′ sequence: TGTAAAACGACGGCCAGT (SEQ ID No. 230); primers from the column labeled “Complementary position range of amplification primer in SEQ ID No.” contain the following RP 5′ sequence: CAGGAAACAGCTATGACC (SEQ ID No. 231).

The synthesis of these primers was performed following the phosphoramidite method, on a GENSET UFPS 24.1 synthesizer.

DNA amplification was performed on a Genius II thermocycler. After heating at 95° C. for 10 min, 40 cycles were performed. Each cycle comprised: 30 sec at 95° C., 54° C. for 1 min, and 30 sec at 72° C. For final elongation, 10 min at 72° C. ended the amplification. The quantities of the amplification products obtained were determined on 96-well microtiter plates, using a fluorometer and Picogreen as intercalant agent (Molecular Probes).

Example 3 Identification of Polymorphisms

a) Identification of Biallelic Markers from Amplified Genomic DNA of Example 2

The sequencing of the amplified DNA obtained in Example 2 was carried out on ABI 377 sequencers. The sequences of the amplification products were determined using automated dideoxy terminator sequencing reactions with a dye terminator cycle sequencing protocol. The products of the sequencing reactions were run on sequencing gels and the sequences were determined using gel image analysis (ABI Prism DNA Sequencing Analysis software (2.1.2 version)).

The sequence data were further evaluated to detect the presence of biallelic markers within the amplified fragments. The polymorphism search was based on the presence of superimposed peaks in the electrophoresis pattern resulting from different bases occurring at the same position as described previously.

The localization of the biallelic markers detected in the fragments of amplification are as shown below in Table 6b. TABLE 6b Biallelic Markers BM Position of Marker Polymorphism SEQ position probes in Amplicon BM Name All1 All2 ID No. in SEQ ID SEQ ID No. Probes 99-27943 A1 99-27943-150 G C 1 8316 8304 8328 P1 8-121 A2 8-121-28 A T 1 14726 14714 14738 P2 8-121 A3 8-121-36 C T 1 14734 14722 14746 P3 8-121 A4 8-121-154 A T 1 14852 14840 14864 P4 8-121 A5 8-121-187 A C 1 14885 14873 14897 P5 8-121 A6 8-121-243 G T 1 14941 14929 14953 P6 8-121 A7 8-121-281 A C 1 14979 14967 14991 P7 8-121 A8 8-121-352 C T 1 15050 15038 15062 P8 8-121 A9 8-121-364 C T 1 15062 15050 15074 P9 8-121 A10 8-121-371 A G 1 15069 15057 15081 P10 99-27935 A11 99-27935-193 G C 1 21672 21660 21684 P11 8-122 A12 8-122-72 A T 1 25480 25468 25492 P12 8-122 A13 8-122-100 C T 1 25508 25496 25520 P13 8-122 A14 8-122-271 deletion of 1 25679 25667 25691 P14 CAAA 8-122 A15 8-122-272 A A 1 25680 25668 25692 P15 8-122 A16 8-122-326 A A 1 25734 25722 25746 P16 8-122 A17 8-122-360 C C 1 25768 25756 25780 P17 8-123 A18 8-123-55 A A 1 29403 29391 29415 P18 8-123 A19 8-123-189 C C 1 29537 29525 29549 P19 8-123 A20 8-123-197 C C 1 29545 29533 29557 P20 8-123 A21 8-123-307 G G 1 29655 29643 29667 P21 8-147 A22 8-147-270 A A 1 30169 30157 30181 P22 99-34243 A23 99-34243-210 A A 1 49475 49463 49487 P23 8-127 A24 8-127-28 A A 1 64666 64654 64678 P24 8-127 A25 8-127-119 A A 1 64757 64745 64769 P25 8-127 A26 8-127-159 A A 1 64797 64785 64809 P26 8-127 A27 8-127-236 C C 1 64874 64862 64886 P27 8-127 A28 8-127-240 A A 1 64878 64866 64890 P28 8-127 A29 8-127-280 G G 1 64918 64906 64930 P29 8-128 A30 8-128-33 C C 1 65485 65473 65497 P30 8-128 A31 8-128-52 A A 1 65504 65492 65516 P31 8-128 A32 8-128-61 G G 1 65513 65501 65525 P32 8-128 A33 8-128-68 C C 1 65520 65508 65532 P33 8-128 A34 8-128-69 A A 1 65521 65509 65533 P34 8-128 A35 8-128-85 A A 1 65537 65525 65549 P35 8-129 A36 8-129-50 C C 1 65596 65584 65608 P36 8-129 A37 8-129-60 deletion of A 1 65607 65594 65618 P37 8-129 A38 8-129-311 A G 1 65857 65845 65869 P38 8-129 A39 8-129-401 C T 1 65947 65935 65959 P39 99-34240 A40 99-34240-492 A T 1 75667 75655 75679 P40 99-31959 A41 99-31959-281 C T 1 94534 94522 94546 P41 99-31960 A42 99-31960-363 A G 1 95396 95384 95408 P42 99-31962 A43 99-31962-250 C T 1 96956 96944 96968 P43 99-31962 A44 99-31962-450 A G 1 97156 97144 97168 P44 99-44282 A45 99-44282-439 A G 1 106384 106372 106396 P45 99-44282 A46 99-44282-54 C T 1 106769 106757 106781 P46 99-24656 A47 99-24656-137 A G 1 107158 107146 107170 P47 99-24656 A48 99-24656-260 A G 1 107281 107269 107293 P48 99-24636 A49 99-24636-22 A G 1 107609 107597 107621 P49 99-31939 A50 99-31939-75 A G 1 108499 108487 108511 P50 99-31939 A51 99-31939-273 C T 1 108697 108685 108709 P51 99-44281 A52 99-44281-418 G T 1 109451 109439 109463 P52 99-44281 A53 99-44281-257 A G 1 109612 109600 109624 P53 99-44281 A54 99-44281-77 A G 1 109792 109780 109804 P54 99-31941 A55 99-31941-320 G T 1 112468 112456 112480 P55 99-31942 A56 99-31942-325 G T 1 115468 115456 115480 P56 99-24635 A57 99-24635-79 A T 1 155736 155724 155748 P57 99-16059 A58 99-16059-313 A G 1 158172 158160 158184 P58 99-24639 A59 99-24639-169 C T 1 160634 160622 160646 P59 99-24639 A60 99-24639-163 A C 1 160640 160628 160652 P60 99-24634 A61 99-24634-108 A T 1 160876 160864 160888 P61 99-7652 A62 99-7652-162 A G 1 168974 168962 168986 P62 99-7652 A63 99-7652-488 A G 1 169300 169288 169312 P63 99-16100 A64 99-16100-83 C T 1 170746 170734 170758 P64 99-16100 A65 99-16100-147 A G 1 170810 170798 170822 P65 99-16100 A66 99-16100-195 G T 1 170858 170846 170870 P66 99-16100 A67 99-16100-197 C T 1 170860 170848 170872 P67 99-16100 A68 99-16100-244 C T 1 170906 170894 170918 P68 99-16100 A69 99-16100-381 A C 1 171043 171031 171055 P69 99-5862 A70 99-5862-167 A G 1 173358 173346 173370 P70 99-16083 A71 99-16083-101 C T 1 174227 174215 174239 P71 99-16044 A72 99-16044-351 C T 1 175800 175788 175812 P72 99-16042 A73 99-16042-420 A G 1 180589 180577 180601 P73 99-16042 A74 99-16042-31 G C 1 180978 180966 180990 P74 99-5919 A75 99-5919-215 A G 1 189957 189945 189969 P75 99-24658 A76 99-24658-410 A G 1 197163 197151 197175 P76 99-30364 A77 99-30364-299 A G 1 198964 198952 198976 P77 99-30366 A78 99-30366-112 G T 1 200256 200244 200268 P78 99-16094 A79 99-16094-75 G T 1 204588 204576 204600 P79 99-24644 A80 99-24644-194 A G 1 204934 204922 204946 P80 99-16107 A81 99-16107-95 A T 1 206197 206185 206209 P81 99-16107 A82 99-16107-161 A G 1 206263 206251 206275 P82 99-16107 A83 99-16107-383 C T 1 206485 206473 206497 P83 99-15873 A84 99-15873-303 C T 1 211608 211596 211620 P84 8-124 A85 8-124-106 A G 1 214669 214657 214681 P85 8-124 A86 8-124-220 A G 1 214783 214771 214795 P86 8-124 A87 8-124-294 A G 1 214857 214845 214869 P87 8-124 A88 8-124-316 C T 1 214879 214867 214891 P88 8-124 A89 8-124-383 A T 1 214946 214934 214958 P89 8-125 A90 8-125-33 C T 1 215538 215526 215550 P90 8-132 A91 8-132-312 A G 1 215705 215693 215717 P91 8-132 A92 8-132-179 A T 1 215838 215826 215850 P92 8-132 A93 8-132-164 A G 1 215853 215841 215865 P93 8-132 A94 8-132-97 A G 1 215920 215908 215932 P94 99-13929 A95 99-13929-201 G T 1 216028 216016 216040 P95 8-131 A96 8-131-363 G T 1 216538 216526 216550 P96 8-131 A97 8-131-199 G T 1 216702 216690 216714 P97 8-130 A98 8-130-236 C T 1 216874 216862 216886 P98 8-130 A99 8-130-220 G T 1 216890 216878 216902 P99 8-130 A100 8-130-144 C T 1 216966 216954 216978 P100 8-130 A101 8-130-143 A G 1 216967 216955 216979 P101 8-130 A102 8-130-102 C T 1 217008 216996 217020 P102 8-130 A103 8-130-101 G T 1 217009 216997 217021 P103 8-130 A104 8-130-83 A C 1 217027 217015 217039 P104 8-209 A105 8-209-333 A G 1 217207 217195 217219 P105 8-209 A106 8-209-290 A C 1 217250 217238 217262 P106 99-5897 A107 99-5897-143 A C 1 219540 219528 219552 P107 99-24649 A108 99-24649-186 A G 1 220836 220824 220848 P108 99-24649 A109 99-24649-80 G C 1 220942 220930 220954 P109 8-199 A110 8-199-84 G T 1 221741 221729 221753 P110 8-198 A111 8-198-138 A G 1 222048 222036 222060 P111 8-195 A112 8-195-348 C T 1 222746 222734 222758 P112 99-13925 A113 99-13925-97 A G 1 223595 223583 223607 P113 8-192 A114 8-192-82 A G 1 225443 225431 225455 P114 99-16090 A115 99-16090-225 A G 1 226219 226207 226231 P115 8-189 A116 8-189-340 Deletion of 1 226282 226270 2263094 P116 CTAT 8-189 A117 8-189-146 G T 1 226487 226475 226499 P117 8-188 A118 8-188-136 C T 1 226870 226858 226882 P118 8-187 A119 8-187-352 G T 1 226987 226975 226999 P119 8-185 A120 8-185-319 G T 1 227589 227577 227601 P120 8-185 A121 8-185-296 A T 1 227612 227600 227624 P121 99-16051 A122 99-16051-226 C T 1 228006 227994 228018 P122 99-16051 A123 99-16051-164 A G 1 228068 228056 228080 P123 8-184 A124 8-184-119 A T 1 228134 228122 228146 P124 8-184 A125 8-184-27 A C 1 228226 228214 228238 P125 8-183 A126 8-183-401 C T 1 228254 228242 228266 P126 8-181 A127 8-181-449 C T 1 229069 229057 229081 P127 8-181 A128 8-181-350 A T 1 229168 229156 229180 P128 8-181 A129 8-181-259 A G 1 229259 229247 229271 P129 8-181 A130 8-181-230 A T 1 229288 229276 229300 P130 8-181 A131 8-181-210 A T 1 229308 229296 229320 P131 8-181 A132 8-181-165 C T 1 229353 229341 229365 P132 8-181 A133 8-181-163 C T 1 229355 229343 229367 P133 8-181 A134 8-181-83 C T 1 229435 229423 229447 P134 8-180 A135 8-180-157 A T 1 229486 229474 229498 P135 8-143 A136 8-143-332 A C 1 229582 229570 229594 P136 8-143 A137 8-143-327 A G 1 229587 229575 229599 P137 8-143 A138 8-143-311 A G 1 229603 229591 229615 P138 8-143 A139 8-143-308 A G 1 229606 229594 229618 P139 8-179 A140 8-179-268 A C 1 229607 229595 229619 P140 8-143 A141 8-143-306 A G 1 229608 229596 229620 P141 8-143 A142 8-143-245 G T 1 229669 229657 229681 P142 8-143 A143 8-143-242 A G 1 229672 229660 229684 P143 8-143 A144 8-143-239 C T 1 229675 229663 229687 P144 8-143 A145 8-143-232 G C 1 229682 229670 229694 P145 8-143 A146 8-143-152 G C 1 229762 229750 229774 P146 8-178 A147 8-178-199 G C 1 229961 229949 229973 P147 8-178 A148 8-178-123 Deletion of A 1 230037 230025 230049 P148 8-119 A149 8-119-404 C T 1 230238 230226 230250 P149 8-177 A150 8-177-281 C T 1 230256 230244 230268 P150 8-119 A151 8-119-377 C T 1 230265 230253 230277 P151 8-119 A152 8-119-309 C T 1 230333 230321 230345 P152 8-119 A153 8-119-294 G T 1 230348 230336 230360 P153 8-119 A154 8-119-284 G C 1 230358 230346 230370 P154 8-119 A155 8-119-272 A T 1 230370 230358 230382 P155 8-119 A156 8-119-262 A T 1 230380 230368 230392 P156 8-119 A157 8-119-248 C T 1 230394 230382 230406 P157 8-119 A158 8-119-247 A G 1 230395 230383 230407 P158 8-119 A159 8-119-210 A C 1 230432 230420 230444 P159 8-119 A160 8-119-204 A C 1 230438 230426 230450 P160 8-119 A161 8-119-200 A G 1 230442 230430 230454 P161 8-119 A162 8-119-195 A C 1 230447 230435 230459 P162 8-119 A163 8-119-125 C T 1 230517 230505 230529 P163 8-119 A164 8-119-120 A G 1 230522 230510 230534 P164 8-119 A165 8-119-97 C T 1 230545 230533 230557 P165 8-119 A166 8-119-93 G T 1 230549 230537 230561 P166 8-119 A167 8-119-38 A T 1 230604 230592 230616 P167 8-138 A168 8-138-234 C T 1 230684 230672 230696 P168 8-138 A169 8-138-218 A G 1 230700 230688 230712 P169 8-138 A170 8-138-163 C T 1 230755 230743 230767 P170 8-138 A171 8-138-54 insertion 1 230864 230852 230876 P171 TA 8-175 A172 8-175-75 G T 1 231070 231058 231082 P172 8-142 A173 8-142-386 C T 1 231118 231106 231130 P173 8-142 A174 8-142-370 C T 1 231134 231122 231146 P174 8-142 A175 8-142-211 deletion 1 231290 231278 231302 P175 CAAA 8-142 A176 8-142-132 A G 1 231372 231360 231384 P176 8-145 A177 8-145-339 C T 1 231669 231657 231681 P177 99-15870 A178 99-15870-400 A G 1 231677 231665 231689 P178 8-145 A179 8-145-231 A T 1 231777 231765 231789 P179 8-145 A180 8-145-197 C T 1 231811 231799 231823 P180 8-145 A181 8-145-154 C T 1 231854 231842 231866 P181 8-145 A182 8-145-138 A C 1 231870 231858 231882 P182 8-145 A183 8-145-78 G C 1 231930 231918 231942 P183 8-171 A184 8-171-247 C T 1 232320 232308 232332 P184 8-170 A185 8-170-373 C T 1 232477 232465 232489 P185 8-169 A186 8-169-266 A G 1 232898 232886 232910 P186 8-169 A187 8-169-166 G T 1 232998 232986 233010 P187 8-168 A188 8-168-380 A G 1 233100 233088 233112 P188 8-235 A189 8-235-349 C T 1 233453 233441 233465 P189 8-235 A190 8-235-182 G T 1 233620 233608 233632 P190 8-137 A191 8-137-340 G C 1 234120 234108 234132 P191 8-137 A192 8-137-182 C T 1 234277 234265 234289 P192 8-137 A193 8-137-152 A C 1 234307 234295 234319 P193 8-165 A194 8-165-185 G C 1 234751 234739 234763 P194 99-16087 A195 99-16087-219 G C 1 235315 235303 235327 P195 8-157 A196 8-157-177 A C 1 238223 238211 238235 P196 8-155 A197 8-155-258 C T 1 238789 238777 238801 P197 99-16038 A198 99-16038-118 C T 1 239763 239751 239775 P198 8-136 A199 8-136-166 A G 1 239864 239852 239876 P199 8-136 A200 8-136-145 A G 1 239885 239873 239897 P200 8-136 A201 8-136-80 C T 1 239950 239938 239962 P201 8-153 A202 8-153-32 A G 1 240044 240032 240056 P202 8-135 A203 8-135-212 A G 1 240497 240485 240509 P203 8-135 A204 8-135-166 G T 1 240543 240531 240555 P204 8-135 A205 8-135-112 A G 1 240597 240585 240609 P205 99-16050 A206 99-16050-235 G C 1 240772 240760 240784 P206 8-144 A207 8-144-378 C T 1 240858 240846 240870 P207 8-144 A208 8-144-234 C T 1 241002 240990 241014 P208 8-144 A209 8-144-196 A T 1 241040 241028 241052 P209 8-144 A210 8-144-127 deletion 1 241002 240090 241014 P210 TGGATAC 8-141 A211 8-141-304 C T 1 241217 241205 241229 P211 8-141 A212 8-141-260 C T 1 241261 241249 241273 P212 8-141 A213 8-141-161 G T 1 241360 241348 241372 P213 8-140 A214 8-140-286 A G 1 241507 241495 241519 P214 8-140 A215 8-140-173 A C 1 241620 241608 241632 P215 8-140 A216 8-140-108 G C 1 241685 241673 241697 P216 8-140 A217 8-140-41 A G 1 241752 241740 241764 P217 99-15880 A218 99-15880-162 A G 1 241861 241849 241873 P218 8-240 A219 8-240-187 G T 1 242402 242390 242414 P219 8-225 A220 8-225-281 A T 1 244313 244301 244325 P220 99-25940 A221 99-25940-186 A G 1 247860 247848 247872 P221 99-25940 A222 99-25940-182 C T 1 247864 247852 247876 P222 99-16032 A223 99-16032-292 G T 1 248315 248303 248327 P223 99-16055 A224 99-16055-216 A G 1 253619 253607 253631 P224 99-16105 A225 99-16105-152 A G 1 255848 255836 255860 P225 99-16101 A226 99-16101-436 C T 1 258573 258561 258585 P226 99-16033 A227 99-16033-244 A G 1 260099 260087 260111 P227 99-15875 A228 99-15875-165 C T 1 279789 279777 279801 P228 99-13521 A229 99-13521-31 A G 1 288007 287995 288019 P229 8-112 A230 8-112-241 C T 1 292680 292668 292692 P230 8-112 A231 8-112-155 A C 1 292766 292754 292778 P231 8-112 A232 8-112-45 A T 1 292876 292864 292888 P232 8-111 A233 8-111-301 deletion 1 295491 295479 295503 P233 AGAT 8-110 A234 8-110-404 G C 1 295716 295704 295728 P234 8-110 A235 8-110-89 A G 1 296031 296019 296043 P235 8-134 A236 8-134-94 C T 1 296068 296056 296080 P236 99-7462 A237 99-7462-508 C T 1 298969 298957 298981 P237 99-16052 A238 99-16052-214 A G 1 300365 300353 300377 P238 99-16047 A239 99-16047-115 A G 1 312030 312018 312042 P239 99-25993 A240 99-25993-280 G C 1 315928 315916 315940 P240 99-25993 A241 99-25993-367 A G 1 316014 316002 316026 P241 99-25101 A242 99-25101-151 A G 1 317245 317233 317257 P242 Position of Marker Polymorphism SEQ BM probes in Amplicon BM Name all1 all2 ID No. position SEQ ID No. Probes 8-94 A243 8-94-252 A G 162 1501 1489 1513 P243 8-95 A244 8-95-43 T C 161 1501 1489 1513 P244 8-97 A245 8-97-98 G A 160 1501 1489 1513 P245 8-98 A246 8-98-68 T C 159 1501 1489 1513 P246 99-14021 A247 99-14021-108 A G 151 1501 1489 1513 P247 99-14364 A248 99-14364-415 G A 152 1501 1489 1513 P248 99-15056 A249 99-15056-99 G A 115 1501 1489 1513 P249 99-15063 A250 99-15063-155 A C 116 1501 1489 1513 P250 99-15065 A251 99-15065-85 C G 117 1501 1489 1513 P251 99-15229 A252 99-15229-412 T C 157 1501 1489 1513 P252 99-15231 A253 99-15231-219 T G 163 1501 1489 1513 P253 99-15232 A254 99-15232-291 G T 155 1501 1489 1513 P254 99-15239 A255 99-15239-377 G C 164 1501 1489 1513 P255 99-15252 A256 99-15252-404 C T 118 404 392 416 P256 99-15253 A257 99-15253-382 C T 119 1501 1489 1513 P257 99-15256 A258 99-15256-392 C T 120 1501 1489 1513 P258 99-15258 A259 99-15258-337 G T 121 1501 1489 1513 P259 99-15261 A260 99-15261-202 A G 122 1501 1489 1513 P260 99-15280 A261 99-15280-432 C T 123 1501 1489 1513 P261 99-15355 A262 99-15355-150 C T 124 1501 1489 1513 P262 99-15663 A263 99-15663-298 G A 175 1501 1489 1513 P263 99-15664 A264 99-15664-185 C A 176 1501 1489 1513 P264 99-15665 A265 99-15665-398 T C 174 1501 1489 1513 P265 99-15668 A266 99-15668-139 C T 177 1501 1489 1513 P266 99-15672 A267 99-15672-166 G A 173 1501 1489 1513 P267 99-15682 A268 99-15682-318 A T 178 1501 1489 1513 P268 99-16081 A269 99-16081-217 C T 113 330 318 342 P269 99-16082 A270 99-16082-218 A G 114 233 221 245 P270 99-20933 A271 99-20933-81 T G 179 1501 1489 1513 P271 99-20977 A272 99-20977-72 A C 147 1501 1489 1513 P272 99-20978 A273 99-20978-89 C G 148 1501 1489 1513 P273 99-20981 A274 99-20981-300 A G 149 1501 1489 1513 P274 99-20983 A275 99-20983-48 T C 150 1501 1489 1513 P275 99-22310 A276 99-22310-148 G A 154 1501 1489 1513 P276 99-25029 A277 99-25029-241 G A 180 1501 1489 1513 P277 99-25224 A278 99-25224-189 A G 125 1126 1114 1138 P278 99-25869 A279 99-25869-182 A C 181 1501 1489 1513 P279 99-25881 A280 99-25881-275 G T 182 1501 1489 1513 P280 99-25897 A281 99-25897-264 A T 183 1501 1489 1513 P281 99-25906 A282 99-25906-131 G T 184 1501 1489 1513 P282 99-25917 A283 99-25917-115 G A 185 1501 1489 1513 P283 99-25924 A284 99-25924-215 G C 186 1501 1489 1513 P284 99-25950 A285 99-25950-121 G C 126 1501 1489 1513 P285 99-25961 A286 99-25961-376 T G 127 1501 1489 1513 P286 99-25965 A287 99-25965-399 T C 128 1501 1489 1513 P287 99-25966 A288 99-25966-241 T C 129 1501 1489 1513 P288 99-25967 A289 99-25967-57 T C 130 1501 1489 1513 P289 99-25969 A290 99-25969-200 C A 131 1501 1489 1513 P290 99-25972 A291 99-25972-317 G A 132 1501 1489 1513 P291 99-25974 A292 99-25974-143 T C 133 1501 1489 1513 P292 99-25977 A293 99-25977-311 A G 134 1501 1489 1513 P293 99-25978 A294 99-25978-166 T C 135 1501 1489 1513 P294 99-25979 A295 99-25979-93 A G 136 1501 1489 1513 P295 99-25980 A296 99-25980-173 A T 137 1501 1489 1513 P296 99-25984 A297 99-25984-312 G A 138 1501 1489 1513 P297 99-25985 A298 99-25985-194 C T 139 1501 1489 1513 P298 99-25989 A299 99-25989-398 T C 140 1501 1489 1513 P299 99-26126 A300 99-26126-498 A G 165 1501 1489 1513 P300 99-26138 A301 99-26138-193 C T 187 1501 1489 1513 P301 99-26146 A302 99-26146-264 C A 188 1501 1489 1513 P302 99-26147 A303 99-26147-396 G A 141 1501 1489 1513 P303 99-26150 A304 99-26150-276 T C 142 1501 1489 1513 P304 99-26153 A305 99-26153-44 A C 143 1501 1489 1513 P305 99-26154 A306 99-26154-107 G T 144 1501 1489 1513 P306 99-26156 A307 99-26156-290 A C 145 1501 1489 1513 P307 99-26166 A308 99-26166-257 G A 166 1501 1489 1513 P308 99-26167 A309 99-26167-278 T C 167 1501 1489 1513 P309 99-26169 A310 99-26169-211 T C 168 1501 1489 1513 P310 99-26171 A311 99-26171-71 A G 169 1501 1489 1513 P311 99-26183 A312 99-26183-156 C T 170 1501 1489 1513 P312 99-26189 A313 99-26189-164 C A 189 1501 1489 1513 P313 99-26190 A314 99-26190-20 C A 190 1501 1489 1513 P314 99-26191 A315 99-26191-58 G A 191 1501 1489 1513 P315 99-26201 A316 99-26201-267 C G 192 1501 1489 1513 P316 99-26222 A317 99-26222-149 A G 193 1501 1489 1513 P317 99-26223 A318 99-26223-225 G T 194 1501 1489 1513 P318 99-26225 A319 99-26225-148 G T 195 1501 1489 1513 P319 99-26228 A320 99-26228-172 G C 196 1501 1489 1513 P320 99-26233 A321 99-26233-275 T C 197 1501 1489 1513 P321 99-26234 A322 99-26234-336 C G 198 1501 1489 1513 P322 99-26238 A323 99-26238-186 T A 199 1501 1489 1513 P323 99-5873 A324 99-5873-159 G A 146 1501 1489 1513 P324 99-5912 A325 99-5912-49 A G 171 1501 1489 1513 P325 99-6012 A326 99-6012-220 G T 158 1501 1489 1513 P326 99-6080 A327 99-6080-99 G A 156 1501 1489 1513 P327 99-7308 A328 99-7308-157 C T 153 1501 1489 1513 P328 99-7337 A329 99-7337-204 A C 172 1501 1489 1513 P329 99-16106 A330 99-16106-48 G T 200 79 67 91 P330 99-25332 A331 99-25332-125 A G 201 125 113 137 P331 99-25516 A332 99-25516-307 C T 202 306 294 318 P332 99-26173 A333 99-26173-470 C T 203 1501 1489 1513 P333 99-26267 A334 99-26267-524 C T 204 1501 1489 1513 P334 99-26284 A335 99-26284-394 G A 205 1501 1489 1513 P335 99-26559 A336 99-26559-315 A G 206 1501 1489 1513 P336 99-26769 A337 99-26769-256 A T 207 1501 1489 1513 P337 99-26772 A338 99-26772-268 C T 208 1501 1489 1513 P338 99-26776 A339 99-26776-209 G T 209 1501 1489 1513 P339 99-26779 A340 99-26779-437 G C 210 1497 1485 1509 P340 99-26781 A341 99-26781-25 G T 211 1501 1489 1513 P341 99-26782 A342 99-26782-300 A G 212 1501 1489 1513 P342 99-26783 A343 99-26783-81 A T 213 1501 1489 1513 P343 99-26787 A344 99-26787-96 A G 214 1501 1489 1513 P344 99-26789 A345 99-26789-201 C T 215 1501 1489 1513 P345 99-27297 A346 99-27297-280 T C 216 1501 1489 1513 P346 99-27306 A347 99-27306-108 C T 217 1501 1489 1513 P347 99-27312 A348 99-27312-58 A C 218 1501 1489 1513 P348 99-27323 A349 99-27323-372 G C 219 1501 1489 1513 P349 99-27335 A350 99-27335-191 A C 220 1501 1489 1513 P350 99-27345 A351 99-27345-189 C G 221 1501 1489 1513 P351 99-27349 A352 99-27349-267 G A 222 1501 1489 1513 P352 99-27352 A353 99-27352-197 C G 223 1501 1489 1513 P353 99-27353 A354 99-27353-105 T C 224 1501 1489 1513 P354 99-27360 A355 99-27360-142 G T 225 1501 1489 1513 P355 99-27361 A356 99-27361-181 A G 226 1501 1489 1513 P356 99-27365 A357 99-27365-421 C T 227 1501 1489 1513 P357 99-27680 A358 99-27680-484 G T 228 484 472 496 P358 99-27912 A359 99-27912-272 C T 229 1501 1489 1513 P359 99-30329 A360 99-30329-380 C T 112 380 368 392 P360

Certain biallelic markers of the invention are insertions or deletions, as indicated above. In particular, the deletion of the nucleotides AGAT (A223, biallelic marker 8-111-301) in Table 6b above may comprise a single deletion of the AGAT motif, or deletions of two or more AGAT motifs. This marker (A223) may thus also serve as a microsatellite marker.

BM refers to “biallelic marker”. All1 and all2 refer respectively to allele 1 and allele 2 of the biallelic marker.

b) Identification of Polymorphisms by Comparison of Genomic DNA from Overlapping BACs

Genomic DNA from multiple BACs derived from the same DNA donor sample and overlapping in regions of genomic DNA of SEQ ID No. I was sequenced. Sequencing was carried out on ABI 377 sequencers. The sequences of the amplification products were determined using automated dideoxy terminator sequencing reactions with a dye terminator cycle sequencing protocol. The products of the sequencing reactions were run on sequencing gels and the sequences were determined using gel image analysis (ABI Prism DNA Sequencing Analysis software (2.1.2 version)).

The sequence data from the overlapping regions of SEQ ID No. I were evaluated to detect the presence of sequence polymorphisms. The comparison of sequences identified sequence polymorphisms including single nucleotide substitutions and deletions, and multiple nucleotide deletions. The localization of these polymorphisms within SEQ ID No. I is shown below in Table 6c. TABLE 6c Polymorphism Position in SEQ ID Ref. No. type Allele 1 Allele 2 No. 1 A361 Deletion AAGG 61595 to 61598 A362 Deletion ATTTT 75217 to 75221 A363 Polymorphic base C T 75367 A364 Deletion CACA 88634 to 88637 A365 Polymorphic base A G 90113 A366 Deletion ACAC 93698 to 93701 A367 Polymorphic base C T 94209 A368 Deletion AATG 94331 to 94334 A369 Polymorphic base A G 95396 A370 Polymorphic base C T 95810 A371 Polymorphic base C T 96956 A372 Polymorphic base A G 97156 A373 Deletion CTTTCTTTCT 98749 to 98758 A374 Deletion TA 104314 to 104315 A375 Polymorphic base A C 104455 A376 Polymorphic base A G 104699 A377 Polymorphic base C T 106253 A378 Polymorphic base A T 106272 A379 Polymorphic base A C 106350 A380 Polymorphic base A G 106384 A381 Polymorphic base A G 107158 A382 Deletion AT 107168 to 107169 A383 Polymorphic base A G 107609 A384 Polymorphic base A G 108032 A385 Deletion ATGGAGATGGC 108668 to 108816 AACACCTACAT GTGACCTTTCC AGCATGGCAGT CTCAGAGTGGA TATGGCAACAG CTGCACATGAC CTCTCCAGCAT GGCAGTCTCAG AGTGGATATGG CAACAGCTGCA CATGACCTCTC CGGCATGGCAG TCTCAG A386 Polymorphic base G T 110222 A387 Polymorphic base A G 111978 A388 Polymorphic base G T 112468 A389 Deletion ACTT 117324 to 117327 A390 Polymorphic base C T 118972 A391 Deletion TT 119160 to 119161 A392 Polymorphic base C T 119316 A393 Polymorphic base A G 119321 A394 Polymorphic base A G 119526 A395 Polymorphic base A G 120573 A396 Polymorphic base A C 121527 A397 Polymorphic base C T 126105 A398 Polymorphic base C G 129789 A399 Polymorphic base A G 130777 A400 Deletion ATT 136942 to 136944 A401 Polymorphic base A T 143839 A402 Polymorphic base C T 146668 A403 Polymorphic base C T 147281 A404 Polymorphic base G T 147505 A405 Deletion T 148183 A406 Polymorphic base A C 148372 A407 Polymorphic base A G 149012 A408 Polymorphic base C T 149113 A409 Polymorphic base A G 151637 A410 Deletion G 151748 A411 Polymorphic base A G 151769 A412 Polymorphic base C T 151847 A413 Polymorphic base A C 152691 A414 Polymorphic base A G 152766 A415 Polymorphic base C T 153046 A416 Polymorphic base A G 153123 A417 Polymorphic base C T 153925 A418 Polymorphic base G T 153977 A419 Polymorphic base C T 154502 A420 Polymorphic base A G 154677 A421 Polymorphic base C T 154879 A422 Polymorphic base G T 154918 A423 Polymorphic base C T 155802 A424 Polymorphic base A G 156448 A425 Polymorphic base A C 157238 A426 Polymorphic base A G 157897 A427 Polymorphic base A G 158172 A428 Polymorphic base A G 158302 A429 Deletion TT 158510 to 158511 A430 Polymorphic base C T 158803 A431 Polymorphic base C T 160172 A432 Polymorphic base C T 160634 A433 Polymorphic base C T 161236 A434 Polymorphic base A G 162810 A435 Polymorphic base A G 163007 A436 Polymorphic base A G 164877 A437 Polymorphic base C T 166844 A438 Deletion TCTC 166911 to 166914 A439 Polymorphic base A G 167754 A440 Polymorphic base C T 167787 A441 Polymorphic base G T 167894 A442 Polymorphic base C T 168346 A443 Polymorphic base A G 168414 A444 Polymorphic base A C 168453 A445 Polymorphic base A G 169300 A446 Polymorphic base C T 169451 A447 Polymorphic base A G 169627 A448 Polymorphic base C T 169984 A449 Polymorphic base C T 170199 A450 Polymorphic base C T 170746 A451 Polymorphic base G T 170858 A452 Polymorphic base C T 170860 A453 Polymorphic base C T 170906 A454 Polymorphic base A G 171309 A455 Polymorphic base A G 171413 A456 Polymorphic base C T 171504 A457 Polymorphic base C T 171539 A458 Polymorphic base C T 171728 A459 Polymorphic base A G 171898 A460 Deletion AA 172125 to 172126 A461 Polymorphic base A G 172295 A462 Polymorphic base A G 172298 A463 Polymorphic base A G 172336 A464 Polymorphic base A G 173145 A465 Polymorphic base C T 173304 A466 Polymorphic base C T 174227 A467 Polymorphic base A G 174397 A468 Polymorphic base C T 179154 A469 Polymorphic base C G 180233 A470 Polymorphic base A G 182552 A471 Polymorphic base C T 182733 A472 Deletion A 182773 A473 Polymorphic base A G 185759 A474 Deletion T 186307 A475 Deletion TATC 186976 to 186979 A476 Polymorphic base A T 188755 A477 Polymorphic base A C 188991 A478 Polymorphic base C T 189002 A479 Polymorphic base A G 189154 A480 Polymorphic base A G 189177 A481 Polymorphic base A G 189604 A482 Polymorphic base C T 190063 A483 Deletion T 191164 A484 Deletion A 193880 A485 Polymorphic base A G 193897 A486 Polymorphic base A T 194441 A487 Deletion T 194459 A488 Polymorphic base A T 195306 A489 Deletion TATC 226323 to 226326

Example 4 Validation Of The Polymorphisms Through Microsequencing

The biallelic markers identified in Example 3a were further confirmed and their respective frequencies were determined through microsequencing. Microsequencing was carried out for each individual DNA sample described in Example 1.

Amplification from genomic DNA of individuals was performed by PCR as described above for the detection of the biallelic markers with the same set of PCR primers (Table 6a).

The preferred primers used in microsequencing were about 19 nucleotides in length and hybridized just upstream of the considered polymorphic base. According to the invention, the primers used in microsequencing are detailed in Table 6d. TABLE 6d Complementary Position range of position range of microsequencing microsequencing Biallelic SEQ primer mis. 1 in primer mis. 2 in Marker Name Marker ID No. Mis. 1 SEQ ID No. Mis. 2 SEQ ID No. 99-27943-150 A1 1 D1 8297 8315 E1 8317 8335 8-121-28 A2 1 D2 14707 14725 E2 14727 14745 8-121-36 A3 1 D3 14715 14733 E3 14735 14753 8-121-154 A4 1 D4 14833 14851 E4 14853 14871 8-121-187 A5 1 D5 14866 14884 E5 14886 14904 8-121-243 A6 1 D6 14922 14940 E6 14942 14960 8-121-281 A7 1 D7 14960 14978 E7 14980 14998 8-121-352 A8 1 D8 15031 15049 E8 15051 15069 8-121-364 A9 1 D9 15043 15061 E9 15063 15081 8-121-371 A10 1 D10 15050 15068 E10 15070 15088 99-27935-193 A11 1 D11 21653 21671 E11 21673 21691 8-122-72 A12 1 D12 25461 25479 E12 25481 25499 8-122-100 A13 1 D13 25489 25507 E13 25509 25527 8-122-271 A14 1 D14 25660 25678 E14 25680 25698 8-122-272 A15 1 D15 25661 25679 E15 25681 25699 8-122-326 A16 1 D16 25715 25733 E16 25735 25753 8-122-360 A17 1 D17 25749 25767 E17 25769 25787 8-123-55 A18 1 D18 29384 29402 E18 29404 29422 8-123-189 A19 1 D19 29518 29536 E19 29538 29556 8-123-197 A20 1 D20 29526 29544 E20 29546 29564 8-123-307 A21 1 D21 29636 29654 E21 29656 29674 8-147-270 A22 1 D22 29780 29798 E22 29800 29818 99-34243-210 A23 1 D23 49456 49474 E23 49476 49494 8-127-28 A24 1 D24 64647 64665 E24 64667 64685 8-127-119 A25 1 D25 64738 64756 E25 64758 64776 8-127-159 A26 1 D26 64778 64796 E26 64798 64816 8-127-236 A27 1 D27 64855 64873 E27 64875 64893 8-127-240 A28 1 D28 64859 64877 E28 64879 64897 8-127-280 A29 1 D29 64899 64917 E29 64919 64937 8-128-33 A30 1 D30 65466 65484 E30 65486 65504 8-128-52 A31 1 D31 65485 65503 E31 65505 65523 8-128-61 A32 1 D32 65494 65512 E32 65514 65532 8-128-68 A33 1 D33 65501 65519 E33 65521 65539 8-128-69 A34 1 D34 65502 65520 E34 65522 65540 8-128-85 A35 1 D35 65518 65536 E35 65538 65556 8-129-50 A36 1 D36 65577 65595 E36 65597 65615 8-129-60 A37 1 D37 65587 65605 E37 65607 65625 8-129-311 A38 1 D38 65838 65856 E38 65858 65876 8-129-401 A39 1 D39 65928 65946 E39 65948 65966 99-34240-492 A40 1 D40 75648 75666 E40 75668 75686 99-31959-281 A41 1 D41 94515 94533 E41 94535 94553 99-31960-363 A42 1 D42 95377 95395 E42 95397 95415 99-31962-250 A43 1 D43 96937 96955 E43 96957 96975 99-31962-450 A44 1 D44 97137 97155 E44 97157 97175 99-44282-439 A45 1 D45 106365 106383 E45 106385 106403 99-44282-54 A46 1 D46 106750 106768 E46 106770 106788 99-24656-137 A47 1 D47 107139 107157 E47 107159 107177 99-24656-260 A48 1 D48 107262 107280 E48 107282 107300 99-24636-22 A49 1 D49 107590 107608 E49 107610 107628 99-31939-75 A50 1 D50 108480 108498 E50 108500 108518 99-31939-273 A51 1 D51 108778 108796 E51 108798 108816 99-44281-418 A52 1 D52 109432 109450 E52 109452 109470 99-44281-257 A53 1 D53 109593 109611 E53 109613 109631 99-44281-77 A54 1 D54 109773 109791 E54 109793 109811 99-31941-320 A55 1 D55 112449 112467 E55 112469 112487 99-31942-325 A56 1 D56 115449 115467 E56 115469 115487 99-24635-79 A57 1 D57 155717 155735 E57 155737 155755 99-16059-313 A58 1 D58 158153 158171 E58 158173 158191 99-24639-169 A59 1 D59 160615 160633 E59 160635 160653 99-24639-163 A60 1 D60 160621 160639 E60 160641 160659 99-24634-108 A61 1 D61 160857 160875 E61 160877 160895 99-7652-162 A62 1 D62 168955 168973 E62 168975 168993 99-7652-488 A63 1 D63 169281 169299 E63 169301 169319 99-16100-83 A64 1 D64 170727 170745 E64 170747 170765 99-16100-147 A65 1 D65 170791 170809 E65 170811 170829 99-16100-195 A66 1 D66 170839 170857 E66 170859 170877 99-16100-197 A67 1 D67 170841 170859 E67 170861 170879 99-16100-244 A68 1 D68 170887 170905 E68 170907 170925 99-16100-381 A69 1 D69 171024 171042 E69 171044 171062 99-5862-167 A70 1 D70 173339 173357 E70 173359 173377 99-16083-101 A71 1 D71 174208 174226 E71 174228 174246 99-16044-351 A72 1 D72 175781 175799 E72 175801 175819 99-16042-420 A73 1 D73 180570 180588 E73 180590 180608 99-16042-31 A74 1 D74 180959 180977 E74 180979 180997 99-5919-215 A75 1 D75 189938 189956 E75 189958 189976 99-24658-410 A76 1 D76 197144 197162 E76 197164 197182 99-30364-299 A77 1 D77 198945 198963 E77 198965 198983 99-30366-112 A78 1 D78 200237 200255 E78 200257 200275 99-16094-75 A79 1 D79 204569 204587 E79 204589 204607 99-24644-194 A80 1 D80 204915 204933 E80 204935 204953 99-16107-95 A81 1 D81 206178 206196 E81 206198 206216 99-16107-161 A82 1 D82 206244 206262 E82 206264 206282 99-16107-383 A83 1 D83 206466 206484 E83 206486 206504 99-15873-303 A84 1 D84 211589 211607 E84 211609 211627 8-124-106 A85 1 D85 214650 214668 E85 214670 214688 8-124-220 A86 1 D86 214764 214782 E86 214784 214802 8-124-294 A87 1 D87 214838 214856 E87 214858 214876 8-124-316 A88 1 D88 214860 214878 E88 214880 214898 8-124-383 A89 1 D89 214927 214945 E89 214947 214965 8-125-33 A90 1 D90 215519 215537 E90 215539 215557 8-132-312 A91 1 D91 215686 215704 E91 215706 215724 8-132-179 A92 1 D92 215819 215837 E92 215839 215857 8-132-164 A93 1 D93 215834 215852 E93 215854 215872 8-132-97 A94 1 D94 215901 215919 E94 215921 215939 99-13929-201 A95 1 D95 216009 216027 E95 216029 216047 8-131-363 A96 1 D96 216519 216537 E96 216539 216557 8-131-199 A97 1 D97 216683 216701 E97 216703 216721 8-130-236 A98 1 D98 216855 216873 E98 216875 216893 8-130-220 A99 1 D99 216871 216889 E99 216891 216909 8-130-144 A100 1 D100 216947 216965 E100 216967 216985 8-130-143 A101 1 D101 216948 216966 E101 216968 216986 8-130-102 A102 1 D102 216989 217007 E102 217009 217027 8-130-101 A103 1 D103 216990 217008 E103 217010 217028 8-130-83 A104 1 D104 217008 217026 E104 217028 217046 8-209-333 A105 1 D105 217188 217206 E105 217208 217226 8-209-290 A106 1 D106 217231 217249 E106 217251 217269 99-5897-143 A107 1 D107 219521 219539 E107 219541 219559 99-24649-186 A108 1 D108 220817 220835 E108 220837 220855 99-24649-80 A109 1 D109 220923 220941 E109 220943 220961 8-199-84 A110 1 D110 221722 221740 E110 221742 221760 8-198-138 A111 1 D111 222029 222047 E111 222049 222067 8-195-348 A112 1 D112 222727 222745 E112 222747 222765 99-13925-97 A113 1 D113 223576 223594 E113 223596 223614 8-192-82 A114 1 D114 225424 225442 E114 225444 225462 99-16090-225 A115 1 D115 226200 226218 E115 226220 226238 8-189-340 A116 1 D116 226274 226292 E116 226294 226312 8-189-146 A117 1 D117 226468 226486 E117 226488 226506 8-188-136 A118 1 D118 226851 226869 E118 226871 226889 8-187-352 A119 1 D119 226968 226986 E119 226988 227006 8-185-319 A120 1 D120 227570 227588 E120 227590 227608 8-185-296 A121 1 D121 227593 227611 E121 227613 227631 99-16051-226 A122 1 D122 227987 228005 E122 228007 228025 99-16051-164 A123 1 D123 228049 228067 E123 228069 228087 8-184-119 A124 1 D124 228115 228133 E124 228135 228153 8-184-27 A125 1 D125 228207 228225 E125 228227 228245 8-183-401 A126 1 D126 228235 228253 E126 228255 228273 8-181-449 A127 1 D127 229050 229068 E127 229070 229088 8-181-350 A128 1 D128 229149 229167 E128 229169 229187 8-181-259 A129 1 D129 229240 229258 E129 229260 229278 8-181-230 A130 1 D130 229269 229287 E130 229289 229307 8-181-210 A131 1 D131 229289 229307 E131 229309 229327 8-181-165 A132 1 D132 229334 229352 E132 229354 229372 8-181-163 A133 1 D133 229336 229354 E133 229356 229374 8-181-83 A134 1 D134 229416 229434 E134 229436 229454 8-180-157 A135 1 D135 229467 229485 E135 229487 229505 8-143-332 A136 1 D136 229563 229581 E136 229583 229601 8-143-327 A137 1 D137 229568 229586 E137 229588 229606 8-143-311 A138 1 D138 229584 229602 E138 229604 229622 8-143-308 A139 1 D139 229587 229605 E139 229607 229625 8-179-268 A140 1 D140 229588 229606 E140 229608 229626 8-143-306 A141 1 D141 229589 229607 E141 229609 229627 8-143-245 A142 1 D142 229650 229668 E142 229670 229688 8-143-242 A143 1 D143 229653 229671 E143 229673 229691 8-143-239 A144 1 D144 229656 229674 E144 229676 229694 8-143-232 A145 1 D145 229663 229681 E145 229683 229701 8-143-152 A146 1 D146 229743 229761 E146 229763 229781 8-178-199 A147 1 D147 229942 229960 E147 229962 229980 8-178-123 A148 1 D148 230018 230036 E148 230038 230056 8-119-404 A149 1 D149 230219 230237 E149 230239 230257 8-177-281 A150 1 D150 230237 230255 E150 230257 230275 8-119-377 A151 1 D151 230246 230264 E151 230266 230284 8-119-309 A152 1 D152 230314 230332 E152 230334 230352 8-119-294 A153 1 D153 230329 230347 E153 230349 230367 8-119-284 A154 1 D154 230339 230357 E154 230359 230377 8-119-272 A155 1 D155 230351 230369 E155 230371 230389 8-119-262 A156 1 D156 230361 230379 E156 230381 230399 8-119-248 A157 1 D157 230375 230393 E157 230395 230413 8-119-247 A158 1 D158 230376 230394 E158 230396 230414 8-119-210 A159 1 D159 230413 230431 E159 230433 230451 8-119-204 A160 1 D160 230419 230437 E160 230439 230457 8-119-200 A161 1 D161 230423 230441 E161 230443 230461 8-119-195 A162 1 D162 230428 230446 E162 230448 230466 8-119-125 A163 1 D163 230498 230516 E163 230518 230536 8-119-120 A164 1 D164 230503 230521 E164 230523 230541 8-119-97 A165 1 D165 230526 230544 E165 230546 230564 8-119-93 A166 1 D166 230530 230548 E166 230550 230568 8-119-38 A167 1 D167 230585 230603 E167 230605 230623 8-138-234 A168 1 D168 230665 230683 E168 230685 230703 8-138-218 A169 1 D169 230681 230699 E169 230701 230719 8-138-163 A170 1 D170 230736 230754 E170 230756 230774 8-138-54 A171 1 D171 230845 230863 E171 230865 230883 8-175-75 A172 1 D172 231051 231069 E172 231071 231089 8-142-386 A173 1 D173 231099 231117 E173 231119 231137 8-142-370 A174 1 D174 231115 231133 E174 231135 231153 8-142-211 A175 1 D175 231274 231292 E175 231294 231312 8-142-132 A176 1 D176 231353 231371 E176 231373 231391 8-145-339 A177 1 D177 231650 231668 E177 231670 231688 99-15870-400 A178 1 D178 231658 231676 E178 231678 231696 8-145-231 A179 1 D179 231758 231776 E179 231778 231796 8-145-197 A180 1 D180 231792 231810 E180 231812 231830 8-145-154 A181 1 D181 231835 231853 E181 231855 231873 8-145-138 A182 1 D182 231851 231869 E182 231871 231889 8-145-78 A183 1 D183 231911 231929 E183 231931 231949 8-171-247 A184 1 D184 232301 232319 E184 232321 232339 8-170-373 A185 1 D185 232458 232476 E185 232478 232496 8-169-266 A186 1 D186 232879 232897 E186 232899 232917 8-169-166 A187 1 D187 232979 232997 E187 232999 233017 8-168-380 A188 1 D188 233081 233099 E188 233101 233119 8-235-349 A189 1 D189 233434 233452 E189 233454 233472 8-235-182 A190 1 D190 233601 233619 E190 233621 233639 8-137-340 A191 1 D191 234101 234119 E191 234121 234139 8-137-182 A192 1 D192 234258 234276 E192 234278 234296 8-137-152 A193 1 D193 234288 234306 E193 234308 234326 8-165-185 A194 1 D194 234732 234750 E194 234752 234770 99-16087-219 A195 1 D195 235296 235314 E195 235316 235334 8-157-177 A196 1 D196 238204 238222 E196 238224 238242 8-155-258 A197 1 D197 238770 238788 E197 238790 238808 99-16038-118 A198 1 D198 239744 239762 E198 239764 239782 8-136-166 A199 1 D199 239845 239863 E199 239865 239883 8-136-145 A200 1 D200 239866 239884 E200 239886 239904 8-136-80 A201 1 D201 239931 239949 E201 239951 239969 8-153-32 A202 1 D202 240025 240043 E202 240045 240063 8-135-212 A203 1 D203 240478 240496 E203 240498 240516 8-135-166 A204 1 D204 240524 240542 E204 240544 240562 8-135-112 A205 1 D205 240578 240596 E205 240598 240616 99-16050-235 A206 1 D206 240753 240771 E206 240773 240791 8-144-378 A207 1 D207 240839 240857 E207 240859 240877 8-144-234 A208 1 D208 240983 241001 E208 241003 241021 8-144-196 A209 1 D209 241021 241039 E209 241041 241059 8-144-127 A210 1 D210 241090 241108 E210 241110 241128 8-141-304 A211 1 D211 241198 241216 E211 241218 241236 8-141-260 A212 1 D212 241242 241260 E212 241262 241280 8-141-161 A213 1 D213 241341 241359 E213 241361 241379 8-140-286 A214 1 D214 241488 241506 E214 241508 241526 8-140-173 A215 1 D215 241601 241619 E215 241621 241639 8-140-108 A216 1 D216 241666 241684 E216 241686 241704 8-140-41 A217 1 D217 241733 241751 E217 241753 241771 99-15880-162 A218 1 D218 241842 241860 E218 241862 241880 8-240-187 A219 1 D219 242383 242401 E219 242403 242421 8-225-281 A220 1 D220 244294 244312 E220 244314 244332 99-25940-186 A221 1 D221 247841 247859 E221 247861 247879 99-25940-182 A222 1 D222 247845 247863 E222 247865 247883 99-16032-292 A223 1 D223 248296 248314 E223 248316 248334 99-16055-216 A224 1 D224 253600 253618 E224 253620 253638 99-16105-152 A225 1 D225 255829 255847 E225 255849 255867 99-16101-436 A226 1 D226 258554 258572 E226 258574 258592 99-16033-244 A227 1 D227 260080 260098 E227 260100 260118 99-15875-165 A228 1 D228 279770 279788 E228 279790 279808 99-13521-31 A229 1 D229 287988 288006 E229 288008 288026 8-112-241 A230 1 D230 292661 292679 E230 292681 292699 8-112-155 A231 1 D231 292747 292765 E231 292767 292785 8-112-45 A232 1 D232 292857 292875 E232 292877 292895 8-111-301 A233 1 D233 295476 295494 E233 295496 295514 8-110-404 A234 1 D234 295697 295715 E234 295717 295735 8-110-89 A235 1 D235 296012 296030 E235 296032 296050 8-134-94 A236 1 D236 296049 296067 E236 296069 296087 99-7462-508 A237 1 D237 298950 298968 E237 298970 298988 99-16052-214 A238 1 D238 300346 300364 E238 300366 300384 99-16047-115 A239 1 D239 312011 312029 E239 312031 312049 99-25993-280 A240 1 D240 315909 315927 E240 315929 315947 99-25993-367 A241 1 D241 315995 316013 E241 316015 316033 99-25101-151 A242 1 D242 317226 317244 E242 317246 317264 Complementary Position range of position range of microsequencing microsequencing Biallelic SEQ1 primer mis. 1 in primer mis. 2 in Marker Name Marker ID No. Mis. 1 SEQ ID No. Mis. 2 SEQ ID No. 8-94-252 A243 162 D243 1482 1500* E243 1502 1521  8-95-43 A244 161 D244 1481 1500  E244 1502 1520* 8-97-98 A245 160 D245 1482 1500* E245 1502 1521  8-98-68 A246 159 D246 1481 1500  E246 1502 1520* 99-14021-108 A247 151 D247 1482 1500* E247 1502 1521  99-14364-415 A248 152 D248 1482 1500* E248 1502 1521  99-15056-99 A249 115 D249 1482 1500* E249 1502 1521  99-15063-155 A250 116 D250 1482 1500* E250 1502 1521  99-15065-85 A251 117 D251 1481 1500  E251 1502 1520* 99-15229-412 A252 157 D252 1481 1500  E252 1502 1520* 99-15231-219 A253 163 D253 1481 1500  E253 1502 1520* 99-15232-291 A254 155 D254 1481 1500  E254 1502 1520* 99-15239-377 A255 164 D255 1482 1500* E255 1502 1521  99-15252-404 A256 118 D256 384 403 E256 405  423* 99-15253-382 A257 119 D257 1481 1500  E257 1502 1520* 99-15256-392 A258 120 D258 1481 1500  E258 1502 1520* 99-15258-337 A259 121 D259 1481 1500  E259 1502 1520* 99-15261-202 A260 122 D260 1482 1500* E260 1502 1521  99-15280-432 A261 123 D261 1481 1500  E261 1502 1520* 99-15355-150 A262 124 D262 1482 1500* E262 1502 1521  99-15663-298 A263 175 D263 1482 1500* E263 1502 1521  99-15664-185 A264 176 D264 1482 1500* E264 1502 1521  99-15665-398 A265 174 D265 1481 1500  E265 1502 1520* 99-15668-139 A266 177 D266 1482 1500* E266 1502 1521  99-15672-166 A267 173 D267 1482 1500* E267 1502 1521  99-15682-318 A268 178 D268 1482 1500* E268 1502 1521  99-16081-217 A269 113 D269 310 329 E269 331  349* 99-16082-218 A270 114 D270 214  232* E270 234 253 99-20933-81 A271 179 D271 1481 1500  E271 1502 1520* 99-20977-72 A272 147 D272 1482 1500* E272 1502 1521  99-20978-89 A273 148 D273 1481 1500  E273 1502 1520* 99-20981-300 A274 149 D274 1481 1500  E274 1502 1520* 99-20983-48 A275 150 D275 1482 1500* E275 1502 1521  99-22310-148 A276 154 D276 1481 1500  E276 1502 1520* 99-25029-241 A277 180 D277 1482 1500* E277 1502 1521  99-25224-189 A278 125 D278 1107 1125* E278 1127 1146  99-25869-182 A279 181 D279 1482 1500* E279 1502 1521  99-25881-275 A280 182 D280 1481 1500  E280 1502 1520* 99-25897-264 A281 183 D281 1482 1500* E281 1502 1521  99-25906-131 A282 184 D282 1481 1500  E282 1502 1520* 99-25917-115 A283 185 D283 1481 1500  E283 1502 1520* 99-25924-215 A284 186 D284 1482 1500* E284 1502 1521  99-25950-121 A285 126 D285 1482 1500* E285 1502 1521  99-25961-376 A286 127 D286 1481 1500  E286 1502 1520* 99-25965-399 A287 128 D287 1481 1500  E287 1502 1520* 99-25966-241 A288 129 D288 1481 1500  E288 1502 1520* 99-25967-57 A289 130 D289 1481 1500  E289 1502 1520* 99-25969-200 A290 131 D290 1482 1500* E290 1502 1521  99-25972-317 A291 132 D291 1482 1500* E291 1502 1521  99-25974-143 A292 133 D292 1481 1500  E292 1502 1520* 99-25977-311 A293 134 D293 1482 1500* E293 1502 1521  99-25978-166 A294 135 D294 1481 1500  E294 1502 1520* 99-25979-93 A295 136 D295 1482 1500* E295 1502 1521  99-25980-173 A296 137 D296 1482 1500* E296 1502 1521  99-25984-312 A297 138 D297 1482 1500* E297 1502 1521  99-25985-194 A298 139 D298 1481 1500  E298 1502 1520* 99-25989-398 A299 140 D299 1481 1500  E299 1502 1520* 99-26126-498 A300 165 D300 1482 1500* E300 1502 1521  99-26138-193 A301 187 D301 1481 1500  E301 1502 1520* 99-26146-264 A302 188 D302 1482 1500* E302 1502 1521  99-26147-396 A303 141 D303 1482 1500* E303 1502 1521  99-26150-276 A304 142 D304 1481 1500 E304 1502 1520* 99-26153-44 A305 143 D305 1482 1500* E305 1502 1521  99-26154-107 A306 144 D306 1481 1500  E306 1502 1520* 99-26156-290 A307 145 D307 1482 1500* E307 1502 1521  99-26166-257 A308 166 D308 1481 1500  E308 1502 1520* 99-26167-278 A309 167 D309 1482 1500* E309 1502 1521  99-26169-211 A310 168 D310 1482 1500* E310 1502 1521  99-26171-71 A311 169 D311 1481 1500  E311 1502 1520* 99-26183-156 A312 170 D312 1482 1500* E312 1502 1521  99-26189-164 A313 189 D313 1482 1500* E313 1502 1521  99-26190-20 A314 190 D314 1482 1500* E314 1502 1521  99-26191-58 A315 191 D315 1481 1500  E315 1502 1520* 99-26201-267 A316 192 D316 1481 1500  E316 1502 1520* 99-26222-149 A317 193 D317 1481 1500  E317 1502 1520* 99-26223-225 A318 194 D318 1481 1500  E318 1502 1520* 99-26225-148 A319 195 D319 1481 1500  E319 1502 1520* 99-26228-172 A320 196 D320 1482 1500* E320 1502 1521  99-26233-275 A321 197 D321 1482 1500* E321 1502 1521  99-26234-336 A322 198 D322 1481 1500  E322 1502 1520* 99-26238-186 A323 199 D323 1481 1500  E323 1502 1520* 99-5873-159 A324 146 D324 1481 1500  E324 1502 1520* 99-5912-49 A325 171 D325 1481 1500  E325 1502 1520* 99-6012-220 A326 158 D326 1481 1500  E326 1502 1520* 99-6080-99 A327 156 D327 1481 1500  E327 1502 1520* 99-7308-157 A328 153 D328 1482 1500* E328 1502 1521  99-7337-204 A329 172 D329 1482 1500* E329 1502 1521  99-16106-48 A330 200 D330 59  78 E330 80  99 99-25332-125 A331 201 D331 105 124 E331 126 145 99-25516-307 A332 202 D332 286 305 E332 307 326 99-26173-470 A333 203 D333 1481 1500  E333 1502 1521  99-26267-524 A334 204 D334 1481 1500  E334 1502 1521  99-26284-394 A335 205 D335 1481 1500  E335 1502 1521  99-26559-315 A336 206 D336 1481 1500  E336 1502 1521  99-26769-256 A337 207 D337 1481 1500  E337 1502 1521  99-26772-268 A338 208 D338 1481 1500  E338 1502 1520* 99-26776-209 A339 209 D339 1481 1500  E339 1502 1521  99-26779-437 A340 210 D340 1477 1496  E340 1498 1517  99-26781-25 A341 211 D341 1482 1500* E341 1502 1521  99-26782-300 A342 212 D342 1482 1500* E342 1502 1521  99-26783-81 A343 213 D343 1481 1500  E343 1502 1521  99-26787-96 A344 214 D344 1482 1500* E344 1502 1521  99-26789-201 A345 215 D345 1482 1500* E345 1502 1521  99-27297-280 A346 216 D346 1481 1500  E346 1502 1521  99-27306-108 A347 217 D347 1481 1500  E347 1502 1521  99-27312-58 A348 218 D348 1481 1500  E348 1502 1521  99-27323-372 A349 219 D349 1481 1500  E349 1502 1521  99-27335-191 A350 220 D350 1481 1500  E350 1502 1521  99-27345-189 A351 221 D351 1481 1500  E351 1502 1521  99-27349-267 A352 222 D352 1482 1500* E352 1502 1521  99-27352-197 A353 223 D353 1481 1500  E353 1502 1520* 99-27353-105 A354 224 D354 1482 1500* E354 1502 1521  99-27360-142 A355 225 D355 1482 1500* E355 1502 1521  99-27361-181 A356 226 D356 1482 1500* E356 1502 1521  99-27365-421 A357 227 D357 1482 1500* E357 1502 1521  99-27680-484 A358 228 D358 464 483 E358 485 504 99-27912-272 A359 229 D359 1481 1500  E359 1502 1521  99-30329-380 A360 112 D360 361 379 E360 381 399

Mis 1 and Mis 2 respectively refer to microsequencing primers which hybridized with the coding strand or with the non-coding strand of the nuceotide sequences of the invention.

The microsequencing reaction was performed as follows

After purification of the amplification products, the microsequencing reaction mixture was prepared by adding, in a 201 μl final volume: 10 pmol microsequencing oligonucleotide, 1 U Thermosequenase (Amersham E79000G), 1.25 μl Thermosequenase buffer (260 mM Tris HCl pH 9.5, 65 mM MgCl₂), and the two appropriate fluorescent ddNTPs (Perkin Elmer, Dye Terminator Set 401095) complementary to the nucleotides at the polymorphic site of each biallelic marker tested, following the manufacturer's recommendations. After 4 minutes at 94° C., 20 PCR cycles of 15 sec at 55° C., 5 sec at 72° C., and 10 sec at 94° C. were carried out in a Tetrad PTC-225 thermocycler (MJ Research). The unincorporated dye terminators were then removed by ethanol precipitation. Samples were finally resuspended in formamide-EDTA loading buffer and heated for 2 min at 95° C. before being loaded on a polyacrylamide sequencing gel. The data were collected by an ABI PRISM 377 DNA sequencer and processed using the GENESCAN software (Perkin Elmer).

Following gel analysis, data were automatically processed with software that allows the determination of the alleles of biallelic markers present in each amplified fragment.

The software evaluates such factors as whether the intensities of the signals resulting from the above microsequencing procedures are weak, normal, or saturated, or whether the signals are ambiguous. In addition, the software identifies significant peaks (according to shape and height criteria). Among the significant peaks, peaks corresponding to the targeted site are identified based on their position. When two significant peaks are detected for the same position, each sample is categorized classification as homozygous or heterozygous type based on the height ratio.

Example 5a

Association Study Between Schizophrenia and the Biallelic Markers of the Invention:

Collection of DNA Samples from Affected and Non-Affected Individuals

A) Affected Population

All the samples were collected from a large epidemiological study of schizophrenia undertaken in hospital centers of Quebec from October 1995 to April 1997. The population was composed of French Caucasian individuals. The study design consisted in the ascertainment of cases and two of their first degree relatives (parents or siblings).

As a whole, 956 schizophrenic cases were ascertained according to the following inclusion criteria:

-   -   the diagnosis had been done by a psychiatrist;     -   the diagnosis had been done at least 3 years before recruitment         time, in order to exclude individuals suffering from transient         manic-depressive psychosis or depressive disorders;     -   the patient ancestors had been living in Quebec for at least 6         generations;     -   it was possible to get a blood sample from 2 close relatives.

Among the 956 schizophrenic ascertained cases, 834 individuals were included in the study for the following reasons:

-   -   for the included individual cases, the diagnosis of         schizophrenia was established according to the DSM-IV         (Diagnostic and Statistical Manual, Fourth edition, Revised         1994, American Psychiatric Press);     -   samples from individuals suffering from schizoaffective disorder         were discarded;     -   individuals suffering from catatonic schizophrenia were also         excluded from the population of schizophrenic cases;     -   were also excluded the individuals having a first degree         relative or 2 or more second degree relatives suffering from         depression or mood disorder;     -   individuals having had severe head trauma, severe obstretical         complications, encephalitis, or meningitis before onset of         symptoms were also excluded;     -   has also been excluded from the population of schizophrenic         cases a patient suffering from epilepsy and treated with         anticonvulsants.

The age at onset was not added as an inclusion criteria.

B) Unaffected Population

Control cases were respectively ascertained based on the following cumulative criteria:

-   -   the individual must not be affected by schizophrenia or any         other psychiatric disorder;     -   the individual must be 35 years old or older;     -   the individual must belong to the French-Canadian population;     -   the individual must have one or two first degree relative         available for blood sampling.

Controls were matched with the sex of cases when possible.

C) Cases and Control Populations Selected for the Association Study

The unaffected population retained for the study was composed of 241 individuals. The initial sample of the clinical study was composed of 215 cases and 214 controls. The controls were composed of 116 males and 98 females while the cases were composed of 154 males and 64 females. For each control, two first degree relatives (father, mother, sisters and brothers) were available. In order to match the sex of cases and controls, the parents of female controls were substituted for the female controls where possible and where the parents were known to be unaffected by schizophrenia or other psychosis. The parents of 27 female controls were thus substituted for the respective females, resulting in a total control sample size of 241 individuals. The composition of the control sample is detailed below in Table 7. TABLE 7 Description of control samples Probands 187 Male 116 Female 71 Parents of probands 54 Fathers 27 Mothers 27 Total 241

The association data that are presented below were obtained on a population size detailed in Table 8 below, wherein the individuals have been randomly selected from the populations detailed above. TABLE 8 Cases and Control Populations Selected for the Association Study sample type Cases Controls sample size 215 241 Gender Male 151 143 Female 64 98 Familial history of psychosis (FH)* positive (FH+) 82 0 none (FH−) 133 241 *close relatives (first or second degree)

Both case and control populations form two groups, each group consisting of unrelated individuals that do not share a known common ancestor. Additionally, the individuals of the control population were selected among those having no family history of schizophrenia or schizophrenic disorder.

Genotyping of Affected and Control Individuals

A) Results from the Genotyping

The general strategy to perform the association studies was to individually scan the DNA samples from all individuals in each of the populations described above in order to establish the allele frequencies of biallelic markers, and among them the biallelic markers of the invention, in the diploid genome of the tested individuals belonging to each of these populations.

Allelic frequencies of every biallelic marker in each population (cases and controls) were determined by performing microsequencing reactions on amplified fragments obtained by genomic PCR performed on the DNA samples from each individual. Genomic PCR and microsequencing were performed as detailed above in Examples 1 to 3 using the described PCR and microsequencing primers.

Single Biallelic Marker Frequency Analysis

For each allele of the biallelic markers included in this study, the difference between the allelic frequency in the unaffected population and in the population affected by schizophrenia was calculated and the absolute value of the difference was determined. The more the difference in allelic frequency for a particular biallelic marker or a particular set of biallelic markers, the more probable an association between the genomic region harboring this particular biallelic marker or set of biallelic markers and schizophrenia. Allelic frequencies were also useful to check that the markers used in the haplotype studies meet the Hardy-Weinberg proportions (random mating).

The allelic frequencies of biallelic markers in the chromosome 13q31-q33 region between the affected and the unaffected population, using the sample population described above, is set forth in Table 9. TABLE 9 Allelic frequencies of markers in different sub-samples all sample cases marker alleles all HF+ HF− controls 99-20978/89 C/G 0.51 0.47 0.51 0.55 99-20983/48 A/G 0.30 0.28 0.33 0.29 99-20981/300 A/G 0.54 0.51 0.55 0.56 99-20977/72 A/C 0.40 0.41 0.38 0.35 99-6080/99 C/T 0.58 0.57 0.57 0.55 99-15229/412 A/G 0.54 0.52 0.55 0.53 99-22310/148 C/T 0.46 0.48 0.44 0.47 99-15232/291 C/T 0.46 0.48 0.43 0.47 99-14021/108 A/G 0.46 0.48 0.44 0.47  8-98/68 A/G 0.20 0.18 0.23 0.19  8-97/98 C/T 0.78 0.75 0.81 0.80 99-6012/220 C/T 0.20 0.19 0.23 0.19  8-95/43 A/G 0.18 0.20 0.18 0.21 99-7308/157 C/T 0.39 0.42 0.36 0.39 99-14364/415 C/T 0.38 0.40 0.36 0.39 99-15672/166 C/T 0.51 0.47 0.54 0.54 99-15668/139 C/T 0.58 0.56 0.62 0.65 99-15665/398 A/G 0.72 0.67 0.72 0.76 99-15663/298 C/T 0.72 0.67 0.72 0.76 99-15664/185 C/T 0.69 0.62 0.72 0.72 99-15682/318 A/T 0.35 0.40 0.34 0.32 99-20933/81 A/C 0.43 0.41 0.42 0.40 99-16081/217 C/T 0.43 0.38 0.46 0.39 99-16082/218 A/G 0.33 0.31 0.35 0.32 99-5862/167 C/T 0.47 0.43 0.44 0.51 99-16100/147 A/G 0.48 0.44 0.45 0.50 99-7652/162 A/G 0.49 0.46 0.46 0.52 99-5919/215 A/G 0.66 0.71 0.69 0.60 99-5897/143 A/C 0.58 0.61 0.53 0.59 99-15870/400 A/G 0.32 0.38 0.27 0.33 99-16032/292 A/C 0.61 0.62 0.64 0.58 99-15880/162 A/G 0.62 0.63 0.65 0.58 99-16038/118 A/G 0.38 0.36 0.35 0.42 99-15875/165 C/T 0.58 0.57 0.57 0.63 99-16033/244 C/T 0.55 0.57 0.49 0.54 99-16047/115 C/T 0.73 0.75 0.68 0.73

In the association study described herein, several individual biallelic markers were shown to be significantly associated with schizophrenia. In particular, several of the chromosome 13q31-q33 region biallelic markers (99-16038/118 (A198), 99-15880/162 (A218), 99-5919/215 (A75), 99-15875/165 (A228), 99-16032/292 (A223)) showed significant association with schizophrenia in both familial and sporadic schizophrenia cases. The significance of the absolute value of the difference of allelic frequency of the individual biallelic markers in the affected and the unaffected population is set forth in FIG. 2, with several biallelic marker having allelic frequency differences with p-values approaching or less than 0.05, biallelic marker 99-5919/215 (A75) having a p-value of less than 0.01. FIG. 2 also shows the physical order of certain specific biallelic markers. These results show that several biallelic markers individually associated with schizophrenia are physically located in a particular region of significance, the subregion of the chromosome 13q31-q33 region referred to herein as Region D.

Haplotype Frequency Analysis

Analysis of markers Haplotype analysis for association of chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic markers and schizophrenia was performed by estimating the frequencies of all possible 2, 3 and 4 marker haplotypes in the affected and control populations described above. Haplotype estimations were performed by applying the Expectation-Maximization (EM) algorithm (Excoffier and Slatkin, 1995), using the EM-HAPLO program (Hawley et al., 1994) as described above. Estimated haplotype frequencies in the affected and control population were compared by means of a chi-square statistical test (one degree of freedom).

Haplotype Association Results in Schizophrenia Cases

The results of the haplotype analysis using the chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic markers biallelic markers is shown in FIG. 3. In particular, the figures show the most significant haplotypes using the biallelic markers: 99-16047/115 (A239), 99-16033/244 (A227), 99-16038/118 (A198), 99-15875/165 (A228), 99-16032/292 (A223), 99-5897/143 (A107), 99-15880/162 (A218), 99-16082/218 (A270), 99-5919/215 (A75), 99-7652/162 (A62), 99-16100/147 (A65), 99-5862/167 (A70).

A number of biallelic marker haplotypes were shown to be significantly associated with schizophrenia. A first preferred haplotype (HAP287 of FIG. 3) consisting of four biallelic markers (99-16038/118 (A198), 99-16082/218 (A270), (99-7652/162 (A62) and 99-16100/147 (A65)) is highly significantly associated with schizophrenia in both total cases and sporadic cases. FIG. 4 shows the characteristics of this haplotype. This haplotype presented a p-value of 3.1×10⁻⁷ and an odd-ratio of 4.01 for total cases and a p-value of 3.9×10⁻⁶ and an odd-ratio of 3.88 for sporadic cases. Phenotypic permutation tests confirmed the statistical significance of these results. Estimated haplotype frequencies were 13.8% in total cases, 13.5% in the sporadic cases, and 3.8% in the controls.

Several other significant haplotypes are listed in FIG. 3, including several 2-, 3- and 4-marker haplotypes. Considered to be highly significantly associated with schizophrenia are the most significant 2-marker haplotype (HAP1 consisting of biallelic markers 99-15875/165 (A228) and 99-5919/215 (A75)) and the most significant 3-marker haplotype (HAP67 consisting of biallelic markers 99-16038/118 (A198), 99-16082/218 (A270) and 99-7652/162 (A218)).

Further preferrred significant haplotypes considered associated with schizophrenia are haplotypes having p-values above a desired threshold level are also; all the haplotypes listed in FIG. 3 present p-values below 1.0×10⁻² for 2-marker haplotypes, 1.0×10⁻⁴ for 3-marker haplotypes, and 1.0×10⁻⁵ for 4-marker haplotypes. All of the biallelic markers presented in FIG. 4 except for 1 (99-16047/115 (A239)) are involved in haplotypes having a p-value above these threshold levels. FIG. 3 shows several 2-marker haplotypes, HAP1 to HAP8, having p-values ranging from 1.0×10⁻² to 1.2×10⁻³, several 3-marker haplotypes, HAP67 to HAP76, having p-values ranging from 1.3×10⁻⁵ to 1.0×10⁻⁴ and several 4-marker haplotypes, HAP287 to HAP291, having p-values ranging from 8.2×10⁻⁷ to 3.1×10⁻⁷. FIG. 4 shows biallelic markers involved in significant haplotypes having significance thresholds of 1.0×10⁻², 1.0×10⁻⁴, and 1.0×10⁻⁵ for 2-, 3- and 4-marker haplotypes, respectively.

Several 2-, 3- and 4-marker haplotypes, HAP 1, HAP8, HAP70, HAP71, HAP75, HAP76, HAP288, HAP290 and HAP291, often comprised the biallelic marker 99-5919/215 (A75) allele A. Furthermore, several 2-, 3- and 4-marker haplotypes, HAP7, HAP67, HAP69, HAP75, HAP287 AND HAP288, often comprised the biallelic marker 99-16038/118 (A198) allele G.

Example 5b Association Study Between Schizophrenia and the Biallelic Markers of the Invention

Collection of DNA Samples from Affected and Non-Affected Individuals

Biallelic markers of the invention were further analyzed in the French Canadian population described above. For this analysis, the proband case population under study consisted of 139 individuals, the control population consisted of 141 individuals, as described in Table 10 below. TABLE 10 Cases and Control Populations Selected for the Association Study Sample type Cases Controls Sample size 139 141 Gender Male 94 96 Female 45 45 Familial history of psychosis (FH)* positive (FH+) 76 0 none (FH−) 63 141 *close relatives (first or second degree)

Genotyping of Affected and Control Individuals

A) Results from the Genotyping

The general strategy for performing the association studies was to individually scan the DNA samples from all individuals in each of the populations described above in order to establish the allele frequencies of biallelic markers, and among them the biallelic markers of the invention, in the diploid genome of the tested individuals belonging to each of these populations.

Allelic frequencies of every biallelic marker in each population (cases and controls) were determined by performing microsequencing reactions on amplified fragments obtained by genomic PCR performed on the DNA samples from each individual. Genomic PCR and microsequencing were performed as detailed above in Examples 1 to 3 using the described PCR and microsequencing primers.

Single Biallelic Marker Frequency Analysis

For each allele of the biallelic markers included in this study, the difference between the allelic frequency in the unaffected population and in the population affected by schizophrenia was calculated and the absolute value of the difference was determined. The allelic frequencies of between the affected and the unaffected population in the regions is set forth in Table 11, using the sample population described above and in Table 10. The more the difference in allelic frequency for a particular biallelic marker or a particular set of biallelic markers, the more probable an association between the genomic region harboring this particular biallelic marker or set of biallelic markers and schizophrenia. Allelic frequencies were also useful to check that the markers used in the haplotype studies meet the Hardy-Weinberg proportions (random mating). TABLE 11 Allelic frequencies of markers in differents sub-samples (%) Cases Marker polymorphism All cases HF+ HF− All controls 99-20978/89 C/G 50.37 47.26 54.03 55.43 99-20983/48 A/G 30.37 28.67 32.5 26.52 99-20977/72 A/C 41.01 42.11 39.68 34.4 99-20981/300 A/G 52.17 51.33 53.17 60 99-6080/99 C/T 58.82 58 59.84 54.85 99-15229/412 A/G 54.92 52.86 57.26 51.88 99-22310/148 C/T 44.2 46.71 41.13 48.57 99-15232/291 G/T 43.85 46.43 40.83 49.28 99-14021/108 A/G 44.85 47.26 42.06 48.54  8-94/252 A/G 2.22 1.97 2.54 2.52  8-98/68 A/G 19.06 17.76 20.63 19.06  8-97/98 C/T 76.26 74.34 78.57 77.3 99-6012/220 G/T 20 18.49 21.77 18.79 99-7308/157 C/T 40.31 41.89 38.18 39.36 99-14364/415 C/T 39.93 40.79 38.89 40  8-95/43 A/G 20.29 20.39 20.16 22.14 99-15672/166 C/T 49.28 47.37 51.59 56.74 99-15668/139 C/T 58.21 56.16 60.66 66.67 99-15665/398 A/G 70.5 67.76 73.81 76.79 99-15663/298 C/T 70.5 67.76 73.81 76.95 99-15664/185 G/T 66.54 62.33 71.43 72.5 99-15682/318 A/T 35.27 39.58 29.82 32.66 99-20933/81 A/C 43.12 42.76 43.55 42.45 99-26146/264 G/T 39.62 38.67 40.91 38.85 99-25922/147 G/T 44.19 39.58 50 40.94 99-16081/217 C/T 42.28 38.82 46.67 36.74 99-16082/218 A/G 34.73 31.94 38.14 33.81 99-24656/260 A/G 48.87 49.32 48.31 54.04 99-24639/163 G/T 38.52 33.33 45 40.51 99-24634/108 A/T 44.85 42.67 47.54 50 99-7652/162 A/G 45.29 44.08 46.77 50.36 99-16100/147 A/G 44.66 42.75 46.77 48.89 99-5862/167 C/T 43.53 41.45 46.03 49.29 99-5919/215 A/G 69.42 71.05 67.46 60.28 99-24658/410 C/T 64.13 69.08 58.06 61.07 99-24644/194 A/G 39.42 41.22 37.3 40.51 99-5897/143 A/C 57.61 60.67 53.97 61.07 99-24649/186 C/T 67.75 67.33 68.25 62.95 99-15870/400 A/G 33.46 36.67 29.51 30.29 99-16038/118 A/G 34.53 36.18 32.54 43.62 99-15880/162 A/G 65.11 63.16 67.46 56.43 99-25940/182 A/G 59.42 56.67 62.7 52.59 99-16032/292 A/C 64.03 61.84 66.67 55.67 99-16033/244 C/T 54.51 56.76 51.69 56.44 99-15875/165 C/T 56.88 57.89 55.65 66.3 99-16047/115 C/T 71.69 74.67 68.03 75.19 99-25993/367 A/G 44.53 40.79 49.18 40.51 99-25989/398 A/G 32.81 33.33 32.2 27.86 99-25979/93 A/G 68.12 69.08 66.94 69.32 99-25969/200 G/T 36.67 38.67 34.17 38.85 99-25966/241 A/G 66.3 67.11 65.32 63.21 99-25961/376 A/C 39.63 42.57 36.07 37.31 99-25965/399 A/G 50.36 51.97 48.39 49.64 99-25977/311 A/G 72.01 67.76 77.59 73.72 99-25950/121 C/G 31.75 36 26.61 27.54 99-25974/143 A/G 25.55 28.29 22.13 22.7 99-26150/276 A/G 46.54 51.43 40.83 47.76 99-15258/337 G/T 25.55 26.97 23.77 24.1 99-15261/202 A/G 63.06 59.46 67.5 65.15 99-15256/392 C/T 64.96 61.33 69.35 65.3 99-15056/99 C/T 32.72 36.49 28.23 31.11 99-15280/432 C/T 42.28 44 40.16 38.97 99-15355/150 C/T 72.3 70.39 74.6 68.79 99-15253/382 C/T 63.04 62.67 63.49 62.95 99-5873/159 C/T 78.1 79.05 76.98 77.34

Haplotype Frequency Analysis

Analysis of markers Haplotype analysis for association of chromosome 13-q31-q33-related biallelic markers and schizophrenia was performed by estimating the frequencies of all possible 2, 3 and 4 marker haplotypes in the affected and control populations described above. Haplotype estimations were performed by applying the Expectation-Maximization (EM) algorithm (Excoffier and Slatkin, 1995), using the EM-HAPLO program (Hawley et al., 1994) as described above. Estimated haplotype frequencies in the affected and control population were compared by means of a chi-square statistical test (one degree of freedom).

Haplotype Association Results in Schizophrenia Cases

Haplotype studies yielded significant results indicating an association of the nucleotide sequences of the invention with schizophrenia. Significant results are shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, including descriptions of the frequency of the haplotype leading to the maximum chi square test (reference no. (1) in figures), the test of the frequency of a particular haplotype in cases vs in controls (reference no. (2) in figures) and the p-value assuming that the test has a chi-square distribution with 1 degree of freedom (ddI) (reference no. (3) in figures). The results of the haplotype analysis using 28 preferred biallelic markers of the invention, 99-24656-260 (A48), 99-24639-163 (A60), 99-24634-108 (A61), 99-7652-162 (A62), 99-16100-147 (A65), 99-5862-167 (A70), 99-5919-215 (A75), 99-24658-410 (A76), 99-24644-194 (A80), 99-5897-143 (A107), 99-24649-186 (A108), 99-16038-118 (A198), 99-15880-162 (A218), 99-25940-182 (A221), 99-16032-292 (A223), 99-16033-244 (A227), 99-15875-165 (A228), 99-16047-115 (A239), 99-25950-121 (A285), 99-25961-376 (A286), 99-25965-399 (A287), 99-25966-241 (A288), 99-25969-200 (A290), 99-25974-143 (A292), 99-25977-311 (A293), 99-25979-93 (A295), 99-25989-398 (A299), and 99-26150-276 (A304) are shown in FIGS. 5 and 6. FIGS. 5 and 6 also show the physical order of the biallelic markers comprising the haplotypes.

FIG. 5 shows the results of the haplotype analysis using the following biallelic markers located on the approximately 319 kb sequence of SEQ ID No. 1: 99-24656-260 (A48), 99-24639-163 (A60), 99-24634-108 (A61), 99-7652-162 (A62), 99-16100-147 (A65), 99-5862-167 (A70), 99-5919-215 (A75), 99-24658-410 (A76), 99-24644-194 (A80), 99-5897-143 (A107), 99-24649-186 (A108), 99-16038-118 (A198), 99-15880-162 (A218), 99-25940-182 (A221), 99-16032-292 (A223), 99-16033-244 (A227), 99-15875-165 (A228), and 99-16047-115 (A239).

FIG. 6 shows the results of the haplotype analysis using the following biallelic markers located on the approximately 319 kb of SEQ ID No. 1 as well as additional biallelic markers located on the human chromosome 13q31-q33 locus: 199-16038-118 (A198), 99-15880-162 (A218), 99-25940-182 (A221), 99-16032-292 (A223), 99-16033-244 (A227), 99-15875-165 (A228), 99-16047-115 (A239), 99-25950-121 (A285), 99-25961-376 (A286), 99-25965-399 (A287), 99-25966-241 (A288), 99-25969-200 (A290), 99-25974-143 (A292), 99-25977-311 (A293), 99-25979-93 (A295), 99-25989-398 (A299), and 99-26150-276 (A304).

A number of biallelic marker haplotypes were shown to be significantly associated with schizophrenia.

Several preferred haplotype all showing highly significant association with schizophrenia and including various 2-, 3- and 4-marker haplotypes are haplotypes 817, 818 and 819, 137, 138, 1 and 2 of FIG. 6, and haplotypes 970, 154 and 1 of FIG. 5. The p-values, odd-ratios and estimated haplotype frequencies are further described in FIGS. 5 and 6. In particular, the two marker haplotype I of FIG. 5 consisting of biallelic markers 99-5862-167 (A70) and 99-15875-165 (A228) showed a highly significant p-value of 7.8×10⁻⁵ and an odd-ratio of 1.61. Haplotype 818 of FIG. 6 consisting of four biallelic markers (99-16032-292 (A223), 99-25969-200 (A290), 99-25977-311 (A293), and 99-25989-398 (A299)) presented a p-value of 3.1×10⁻⁷ and an odd-ratio of 9.08. Another example showing significance is haplotype 817 of FIG. 6 consisting of four biallelic markers (99-16033-244 (A227), 99-15875-165 (A228), 99-25950-121 (A285) and 99-25979-93 (A295)), presented a p-value of 2.4×10⁻⁷ and an odd-ratio of 100. Phenotypic permutation tests confirmed the statistical significance of these results. Estimated haplotype frequencies were 10.5% in cases and 0% in the controls. Haplotype 970 of FIG. 5 consisting of four biallelic markers (99-5919-215 (A75), 99-24658-410 (A76), 99-15875-165 (A228), and 99-16047-115 (A239)) presented a p-value of 7.8×10⁻⁷ and an odd-ratio of 2.41. Phenotypic permutation tests confirmed the statistical significance of these results. Estimated haplotype frequencies were 25.7% in cases and 12.5% in the controls.

Several other significant haplotypes are listed in FIGS. 5 and 6, including several 2-, 3- and 4-marker haplotypes. Considered to be highly significantly associated with schizophrenia are the most significant 2-marker haplotypes (for example haplotype 1 of FIG. 5 noted above and the most significant 3-marker haplotypes (for example haplotype 137 of FIG. 6 consisting of biallelic markers (99-15875-165 (A228), 99-16047-115 (A239) and 99-25950-121 (A285)).

Further preferrred significant haplotypes considered associated with schizophrenia are haplotypes having p-values above a desired threshold level; all the haplotypes listed in FIGS. 5 and 6 present p-values below 1.0×10⁻² for 2-marker haplotypes, 1.0×10⁻⁴ for 3-marker haplotypes, and 1.0×10⁻⁵ for 4-marker haplotypes. FIGS. 5 and 6 show several 2-marker haplotypes, haplotypes 1 to 9 and haplotypes 1 to 5 of FIGS. 5 and 6 respectively, having p-values ranging from 7.8×10⁻⁵ to 8.6×10⁻³, several 3-marker haplotypes, haplotypes 154 to 163 and 137 to 141 of FIGS. 5 and 6 respectively, having p-values ranging from 3.9×10⁴ to 1.1×10⁻⁴ and several 4-marker haplotypes, haplotypes 970 to 973 and 817 to 836 of FIGS. 5 and 6 respectively, having p-values ranging from 2.4×10⁻⁷ to 7.3×10⁻⁶.

Additionally, a particularly large number of the significant 2-, 3- and 4-marker haplotypes often comprised the biallelic markers A223, A76, A227, A239, A286, A290, A299 and most commonly A228 (99-15875-165), allele T.

The statistical significance of the results obtained for the haplotype analysis was evaluated by a phenotypic permutation test reiterated 100 times on a computer. For this computer simulation, data from the affected and control individuals were pooled and randomly allocated to two groups which contained the same number of individuals as the case-control populations used to produce the data summarized in FIGS. 5 and 6. A haplotype analysis was then run on these artificial groups for the markers included in the haplotypes showing strong association with schizophrenia. This experiment was reiterated 100 times and the results are shown in the columns of FIGS. 5 and 6 labelled “Haplotype test by permutation procedure”. For a given haplotype, these results demonstrate the number of obtained (simulated) haplotypes having a p-value comparable to the one obtained for the given haplotype among 100 iterations. These results, set forth in FIGS. 5 and 6 validate the statistical significance of the association between the haplotypes and schizophrenia.

Example 5c

Association Study Between Schizophrenia and the Biallelic Markers of the Invention in French Canadian Samples

Collection Of DNA Samples from Affected and Non-Affected Individuals

Biallelic markers of the present invention were further genotyped in French Canadian samples as described above in order to compare the association of the 1st and the 2nd portion of Region D with schizophrenia. The population used in the study was the same as described above with the exception that 2 male FH+cases were not included.

The biallelic markers analyzed in the study include 34 preferred biallelic markers of the invention located in Region D of the chromosome 13q31-33 region. Included in the analysis were the 14 following biallelic markers from the first of two portions of Region D: 99-26150/276 (A304), 99-26156/290 (A307), 99-26153/44 (A305), 99-25985/194 (A298), 99-25974/143 (A292), 99-25977/311 (A293), 99-25972/317 (A291), 99-25965/399 (A287), 99-25961/376 (A286), 99-25966/241 (A288), 25967/57 (A289), 99-25969/200 (A290), 99-25979/93 (A295) and 99-25989/398 (A299). Included in the analysis were also the 20 following biallelic markers from the second of two portions of Region D: 99-25993/367 (A241), 99-16047/115 (A239), 99-15875/165 (A228), 99-16033/244 (A227), 99-16032/292 (A223), 99-25940/182 (A221), 99-15880/162 (A218), 99-16038/118 (A198), 99-15870/400 (A178), 99-24649/186 (A 108), 99-5897/143 (A107), 99-24644/194 (A80), 99-24658/410 (A76), 99-5919/215 (A75), 99-5862/167 (A70), 99-16100/147 (A65), 99-7652/162 (A62), 99-24634/108 (A61), 99-24639/163 (A60) and 99-24656/260 (A48).

Single Biallelic Marker Association Results in Schizophrenia Cases

Single biallelic marker studies yielded significant results, indicating an association of the nucleotide sequences of the invention with schizophrenia. Biallelic markers used in the analysis included the set of 34 biallelic markers shown in Table 11 below, 14 biallelic markers of which were located on the first of two portions of Region D, and 20 of which were located on the second portion. The distribution of markers in shown in Table 12 below. As summarized in Table 13, analyses using these biallelic markers demonstrated a significant association with schizophrenia for 5 markers on the second portion of Region D. TABLE 11 SNPS POLY- FREQUENCY IN REGION CONTIG GENOTYPED MORPHISM CONTROLS D 1^(st) portion 99-26150/276 A/G 50 99-26156/290 A/C 69 99-26153/44 A/C 61 99-25985/194 C/T 29 99-25974/143 A/G 25 99-25977/311 A/G 73 99-25972/317 C/T 72 99-25965/399 A/G 49 99-25961/376 A/C 40 99-25966/241 A/G 63 99-25967/57 A/G 43 99-25969/200 G/T 40 99-25979/93 A/G 72 99-25989/398 A/G 29 2^(nd) portion 99-25993/367 A/G 44 99-16047/115 C/T 73 99-15875/165 C/T 63 99-16033/244 C/T 54 99-16032/292 A/C 58 99-25940/182 A/G 53 99-15880/162 A/G 58 99-16038/118 A/G 42 99-15870/400 A/G 33 99-24649/186 C/T 65 99-5897/143 A/C 59 99-24644/194 A/G 39 99-24658/410 C/T 58 99-5919/215 A/G 60 99-5862/167 C/T 51 99-16100/147 A/G 50 99-7652/162 A/G 52 99-24634/108 A/T 53 99-24639/163 G/T 44 99-24656/260 A/G 54

TABLE 12 Mean Mean No. of Biallelic frequency inter-marker Region markers (σ) (σ) distance (σ) D 1^(st) half 14 (14) 0.34 (0.07)   7 (6.3) D 2^(nd) half 20 (8)  0.42 (0.06) 11 (13) D 1^(st) and 2^(nd) half 34 (22) 0.39 (0.07) 10.3 (11)  

Haplotype Frequency Analysis

Haplotype analysis for association of chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic markers and schizophrenia was performed by estimating the frequencies of all possible 2, 3 and 4 marker haplotypes in the affected and control populations described above. Haplotype estimations were performed by applying the Expectation-Maximization (EM) algorithm (Excoffier and Slatkin, 1995), using the EM-HAPLO program (Hawley et al., 1994) as described above.

Haplotype Association Results in Schizophrenia Cases

Significant results were also obtained in haplotype studies indicating an association of the nucleotide sequences of the invention with schizophrenia.

The present inventors having previously demonstrated highly significant association of biallelic markers located on the Region D subregion of the human chromosome 13q31-q33 locus with disease. Using the Omnibus LR test which compares the profile of haplotype frequencies, and Haplo-maxM test which is based on haplotype differences for each haplotype in two groups, FIGS. 7 and 8 describe the results of an analysis of the first and second portions of Region D which demonstrated an association of the second portion of Region D with schizophrenia.

For combinations of 2 and 3 biallelic markers, one likelihood ratio test is obtained based on the haplotype frequency values calculated using the E-M algorithm. A permutation procedure was used, where data from the affected and control individuals was pooled and randomly allocated to two groups which contained the same number of individuals as the case-control populations used to produce the data. A haplotype analysis was then run on these artificial groups for the markers included in the haplotypes showing strong association with schizophrenia. This experiment was reiterated 100 times. For a given haplotype, these results demonstrate the number of obtained (simulated) haplotypes having a p-value comparable to the one obtained for the given haplotype among 100 iterations.

FIG. 7 shows a comparison of the LR test value distributions of haplotype frequencies in the two portions of Region D. This association of the second portion of Region D with schizophrenia is shown using both 2-marker and 3-marker combinations. The distribution of LR test values in the different regions was analyzed using a Kruskal-Wallis rank test, a chi-square test with r-1 degrees of freedom, where r represents the number of value sets compared. As shown, the significance of the association is demonstrated by a chi-square value (one degree of freedom) of 74.405 and a p-value of less than 1×10⁻¹⁰ for 2 marker combinations, and a chi-square value (one degree of freedom) of 228.72 and a p-value of 1×10⁻¹⁰ for 3-marker combinations.

Another association analysis approach based on haplotype frequency differences, referred to as the Haplo-maxM test, was conducted using region D biallelic markers. For one combination of markers having h haplotypes, h differences of haplotype frequencies can be compared via a Pearson chi-square statistic (one degree of freedom). The haplo-max test selects the difference showing the maximum positive test value between cases versus controls (rejecting test values based on rare haplotype frequencies, i.e, with an estimated number of haplotypes inferior to 10); for one combination of markers there is therefore one Max-M test value. The results of the Haplo-maxM test using Region D biallelic markers are shown in FIG. 8.

FIG. 8 shows the distribution of haplo-maxM test values obtained for both 2-marker and 3-marker combinations in the two portions of Region D, demonstrating an association of the second portion of Region D with schizophrenia. The comparison of the distribution of Haplo-maxM test values oin the two regions was analyzed using a Kruskal-Wallis rank test, a chi-square test with r-1 degrees of freedom, where r represents the number of value sets compared. As shown, the significance of the association is demonstrated by a chi-square value (one degree of freedom) of 34.839 and a p-value of less than 3.58×10⁻⁹ for 2 marker combinations, and a chi-square value (one degree of freedom) of 13.773 and a p-value of 2.6×10⁻⁴ for 3-marker combinations.

The results from the haplo-maxM tests further confirms the association shown using the Omnibus LR test results.

Results of association studies discussed above using biallelic markers of the invention are further summarized in Table 13 below, showing a significant association of the biallelic markers with schizophrenia in both single biallelic marker and haplotype analysis. TABLE 13 Single-point Analysis No. of Multi-point analysis allelic freq No. (Haplotype-based analysis) differences > Significant Omnibus LR TEST* 10% allelic tests 2-mks 3-mks 4-mks Region D, 1st 0 0 0.03 0.05 0.06 portion Region D, 2nd 0 5 0.30 0.30 0.31 portion *percentage of significant tests (5% level of significance) Cases (N = 213)/Controls (N = 241)

Example 5d

Association Study Between Bipolar Disorder and the Biallelic Markers of the Invention Description of Study Design

Biallelic markers of the invention were analyzed in bipolar disorder cases. As in examples above, single and multi-point analyses showed a significant association of the markers of the invention, of Region D of the chromosome 13q33 locus, and more particularly of a sub-region of Region D with bipolar disorder.

A) Description of the Affected Population

All the samples were collected from a study of bipolar disorder undertaken in a hospital located south of Buenos Aires, Argentina, generally representing a population estimated at about 400,000 inhabitants. Patients were evaluated by four doctors in 1994 and 1995. The study design involved in the ascertainment of cases and their first degree relatives (parents or siblings). 514 individuals were available for the study. This group consisted of 158 subjects from 51 different families, and 356 independent subjects.

As a whole, bipolar disorder cases were ascertained according to the diagnosis of bipolar disorder established by the DSM-IV (Diagnostic and Statistical Manual, Fourth edition, Revised 1994, American Psychiatric Press);

-   -   Available for consideration for each coded case were also age,         sex, nationality of parents and grand parents, ethnic origin,         familial composition, marital state, socio-economic level,         educational level, professional situation, employment,         receational activities, age of onset of phychiatric symptoms,         age of first consultation, occurrences of obstetric or prenatal         incidents, suicide attempts, other medical conditions, treatment         for or occurrence of a neurological condition, familial         occurrence of symptoms, previous or concurrent use of         psychotropic drugs, other admissions to a hospital or medical         treatments, and diagnostic reason for admission including (a)         DSM-IV diagnosis and (b) symptoms first presented on admission         to hospital.

Available for study were 226 bipolar disorder ascertained cases of which 203 were independent cases. This group consisted of 51 cases from 51 families, 20 cases in relatives thereof, and 155 independent cases. Upon elimination of 3 cases from the initial independent 155 cases due to discovery of a familial relation, the total number of independent cases was 203.

Cases were classified according to bipolar disorder type. The cases included 115 bipolar disorder type I individuals (including 1 rapid cycling case), 67 bipolar disorder type II individuals (including 1 rapid cycling case), 18 unclassified bipolar disorder cases, and 3 cases which remained unclassified due to lack of or inconsistent information.

The 203 independent cases were examined for a familial history of psychosis. 53 of these cases reported an occurrence of psychosis (characterized as schizophrenia or bipolar disorder) among first degree relatives (father, mother, brothers, sisters or children).

B) Decription of the Unaffected Population

Available for study were 201 controls which had not been affected by any psychiatric difficulties or reported any familial history of psychiatric difficulties. Available for consideration were also age, sex and ethnic origin of the unaffected population.

C) Case and Control Populations Selected for the Association Study

For the association study, the case population under study consisted of 201 individuals selected from the 226 total cases above; the control population consisted of 198 individuals selected from the 201 controls described above.

The association data that are presented in the Example 5d below were obtained on a population size detailed in Table 14 below. TABLE 14 Cases and Control Populations Selected for the Association Study Sample type Cases Controls Sample size 201 198 Gender Male 68 81 Female 124 117 Missing 9 Ethnic origin Causasian 182 177 Non caucasian 5 21 Missing 14 Familial history of psychosis (FH)* positive (FH+) 54 0 none (FH−) 147 198 *close relatives (first degree)

Both case and control populations form two groups, each group consisting of unrelated individuals that do not share a known common ancestor.

Genotyping of Affected and Control Individuals

The general strategy was to individually scan the DNA samples from all individuals in each of the populations described above in order to establish the allele frequencies of biallelic markers, and among them the biallelic markers of the invention, in the diploid genome of the tested individuals belonging to each of these populations.

Allelic frequencies of every biallelic marker in each population (cases and controls) were determined by performing microsequencing reactions on amplified fragments obtained by genomic PCR performed on the DNA samples from each individual. Genomic PCR and microsequencing were performed as detailed above in Examples 1 to 3 using the described PCR and microsequencing primers.

Association Analysis

The association analysis included 30 preferred biallelic markers of the invention located in Region D of the chromosome 13q31-33 region. Included in the analysis were the 14 following biallelic markers from the first of two subjective portions of Region D: 99-26150/276 (A304), 99-26156/290 (A307), 99-26153/44 (A305), 99-25985/194 (A298), 99-25974/143 (A292), 99-25977/311 (A293), 99-25972/317 (A291), 99-25965/399 (A287), 99-25961/376 (A286), 99-25966/241 (A288), 25967/57 (A289), 99-25969/200 (A290), 99-25979/93 (A295) and 99-25989/398 (A299). Included in the analysis were also the 16 following biallelic markers from the second of two portions of Region D: 99-25993/367 (A241), 99-16047/115 (A239), 99-15875/165 (A228), 99-16033/244 (A227), 99-16032/292 (A223), 99-25940/182 (A221), 99-15880/162 (A218), 99-16038/118 (A198), 99-15870/400 (A178), 99-24649/186 (A108), 99-5897/143 (A107), 99-24644/194 (A80), 99-5919/215 (A75), 99-5862/167 (A70), 99-16100/147 (A65), and 99-7652/162 (A62).

A) Single Biallelic Marker Association Results in Bipolar Disorder Cases

For each allele of the biallelic markers included in this study, the difference between the allelic frequency in the unaffected population and in the population affected by bipolar disorder was calculated and the absolute value of the difference was determined. The set of biallelic markers and their allelic frequencies included in this study are set forth in Table 15. The more the difference in allelic frequency for a particular biallelic marker or a particular set of biallelic markers, the more probable an association between the genomic region harboring this particular biallelic marker or set of biallelic markers and bipolar disorder. Allelic frequencies were also useful to check that the markers used in the haplotype studies meet the Hardy-Weinberg proportions (under random mating assumptions) TABLE 15 POSITION FREQUENCY REGION CONTIG ON CONTIG SNPS GENOTYPED POLYMORPHISM IN CONTROLS D Region D 168.02 99-26150/276 A/G 62.93 first Half 173.29 99-26156/290 A/C 72.42 177.01 99-26153/44 A/C 52.66 186.41 99-25985/194 C/T 28.87 190.15 99-25974/143 A/G 31.79 216.43 99-25977/311 A/G 63.82 224.62 99-25972/317 C/T 72.32 236.64 99-25965/399 A/G 58.24 244.82 99-25961/376 A/C 44.35 254.70 99-25966/241 A/G 66.18 257.85 99-25967/57 A/G 42.44 261.23 99-25969/200 G/T 35.76 263.67 99-25979/93 A/G 67.15 269.39 99-25989/398 A/G 35.88 Region D 299.02 99-25993/367 A/G 47.38 second Half 303.04 99-16047/115 C/T 69.01 335.02 99-15875/165 C/T 61.3 354.81 99-16033/244 C/T 50.3 366.51 99-16032/292 A/C 62.87 367.14 99-25940/182 A/G 54.39 372.98 99-15880/162 A/G 62.72 375.28 99-16038/118 A/G 37.29 383.41 99-15870/400 A/G 29.65 394.16 99-24649/186 C/T 66.57 395.27 99-5897/143 A/C 52.6 409.93 99-24644/194 A/G 38.29 424.95 99-5919/215 A/G 60.63 441.62 99-5862/167 C/T 46.53 444.00 99-16100/147 A/G 48.84 445.84 99-7652/162 A/G 49.7 TOTAL 30 (1): frequency (%) in caucasian controls (N = 177) of the first allele (alphabetic order) Region D was arbitrarily split in two halves (D 1^(st) half and D 2^(nd) half) for purpose of the analysis.

The present inventors have previously demonstrated significant association of biallelic markers located on the Region D subregion of the human chromosome 13q31-33 region with disease. Using a set of 30 biallelic markers shown in Table 15, D 1^(st) half contained 14 markers and D 2^(nd) half contained 16 markers.

Table 15 also shows the physical order of the biallelic markers on Region D of the human chromosome 13q31-q33 region. The mean intermarker distances of the biallelic markers on the first and the second subjective portions of Region D were as listed below in Table 16. TABLE 16 Mean Region Inter-marker distance (std) D 1^(st) half 7.80 (6.33) D 2^(nd) half 9.79 (8.78) D 1^(nd) and 2^(nd) half 9.58 (8.46)

The analysis using selected Region D biallelic markers of the invention demonstrated a significant association with bipolar disorder for the second portion of Region D. The analysis was conducted using the sample population described above with 182 Caucasian cases and 177 Caucasian controls selected from the total case and control group.

One biallelic marker in particular, 99-15875/165(A228), located on the second half of Region D, demonstrated a significant association with disease at a significance level of better than 5% (corresponding to an absolute logarithm (p-value) of 1.3).

B) Haplotype Association Results in Bipolar Disorder Cases

Haplotype analysis for association of chromosome 13q31-q33-related biallelic markers and bipolar disorder was performed by estimating the frequencies of all possible 2, 3 and 4 marker haplotypes in the affected and control populations described above. Haplotype frequencies estimations were performed by applying the Expectation-Maximization (EM) algorithm (Excoffier and Slatkin, 1995), modified by Nicholas Schork.

Significant results were obtained in haplotype studies indicating an association of the nucleotide sequences of the invention with bipolar disorder. The haplotype analysis as shown in the FIGS. 9A, 9B, 10A, 10B, 11A and 11B was conducted using the sample population described above, using 182 Caucasian cases and 177 Caucasian controls selected from the total case and control group.

Using the Omnibus LR test which compares the profile of haplotype frequencies, and Haplo-maxM test which is based on haplotype frequencies differences for each haplotype in two groups, FIGS. 9A, 9B, 10A, 10B, 11A and 11B show the results of a comparison of the first and second portions of Region D which demonstrated an association of the second portion of Region D with bipolar disorder.

a—Omnibus LR Tests Values

For a given combination of 2, 3 or 4 biallelic markers, one likelihood ratio test (LR test) is obtained based on the haplotype frequencies values calculated using the E-M algorithm.

FIGS. 9A and 9B show a comparison of the LR test value distributions of haplotype frequencies in the two portions of Region D. This association of the second portion of Region D with bipolar disorder is shown using both 2-marker and 3-marker combinations. A Kruskall Wallis rank test was used to compare LR test values distributions in the two subjective portions of Region D. This test has an asymptotic Chi-square distribution, under the null hypothesis of no difference between the sets compared, with (r-1) degrees of freeedom, where r represents the number of sets compared. Here, we compare the 2 portions of region D, so r=2, and the asymptotic Chi-square distribution has 1 degree of freedom. As shown, the significance of the association is demonstrated by a chi-square value (one degree of freedom) of 46.62 and a p-value of 8.62×10⁻¹² for 2 marker combinations, and a chi-square value (one degree of freedom) of 124.72 and a p-value of 5.86×10⁻²⁹ for 3-marker combinations.

b—Haplo-max Tests Values

Another association analysis approach based on haplotype frequencies differences, referred to as the Haplo-max test, was conducted using region D biallelic markers. The haplo-max test selects the difference showing the maximum positive (maxM) or negative (maxS) test value between cases versus controls (rejecting test values based on rare haplotype frequencies, i.e, with an estimated number of haplotypes carriers inferior to 10); for one combination of markers there is therefore one Max-M and one Max-S test values.

FIGS. 10A and 1B show the distribution of haplo-maxM test values obtained for both 2-marker and 3-marker combinations in the two portions of Region D, demonstrating an association of the second portion of Region D with bipolar disorder. The comparison of the distribution of Haplo-maxM test values in the two regions was analyzed using a Kruskal-Wallis rank test, a chi-square test with 1 degree of freedom. As shown, the significance of the association is demonstrated by a chi-square value of 29.07 and a p-value 6.98×10⁻⁸ for 2 marker combinations, and a chi-square value of 98.63 and a p-value of 3.04×10⁻²³ for 3-marker combinations.

FIGS. 11A and 11B show the distribution of Haplo-maxS test values again obtained for all 2-marker and 3-marker combinations in the two portions of Region D, demonstrating an association of the second portion of Region D with bipolar disorder. The comparison of the distributions of Haplo-maxS test values in the two portions was analyzed using a Kruskal-Wallis rank test with one degree of freedom. As shown, the significance of the association is demonstrated by a chi-square value of 34.6 and a p-value of 4.05×10⁻⁹ for 2 marker combinations, and a chi-square value of 98.31 and a p-value of 3.58×10123 for 3-marker combinations.

The results from the haplo-maxM and haplo-maxS tests thus further confirm the association shown using the Omnibus LR test results;

Example 5e

Confirmation of Associations with Schizophrenia and Bipolar Disorder (“SCREENING II”)

Results obtained above using French Canadian schizophrenia samples and Argentinian bipolar disorder cases were confirmed in larger screening samples and in several different populations using markers spanning Region D of the chromosome 13q31-q33 region.

In the confirmation studies, French Canadian schizophrenia samples (Algene) described above, additional United States schizophrenia samples and Argentinian bipolar disorder (Labimo) samples were analyzed in sub-regions of Region D referred to as sub-regions D1 to D4. The schizophrenia sample referred to as the Algene (or French Canadian) and the bipolar disorder sample referred to as the Labimo sample (Argentinian) are as described above. The United States schizophrenia samples are described in Table 17 below. TABLE 17 United States Schizophrenia Cases and Control Populations (United States Caucasians) Random US Sample type Cases Controls Sample size 131 188 Ethnic origin European Causasians 92 (26 female, 66 male) Ashkenazi caucasians 24 (7 female, 17 female) Other Caucasians 15 (7 female, 8 male) Familial history of psychosis (FH) positive (FH+) 133 none (FH−) 147 198

A set of 32 SNPs covering sub-regions D1 to D4 (mean density of 1 SNP/25 kb) was genotyped on the two different schizophrenia samples and one bipolar disorder sample. The 32 biallelic markers genotyped are shown in Table 18. TABLE 18 SNPs Polymorphism % Frequency in Algene Controls(141) 99-5873/159 C/T 22 99-30329/380 C/T 48 99-15253/382 C/T 37 99-15280/432 C/T 39 99-15256/392 C/T 35 99-15258/337 G/T 24 99-27345/189 G/C 26 99-26150/276 A/G 48 99-25974/143 A/G 23 99-25950/121 G/C 28 99-25972/317 C/T 28 99-25965/399 A/G 50 99-25966/241 A/G 37 99-25989/398 A/G 28 99-16047/115 C/T 25 99-16052/214 A/G 37 99-15875/165 C/T 34 99-16105/152 A/G 46 99-16032/292 A/C 44 99-15880/162 A/G 44 99-15870/400 A/G 30 99-5897/143 A/C 39 99-24644/194 A/G 41 99-24658/410 C/T 39 99-5919/215 A/G 40 99-5862/167 C/T 49 99-24634/108 A/T 50 99-24656/260 A/G 46 99-31960/363 A/G 39  8-128/33 C/T 23 99-27935/193 G/C 21 99-27943/150 G/C 35

For each of the three populations, the number of significant tests in each sub-region of Region D based on single and multiple point biallelic marker analyses were compared among cases and controls. For single point analyses, excess of heterozygotes and deficiency of heterozygotes (Hardy-Weinberg disequilibrium coefficient), allelic and genotypic association analyses and logistic regression analyses were compared. For multipoint analyses, the haplotypic frequency differences between case and controls were examined, reported as MaxM for the maximum positive difference, and MaxS as the maximum negative difference, and the Omnibus LR test. The HaploMax tests giving MaxS and MaxM results and the Omnibus LR test are known and otherwise described herein. As noted in FIGS. 12 to 17, the tests containing the footnote (1) involved significance thresholds which were assessed from observed distributions, inferred taking into account the D1, D2, D3 and D4 subregions for each sub-population studied relative to the number of tests performed; for tests containing the footnote (2) in FIGS. 12 to 17, significant tests were defined as those having a significance level of 5% or better.

The present inventors have found that samples from three different populations all show a significant association to the schizophrenia trait with biallelic markers located in region D, thus confirming previous association studies with different samples and markers. Furthermore, the inventors have found in all three populations that the association is most significant in the sub-region D3. Thus, it is likely that a gene associated with schizophrenia and bipolar disorder resides in the region. The sbg1 and g35030 nucleic acid sequences described herein reside in the region D3.

In addition to results using markers in previous analyses, analyses with the 32 biallelic markers listed in Table 18 demonstrated significant results in single point analyses for several newly analyzed biallelic markers. In particular, markers 99-25974-143 (A292), 99-25972-317 (A291), 99-15870400 (A178), 99-24656-260 (A48) demonstrated a statistically significant excess or deficiency of heterozygotes.

Schizophrenia: Algene (French Canadian)

The analysis using Algene samples compared (1) the total patients cluster of patients selected for analysis (2) cases of the cluster showing a familial history of psychosis (FH+), and (3) cases of the cluster with an absence of familial history of psychosis (FH−) to Algene control samples. Additionally, for further comparison, the number of significant tests in Region D and each of the sub-regions of Region D were compared among total cases and total controls from the screening sample of example 5b above is listed in FIG. 12 under “first screening sample”. As previously reported, the original French Canadian (Algene) samples show a significant association to the schizophrenia trait with biallelic markers located in region D, both in single and multi-point analyses. Furthermore, results show that the association is clearly confined to sub-region D3 and does not extend to D2 and D4. In single point analyses, a significant concentration of biallelic markers containing the sbg1 gene presented an excess of heterozygotes for familial cases. Five of 13 (5/13) markers around sbg1 were significant for allelic association analysis.

FIG. 12 provides the results from a single and multi-point biallelic marker analysis comparing regions D1, D2, D3, and D4 located in the chromosome 13q31-q33 region.

FIG. 13 shows the sum of the results shown in FIG. 12 over the larger Region D span tested (ie. D1, D2, D3 and D4).

FIGS. 12 and 13 thus demonstrate that there is a significant association with Region D and schizophrenia in the Algene sample. Furthermore, these figures show that the number and percentage of significant tests was highest in sub-region D3 consistently across comparisons among controls and FH+, FH− and total cases. In comparing the number of significant tests in sub-region D3 among FH+ and FH− cases, the figures show that the association is more clearly observed in cases having a familial history of psychosis; single point analyses suggested a higher number of significant tests in the FH+ cases than multiple point analyses.

FIGS. 12 and 13 also show that a larger screening sample confirms the results of the smaller sample from the first screening of Algene samples, both for the larger Region D and for the sub-region D3.

Schizophrenia: United States Schizophrenia Samples

As in the French Canadian samples, the present inventors have found Region D, and more specifically sub-region D3, to be significantly associated with schizophrenia in a first, smaller screening sample of the United States Schizophrenia samples. Further analysis in the United States Schizophrenia population using a set of biallelic markers covering Region D confirms that the association of sub-region D3 with schizophrenia is of high statistical significance.

The United States Schizophrenia samples selected for the analysis consisted of the 92 European Caucasians. Two analyses were performed, a first analysis using controls consisting of 188 random US controls, and a second analysis where controls consisted of 241 controls from the French Canadian samples described above.

FIG. 14 provides the results from a single and multi-point biallelic marker analysis comparing regions D1, D2, D3, and D4 located in the chromosome 13q31-q33 region. FIG. 15 shows the sum of the results shown in FIG. 14 over the larger Region D span tested (ie. D1, D2, D3 and D4).

As shown in the figures, the analysis in United States Schizophrenia samples also suggests a significant association of sub-region D2 with schizophrenia, when considering multi-point analyses. However, this association of the D2 region with schizophrenia is of lesser statistical significance than the association of schizophrenia with sub-region D3 because a lower number of tests were carried out in the D2 region. Additionally, one marker (99-5897/143) in particuar, localized in the sbg1 gene showed a significant excess of heterozygotes in schizophrenia familial cases.

In general, the number of significant tests in United States Schizophrenia samples were lower that in French Canadian population. This may be attributed to the higher heterogeneity of the United States Schizophrenia sample in comparison to the French Canadian samples. Analyses using the United States Schizophrenia samples were done using either Caucasian controls from the French Canadian samples, or US random controls.

Bipolar Disorder: Labimo (Argentinian)

As in the French Canadian and United States Schizophrenia samples, the present inventors have found Region D, and more specifically sub-region D3, to be significantly associated with bipolar disorder in Labimo samples from Argentina. Further analysis using a more extensive set of biallelic markers covering Region D confirms that the association of sub-region D3 with bipolar disorder is of high statistical significance.

FIG. 16 provides the results from a single and multi-point biallelic marker analysis comparing regions D1, D2, D3, and D4 located in the chromosome 13q31-q33 region. FIG. 17 shows the sum of the results shown in FIG. 16 over the larger Region D span tested (ie. D1, D2, D3 and D4). While results showed the most significant association for D3 in Labimo samples, some background signal was seen for D2. It is possible that this variance in the percentage of significant tests reflects the higher relative heterogeneity of the Labimo samples in comparison to the French Canadian samples.

FIGS. 16 and 17 thus demonstrate that there is a significant association with Region D and bipolar disorder in the Labimo sample.

Analyses of Labimo samples were also conducted separately in bipolar disorder I and bipolar disorder II cases, as shown in FIG. 16. In comparisons of results obtained with bipolar disorder I and II types, the association of sub-region D3 with schizophrenia tended to be more clearly found in bipolar disorder I cases.

Example 6 Preparation of Antibody Compositions to the sbg1 Protein

Substantially pure protein or polypeptide is isolated from transfected or transformed cells containing an expression vector encoding the sbg1 protein or a portion thereof. The concentration of protein in the final preparation is adjusted, for example, by concentration on an Am icon filter device, to the level of a few micrograms/ml. Monoclonal or polygonal antibody to the protein can then be prepared as follows:

A. Monoclonal Antibody Production by Hybridoma Fusion

Monoclonal antibody to epitopes in the sbg1 protein or a portion thereof can be prepared from murine hybridomas according to the classical method of Kohler, G. and Milstein, C., Nature 256:495 (1975) or derivative methods thereof. Also see Harlow, E., and D. Lane. 1988. Antibodies A Laboratory Manual. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory. pp. 53-242.

Briefly, a mouse is repetitively inoculated with a few micrograms of the sbg1 protein or a portion thereof over a period of a few weeks. The mouse is then sacrificed, and the antibody producing cells of the spleen isolated. The spleen cells are fused by means of polyethylene glycol with mouse myeloma cells, and the excess unfused cells destroyed by growth of the system on selective media comprising aminopterin (HAT media). The successfully fused cells are diluted and aliquots of the dilution placed in wells of a microtiter plate where growth of the culture is continued. Antibody-producing clones are identified by detection of antibody in the supernatant fluid of the wells by immunoassay procedures, such as ELISA, as originally described by Engvall, (1980), and derivative methods thereof. Selected positive clones can be expanded and their monoclonal antibody product harvested for use. Detailed procedures for monoclonal antibody production are described in Davis, L. et al. Basic Methods in Molecular Biology Elsevier, New York. Section 21-2.

B. Polyclonal Antibody Production by Immunization

Polyclonal antiserum containing antibodies to heterogeneous epitopes in the sbg1 protein or a portion thereof can be prepared by immunizing suitable non-human animal with the sbg1 protein or a portion thereof, which can be unmodified or modified to enhance immunogenicity. A suitable non-human animal is preferably a non-human mammal is selected, usually a mouse, rat, rabbit, goat, or horse. Alternatively, a crude preparation which has been enriched for sbg1 concentration can be used to generate antibodies. Such proteins, fragments or preparations are introduced into the non-human mammal in the presence of an appropriate adjuvant (e.g. aluminum hydroxide, RIBI, etc.) which is known in the art. In addition the protein, fragment or preparation can be pretreated with an agent which will increase antigenicity, such agents are known in the art and include, for example, methylated bovine serum albumin (mBSA), bovine serum albumin (BSA), Hepatitis B surface antigen, and keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH). Serum from the immunized animal is collected, treated and tested according to known procedures. If the serum contains polyclonal antibodies to undesired epitopes, the polyclonal antibodies can be purified by immunoaffinity chromatography.

Effective polyclonal antibody production is affected by many factors related both to the antigen and the host species. Also, host animals vary in response to site of inoculations and dose, with both inadequate or excessive doses of antigen resulting in low titer antisera. Small doses (ng level) of antigen administered at multiple intradermal sites appears to be most reliable. Techniques for producing and processing polyclonal antisera are known in the art, see for example, Mayer and Walker (1987). An effective immunization protocol for rabbits can be found in Vaitukaitis, J. et al. J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. 33:988-991 (1971).

Booster injections can be given at regular intervals, and antiserum harvested when antibody titer thereof, as determined semi-quantitatively, for example, by double immunodiffusion in agar against known concentrations of the antigen, begins to fall. See, for example, Ouchterlony; O. et al., (1973). Plateau concentration of antibody is usually in the range of 0.1 to 0.2 mg/ml of serum (about 12 μM). Affinity of the antisera for the antigen is determined by preparing competitive binding curves, as described, for example, by Fisher, D., Chap. 42 in: Manual of Clinical Immunology, 2d Ed. (Rose and Friedman, Eds.) Amer. Soc. For Microbiol., Washington, D.C. (1980).

Antibody preparations prepared according to either the monoclonal or the polyclonal protocol are useful in quantitative immunoassays which determine concentrations of antigen-bearing substances in biological samples; they are also used semi-quantitatively or qualitatively to identify the presence of antigen in a biological sample. The antibodies may also be used in therapeutic compositions for killing cells expressing the protein or reducing the levels of the protein in the body.

Example 7 Study of Effect of sbg1 Peptides on Behavior of Mice

-   Animals: Male C57BL6 adult mice (approximately 6 weeks old) -   Peptides: sbg1 peptide:     -   NH2-QPLERMWTCNYNQQKDQSCNHKEITSTKAE-COOH     -   Control 1: NH2-REAHKSETISSKLQKEKQIKKQ-COOH     -   Control 2: NH2-MHMKTILGPRLGLGE-COOH -   Protocol:     -   1. Inject mice intraperitoneally with 50 μg peptide in 200 μl         sterile physiological saline (n=4/peptide).     -   2. Place mice in clean empty cages containing no litter, and         only a small test tube rack. The cages are covered with a         plastic sheet to enable taking photographs and video-tracking.     -   3. Observe behavior for one minute from t=5 min up to t=45 min,         as indicated. Any locomoter or stereotypy movements were         recorded as positive over 1 min intervals. Locomoter movements         include climbing, and rearing while stereotypy movements include         grooming and scratching. At the end of the experiment, the         number of movements were added up for each animal. -   Results:     -   1. Mice injected with the sbg1 peptide exhibited a decrease in         the frequency of their movements over the time course of the         experiment, shown in FIG. 18. This is illustrated in the left         top panel of FIG. 18, where we compare the average number of         movements in 3 separate time points (5, 10, and 15 min) with the         average movements per min in the last period of observations         (30, 35, 40, and 45 min). The sbg1 peptide also increased         stereotypy—this effect was most prominent during the last period         of observations. However, because the onset of stereotype was         variable, we presented the data as the average of stereotypy for         observations over the entire time period.

Although this invention has been described in terms of certain preferred embodiments, other embodiments which will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art of view of the disclosure herein are also within the scope of this invention. Accordingly, the scope of the invention is intended to be defined only by reference to the appended claims.

The disclosures of all issued patents, published PCT applications, scientific references or other publications cited herein are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.

REFERENCES CITED

The disclosures of the following references are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties:

-   Abbondanzo S. J. et al. (1993) Methods in Enzymology, Academic     Press, New York. pp. 803-823. -   AjiokaR. S. et al. (1997) Am. J. Hum. Genet. 60:1439-1447. -   Altschul et al., 1990, J. Mol. Biol. 215(3):403-410; -   Altschul et al., 1993, Nature Genetics 3:266-272 -   Altschul et al., 1997, Nuc. Acids Res. 25:3389-3402 -   Anton M. et al., 1995, J. Virol., 69: 4600-4606. -   Araki K et al. (1995) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 92(1):160-4. -   Ausubel et al. (1989) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Green     Publishing Associates and Wiley Interscience, N.Y. -   Baubonis W. (1993) Nucleic Acids Res. 21(9):2025-9. -   Beaucage et al., Tetrahedron Lett 1981, 22: 1859-1862 -   Bradley A., (1987) Production and analysis of chimaeric mice.     In: E. J. Robertson (Ed.), Teratocarcinomas and embryonic stem     cells: A practical approach. IRL Press, Oxford, pp. 113. -   Brown E L, Belagaje R, Ryan M J, Khorana H G, Methods Enzymol 1979;     68:109-151 -   Brutlag et al. Comp. App. Biosci. 6:237-245, 1990 -   Chai H. et al. (1993) Biotechnol. Appl. Biochem. 18:259-273. -   Chee et al. (1996) Science. 274:610-614. -   Chen and Kwok Nucleic Acids Research 25:347-353 1997 -   Chen et al. (1987) Mol. Cell. Biol. 7:2745-2752. -   Chen et al., 0.1987, Mol. Cell. Biol., 7: 2745-2752. -   Chou J. Y. (1989) Mol. Endocrinol. 3:1511-1514. -   Clark A. G. (1990) Mol. Biol. Evol. 7:111-122. -   Coles et al. Hum. Mol. Genet., 7:791-800, 1998 -   Compton J. (1991) Nature. 350(6313):91-92. -   Davis et al., Basic Methods in Molecular Biology, ed., Elsevier     Press, NY, 1986 -   Dempster et al., (1977) J.R. Stat. Soc., 39B:1-38. -   Dent D. S. and Latchman D. S. (1993) The DNA mobility shift assay.     In: Transcription Factors: A Practical Approach (Latchman D S, ed.)     Oxford: IRL Press. pp 1-26. -   Eckner R. et al. (1991) EMBO J. 10:3513-3522. -   Excoffier L. and Slatkin M. (1995) Mol. Biol. Evol., 12(5): 921-927. -   Feldman and Steg, 1996, Medecine Sciences, synthese, 12:47-55 -   Flotte et al. (1992) Am. J. Respir. Cell Mol. Biol. 7:349-356. -   Fodor et al. (1991) Science 251:767-777. -   Fraley et al. (1979) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 76:3348-3352. -   Fried M. and Crothers D. M. (1981) Nucleic Acids Res. 9:6505-6525. -   Fuller S. A. et al. (1996) Immunology in Current Protocols in     Molecular Biology, Ausubel et al. Eds, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., USA. -   Furth P. A. et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA. 91:9302-9306. -   Garner M. M. and Revzin A. (1981) Nucleic Acids Res. 9:3047-3060. -   Geysen H. Mario et al. 1984. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.     81:3998-4002 -   Ghosh and Bacchawat (1991) Targeting of liposomes to hepatocytes,     IN: Liver Diseases, Targeted diagnosis and therapy using specific     rceptors and ligands. Wu et al. Eds., Marcel Dekeker, New York, pp.     87-104. -   Gonnet et al., 1992, Science 256: 1443-1445; -   Gopal (1985) Mol. Cell. Biol., 5:1188-1190. -   Gossen M. et al. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 89:5547-5551. -   Gossen M. et al. (1995) Science. 268:1766-1769. -   Graham et al. (1973) Virology 52:456-457. -   Green et al. (1986) Ann. Rev. Biochem. 55:569-597. -   Griffin et al. (1989) Science. 245:967-971. -   Grompe, M. (1993) Nature Genetics. 5:111-117. -   Grompe, M. et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 86:5855-5892. -   Gu H. et al. (1993) Cell 73:1155-1164. -   Guatelli J C et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 35:273-286. -   Hacia J G, Brody L C, Chee M S, Fodor S P, Collins FS, Nat Genet     1996; 14(4):441-447 -   Haff L. A. and Smirnov I. P. (1997) Genome Research, 7:378-388. -   Hames B. D. and Higgins S. J. (1985) Nucleic Acid Hybridization: A     Practical Approach. -   Hames and Higgins Ed., IRL Press, Oxford. -   Harju L, Weber T, Alexandrova L, Lukin M, Ranki M, Jalanko A, Clin     Chem 1993; 39(11 Pt 1):2282-2287 -   Harland et al. (1985) J. Cell. Biol. 101:1094-1095. -   Hawley M. E. et al. (1994) Am. J. Phys. Anthropol. 18:104. -   Henikoff and Henikoff, 1993, Proteins 17:49-61 -   Higgins et al., 1996, Methods Enzymol. 266:383-402; -   Hillier L. and Green P. Methods Appl., 1991, 1: 124-8. Gu H. et     al. (1994) Science 265:103-106. -   Hoess et al. (1986) Nucleic Acids Res. 14:2287-2300. -   Huang L. et al. (1996) Cancer Res 56(5):1137-1141. -   Huygen et al. (1996) Nature Medicine. 2(8):893-898. -   Izant J. G. and Weintraub H. (1984) Cell 36(4):1007-1015. -   Julan et al. (1992) J. Gen. Virol. 73:3251-3255. -   Kanegae Y. et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 23:3816-3821. -   Karlin and Altschul, 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:2267-2268; -   Khoury J. et al. (1993) Fundamentals of Genetic Epidemiology, Oxford     University Press, NY. -   Kim U-J. et al. (1996) Genomics 34:213-218. -   Klein et al. (1987) Nature. 327:70-73. -   Koller et al. (1992) Annu. Rev. Immunol. 10:705-730. -   Kozal M J, Shah N, Shen N, Yang R, Fucini R, Merigan T C, Richman D     D, Morris D, Hubbell E, Chee M, Gingeras T R, Nat Med 1996;     2(7):753-759 -   Landegren U. et al. (1998) Genome Research, 8:769-776. -   Lander and Schork, Science, 265, 2037-2048, 1994 -   Lenhard T. et al. (1996) Gene. 169:187-190. -   Linton M. F. et al. (1993) J. Clin. Invest. 92:3029-3037. -   Liu Z. et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 91: 4528-4262. -   Livak et al., Nature Genetics, 9:341-342, 1995 -   Livak K J, Hainer J W, Hum Mutat 1994; 3(4):379-385 -   Lockhart et al. (1996) Nature Biotechnology 14:1675-1680. -   Mansour S. L. et al. (1988) Nature. 336:348-352. -   Marshall R. L. et al. (1994) PCR Methods and Applications. 4:80-84. -   McCormick et al. (1994) Genet. Anal. Tech. Appl. 11:158-164. -   McLaughlin B. A. et al. (1996) Am. J. Hum. Genet. 59:561-569. -   Morton N. E. (1955) Am. J. Hum. Genet. 7:277-318. -   Muzyczka et al. (1992) Curr. Topics in Micro. and Immunol.     158:97-129. -   Nada S. et al. (1993) Cell 73:1125-1135. -   Nagy A. et al. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 90:8424-8428. -   Narang S A, Hsiung H M, Brousseau R, Methods Enzymol 1979; 68:90-98 -   Neda et al. (1991) J. Biol. Chem. 266:14143-14146. -   Newton et al. (1989) Nucleic Acids Res. 17:2503-2516. -   Nickerson D. A. et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.     87:8923-8927. -   Nicolau et al. (1982) Biochim. Biophys. Acta. 721:185-190. -   Nyren P, Pettersson B, Uhlen M, Anal Biochem 1993; 208(1):171-175 -   O'Reilly et al. (1992) Baculovirus Expression Vectors: A Laboratory     Manual. W. H. Freeman and Co., New York. -   Ohno et al. (1994) Science. 265:781-784. -   Orita et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 86: 2776-2770. -   Ott J. (1991) Analysis of Human Genetic Linkage. John Hopkins     University Press, Baltimore. -   Pastinen et al., Genome Research 1997; 7:606-614 -   Pearson and Lipman, 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA     85(8):2444-2448; -   Pease S. and William R. S. (1990) Exp. Cell. Res. 190:09-211. -   Perlin et al. (1994) Am. J. Hum. Genet. 55:777-787. -   Peterson et al. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 90: 7593-7597. -   Pietu et al. (1996) Genome Research. 6:492-503. -   Potter et al. (1984) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 81(22):7161-7165. -   Rayl et al., (1996) J. Bio. Chem, 271, 2225-2233. -   Reid L. H. et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87:4299-4303. -   Risch, N. and Merikangas, K. (1996) Science. 273:1516-1517. -   Robertson E. (1987) “Embryo-Derived Stem Cell Lines.” In: E. J.     Robertson Ed. Teratocarcinomas And Embrionic Stem Cells: A Practical     Approach. IRL Press, Oxford, pp. 71. -   Rossi et al. (1991) Pharmacol. Ther. 50:245-254. -   Roth J. A. et al. (1996) Nature Medicine. 2(9):985-991. -   Roux et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 86:9079-9083. -   Ruano et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87:6296-6300. -   Sambrook, J., Fritsch, E. F., and T. Maniatis. (1989) Molecular     Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2ed. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory,     Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y. -   Samson M, et al. (1996) Nature, 382(6593):722-725. -   Samulski et al. (1989) J. Virol. 63:3822-3828. -   Sanchez-Pescador R. (1988) J. Clin. Microbiol. 26(10): 1934-1938. -   Sarkar, G. and Sommer S. S. (1991) Biotechniques. -   Sauer B. et al. (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85:5166-5170. -   Schaid D. J. et al. (1996) Genet. Epidemiol. 13:423-450. -   Schedl A. et al. (1993a) Nature. 362:258-261. -   Schedl et al. (1993b) Nucleic Acids Res. 21:4783-4787. -   Schedl et al. (1993b) Nucleic Acids Res. 21:4783-4787. -   Schena et al. (1995) Science. 270:467-470. -   Schena et al. (1996) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.     93(20):10614-10619. -   Schneider et al. (1997) Arlequin: A Software For Population Genetics     Data Analysis. University of Geneva. -   Schwartz and Dayhoff, eds., 1978, Matrices for Detecting Distance     Relationships: Atlas of Protein Sequence and Structure,     Washington:National Biomedical Research Foundation -   Sczakiel G. et al. (1995) Trends Microbiol. 3(6):213-217. -   Shay J. W. et al. (1991) Biochem. Biophys. Acta. 1072:1-7. -   Sheffield, V. C. et al. (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.     49:699-706. -   Shizuya et al. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 89:8794-8797. -   Shoemaker D D, Lashkari D A, Morris D, Mittmann M, Davis R W, Nat     Genet 1996; 14(4):450-456 -   Smith (1957) Ann. Hum. Genet. 21:254-276. -   Smith et al. (1983) Mol. Cell. Biol. 3:2156-2165. -   Sosnowski R. G. et al. (1997) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.     94:1119-1123. -   Spielmann S. and Ewens W. J. (1998) Am. J. Hum. Genet. 62:450-458. -   Spielmann S. et al. (1993) Am. J. Hum. Genet. 52:506-516. -   Sternberg N. L. (1992) Trends Genet. 8:1-16. -   Sternberg N. L. (1994) Mamm. Genome. 5:397-404. -   Syvanen A C, ClinChim Acta 1994; 226(2):225-236 -   Tacson et al. (1996) Nature Medicine. 2(8):888-892. -   Te Riele et al. (1990) Nature. 348:649-651. -   Terwilliger J. D. and Ott J. (1994) Handbook of Human Genetic     Linkage. John Hopkins University Press, London. -   Thomas K. R. et al. (1986) Cell. 44:419-428. -   Thomas K. R. et al. (1987) Cell. 51:503-512. -   Thompson et al., 1994, Nucleic Acids Res. 22(2):4673-4680; -   Tur-Kaspa et al. (1986) Mol. Cell. Biol. 6:716-718. -   Tyagi et al. (1998) Nature Biotechnology. 16:49-53. -   Urdea M. S. (1988) Nucleic Acids Research. 11:4937-4957. -   Urdea M. S. et al. (1991) Nucleic Acids Symp. Ser. 24:197-200. -   Van der Lugt et al. (1991) Gene. 105:263-267. -   Vlasak R. et al. (1983) Eur. J. Biochem. 135:123-126. -   Wabiko et al. (1986) DNA. 5(4):305-314. -   Walker et al. (1996) Clin. Chem. 42:9-13. -   Weir, B. S. (1996) Genetic data Analysis 11: Methods for Discrete     population genetic Data, Sinauer Assoc., Inc., Sunderland, Mass.,     U.S.A. -   White, M. B. et al. (1992) Genomics. 12:301-306. -   White, M. B. et al. (1997) Genomics. 12:301-306. -   Wong et al. (1980) Gene. 10:87-94. -   Wood S. A. et al. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90:4582-4585. -   Wu and Wu (1987) J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432. -   Wu and Wu (1988) Biochemistry. 27:887-892. -   Wu et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 86:2757. -   Yagi T. et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87:9918-9922. -   Zhao et al. (1998) Am. J. Hum. Genet. 63:225-240. -   Zou Y. R. et al. (1994) Curr. Biol. 4:1099-1103 

1. A composition of matter selected from: a) an isolated polynucleotide comprising the polynucleotide sequence of nucleotide position 213818 to 243685 of SEQ ID NO: 1, or the complement thereof; b) an isolated polynucleotide comprising any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 2 or 3 or the complement thereof; c) an isolated polynucleotide comprising any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 4 to 26 or the complement thereof; d) an isolated polynucleotide comprising a polynucleotide encoding any of the polypeptide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 27 to 35; e) an isolated polynucleotide comprising a polynucleotide having at least 70% identity with any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 2 to 26 or the complement thereof; f) an isolated polynucleotide comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes under stringent conditions with any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 2 to 26 or the complement thereof; g) an isolated polynucleotide comprising any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 44 to 53 or the complement thereof; h) an isolated polynucleotide comprising a fragment of at least 50 nucleotides of the polynucleotide specified in (a) or comprising a fragment of at least 15 nucleotides of the polynucleotide specified in (b) or comprising a fragment of at least 12 nucleotides of any of the polynucleotides specified in (c); i) an isolated polynucleotide comprising a fragment of at least 12 nucleotides of any of the polynucleotides specified in (a) comprising any of the biallelic markers A85 to A219; j) a recombinant vector, host cell, or non-human host animal comprising a polynucleotide according to a), b), c), d), e), f), g), h), or i); k) an isolated, purified or recombinant polynucleotide according to a), b), c), d), e), f), g), h), or i) attached to a solid support; l) an array of polynucleotides comprising at least one polynucleotide according a), b), c), d), e), f), g), h), or i); m) a diagnostic kit comprising a polynucleotide according a), b), c), d), e), f), g), h), or i); n) a purified or isolated sbg1 polypeptide selected from: 1) a polypeptide comprising any of the polypeptide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 27 to 35; 2) a polypeptide comprising a polypeptide encoded by any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 2 to 26; 3) a polypeptide comprising a polypeptide encoded by a polynucleotide having at least 70% identity with any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 2 to 26; 4) a polypeptide comprising a polypeptide encoded by a polynucleotide that hybridizes under stringent conditions with any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 2 to 26; or 5) a polypeptide comprising a fragment of at least 6 contiguous amino acid residues of any of the polypeptides specified in (1) to (4); or o) an isolated or purified antibody composition capable of selectively binding to a polypeptide of n);
 2. A method of genotyping or diagnosis comprising determining the identity of a nucleotide at any one of the biallelic markers shown as A85 to A219, or the complement thereof in a biological sample.
 3. A method of using a composition of matter according to claim 1 for: estimating the frequency of an allele of a biallelic marker in a population; detecting an association between a genotype and a trait; estimating the frequency of a haplotype for a set of biallelic markers in a population; detecting an association between a haplotype and a trait; determining whether an individual is at risk of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder; screening of a candidate substance that interacts with a sbg1 polypeptide; or screening molecules that modulate the expression of a sbg1 polypeptide.
 4. The method according to claim 3, wherein said method of estimating the frequency of an allele of a biallelic marker in a population comprises: a) genotyping individuals from said population for said biallelic marker according to the method of claim 2; and b) determining the proportional representation of said allele marker in said population.
 5. The method according to claim 3, wherein said method of detecting an association between a genotype and a trait comprises: a) determining the frequency of at least one biallelic marker in a trait positive population according to the method of claim 4; b) determining the frequency of at least one biallelic marker in a control population according to the method of claim 4; and c) determining whether a statistically significant association exists between said genotype and said trait.
 6. The method according to claim 5, wherein said trait is schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, predisposition to schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, an early onset of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, or a beneficial response to or side effects related to treatment against schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, or a symptom of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder.
 7. The method according to claim 3, wherein said method of estimating the frequency of a haplotype for a set of biallelic markers in a population comprises: a) genotyping at least one biallelic marker according to the method of claim 2 for each individual in said population; b) genotyping a second biallelic marker by determining the identity of the nucleotides at said second biallelic marker for both copies of said second biallelic marker present in the genome of each individual in said population; and c) applying a haplotype determination method to the identities of the nucleotides determined in steps a) and b) to obtain an estimate of said frequency.
 8. The method according to claim 3, wherein said method of detecting an association between a haplotype and a trait comprises: a) estimating the frequency of at least one haplotype in a trait positive population according to the method of claim 7; b) estimating the frequency of said haplotype in a control population according to the method of claim 7; and c) determining whether a statistically significant association exists between said haplotype and said trait.
 9. The method according to claim 8, wherein said trait is schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, predisposition to schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, an early onset of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, or a beneficial response to or side effects related to treatment against schizophrenia or bipolar disorder, or a symptom of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder.
 10. The method according to claim 3, wherein said method of determining whether an individual is at risk of schizophrenia or bipolar disorder comprises: a) genotyping at least one biallelic marker according to the method of claim 2; and b) correlating the result of step a) with a risk of developing schizophrenia or bipolar disorder.
 11. The method according to claim 3, wherein said method for the screening of a candidate substance that interacts with a sbg1 polypeptide comprises: a) providing a polypeptide selected from: 1) a polypeptide comprising any of the polypeptide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 27 to 35; 2) a polypeptide comprising a polypeptide encoded by any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 2 to 26; 3) a polypeptide comprising a polypeptide encoded by a polynucleotide having at least 70% identity with any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 2 to 26; 4) a polypeptide comprising a polypeptide encoded by a polynucleotide that hybridizes under stringent conditions with any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 2 to 26; or 5) a polypeptide comprising a fragment of at least 6 contiguous amino acid residues of any of the polypeptides specified in (1) to (4); b) obtaining a candidate substance; c) bringing into contact said polypeptide with said candidate substance; and d) detecting the complexes formed between said polypeptide and said candidate substance.
 12. The method according to claim 3, wherein said method for screening molecules that modulate the expression of a sbg1 polypeptide comprises: a) cultivating a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell that has been transfected with a polynucleotide sequence selected from: 1) an isolated polynucleotide comprising the polynucleotide sequence of nucleotide position 213818 to 243685 of SEQ ID NO: 1, or the complement thereof; 2) an isolated polynucleotide comprising any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 2 or 3 or the complement thereof; 3) an isolated polynucleotide comprising any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 4 to 26 or the complement thereof; 4) an isolated polynucleotide comprising a polynucleotide encoding any of the polypeptide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 27 to 35; or 5) an isolated polynucleotide comprising a polynucleotide having at least 70% identity with any of the polynucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 2 to 26 or the complement thereof; b) bringing into contact the cultivated cell with a molecule to be tested; and c) quantifying the expression of the protein encoded by said polynucleotide sequence. 